/.  2.5To6  . 


0i  flW  f !»<*%% 

PRINCETON,  N.  J. 


Purchased  by  the  Hamill  Missionary  Fund. 


Division  DSL5  9 


Section 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016 


https://archive.org/details/observerinphilip00devi_0 


AN  OBSERVER  IN  THE 
PHILIPPINES 


President  Roosevelt 


AN  OBSERVER  IN 
THE  PHILIPPINES 

or 

Life  in  Our  New  Possessions 


JOHN  BANCROFT  DEVINS 

Editor  op  “The  New  York  Observer” 


With  a Foreword  by 

The  Hon.  WILLIAM  HOWARD  TAFT,  LL.D. 

The  First  Governor  op  the  Philippine  Islands 


And  an  Appendix  containing  Extracts  of 
Addresses  by  President  McKinley, 
President  Roosevelt,  Judge  Parker, 
Secretary  Hay,  Ex-Secretary 
Root,  Secretary  Taft  and 
Governor  Wright 


“ Take  np  the  White  Man’s  Burden, 
Send  forth  the  best  ye  breed.” 

Kipling. 


AMERICAN  TRACT  SOCIETY 


BOSTON 


NEW  YORK 


CHICAGO 


Copyright,  1905 
By  American  Tract  Society 


All  Rights  Reserved 


To  THEODORE  ROOSEVELT: 


Who  teaches  the  sanctity  of  government:  who 
enforces  laics  without  respect  of  persons:  who 
looks  for  the  best  in  every  man:  who  sympa- 
thizes with  those  in  distress:  who  aids  those 
struggling  upward  “along  the  hard  path  which  ulti- 
mately leads  to  self-respect  and  self-government” : 

This  record  of  achievements  in  the  Philippines  during  the  first 
six  years  of  American  occupation,  and  of  plans  for  the 
future,  is  affectionately  inscribed  by  one  who  had  the 
honor  of  his  friendship,  and  the  privilege  of 
being  a fellow-laborer  during  his  Police 
Administration  in  New  York. 


■ 


The  Hon.  Wii.i.iam  II.  Taft, 


FOREWORD 


THE  woi’k  which  Doctor  Devins  has  done  as  a result 
of  his  visit  to  the  Philippine  Islands  in  writing 
this  volume,  is  an  exceedingly  useful  one. 

I have  examined  the  manuscript  with  as  much  care  as 
I could  give  it  in  the  very  short  time  which  other  duties 
permitted,  and  it  seems  to  me  that  he  has  told  the  story 
of  the  Philippine  Islands  and  of  the  conditions  exist- 
ing there  with  as  earnest  a desire  to  reach  the  truth  as 
possible.  Of  course  deductions  and  inferences  made  from 
observations  are  a matter  of  opinion  and  are  much 
affected  by  one’s  standpoint.  Doctor  Devins  is  a Protes- 
tant clergyman  and  looks  at  the  situation  from  a possi- 
bly somewhat  different  standpoint  than  that  of  a Prot- 
estant layman  or  from  that  of  a Catholic  layman  or  a 
Catholic  clergyman,  but  yet  it  seems  to  me  there  is  very 
little  in  the  book  to  which  exception  could  be  taken  by 
either  a Protestant  layman  or  by  a good  Catholic, 
whether  priest  or  parishioner. 

The  critical  issue  as  to  the  friars  might  present  some 
differences  of  opinion,  but  generally  the  picture  which  is 
painted  in  this  book  is  true  to  nature  and  to  the  facts  as 
Doctor  Devins  saw  them.  It  is  of  the  utmost  importance 
that  the  people  of  America  should  know  the  truth  about 
the  Philippines;  should  understand  so  far  as  they  can 
the  atmosphere,  political,  moral  and  social,  which  there 
is  in  the  Islands,  and  this  book  I am  sure  will  tend 
greatly  to  promote  such  knowledge.  The  defects  of  the 


8 


FOREWORD 


American  Government  in  the  Islands  no  one  knows  better 
than  those  who  have  been  responsible  for  it;  probably 
no  one  realizes  better  the  difficulties  w'e  have  to  overcome 
in  remedying  those  defects.  Doctor  Devins,  some  people 
will  think,  has  been  quite  charitable  in  his  reference  to 
the  Government  and  he  might  be  a severer  critic.  In 
that  respect  I am  not  altogether  unprejudiced,  but  it  is 
a great  pleasure  to  read  a book  in  which  the  author  is 
inspired  first,  to  tell  the  truth,  and  second,  to  manifest  a 
sympathy  with  the  motives  and  policy  of  those  who  are 
laboring  under  a great  burden  and  responsibility  in 
attempting  by  an  American  Government  to  elevate  and 
make  better  the  lot  of  eight  millions  of  their  fellow- 
beings. 

I sincerely  hope  that  this  book  of  Doctor  Devins’s  will 
have  a wide  circulation,  for  while,  as  already  intimated, 
I might  differ  with  some  of  the  statements  contained  in 
it  and  might  vary  or  qualify  them,  on  the  whole  I can- 
not withhold  from  it  my  most  cordial  approval. 

Doctor  Devins  was  more  than  two  months  in  the  Islands 
and  spent  all  that  time  in  the  hard  work  of  investigating 
conditions.  We  were  all  glad  to  give  him  as  full  oppor- 
tunit}r  as  possible  to  reach  the  truth,  and  I do  not  hesi- 
tate to  say  that  the  book  which  he  has  produced  is  worthy 
of  the  reading  of  any  one  interested  in  the  “Gems  of 
the  Orient.”  I am  honored  to  be  invited  to  write  this 
Foreword. 

William  Howard  Taft. 

War  Department,  Washington,  D.  C., 

February  I,  1905. 


Rev.  John  Bancroft  Devins,  D.D. 


PREFACE 


WHAT  did  America  secure  from  Spain  in  return 
for  the  twenty  million  dollars  paid  for  the 
Philippine  Islands?  Was  the  outlay  necessary?  Was 
it  a wise  investment?  Have  the  results  achieved  war- 
ranted the  expenditure?  Is  expansion,  as  it  is  illus- 
trated by  this  experiment,  a success  or  a failure?  What 
are  the  representatives  of  the  American  people — military, 
civil,  business,  educational  and  religious — accomplishing 
in  the  New  Possessions? 

These  questions  and  others  are  among  those  which  are 
discussed  in  this  volume,  after  a visit  to  the  Philippines. 
The  study  begun  in  1898  was  diligently  prosecuted  dur- 
ing the  sail  of  twenty-four  days  from  San  Francisco  to 
Manila  on  an  Army  transport  and  continued  both  in 
Manila  and  throughout  the  Archipelago.  American  of- 
ficials in  the  Army  and  Navy  and  Civil  Government ; Fili- 
pinos in  public  and  private  life;  the  editors  of  news- 
papers in  Manila ; American  and  Filipino  school-teachers ; 
business  men  from  America,  Europe  and  Asia ; repre- 
sentatives of  the  Roman  Catholic  Church  and  Friars’ 
Orders, — Spanish,  American  and  Native;  missionaries 
and  secretaries  from  several  religious  denominations  and 
societies  in  the  United  States — these  are  among  the  men 
and  women  from  whom  facts  have  been  gained  which 
have  contributed  to  the  study  of  the  problems  mentioned. 
Ever}T  report  submitted  to  Congress  by  Army  officers  and 
by  the  Civil  Commissions  appointed  by  President  McKin- 


10 


PREFACE 


ley,  together  with  messages  and  addresses  on  the  Philip- 
pines by  Mr.  McKinley  and  Mr.  Roosevelt — and  every 
valuable  volume  published  relating  to  the  Islands  have 
been  read  in  connection  with  the  experiences  enjoyed  and 
interviews  obtained  while  visiting  them. 

Other  pens  have  narrated  the  causes  which  led  to  the 
War  with  Spain,  and  have  described  the  swift  and  terri- 
ble destruction  of  the  Spanish  fleets  at  Manila  and  San- 
tiago, and  the  prolonged  campaign  with  the  Filipinos 
under  the  leadership  of  Aguinaldo.  The  purpose  of  this 
book  is  to  consider  the  problems  which  face  the  American 
people  to-day,  several  years  after  Dewey’s  entry  into  the 
harbor  of  Manila,  and  to  tell  how  these  problems  are 
being  met  and  solved.  America  is  in  the  Philippines  ; this 
book  shows  what  has  been  done  for  the  betterment  of 
mankind  in  that  interesting  part  of  the  world  since  the 
close  of  the  Spanish  War. 

The  special  thanks  of  the  author  are  extended  to 
President  Roosevelt,  Secretary  Root  and  Governor  Taft 
for  opportunities  of  visiting  places  and  institutions  and 
meeting  leading  men  who  were  able  to  give  helpful  infor- 
mation ; to  other  officials  and  to  many  friends  in  private 
life  for  numerous  courtesies  extended  to  his  wife  and  him- 
self during  their  travels,  especially  General  Allen  and 
Captain  Cofren,  of  the  Constabulary,  who  arranged  trips 
for  them  in  the  provinces,  and  to  the  Rev.  James  B. 
Rodgers  and  the  Rev.  Lewis  B.  Hillis,  of  Manila,  who 
accompanied  them  on  several  of  these  inter-island 
journeys. 


J.  B.  D. 


* 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

CHAPTER  I 

An  Army  Transport  .......  21 

Farewell  to  the  Homeland — Daily  Activities  Aboard 
Ship — College  Boys  as  Stewards— No  Gambling  or 
Drinking  Allowed— Twenty-five  Happy  Days  on  the 
Logan. 

CHAPTER  II 

Mid-Pacific  America  .......  29 

San  Francisco  and  Manila  United  by  Cable — Mission- 
ary Influence  in  Hawaii — A Night  on  Mauna  Loa— 

In  the  Harbor  of  Guam — Mumps  Cause  a Quaran- 
tine. 

CHAPTER  III 

Soldiers  Play  and  Pray 39 

Novel  Situation  for  a Clergyman— A Favorite  Hymn 
on  Shipboard — Needs  of  the  Chaplain — Song  of 
Childhood — The  Howling  Wilderness. 

CHAPTER  IV 

First  Impressions  ........  46 

Rival  of  the  Inland  Sea — Filipino  Life  at  First  Hand 
— Shipping  in  Manila  Harbor — Jehu  Out-distanced — 

The  Carabao  an  Insurrecto — Costume  of  the  Fili- 
pina — The  Scholar’s  Question. 

CHAPTER  V 

Admiral  Dewey’s  Victory 61 

Views  of  John  W.  Foster — Capitulation  of  the  Cap- 
ital— What  America  Received  for  its  Twenty  Millions 
— Mr.  McKinley’s  Hesitation — Appointing  the  Com- 
mission. 


12 


CONTENTS 


PAG* 


CHAPTER  VI 

From  Manila  to  Dagupan 77 

Experiences  on  a Railway — Goats,  not  Children, 
Crying — An  Interview  with  a Provincial  Governor— 

An  Address  on  Character. 

CHAPTER  VII 

Products  of  the  Islands  .......  65 

Progress  Possible  through  Soil — Agriculture  a Science 
— Cocoanut  Industry  Remunerative — Utility  of  the 
Bamboo. 

CHAPTER  VIII 

A Day  on  the  Pasig  River  ......  97 

Confidence  in  the  Ladrones — An  American  Officer 
Killed  by  a Lad  of  Ten  Years — A Glimpse  of  Life  at 
a Constabulary  Post — Proud  of  his  Province — A Day 
in  a Court  Room. 

CHAPTER  IX 

Filipino  Characteristics  .......  103 

Generalizing  from  Special  Cases — Human  Nature  not 
a Matter  of  Latitude — Superstition  at  Home  and 
Abroad— Sleeping  a Solemn  Matter — Sworn  Enemies 
of  Sanitation. 

CHAPTER  X 

Waterfalls  and  Rapids  . 110 

Plenty  of  Time  in  the  Orient — Transport  Friends 
Visited — Calling  on  a Padre — Rival  Attractions  near 
Together — The  Pagsanjan  Canon — The  Falls  of  the 
Botocan — The  Best  Time  to  See  the  Waterfalls. 

CHAPTER  XI 

The  New  Summer  Capital 117 

Character  of  the  Heat  in  Manila — A Native  in  a 
Crematory — The  Philippine  Thirst — Baguio,  the  Simla 
of  the  Philippines — Considerations  not  to  be  Ignored. 


CONTENTS 


13 

PAGE 

CHAPTER  XII 

Marriage,  Pure  and  Mixed 124 

Children  with  their  Parents  at  the  Marriage  Altar — 

Why  a Double  Signature  is  Used — The  Position  of 
Women  in  the  Philippines — Mixed  Marriages  De- 
nounced— Meeting  his  Wife  without  a Blush. 


CHAPTER  XIII 

Chinese  or  Filipinos  .......  129 

Two  Views  Strongly  Advocated — Is  the  Chinese 
Laborer  Needed — The  Government  Favors  the  Na- 
tives— Raising  the  Standard  of  Life. 


CHAPTER  XIV 

Cemetery  Privileges 135 

One  Child  out  of  Two  Dies — Funerals  without 
Hearses — Suggestive  Music  at  a Funeral — Vaults 
Rented  by  the  Year. 


CHAPTER  XV 

The  Opium  Traffic  . . . . . . . .138 

Prevention  of  Smuggling  Impossible — Missionaries 
Appeal  to  President  Roosevelt — Arguments  before  the 
Commission — The  Sale  of  Opium  to  be  Prohibited. 


CHAPTER  XVI 

Harbor  Improvements  .......  146 

The  Need  of  Changes  in  Manila — A Breakwater  and 
Piers  now  Building — Removing  Cargo  on  Lighters — 
Railroad  Construction  under  Difficulties — Road-beds 
Carried  away  by  Rain. 


14 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 


CHAPTER  XVII 

American  Army  Humane  ......  152 

Opinion  of  an  English  Officer — Orders  Given  to  only 
one  of  the  two  Opposing  Forces — Defending  the 
Water  Cure — Praise  from  President  Roosevelt — 
Strength  of  the  Military  in  the  Islands. 

CHAPTER  XVIII 

Native  Guardians  of  Peace 163 

Filipino  Police,  Scouts  and  Constabulary — The  Na- 
tional Guard  of  the  Archipelago — Native  and  Ameri- 
can Soldiers  Quell  an  Uprising — Giving  Poison 
because  He  was  Told  to  Do  So. 

CHAPTER  XIX 

Contagion  at  Close  Range 178 

A Morning  in  a San  Lazaro  Hospital — Safeguarding 
Young  Americans — The  First  Suggestion  of  Leprosy 
— A “Fine”  Case  of  Smallpox — From  the  Cholera 
Hospital  to  the  Plague  Ward — Infant  Mortality. 

CHAPTER  XX 

The  American  Teacher  .......  187 

The  Ladrones  Respect  the  Instructor — Church  and 
State  Kept  Separate  in  the  Islands — Little  Filipinos 
Sing  “My  Country”  also — Higher  Education  Greatly 
Appreciated — Benjamin  Franklin  an  Ideal  American. 

CHAPTER  XXI 

A Morning  with  Aguinaldo 206 

The  Recognized  Leader  of  the  Insurgents — Luzon  the 
Home  of  Revolution — Aguinaldo’s  Banking  Scheme — 

The  Treaty  of  Peace  with  Spain — Influence  of  Rizal, 
the  Idol  of  the  Filipinos. 


CONTENTS 

15 

PAGE 

CHAPTER  XXII 

Two  Types  of  Patriots  .... 

# 

. 220 

Mabini  and  Paterno  the  Representatives — The  Former 
Deported  for  a Time — The  Latter  Seeking  Reform  by 
Evolution — Advice  to  a Leader  of  Ladrones — Mod- 
esty of  a Filipino  Trained  in  Europe. 

CHAPTER  XXIII 

Catholicism  in  the  Islands 233 

The  Civil  Commission  Friendly — Calling  for  Armed 
Intervention — Strength  of  the  Orders — The  Friar 
Lands — Testimony  Regarding  Clerical  Misrule. 

CHAPTER  XXIV 

The  Aglipay  Movement  252 

Charges  and  Counter-Charges — Governor  Taft  En- 
lightens a Prelate — Separation  of  Church  and  State — 
Proclamation  of  Peaceable  Possession — Hungry  for 
Spiritual  Food. 


CHAPTER  XXV 

Protestantism:  Its  Progress  ......  262 

Indiscriminate  Audiences  in  Church — Settlement  Work 
for  Filipinos — Many  Denominations,  but  no  Rivalry — 
Example  of  Americans  an  Obstacle  to  Protestant- 
ism— Government  Employees  Free  to  Worship  God 
as  They  Please— A Teacher  and  the  Colporters — Sab- 
bath Observance. 


CHAPTER  XXVI 

The  Presbyterian  Church  270 

Early  Action  Taken  by  the  General  Assembly — Comity 
Planned  for  the  New  Fields — Splendid  Work  in  Ma- 
nila and  Iloilo — The  First  Protestant  Church  Build- 
ing— A Market  Day  in  Oton. 


16 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 


CHAPTER  XXVII 

Ik  Aguinaldo’s  Province 282 

A Sunday  Sail  in  Manila  Bay — Greetings  from 
America — Remembering  His  First  Wife  at  His 
Second  Wedding — Dedicating  a Bamboo  Chapel — 

Bitter  Enemies  Made  Strong  Allies. 

CHAPTER  XXVIII 

The  Silliman  Institute  .......  288 

Dumaguete  an  Ideal  Place  for  the  School— Friendly 
Spirit  and  Active  Co-operation  of  Government  Offi- 
cers— Necessity  and  Dignity  of  Honest  Toil — Boys 
Alike  the  World  Over — The  Benefactor  a Noble 
American. 

CHAPTER  XXIX 

Methodist  Episcopal  Church  ......  298 

Old-Time  Revival  in  New  Possessions — A Church 
with  a Flexible  Economy — Printing  Press  an  Active 
Missionary  Agent — Modest  Church  Building  for 
Americans — The  Original  Protestant — Methodism 
Taught  to  Nicholas  Zamora. 

CHAPTER  XXX 

Protestant  Episcopal  Church  ......  311 

Bishop  Brent  and  Bishop  Brooks — A Ton  of  Soap 
Sent  from  the  Homeland — Gambling  Proceeds  Re- 
fused— Excellent  Work  Carried  on  by  Women — Safe- 
guarding the  Health  of  Missionaries — Influence  in 
Public  Affairs. 

CHAPTER  XXXI 

Christian  Association  Work  ......  322 

Substitute  for  tbe  Canteen — Satisfying  the  Philip- 
pine Thirst — Erecting  Suitable  Buildings  at  Army 
Posts  — Material  Benefit  for  Soldiers  — Spiritual 
Blessings  Conferred — Pressing  Needs  of  the  Asso- 
ciations— Miss  Gould’s  Beautiful  Service. 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER  XXXII 

Bible  Distribution  ........ 

Withholding  the  Scriptures — President  Roosevelt’s 
Ringing  Tribute  to  the  Word  of  God — Colporters 
Travel  on  Foot — Priests  Oppose  the  Circulation  of 
the  Bible — Effect  of  the  Aglipay  Movement. 

CHAPTER  XXXIII 

Trustworthy  Men  Needed  ......  341 

High  Moral  Tone  Needed — Violations  of  Financial 
Confidence — American  Enthusiasm  Dampened — Sac- 
rifice by  Men  of  Culture — Haste  to  Get  Rich — The 
Kind  of  Patriots  to  Establish  a Government — Gov- 
ernor Taft  a True  Representative. 

CHAPTER  XXXIV 

The  Pearl  of  the  Orient  ......  354 

In  Quarantine — Verbal  Protest  Based  on  the  Color 
Line — An  Old-Time  Democrat  Forfeits  His  Break- 
fast— Lifting  One’s  Hat  to  Dr.  Patton — Self-Sac- 
rifice Typical  of  American  Spirit — Heart  of  Filipino 
Will  Repay  Cultivation — Our  Triumph. 

CHAPTER  XXXV 

Exhibit  at  St.  Louis  .......  361 

Getting  Ready  for  the  World’s  Fair — Bilibid  Prison- 
ers Preparing  a Collection — Patriotic  Pride  Displayed 
by  the  Filipinos — Scouts  and  Constabulary  on  Ex- 
hibition— A Native  Band  Led  by  a Negro — Antaero 
Gives  an  Interview. 

CHAPTER  XXXVI 

Duty  of  American  Church  ......  371 

Responsibility  Early  Recognized — Chaplains  and 
Secretaries  for  Soldiers — Mission  Work  Among  the 
Filipinos — Providing  for  the  Religious  Needs  of 
Americans — Bible  and  Tract  Distribution. 


17 

PAGE 

33  2 


18 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 


Appendix  379 

Paths  of  Peace  and  Prosperity.  President  McKinley  379 

The  Philippines  for  the  Filipinos.  President 

Roosevelt  ........  381 

Filipino  Self-Government.  Judge  Parker  . . 382 

Liberty,  not  Independence  yet.  Secretary  Hay  . 384 

Self-Government  the  Goal.  Ex-Secretary  Root  . 385 

The  American  Union  an  Asiatic  Power.  Ex-Secre- 
tary Foster  ........  388 

The  Duty  of  Americans  in  the  Philippines.  Gov- 
ernor Taft  ........  389 

The  Door  of  Opportunity  Open.  Governor  Wright  401 

Authorities  Consulted  .......  403 

Index  of  Subjects 405 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS 


President  Roosevelt  ....  Frontispiece 


orr.  page 


Hon.  William  H.  Taft,  First  Governor  of  the  Philippines  . 7 

Rev.  John  Bancroft  Devins,  D.D.  . . . .9 

Map  of  the  Philippines  . . . . . .21 

Some  Insurgents  . . . . . .24 

A Wedding  Party  and  a Nipa  Hut  . . . .33 

The  China  Sea  . . . . . . .37 

A Street-Meeting  Crowd  in  Manila  . . . .44 

Hotel  de  Oriente  . .....  48 

The  Carabao  at  Rest  and  at  Work  . . . .53 

Poling  a Boat  on  the  Pasig  River  . . . .56 

Admiral  Dewey,  U.  S.  N.  . . . . .60 

Corregidor  Island  at  the  Entrance  of  Manila  Bay  . . 63 

The  Old  Wall  and  Moat,  Manila  ...  65 

J.  G.  Schurman,  President  of  First  Philippine  Commission  . 69 

William  McKinley  . . . . . .76 

Negritos  ........  80 

Students  in  Biblical  Institute,  Dagupan  . . .85 

The  Rope  Industry  . . . . . .92 

On  the  Upper  Pasig  River  . . . . .97 

Street  Scenes  in  Manila  ......  101 

Presbyterian  Clergyman  in  Caromatta  . . . .108 

Dr.  Hall  Distributing  Tracts  .....  108 

Barbara,  the  Belle  of  the  Transport  ....  108 

The  Author  Entering  a CarateOa  ....  108 

Pagsanjan  Canon  . . . . . . .112 

The  Manila  and  Dagupan  Railroad  . . . .120 

Natives  at  Dinner  and  Taking  their  Siesta  . . .129 

The  Cemetery  and  the  Bone  Pile  ....  135 

The  Manila  Girls’  School  and  its  First  Pupils  . . . 137 

Native  Children  .......  144 

A Bolo  Man  .......  153 

Insurgents  Surrendering  to  the  American  Arm}  . . 157 


20 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS 


The  Native  Constabulary 

OPP.  PAGE 
. 161 

General  Henry  T.  Allen  . 

. 165 

General  Gonzales,  the  Last  to  Surrender 

. 172 

Cock-Fighting,  the  Natives’  Pastime 

. 176 

A Leper  Beggar  . 

. 181 

A Lemon  Shampoo 

. 185 

Dr.  F.  A.  Atkinson 

. 188 

Native  Children 

. 193 

Legaspi  Statue 

. 201 

Mortuary  Chapel,  Paco 

. 201 

Aguinaldo 

. 208 

Area  in  Front  of  Malacanan  Palace 

. 213 

The  Bridge  of  Spain 

. 213 

Royal  Gate,  Walled  City,  Manila 

. 220 

Gate  at  Pagsanjan 

. 220 

Spanish  Mestizo  Family  . 

. 225 

Friars  .... 

. 233 

Cathedrals  in  Manila 

. 240 

Cathedral  at  Zamboanga  . 

. 245 

Senor  A.  0.  Reyes  and  Mrs.  Reyes 

. 252 

Filipina  and  Visayan  Belles 

. 261 

Dumaguete 

. 268 

A Scene  on  the  Pasig  River 

. 273 

Silliman  Industrial  Institute 

. 288 

Dr.  H.  B.  Silliman 

. 288 

Mission  Hospital,  Dumaguete 

. 293 

Rev.  Homer  C.  Stuntz,  D.D. 

. 300 

Nicholas  Zamora  . 

. 306 

Two  Filipino  Evangelists  . 

. 309 

Bishop  Charles  G.  Brent  . 

. 316 

Rev.  Teodora  Basconcillo 

. 321 

Association  Buildings 

. 325 

Rice  Cultivation  . 

. 332 

Preparing  Rice  for  Market 

. 336 

Malecon  Walk  and  Drive  in  Manila 

. 341 

General  Wood  and  Staff  Entering  Jolo 

. 348 

Outrigger  Boats  . 

. 353 

Igorrotes  .... 

. 368 

AN  OBSERVER  IN 
THE  PHILIPPINES 


CHAPTER  I 

ON  AN  ARMY  TRANSPORT 


Farewell  to  the  Homeland — Daily  Activities  Aboard 
Ship — College  Boys  as  Stewards — No  Gambling  or 
Drinking  Allowed — Twenty-five  Happy  Days  on  the 
Logan. 

TO  begin  a journey  around  the  world  by  crossing  the 
Hudson  River  on  a ferry-boat  is  prosaic  indeed, 
even  though  loving  friends  and  relatives  accompany  one 
to  Jersey  City.  One  needs  the  crowded  deck  of  a steamer, 
with  its  hustle  and  bustle ; the  hurrying  and  scurrying  of 
stewards  as  they  show  passengers  and  friends  to  state- 
rooms ; the  authority  manifest  in  every  movement  of  the 
officers ; the  suppressed  excitement  on  the  part  of  tour- 
ists and  those  who  come  to  bid  them  farewell;  the  little 
chat  in  the  saloon,  so  highly  prized  in  after  days ; the 
delicious  odor  of  flowers  and  fruit,  remaining  a fra- 
grant memory  for  many  days;  the  inevitable  shower  of 
rice,  suggesting  a romance,  and  the  soul-stirring 
“All  ashore  that’s  going  ashore !” 

And  then  the  minutes  that  seem  to  run  into  hours  as 
friends  afloat  and  ashore  wait  for  the  lines  to  be  cast  off, 
and  then  the  farewells  which  may  be  the  last  for  some  of 


22 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


those  on  the  deck  and  on  the  shore ! Rapidly  pass  the 
moments  as  the  distance  steadily  widens  between  those 
who  never  seem  quite  so  dear  to  one  another  as  at  the 
hour  of  sailing.  A final  farewell  to  those  who  are  rapidly 
becoming  a part  of  the  crowd  and  then  a part  of  the 
pier,  and  a tender  thought  for  the  loved  ones  at  home. 
How  can  one  begin  a journey  around  the  world  on  a 
ferry-boat? 

Having  had  the  privilege,  one  highly  prized,  of  going 
to  the  Philippines  on  a United  States  transport  sailing 
from  San  Francisco,  it  is  a pleasure  to  record  one’s  im- 
pressions of  this  branch  of  the  Military  service.  Every 
month  a transport  starts  for  Manila  from  San  Francisco, 
and  one  goes  occasionally  from  New  York  by  way  of  the 
Mediterranean  Sea  and  the  Suez  Canal.  The  Pacific 
Coast  transports  return  monthly  by  way  of  Nagasaki  to 
secure  coal  for  the  round  trip.  Every  steamer  that  sails 
through  the  Canal  is  sure  to  carry  as  many  passengers 
as  can  receive  permission  to  go  that  way.  Men  who  have 
been  assigned  to  a transport  going  home  by  way  of 
Japan,  if  they  are  able  to  get  transferred  to  one  going 
through  the  Mediterranean,  will  take  a local  steamer  to 
Japan  and  China  to  catch  a glimpse  of  those  countries, 
and  then  return  to  Manila  in  time  to  board  the  Govern- 
ment boat,  with  Colombo  as  its  first  stop. 

A day  on  a transport  begins  at  5 a.m.,  when  the  decks 
are  washed  with  a hose,  and  the  activities  begin  in  the 
kitchens— that  used  for  the  officers  and  their  wives  and 
children,  the  one  in  which  the  soldiers’  food  is  prepared 
and  the  one  which  serves  the  crew  of  the  ship.  A little 
later  fingers  are  heard  on  the  door  of  the  stateroom  and 
a voice  says : 


BEGINNING  THE  DAY  RIGHT 


23 


“Two  baths  are  ready  for  the  lady  and  the  gentle- 
man.” The  luxury  of  a salt-water  bath  at  sea  is  appar- 
ently not  appreciated  by  every  passenger,  but  to  miss  it 
is  to  begin  the  day  wrong.  George,  who  has  charge  of 
the  five  bathrooms  used  by  the  saloon  passengers,  is 
never  disturbed,  no  matter  how  many  stateroom  bells 
ring  at  once. 

“How  can  I answer  two  bells  at  once?”  snapped  out  a 
bell-boy  one  afternoon. 

“By  being  twins,  same  as  I am,”  replied  the  son  of 
Ham,  with  a chuckle  that  brought  a smile  to  the  face  of 
the  overtaxed  bell-boy. 

The  children’s  breakfast  is  served  at  6.15  a.m.  ; three 
sittings  are  required  for  the  passengers,  although  more 
than  sixty  can  be  served  at  once.  At  9 o’clock  comes 
“guard  mount,”  when  the  officer  of  the  day  and  the  men 
under  him  stand  before  the  inspecting  officers.  The 
inspection  is  followed  by  several  selections  from  the  band. 
At  10.30  the  ship  is  inspected  thoroughly.  A siesta 
usually  follows  luncheon,  when  the  decks  are  well-nigh 
deserted.  Before  dinner  on  the  cooler  days,  and  in  the 
evening  when  the  weather  becomes  hotter,  the  band  gives 
a concert,  which  adds  greatly  to  the  pleasure  of  the 
passengers.  Books  and  cards  and  fancy-work,  letter 
writing,  and  an  occasional  hop  on  the  forward  deck, 
occupy  the  attention  of  many  passengers,  while  others 
lie  stretched  out  on  steamer  chairs  and  sleep  or  gaze  far 
into  the  night  on  the  Northern  Dipper  or  the  Southern 
Cross,  the  latter  appearing  in  view  as  one  reaches  the 
fifteenth  degree. 

The  stewards  on  our  trip  were  college  boys  from 
Leland  Stanford  University  and  the  University  of  Cali- 


24 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


fornia.  Sixteen  were  spending  their  vacation  in  this 
novel  manner,  not  that  they  were  all  in  need  of  the  dollar 
a day,  or  less,  which  they  received  from  the  Government, 
for  one  of  them  was  the  son  of  a bank  president  and 
another  a nephew  of  a western  senator.  The  latter 
stood  in  the  galley  with  perspiration  running  down  his 
cheeks,  washing  dishes  as  manfully  as  if  he  were  de- 
pendent upon  his  own  efforts  for  the  daily  bread  which 
he  was  earning. 

In  “Yesterdays  in  the  Philippines,”  a delightful  book 
narrating  his  experiences  in  Manila  for  two  years  before 
the  uprising  in  1896,  Joseph  Earle  Stevens  relates  a 
joke  played  on  outgoing  missionaries  by  the  captain  of 
a “liner”  which  carried  them  and  him  to  China.  The 
missionaries  posted  a notice  in  the  companionway  on 
Saturday,  announcing  a missionary  service  at  10  a.m. 
the  following  day.  It  was  allowed  to  remain  there  undis- 
turbed, but  when  the  passengers  went  to  breakfast  on 
Sunday  morning  they  found  the  following  notice  posted: 

Sunday,  Nov.  29, 

Ship  Crosses  180th  Meridian 
9.30  a.m., 

After  which  it  will  be  Monday. 

As  we  wore  neither  the  blue  nor  the  khaki  uniform, 
and  denied  that  we  were  under  a commission  from  the 
Government,  or  were  going  out  to  engage  in  teaching, 
some  of  the  younger  army  officers  were  at  a loss  to 
understand  how  a civilian,  and  he  a clergyman,  and  his 
wife  could  be  on  a government  transport.  But  no  one, 
whatever  his  rank  in  the  army,  could  have  been  more 
cordially  welcomed  nor  more  hospitably  treated  than  we 


Some  Insurgents 


CULTURED  MEN  AND  WOMEN 


25 


were;  among  the  most  pleasant  memories  of  our  jour- 
neys, on  land  and  sea,  will  be  those  associated  with  the 
twenty-five  happy  days  on  the  Logan. 

The  ship  on  this  trip  carried  the  Fourth  Infantry,  a 
squadron  of  the  Thirteenth  Cavalry,  half  a dozen  sur- 
geons going  out  under  orders  to  report  at  Manila,  and 
several  officers  returning  to  join  their  regiments. 
Colonel  J.  C.  Chance,  commanding  officer  of  the  Fourth 
Infantry,  was  in  command  of  the  thousand  soldiers. 

Among  the  returning  officers  was  Colonel  J.  J.  O’Con- 
nell, going  out  to  take  command  of  the  Thirtieth  Infan- 
try. Colonel  Chance  was  accompanied  by  his  wife  and 
son,  and  Colonel  O’Connell  by  his  wife  and  daughter, 
and  among  the  one  hundred  and  sixty-three  saloon  pas- 
sengers were  the  wives  and  children  of  many  of  the  offi- 
cers. It  would  be  difficult  to  gather,  in  any  other  wralk 
of  life,  a company  of  men  and  women  more  cultured  or 
more  agreeable  than  that  which  met  daily  on  the  deck  of 
the  Logan. 

What  is  true  about  the  officers  applies  in  a corre- 
sponding degree  to  the  enlisted  men,  both  infantrymen 
and  cavalrymen.  The  writer  mingled  freely  with  both 
classes  and  closely  observed  the  soldiers.  Not  an  oath 
was  heard — there  was  no  sign  of  drinking  and  no 
gambling  was  allowed.  Many  of  the  officers  and  men 
played  cards,  but  as  one  of  the  former  said : 

“All  we  do  is  to  kill  time ; so  far  as  any  harm  is  done, 
we  might  as  well  be  playing  mumblety-peg.” 

An  officer  suggested  a game  of  poker,  perhaps  in 
earnest,  possibly  as  a jest. 

“The  Colonel  does  not  approve  it,”  settled  the  ques- 
tion. Gambling,  drinking  and  profanity  were  not  pro- 


26 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


hibited  by  posted  notices.  “The  Colonel  does  not  ap- 
prove,” was  known  throughout  the  command,  from  the 
officer  by  his  side  to  the  last  enlisted  man,  and  no  order 
was  needed. 

Every  morning  a careful  inspection  of  the  ship  was 
made.  It  was  a pleasure  to  accompany  the  inspecting 
party  from  bow  to  stern  and  from  the  hurricane-deck 
to  the  bottom  of  the  hold.  The  quartermaster  of  the 
transport,  the  ship’s  surgeon,  the  troop’s  surgeon  and 
several  officers  inspected  the  men  and  their  quarters, 
looked  into  every  stateroom,  walked  past  every  cot,  and 
visited  the  dining  saloon  of  the  officers,  the  messrooms 
of  the  soldiers  and  the  quarters  occupied  for  eating  or 
sleeping  purposes  by  the  crew.  Not  a spot  a foot  square 
escaped  the  trained  eyes  of  the  inspectors,  and  woe  to  the 
officer  or  man  or  steward  or  bathroom  boy  remiss  in  his 
duties. 

The  Logan,  built  in  Belfast  in  1892,  is  a steel  ship 
with  a double  screw  propeller  and  two  engines,  the  main 
one  having  3,000  horse-power.  It  is  equipped  to  carry 
1,650  soldiers  in  hammocks  with  iron  standards  and  can- 
vas bottoms.  The  coal  bunkers  hold  1,780  tons,  and  100 
more  can  be  carried  in  the  hold.  The  average  consump- 
tion of  coal  is  70  tons  a day.  There  are  fourteen  fresh- 
water tanks  with  a capacity  of  1,270  tons,  and  a cold- 
storage  capacity  of  20,580  feet,  with  an  average  tem- 
perature of  eighteen  degrees.  With  the  temperature 
eighty  degrees  on  deck  and  a hundred  and  thirty  in  the 
engine  room,  which  was  visited  after  the  general  inspec- 
tion of  the  ship,  it  was  like  a plunge  in  an  ice  bath  to 
go  to  the  cold-storage  room,  where  the  temperature  was 
at  that  time  nineteen  degrees ; but  to  feel  the  chill  gave 


CRITICS  OF  THE  SERVICE 


n 


one  confidence  in  the  meat  and  other  contents  of  that 
room.  The  ship  has  a treasure  chamber,  containing  on 
this  trip  $2,000,000  in  silver  for  use  in  the  Philippines, 
worth  in  gold  $1,000,000. 

While  the  transport  service  has  many  critics  and  is 
admittedly  a considerable  expense  to  the  Government,  it 
is  the  belief  of  those  who  are  obliged  to  use  it  that  it 
would  be  a sad  day  for  the  Army  if  the  transports  were 
abandoned  and  the  soldiers  transferred  on  commercial 
steamers.  Based  upon  the  actual  expense  of  a transport 
trip  from  San  Francisco  to  Manila  and  return,  compared 
with  the  lowest  bids  for  similar  service  by  a commercial 
company,  it  is  far  more  economical  to  keep  the  trans- 
ports. 

For  the  health  and  comfort  of  officers  and  men, 
there  is  no  question  that  the  transports  are  valuable, 
and  that  should  carry  greatest  weight.  There  can  be 
no  doubt  that  the  transport  service  is  better  than  any 
yet  offered  as  a substitute  for  it.  After  a trip  of  from 
twenty-six  to  thirty  days  on  one  of  these  ships,  regiments 
on  several  occasions  have  stepped  into  barges  that  carried 
them  directly  to  the  field,  and  into  active  service. 

It  is  the  policy  of  the  Government  to  stimulate  com- 
mercial lines,  and  the  number  of  transports  in  service 
among  the  islands  is  limited  to  the  actual  present  needs 
of  the  Government.  There  is  a special  line  of  coast- 
guard boats  which  do  not  enter  into  competition  with  the 
established  local  lines,  and  are  used  chiefly  to  call  at 
small  places  which  do  not  have  regular  connection  with 
Manila. 

It  seems  impossible  for  a commercial  line  to  provide 
for  the  comfort  of  the  troops  as  well  as  is  done  by  the 


28 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


Government,  unless  it  duplicates  the  present  transports 
in  fitting  and  service.  If  it  were  proposed  to  buy  ships 
and  refit  them,  as  was  done  in  1898,  the  question  would 
be  debatable ; were  it  simply  a financial  problem,  it  would 
seem  to  be  the  part  of  wisdom  to  retain  this  service ; but 
with  the  welfare  of  the  soldiers,  the  question  of  prime 
importance,  it  would  not  seem  wise  to  sell  the  few  ships 
that  have  been  fitted  up  at  great  expense  and  seem 
admirably  adapted  to  carry  the  soldiers  to  and  from  the 
Philippines  safely,  economically  and  comfortably. 


CHAPTER  II 


MID-PACIFIC  AMERICA 


San  Francisco  and  Manila  United  by  Cable — Mission- 
ary Influence  in  Hawaii — A Night  on  Mauna  Loa — 

In  the  Harbor  of  Guam — Mumps  Cause  a Quaran- 
tine. 

WHEN  Admiral  Dewey  cut  the  cable  in  Manila 
because  the  Spaniards  would  not  surrender  it, 
he  little  thought  that  within  five  years  an  American  cable 
would  be  laid  across  the  Pacific  with  every  landing  on 
American  territory.  Yet  such  was  the  result:  San  Fran- 
cisco and  Manila  were  united  on  July  4,  1903,  with  inter- 
mediate stations  at  Honolulu  and  on  the  islands  of  Mid- 
way, Wake  and  Guam,  over  each  of  which  the  Stars  and 
Stripes  proudly  float. 

Twenty-two  hundred  miles  nearly  southwest  from  San 
Francisco,  steamers  for  Japan,  China,  Australia,  New 
Zealand  and  Samoa  stop  at  Honolulu  for  a day  or  two 
and  enable  passengers  to  get  their  first  glimpse  of  a 
tropical  island,  with  its  palms  and  flowers  and  fruits  and 
volcanoes  and  lepers  and  a high  degree  of  civilization. 
Men  are  yet  living  who  were  born  when  the  Hawaiian 
Islands  were  the  homes  of  savages  engaged  in  war  upon 
one  another.  Then  came  Kamehameha,  the  chief  of  a 
powerful  tribe,  who  conquered  one  tribe  after  another 
until  he  was  able  to  unite  the  whole  group  under  one 


30 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


government  and  proclaim  himself  king.  In  his  reign 
missionaries  began  their  work  among  the  people  of  the 
Sandwich  Islands,  as  they  were  called  at  that  time,  and 
civilization,  schools,  churches  and  hospitals  followed. 
The  words  of  John  Quincy  Adams  on  the  Hawaiian 
Islands,  contained  in  a report  to  Congress  in  1843,  are 
germane : 

“It  is  a subject  of  cheering  contemplation  to  the 
friends  of  human  improvement  and  virtue  that,  by  the 
mild  and  gentle  influence  of  Christian  charity,  dispensed 
by  humble  missionaries  of  the  Gospel,  unarmed  with 
secular  power,  within  the  last  quarter  of  a century  the 
people  of  this  group  of  islands  have  been  converted  from 
the  lowest  abasement  of  idolatry  to  the  blessing  of  the 
Christian  Gospel ; united  under  one  balanced  govern- 
ment, rallied  to  the  fold  of  civilization  by  a written 
language  and  a constitution  providing  security  for  the 
rights  of  persons,  property  and  mind,  and  invested  with 
all  the  elements  of  right  and  power  which  can  entitle 
them  to  be  acknowledged  by  their  brethren  of  human 
race  as  a separate  and  independent  community.”  To 
whom  should  the  Hawaiians  look  for  suggestion  if  not  to 
the  men  and  women  who  had  rescued  them  from  barbar- 
ism? 

If  one  wishes  to  read  an  informing  chapter  on  the 
attitude  of  Europe  toward  the  Pacific  Islands,  he  will 
find  it  in  “American  Diplomacy  in  the  Orient,”  by  the 
Hon.  John  W.  Foster,  ex-Secretary  of  State  of  the 
United  States.  Twice  did  the  British  raise  their  flag  over 
what  Mr.  Foster  terms  “The  Paradise  of  the  Pacific”; 
once  the  Russians  claimed  the  island,  and  twice  the 
French  were  in  control;  “but  the  little  kingdom  outlived 


LEGISLATION  FOR  HAWAII 


31 


the  designs  of  these  powerful  States,”  and  “with  the 
good  will  of  all  the  nations,  was  left  to  work  out  its 
own  career.” 

A short  time  before  the  close  of  President  Harrison’s 
second  administration,  a treaty  was  submitted  providing 
for  the  annexation  by  the  United  States  of  the  eight 
islands,  a little  larger  in  area  than  the  State  of  Connec- 
ticut, and  containing  a population  of  one  hundred  and 
fifty  thousand  people.  The  Senate  did  not  vote  on  the 
treaty,  and  President  Cleveland  withdrew  it  soon  after 
he  was  inaugurated.  Four  years  later  a new  treaty 
similar  to  the  earlier  one  was  sent  to  the  Senate  by 
President  McKinley.  Under  its  terms  the  Hawaiian 
Government  offered  all  rights  of  sovereignty  to  the 
United  States  Government  if  the  latter  would  assume  the 
public  debt  of  Hawaii,  to  an  amount  not  to  exceed  four 
million  dollars.  While  the  Senate  of  Hawaii  ratified  the 
treaty,  the  United  States  Senate  took  another  form  of 
legislation. 

President  McKinley,  on  July  7,  1898,  signed  the 
resolutions  providing  for  annexation  which  had  passed 
the  Houses  of  Congress.  By  them  he  received  power  to 
provide  for  the  government  of  the  islands  until  Con- 
gress should  enact  laws  for  that  purpose.  A commission 
was  appointed  to  recommend  suitable  legislation  for  the 
islands,  and  on  April  30,  1900,  the  bill  establishing  a 
territorial  government  in  Hawaii  became  a law. 

The  volcanoes  on  these  islands  are  among  the  most 
prominent  in  the  world.  Mauna  Loa  and  Kilauea  lie 
near  together  on  Hawaii,  the  largest  island  of  the  group. 
The  former  is  nearly  fourteen  thousand  feet  above  the 
sea  level,  and  has  several  times  menaced  the  towns  of 


32 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


Hilo  on  the  eastern  coast.  A recent  writer  at  Honolulu 
gives  the  following  graphic  description  of  a stream  of 
lava  from  Mauna  Loa: 

“I  spent  a night  at  the  end  of  a black  glossy  river  of 
humpy  rock,  over  half  a mile  wide,  sluggishly  eating  its 
way  through  a dense  and  lofty  forest.  Out  of  its  irregu- 
lar, billowy  front  line  of  black  tongues  of  rock  among 
the  trees,  fresh  red  tongues  of  molten  rock  were  here  and 
there  pushing  forward,  wrapping  in  flame  the  lofty  trees 
and  broad  ferns.  One  broad  tongue  slowly  crept  dowp 
a brook  channel  licking  up  the  water  pools  with  loud 
explosions.  In  half  an  hour  we  could  step  across  the 
congealed  lava,  although  it  bent  like  ice  under  the  weight. 
We  boiled  our  coffee  on  the  hot  rounded  ends  of  a tongue 
as  on  a stove.  When  our  breakfast  was  finished  the 
rock  opened  and  emitted  a fresh  stream.  It  ran  slug- 
gishly like  pitch.  It  was  forty  miles  from  its  source, 
whence  it  had  come  through  a few  covered  tunnels  where 
it  ran  swiftly,  near  the  end  ramifying  into  a multitude 
of  streamlets.  The  general  rate  of  advance  averaged 
perhaps  one  hundred  feet  a day.  Much  of  the  lava  was 
expended  in  piling  up  behind  to  an  average  depth  of 
ten  feet  or  more.  The  whole  formed  a cruel  monster, 
slowly  creeping  toward  its  prey,  the  beautiful  town  on 
the  bay.  It  was  a long  agony  for  the  people,  for  month 
after  month  the  terrible  fire  drew  nearer,  until  after  thir- 
teen months  of  fears  and  prayers,  it  suddenly  ceased  only 
six  miles  away.” 

The  Japan  steamers  pass  the  Midway  Island  1,160 
miles  northwest  of  Honolulu ; Yokohama  is  2,245  miles 
farther  west.  Wake  Island  lies  in  a southwesterly  direc- 
tion from  Honolulu,  2,044  miles  distant,  with  Guam 


THE  MIDWAY  ISLANDS 


33 


1,293  miles  to  the  southwest,  Manila  in  the  Philippines 
1,506  miles  farther  west,  and  Tutuila  in  the  Samoan 
group  2,263  miles  southwest  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands. 
From  “Greater  America,”  a timely  collection  of  papers 
reprinted  from  The  Youth's  Companion,  some  interest- 
ing facts  are  taken  regarding  these  latest  acquired  pos- 
sessions of  America. 

Four  thousand  miles  or  more  beyond  Hawaii,  toward 
Japan,  extends  a shoal  which  occasionally  touches  the 
surface  in  a reef  or  little  island.  At  the  western  end  of 
this  irregular  shoal  are  three  islands,  formerly  called 
Brooks  Island  in  honor  of  the  American  discoverer,  and 
now  known  as  the  Midway  Islands.  The  smallest  is  a 
mere  sandy  spit  over  which  the  waves  dash  in  storms.  The 
other  two  islands  are  each  four  miles  long  and  about  a 
mile  wide.  There  is  no  indication  that  these  islands  were 
ever  inhabited,  but  the  soil  is  good  and  there  is  abun- 
dance of  sweet  water,  so  that  quite  a large  colony  could 
subsist  on  the  tropical  fruits  that  might  be  raised,  and 
the  abundant  fish  and  turtle  that  abound  in  the  lagoons 
and  waters  surrounding  these  islands.  Captain  Brooks 
discovered  the  islands  in  1859.  The  American  Govern- 
ment took  formal  possession  August  28,  1867,  and 
raised  the  Stars  and  Stripes  on  the  highest  point.  There 
is  a fine  and  safe  harbor  for  vessels  no  larger  than  col- 
liers, and  outside  of  the  harbor,  in  the  roadstead,  there 
is  good  anchorage  for  recoaling  in  fair  weather.  As  the 
islands  are  on  the  direct  route  from  Honolulu  to  Yoko- 
hama, their  value  as  a coaling  station  and  a cable  station 
was  early  recognized  by  the  Government  when  plan- 
ning the  cable  line  from  San  Francisco  to  the  Philippines. 

Commander  Taussig,  of  the  gunboat  Bennington,  on 


34 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


his  way  from  Honolulu  to  Guam  in  February,  1899, 
stopped  at  Wake  Island  and  took  formal  possession  of  it 
in  the  name  of  the  United  States.  The  claim  of  the 
United  States  to  this  island  is  based  on  original  discovery 
in  the  year  1796  by  Captain  Wake,  who  gave  his  name 
to  the  island.  It  is  of  coral  formation,  and  is  about 
four  miles  long  and  two  miles  wide.  As  Wake  Island  is 
nearly  in  a direct  line  from  Hawaii  to  the  Philippines,  it 
has  been  settled  upon  as  a good  location  for  a cable 
station. 

In  December,  1899,  by  a treaty  with  England  and 
Germany,  Tutuila,  the  third  largest  island  of  the 
Samoan  group,  and  four  small  islands  lying  the  same 
distance  to  the  eastward,  became  the  property  of  the 
United  States.  The  Tutuila  is  said  to  contain  the  best 
harbor  in  the  South  Pacific  Ocean.  Pago-Pago,  on  the 
south  side  of  the  island,  contains  a bay  with  deep  water 
near  the  shore,  and  is  surrounded  by  high  hills  which 
offer  perfect  protection  to  the  largest  navy  in  the  severest 
tornado.  It  is  located  near  the  routes  of  the  large  trans- 
pacific steamers  from  San  Francisco  and  Vancouver  to 
Australia  and  New  Zealand,  and  it  is  the  only  harbor  on 
their  route,  except  Honolulu,  that  those  large  steamers 
can  enter. 

Tutuila  is  about  seventeen  miles  long  and  five  miles 
wide.  It  has  a population  of  four  thousand  people,  a 
superior  branch  of  Polynesians,  fairly  well  educated  and 
living  in  thirty  villages. 

When  the  Logan  was  riding  the  seas  of  the  Northern 
Pacific  large  sums  wrere  jocularly  offered  if  the  captain 
would  stop  the  ship  long  enough  to  enable  the  passen- 
gers to  walk  on  mother  earth  for  five  minutes.  At  times 


IN  AN  AMERICAN  HARBOR 


35 


there  was  no  land  within  a thousand  miles  except  that 
directly  underneath  the  steamer. 

“Cheer  up,  friend,  the  worst  is  yet  to  come,”  was  the 
well-meant  expression  of  a fellow  passenger.  Others 
would  say  with  a keener  sense  of  sympathy : 

“Never  mind ; we  will  be  at  Guam  soon,  and  then  you 
can  walk  for  miles  and  save  your  money.  In  fact,  you 
cannot  ride  unless  you  hire  a bullock  cart  and  let  your 
feet  hang  over.” 

For  nineteen  days  we  visited  the  writing  room  where 
the  day’s  run  was  posted  at  noon,  and  saw  the  distance 
between  the  steamer  and  Guam  rapidly  decreasing;  on 
June  1,  it  was  5,100  miles,  and  at  noon  on  June  20,  it 
had  dwindled  to  nineteen  miles,  and  hopes  ran  high. 
For  an  hour  or  more  we  had  been  running  alongside  of 
this  first  New  Possession  to  be  sighted  since  we  sailed 
through  the  Golden  Gate  and  saw  “God’s  Country” 
Slowly  fade  from  view. 

Soon  after  luncheon  the  town  of  Agana  was  made 
out  by  the  aid  of  glasses;  seven  miles  farther  west  could 
be  seen  Piti,  the  landing  place  of  Port  San  Luis  de  Apra, 
one  of  the  best  insular  harbors  of  the  Pacific.  The  naval 
supply  ship,  very  appropriately  named  the  Supply, 
with  steam  up,  was  awaiting  our  arrival. 

The  harbor  is  protected  by  a reef  three  or  four  miles 
from  shore;  back  of  it  is  a thickly  wooded  promontory, 
at  the  foot  of  which  are  beautiful  palms  and  cocoanut 
trees.  Near  the  village  of  Piti,  the  new  Pacific  cable 
station,  the  most  beautiful  flag  on  earth  was  waving  its 
welcome  in  the  hot  breezes.  Slowly  we  glided  into  the 
channel  almost  at  the  base  of  the  beautiful  headland. 
Tons  of  cargo  were  to  be  unloaded  upon  the  Supply, 


36 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


including  a large  quantity  of  fresh  meat  and  other  sup- 
plies for  the  American  governor  and  other  officials  on 
the  island,  the  two  companies  of  marines  stationed  there 
and  the  officers  and  crew  of  the  Supply. 

As  the  anchor  chains  rattled,  cameras  were  quickly 
loaded  with  new  films  and  exti'a  cartridges  placed  in 
convenient  pockets  in  order  to  “catch”  everything  new 
and  interesting  at  our  first  landing  place.  Large  bills 
were  exchanged  at  the  quartermaster’s  office  for  small 
change.  The  passengers  crowded  as  near  the  ship’s 
stairway  as  possible.  Some  of  the  young  officers  and  the 
young  ladies  had  planned  a dance  at  the  old  barracks, 
and  their  feet  tingled  with  the  anticipation  of  an  experi- 
ence which  they  would  probably  never  be  able  to  repeat. 
In  the  meantime,  Dr.  Davis,  the  transport  surgeon,  and 
the  physician  from  the  port,  were  having  a quiet  chat. 
The  interview  closed,  and  in  an  instant  a yellow  flag 
floated  from  our  mainmast.  We  were  quarantined!  Four 
soldiers  on  board  with  mumps  had  spoiled  an  afternoon’s 
pleasure  for  two  hundred  people.  The  people  of  the 
Pacific  Islands  have  never  had  the  American  “children’s 
diseases,”  and  seem  unable  to  resist  the  attack  of  these 
new  enemies.  Smallpox,  cholera  and  bubonic  plague  are 
not  so  fatal  to  Americans  as  measles,  mumps  and  scarlet 
fever  are  to  our  “brothers  in  brown.” 

Guam  is  the  largest  of  the  Ladrone  Islands,  and  was 
under  Spanish  rule  at  the  outbreak  of  hostilities  between 
Spain  and  the  United  States  in  1898.  On  June  20,  the 
first  American  military  expedition  to  the  Philippines 
stopped  to  take  possession  of  Guam  in  order  to  have  a 
safe  harbor  between  Honolulu  and  Manila  for  a coaling 
station  or  for  temporary  repairs,  if  necessary.  Guam 


I 


The  China  Sea 


SURPRISE  OF  THE  GOVERNOR 


37 


was  so  far  removed  from  the  lines  of  communication  that 
when  the  Americans  arrived  the  Spanish  governor  had  not 
heard  of  the  wrar,  which  had  been  declared  on  April  26. 
Several  officers  on  the  Logan  w'ere  in  the  attacking  expe- 
dition five  years  before,  and  told  with  much  merriment 
how  the  governor  came  down  to  the  shore  when  he  heard 
the  American  guns  silencing  the  fort  in  the  harbor  and 
offered  his  apology  for  not  returning  the  “salute,”  ex- 
plaining that  he  had  no  powder  on  the  islands ! Imagine 
his  surprise  when  he  found  himself  and  his  command 
prisoners  of  war,  ordered  on  board  the  “saluting”  vessel 
and  on  the  way  to  Manila.  The  governor  surrendered 
the  whole  chain  of  fifteen  islands,  but  the  American  Gov- 
ernment, in  the  Treaty  of  Paris,  gave  fourteen  back  to 
Spain — these  were  promptly  sold  to  Germany — our  Gov- 
ernment retaining  only  Guam. 

The  first  American  governor  of  the  island  was  Captain 
Richard  P.  Leary,  of  the  United  States  cruiser  Yosemite, 
who  established  a permanent  civil  government  under 
the  Navy  Department.  During  his  administration  the 
bay  was  surveyed  and  charted  and  made  safe  for  vessels 
of  all  sizes. 

The  area  of  the  island  of  Guam  is  about  one  hundred 
and  fifty  square  miles,  one-half  of  which  is  susceptible  of 
cultivation.  Nearly  all  of  the  land  is  still  virgin  soil, 
only  about  one  per  cent,  being  under  cultivation.  The 
population  is  about  nine  thousand,  nearly  all  of  it 
being  in  towns,  Agana  having  two-thirds  of  the  entire 
number,  and  the  five  other  towns  containing  from  two  to 
nine  hundred  each.  Cocoanuts,  oranges,  lemons,  cacaos, 
rice,  corn,  tobacco,  sugar-cane,  beans  and  tomatoes  are 
among  the  fruits  and  vegetables  raised.  Deer  and  wild 


38 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


goats  are  found  in  abundance ; cows  and  pigs  are 
raised. 

The  Rev.  Francis  E.  Price,  who  represents  the  Ameri- 
can Board  of  Missions,  speaks  of  the  excellent  record 
which  the  American  Government  has  made  during  its 
occupancy,  asserts  that  the  people  are  far  more  pros- 
perous than  ever  before,  and  that,  as  a rule,  they  are 
contented.  The  Government,  he  declares,  has  been  honest, 
administering  public  affairs  justly  and  visiting  swift 
punishment  on  official  dishonesty. 

When  the  typhoon  in  November,  1900,  had  left  the 
inhabitants  of  Guam  in  a destitute  condition,  the  Gov- 
ernment promptly  expended  $5,000  in  relief  work.  At 
that  time  Mr.  Price  heard  the  following  from  a group  of 
persons  on  the  street : “This  is  something  we  never  saw 
before — the  government  helping  the  people.  Heretofore 
the  people  have  always  given  to  the  government  and  re- 
ceived nothing  in  return.”  Evidently  “a  government 
for  the  people”  had  not  been  a popular  sentiment  in 
Guam.  The  American  Board  has  a school  in  Agana,  and 
a boarding  school  on  its  premises,  one  and  a half  miles 
from  Agana. 

As  the  sun  sank  to  his  rest,  the  band  on  the  Logan 
played  and  the  strains  of  peace  and  good-will  to  men 
floated  over  the  quiet  harbor  where  five  years  before  the 
notes  of  war  had  been  heard.  When  the  Sabbath  dawned 
the  noble  steamer  sailed  out  through  the  narrow  channel 
and  turned  her  prow  toward  the  west,  and  the  record  at 
noon  was  eighty-one  miles  from  Guam  and  fourteen  hun- 
dred and  nine  from  Manila. 


CHAPTER  III 


SOLDIERS  PLAY  AND  PRAY 


Novel  Situation  for  a Clergyman — A Favorite  Hymn 
on  Shipboard — Needs  of  the  Chaplain — Song  of 
Childhood — The  Howling  Wilderness. 

THREE  Sundays  were  passed  on  the  voyage  from 
San  Francisco  to  Manila.  A religious  service 
with  a sermon  was  held  each  morning,  and  a song  service 
with  an  address  in  the  evening.  The  efficiency  of  an 
army  chaplain  depends  on  two  things : his  personality 
and  the  attitude  of  the  commanding  officer  and  his  staff. 
Both  must  co-operate  to  accomplish  any  lasting  good. 
A clergyman  looking  for  an  easy  berth  would  better 
become  a tract  distributor  or  an  editor ; he  will  certainly 
miss  his  mark  as  a chaplain.  The  Rev.  Joseph  L. 
Hunter  of  Pennsylvania  is  the  chaplain  of  the  Fourth 
Infantry. 

At  two  of  the  Sabbath  services  the  writer  was  invited 
to  speak,  once  aft  and  once  forward.  One  Sunday  the 
sea  was  smooth,  and  on  the  other  it  was  not  so  rough  as 
it  had  been.  Standing  on  the  main  deck  under  a canvas 
awning,  with  the  enlisted  men  about  him,  and  the  officers 
and  their  wives,  only  a few  of  whom  he  could  see,  sitting 
on  the  upper  deck,  the  situation  was  novel.  It  was  an 
effort  to  retain  one’s  footing,  while  manuscript  or  note 
was  out  of  the  question  in  the  breeze  that  was  blowing. 


40 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


The  two  audiences,  one  seen  and  the  other  unseen ; the 
certainty  that  the  speaker  and  his  hearers  would  soon 
part  not  to  meet  again  in  that  relation ; the  keen  interest 
manifested  on  the  part  of  the  men  going  forward  at  the 
call  of  duty  to  dangers  of  which  many  have  no  concep- 
tion— these  features  and  others  combined  to  make  the 
services  deeply  impressive. 

The  men  were  fond  of  singing,  and  the  hymns  that  are 
popular  in  the  prayer  meetings  at  home  were  called  for 
most  frequently  on  ship-board.  Three  and  four  men 
looked  over  a single  book,  and  the  singing,  led  by  the 
organ  and  cornet,  was  hearty  and  sincere.  The  song 
service  on  the  Logan,  with  the  chaplain  leading  the  sing- 
ing, Mrs.  Chance  at  the  organ,  and  a member  of  the 
band  helping  with  the  cornet,  and  hundreds  of  men  with 
bared  heads  singing  their  greatest  favorite: 

“When  the  Roll  is  Called  Up  Yonder, 

I’ll  be  There,” 

will  not  soon  be  forgotten.  One  evening  Gospel  hymns 
were  sung,  the  next  night  patriotic  songs,  and  the  follow- 
ing evening  the  graphophone  was  used  to  entertain  the 
men.  The  organ,  hymn-books,  reading  matter  and 
graphophone,  used  by  the  regiment,  were  gifts.  Sol- 
diers and  sailors,  set  for  the  defence  of  the  flag  and  the 
dissemination  of  American  principles,  deserve  well  of 
those  who  remain  at  home,  and  what  can  properly  be 
done  for  their  enjoyment  and  comfort  will  be  a wise 
investment  by  the  Government. 

The  chaplain  wears  the  khaki  uniform  of  the  arm}r, 
with  the  insignia  of  his  rank,  that  of  captain,  and  a 
silver  cross  on  each  shoulder  strap.  Besides  conducting 


GOOD  WORK  OF  THE  CHAPLAIN  41 


the  Sunday  services,  he  visits  the  sick  in  the  hospital, 
engages  in  personal  religious  conversation  with  the  men, 
secures  suitable  reading  matter  and  provides  innocent 
recreations.  The  Government  has  not  seemed  to  realize 
how  important  an  officer  the  chaplain  of  a regiment  may 
be,  and  as  a rule  is ; a poor  chaplain  is  as  rare  as  a 
poor  surgeon.  What  the  surgeon  needs  to  make  his  work 
efficient  is  given  to  him,  as  it  should  be ; what  the  chap- 
lain needs  should  be  given  to  him.  The  success  attending 
the  splendid  work  done  by  Christian  workers,  not  chap- 
lains, sent  out  with  the  troops  by  societies,  is  partly  due 
to  the  fact  that  they  are  provided  with  money  with  which 
to  secure  what  the  soldiers  need. 

Mr.  Hunter  is  a soldier  and  had  no  complaint  to  make ; 
but  it  is  not  difficult  to  see  how  his  work  and  those  of  his 
fellow  chaplains  could  be  improved  by  small  annual  ap- 
propriations. The  additional  expense  of  fitting  out  the 
Army  and  Navy  chaplains  with  reading  rooms,  traveling 
libraries,  stationery,  games,  etc.,  would  not  be  large,  and 
the  investment  would  seem  to  be  a good  one.  A stereop- 
ticon  with  a good  collection  of  slides,  a few  good  papers 
and  periodicals  regularly  subscribed  for,  and  a few  dol- 
lars a month  to  use  as  exigencies  arise — these  are  some 
of  the  needs  of  chaplains  as  they  appear  to  the  writer. 
A few  people  are  now  doing  privately  what  could  be 
wisely  done  by  the  Government,  while  other  expenditures 
probably  come  from  the  small  salaries  of  the  chaplains. 
There  are  a thousand  men  in  a regiment;  the  Fourth 
Infantry  has  one  hundred  copies  of  “Church  Hymns  and 
Gospel  Songs.” 

Mr.  Hunter  had  the  cordial  co-operation  of  the  officers ; 
many  of  them,  and  nearly  all  of  the  ladies  on  board, 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


42 

attended  the  services  regularly.  The  example  of  these 
prominent  people  was  greatly  appreciated.  The  chap- 
lain had  held  a similar  position  in  a Pennsjdvania  regi- 
ment of  militia  for  several  years.  When  the  Spanish- 
American  War  began,  he  went  with  his  regiment  to  the 
Philippines,  being  on  the  second  American  Military  Ex- 
pedition. After  the  regiment  returned  home  he  resumed 
his  pastorate.  Knowing  the  needs  of  the  soldiers  of  the 
Regular  Army,  he  again  offered  his  services  to  his  coun- 
try and  was  appointed  chaplain  in  1902.  He  was  accom- 
panied to  the  Philippines  the  second  time  by  his  wife  and 
their  four  children. 

Twice  a week  the  enlisted  men  sang  patriotic  songs. 
A favorite  wras  “The  Army  Hiking  Song,”  sung  to  the 
tune,  “Tramp,  Tramp,  Tramp,  the  Boys  are  Marching”: 

“In  the  land  of  dopy  dreams. 

Peaceful,  happy  Philippines; 

Where  the  bolo-man  is  busy  all  day  long; 

Where  Americanos  die, 

And  the  Filipinos  lie, 

And  the  soldiers  sing  their  Army  Hiking  Song. 

Chorus  : 

Tramp,  tramp,  tramp,  ’tis  weary  marching, 

Hiking  after  Philippine  ladrones; 

But  beneath  the  Starry  Flag, 

We  corral  them  with  a Krag, 

For  we  want  to  see  our  own  beloved  homes.” 

The  soldiers  practiced  calisthenic  exercises  for  an  hour 
every  afternoon  under  the  direction  of  officers.  Besides 
keeping  the  soldiers  in  excellent  trim  physically,  this  is 
said  to  be  a preventive  of  seasickness,  or  at  least  it  en- 


CHILDHOOD  DAYS  RECALLED  43 

ables  one  to  forget  that  he  is  ill.  Aside  from  this  drill 
exercise  and  sentry  duty,  the  soldiers  were  left  largely 
to  themselves,  and  sat  or  lay  on  the  deck  reading, 
sleeping  or  playing  cards,  according  to  fancy.  Not 
long  after  the  trip  began,  a few  of  the  men  started  a 
glove  contest  on  the  deck  where  the  song  service  was  in 
progress. 

“A  prize  fight !”  shouted  an  enthusiastic  lover  of  the 
strenuous  life.  A divided  interest  was  manifest  from  that 
time.  Not  only  the  enlisted  men  on  the  outskirts  of  the 
crowd,  but  a number  of  junior  officers  and  young  ladies 
were  unable  to  resist  the  temptation  to  see  a free  glove 
contest.  No  complaint  was  made  by  the  chaplain,  but 
the  disturbance  was  not  repeated.  The  colonel  “did  not 
approve”  having  the  chaplain’s  services  disturbed,  and 
they  never  were  again. 

Nearly  every  week,  on  the  patriotic  night,  the  men 
called  for  “The  Good  Old  Summer  Time,”  which  was 
sung  with  great  enthusiasm.  When  it  is  remembered 
that  the  soldiers  were  leaving  home  and  loved  ones  for 
two  years,  if  not  forever,  it  was  not  surprising  that  they 
loved  to  recall  the  days  of  childhood : 

“There’s  a time  in  each  year 
That  we  always  hold  dear, 

Good  old  Summer  time. 

With  the  birds  and  the  treeses 
And  sweet-scented  breezes, 

Good  old  Summer  time; 

When  your  day’s  work  is  over 

Then  you  are  in  clover 

And  life  is  one  beautiful  rhyme. 

No  trouble  annoying, 

Each  one  is  enjoying 

The  good  old  Summer  time. 


44 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 

Choeus: 


“In  the  good  old  Summer  time, 

In  the  good  old  Summer  time, 

Strolling  through  the  shady  lanes, 

With  your  baby  mine. 

You  hold  her  hand,  and  she  holds  yours. 

And  that’s  a very  good  sign, 

That  she’s  your  tootsey  wootsey  in 
The  good  old  Summer  time.” 

The  sail  from  Guam  to  the  Philippines  occupied  four 
days,  but  it  was  twenty-four  hours  after  we  sighted  the 
Island  of  Samar  before  we  dropped  anchor  in  Manila 
Bay.  For  several  hours  we  passed  near  to  the  island 
which  will  be  known  in  history  as  “The  Howling  Wilder- 
ness.” 

Colonel  O’Connell  was  stationed  at  one  time  at 
Samar.  One  evening,  when  recalling  his  Philippine  ex- 
periences, he  told  of  a conversation  which  he  had  with 
the  Archbishop  of  California  just  before  sailing  on  the 
Logan. 

“So  you  have  been  in  Samar,  which  General  Smith 
made  a howling  wilderness?” 

“I  have  been  in  Samar,  and  it  is  a howling  wilderness ; 
but  General  Smith  did  not  make  it  so.” 

“Have  I the  wrong  name?”  asked  the  archbishop. 
“Who  was  it  that  made  Samar  a howling  wilderness?” 
“God  Almighty,  not  General  Smith.” 

Army  officers,  while  not  wishing  to  be  quoted,  were 
not  reticent  in  defending  General  Smith  for  his  efforts 
to  suppress  the  rebellion  in  Samar,  which  was  crushing 
the  American  Army.  His  famous  words  to  “kill  and 
burn  everything  and  make  a wilderness  of  Samar”  were 


PUTTING  DOWN  THE  REBELLION  45 


never  understood,  in  their  opinion,  to  be  an  order,  and 
were  never  taken  as  an  order  by  those  who  heard  them. 
He  was  understood  to  mean  that  the  rebellion  should  be 
put  down  in  the  shortest  possible  time  and  with  the  least 
possible  loss  of  life  on  both  sides. 


CHAPTER  IV 


FIRST  IMPRESSIONS 


Rival  of  the  Inland  Sea — Filipino  Life  at  First  Hand 
— Shipping  in  Manila  Harbor — Jehu  Out-distanced — 

The  Carabao  an  Insurrecto — Costume  of  the  Fili- 
pina — The  Scholar’s  Question. 

“T^TH  want  you  to  write  an  article  giving  your  im- 
▼ * pressions  of  Manila  when  you  had  been  there 
one  week.  Do  not  wait  until  you  are  acclimatized.  Tell 
us  what  an  American  traveler  sees  when  he  enters  the  city 
of  Manila.” 

This  was  the  instruction  received  by  the  writer  when 
leaving  New  York.  Were  he  to  give  similar  directions 
to  another  American  traveler  he  would  modify  them  in 
a single  particular: 

“Write  your  impressions  on  the  first  day  after  land- 
ing.” It  does  not  take  the  traveler  a week  to  yield  to 
the  seductive  influences  of  this  charming  city. 

Passengers  coming  from  the  Pacific  coast  on  a liner 
touch  first  at  Yokohama  and  then  at  Nagasaki,  Shang- 
hai and  Hong  Kong,  or  sail  directly  from  Nagasaki, 
according  to  the  line  and  the  steamer  taken.  Reaching 
Manila,  as  we  did,  on  a transport,  we  approached  the 
Philippines  from  the  East,  sighting  Samar  on  our  left 
and  soon  afterwards  southern  Luzon  on  our  right,  and 
sailed  between  the  two  islands  through  San  Bernardino 
Strait,  about  five  miles  wide  at  the  narrowest  point. 


ENTERING  MANILA  BAY 


47 


The  morning  ride  was  one  of  surpassing  beauty.  The 
glimpse  of  tropical  foliage  which  we  had  at  Guam  was 
simply  a foretaste  of  what  was  now  visible  from  either 
side  of  the  ship.  Many  of  the  officers  were  returning  to 
former  fields  or  going  to  new  ones,  and  their  description 
of  towns  and  villages,  almost  hidden  from  view,  showed 
how  varied  were  the  aspects  of  Filipino  life  and  how  pop- 
ulous were  the  islands.  The  cocoanut  palm  and  the  ever- 
present bamboo  could  be  seen  near  the  shore,  and  fre- 
quently a little  settlement. 

For  hours  during  our  first  day  among  the  Philippine 
Islands  we  had  a fine  view  of  the  Mayon  volcano,  near 
the  southern  end  of  Luzon. 

A few  officers  on  previous  trips  to  Manila  had  sailed 
through  the  Inland  Sea  of  Japan,  and  they  declared  that 
that  famous  sheet  of  water  does  not  surpass  in  beauty, 
and  certainly  not  in  grandeur,  the  Straits  of  San  Ber- 
nardino, and  that  Fujiyama  itself  is  not  so  perfect  in 
formation  as  Mayon. 

Manila  Bay  is  entered  from  the  sea  by  two  channels, 
one  on  either  side  of  Corregidor  Island.  The  main  chan- 
nel is  called  the  Boca  Grande,  or  great  mouth ; the  other 
is  the  Boca  Chica,  or  little  mouth.  We  sailed  through 
the  larger  channel  while  the  revolving  light  which  guided 
Admiral  Dewey  on  the  memorable  night  of  April  30, 
1898,  was  still  flashing  its  beams,  alternately  red  and 
white,  across  the  bay  and  far  out  to  sea.  When  we 
anchored  we  were  twenty-five  miles  from  Corregidor,  just 
outside  the  breakwater,  with  Manila  a mile  away,  and 
Cavite,  the  scene  of  the  great  naval  battle,  a dozen  miles 
distant  at  our  right. 

The  first  impression  that  one  receives  while  entering 


48 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


the  harbor  of  Manila  is  that  here  is  a body  of  water  in 
which  could  lie  secure  not  only  the  entire  American  Nav}q 
but  also  the  navies  of  many  nations.  One  does  not  have 
long  to  meditate  upon  the  occurrences  of  1898,  for  his 
transport  is  quickly  surrounded  by  official  boats,  repre- 
senting the  customs  service  and  the  quartermaster’s  de- 
partment, and  also  by  innumerable  little  boats  manned 
by  natives  and  waiting  to  carry  passengers  ashore.  At 
present  it  is  impossible  to  take  large  ships  near  the  city, 
as  the  water  is  not  deep  enough,  and  sudden  gales  may 
drive  them  from  their  moorings.  Given  a thousand 
islands  stretching  over  two  thousand  miles,  from  north 
to  south,  the  chief  means  of  communication  must  be  by 
water.  In  the  harbor  of  Manila  one  sees  many  kinds  of 
craft.  He  finds  several  ships  bearing  on  their  funnels 
the  national  colors,  though  somewhat  begrimed  with 
smoke.  These  are  inter-island  transports  which  carry 
the  troops  and  mail,  fresh  meat  and  ice  and  other  neces- 
saries of  life  to  the  different  posts  on  the  isles  of  Luzon, 
Panav,  Mindanao,  Cebu,  Negros,  Samar,  Leyte,  and  a 
few  smaller  ones.  These  transports  travel  on  schedule 
time;  their  routes  average  from  ten  to  twelve  days  in 
length. 

Commerce  and  traffic  have  followed  the  American  flag ; 
and  to-day  many  lines  of  steamers,  passenger  and 
freight,  include  Manila  in  their  course,  while  several 
have  it  as  one  of  their  terminal  ports.  Steamers  from 
China  or  Japan  bring  mail  and  passengers  every  week ; 
several  lines  run  to  Hong  Kong,  and  others  to  Japan 
direct.  There  are  frequent  arrivals  from  Australia. 
China  is  within  three  days  of  Manila,  and  Japan  is 
reached  in  two  days  more.  At  Hong  Kong  or  Nagasaki 


Hotel  de  Oriente 


IN  A STRANGE  LAND 


49 


liners  may  be  taken  for  San  Francisco,  Portland  or 
Vancouver,  prompt  connections  being  made.  A letter 
mailed  in  Manila  may  be  read  in  New  York  in  thirty-two 
days.  At  Hong  Kong  and  Singapore  one  may  catch 
western-bound  liners  and  reach  England  and  New  York 
through  the  Suez  Canal.  There  are  also  many  local 
steamship  lines,  mostly  under  Spanish  control,  although 
the  English  and  Filipinos  own  some  of  the  boats  which 
ply  between  Manila  and  other  cities.  The  Compania 
Maritima,  the  largest  of  the  commercial  companies,  has 
an  excellent  fleet  of  twenty  vessels,  with  which  it  touches 
nearly  all  the  important  centers  in  the  Archipelago. 
There  are  also  in  the  harbor  ships  from  Nagasaki,  Hong 
Kong  and  Calcutta,  and  from  Spanish,  English  and  Ger- 
man ports ; an  occasional  schooner  from  the  Pacific  coast 
is  seen. 

While  we  were  looking  at  the  shipping  and  watching 
the  great  steam  dredges  at  work,  the  launch  carried  us 
to  the  wharf  opposite  the  Customs  House.  As  we  landed 
we  found  ourselves  strangers  in  a strange  land,  and  in 
the  midst  of  strange  customs. 

Imagine  two  Americans  standing  on  the  wharf,  unable 
to  speak  a word  of  Spanish,  and  a crowd  of  chattering 
natives  unable  to  understand  a word  of  English.  Car- 
riages, carts  and  other  vehicles  dashed  past  us,  many  of 
them  empty  and  driven  at  breakneck  speed.  All  efforts 
to  get  a conveyance  were  futile  until  we  discovered  a 
group  of  men  in  khaki  uniform.  A cordial  greeting 
from  these  American  brothers,  a word  or  two  in  Spanish 
or  Tagalog  from  one  of  them  to  a passing  native,  and 
we  were  soon  on  our  way  to  the  Hotel  Oriente. 

While  the  soldiers  were  securing  the  carromata,  a Fil- 


50 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


ipino  lad  ran  toward  the  vehicle  and  engaged  the  atten- 
tion of  the  driver  for  an  instant.  For  this  service,  less 
than  a minute  in  duration,  he  extended  a brown  hand  and 
said  with  a pathos  almost  irresistible: 

“Fifty  cents,  Mex.” 

Just  why  he  claimed  a half  dollar  it  was  difficult  to 
tell,  unless  he  believed  that  we  represented  the  people 
who  had  come  from  America  to  benefit  the  Filipinos. 

There  may  be  vehicles  which  jar  one  more  than  a 
carromata,  a two-wheeled  vehicle  drawn  by  a small  native 
pony,  but  they  have  not  come  under  the  writer’s  obser- 
vation. Jehu  would  have  been  distanced  had  he  driven 
his  chariot  through  Manila.  The  driver,  or  cochero, 
takes  no  chances ; he  lets  those  in  his  carriage  do  that. 
He  simply  plans  to  get  to  his  destination  by  the  quickest 
route  and  in  the  shortest  time;  the  fact  that  he  is  paid 
by  the  hour  or  the  mile  does  not  enter  into  his  reckoning. 
He  aims  simply  to  get  ahead  of  every  one  else,  and  he 
usually  succeeds  when  he  has  an  American  passenger. 

We  had  learned  on  the  transport  that  there  were  ex- 
cellent hospitals  in  Manila,  and  we  had  no  doubt  that 
within  a half  hour  we  should  be  in  the  accident  ward,  or 
more  probably  in  the  morgue.  We  did  not  communicate 
our  fears  to  the  cochero.  We  could  not  have  done  so  if 
we  had  tried,  and  we  were  too  busy  holding  on  to  the 
narrow  seat  even  to  talk  to  each  other.  The  ride  was 
not  so  long  as  it  seemed,  as  we  found  later;  and  by 
learning  one  or  two  Spanish  words,  we  were  able  later  to 
ride  in  a carromata  with  some  hope  of  returning  to  our 
hotel  without  broken  limbs,  although  we  never  ceased  to 
watch  for  broken  axles  and  other  damaged  parts  of  our 
carriage. 


THE  CARABAO  AN  INSURRECTO 


51 


On  our  way  to  the  hotel  we  passed  many  carts  drawn 
by  carabao.  This  animal,  in  appearance  a cross  between 
an  ox  and  a rhinoceros,  actually  a water  buffalo,  is  driven 
singly  to  a heavy  cart.  The  carabao  has  an  individuality 
which  must  be  respected.  It  is  tractable  and  gentle  when 
driven  by  a Filipino  or  a Chino — every  man  from  the 
Flowery  Kingdom  is  a “Chino,”  the  Spanish  for  Chinese, 
and  the  word  “Chinaman”  is  never  heard  in  the  Philip- 
pines. 

The  carabao  is  an  insurrecto.  The  hatred  of  Ameri- 
cans which  the  natives  had  has  apparently  been  trans- 
ferred from  Aguinaldo  and  his  followers  to  the  carabao. 
It  is  said  that  formerly  one  of  these  animals  would  turn 
and  charge  an  entire  company  of  American  soldiers  when 
driven  by  one  of  them.  Whether  it  was  the  uniform  or 
the  color  of  the  American,  or  simply  “cussedness,” 
psychologists  have  not  explained.  No  American  ever 
drives  one  of  these  animals  if  he  can  help  it ; when  any 
driving  is  being  done  the  carabao  is  in  pursuit. 

But  the  carabao  and  the  Filipino  ai’e  'on  excellent 
terms.  Critical  Americans  speak  of  a “Filipino  smell” ; 
it  is  said  that  the  carabao  objects  to  the  “American 
smell.”  One  might  as  well  try  to  stop,  single-handed,  an 
automobile  as  a carabao  when  once  he  has  his  head  up, 
while  a Filipino  child  of  five  years  can  handle  the  animal 
with  impunity,  leading  him  by  the  rope  running  between 
his  horns  to  a ring  in  his  nose,  or  sitting  on  his  back. 
The  speed  of  the  carabao  is  uniform.  It  is  one  mile  an 
hour  with  good  roads,  but  this  rate  cannot  be  maintained 
for  many  consecutive  hours ; unless  the  animal  is  allowed 
to  have  a mud  bath  once  or  twice  a day  he  becomes  water 
mad. 


52 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


A failure  to  understand  this  characteristic  led  the 
Americans  in  the  early  days  into  needless  complications. 
If  the  carabao  is  not  released  from  his  cart  and  allowed 
the  course  which  nature  has  laid  down,  he  takes  the  cart 
with  him  to  the  nearest  water  in  sight,  whether  it  be  a 
mud  hole,  rice  paddy,  estero,  river  or  ocean.  His  consti- 
tution requires  that  his  body  should  be  submerged  not  in 
water  simply,  but  in  mud  as  well,  and  it  is  no  uncommon 
sight  to  notice  a dozen  carabaos  in  one  of  the  esteros 
with  which  the  city  abounds.  All  that  one  can  see  of  the 
great  animal  are  the  horns  and  a few  inches  of  the  back. 
After  refreshing  itself  in  water  that  would  seem  to  be 
fitted  only  for  the  culture  of  cholera  germs,  the  faithful 
friend  of  the  farmer  and  traffic  manager  returns  to  his 
duties  for  another  term  of  service.  In  the  rice  field,  which 
is  plowed  when  under  water,  the  carabao  is  invaluable. 
If  it  should  be  decided  at  any  time  to  dispense  with 
his  services,  the  system  of  rice  growing  would  have  to  be 
changed. 

There  are  a few  street  cars  in  Manila,  drawn  by 
ponies  that  would  not  be  allowed  to  pass  an  officer  of 
the  Society  for  the  Prevention  of  Cruelty  to  Animals; 
but  these  cars  are  not  patronized  by  Americans.  The 
story  is  told  of  an  American  school  teacher  who  thought 
that  street  cars  were  run  for  the  purpose  of  conveying 
passengers,  and,  acting  on  her  intuition,  she  took  a seat 
in  one  of  them ; but  she  had  counted  without  the  cost. 
Receiving  many  stares  from  her  fellow-travelers,  stares 
not  born  of  rudeness,  but  of  intense  curiosity  upon  seeing 
an  American  lady  in  a Manila  car,  she  left  it  after 
riding  a block  or  two.  The  cars  are  uniformly  crowded 
to  the  doors,  and  the  steps  are  also  jammed,  many  native 


ENJOYING  THE  SIESTA 


53 


women  being  among  the  passengers.  Some  of  the  Ameri- 
can soldiers  patronize  the  cars,  but  not  until  they  are 
immune  from  a disease  apparently  familiar  to  the  ma- 
jority of  the  lower  classes  among  the  Filipinos.  It  is 
said  that  there  are  people  who  think  that  they  have 
prickly  heat,  and  try  to  convince  their  friends  that  it  is 
so.  With  the  new  electric  line  in  operation,  with  first  and 
second  class  cars,  Americans  as  well  as  Filipinos  will 
patronize  it. 

The  siesta,  the  nap  following  luncheon,  or  tiffin,  as  it 
is  termed,  may  be  omitted  the  first  day  that  one  is  in 
Manila,  but  not  after  that.  When  one  has  gone  to  the 
shopping  district  and  found  all  of  the  principal  stores 
closed,  doors  locked  and  blinds  up,  and  has  found  empty 
desks  in  the  public  offices  and  business  houses,  he  realizes 
that  he  might  as  well  go  where  all  the  rest  of  the  world  is 
at  that  time,  and  he  returns  to  his  hotel,  sleeps  an  hour, 
has  a cold  bath,  dresses  for  the  afternoon,  orders  a car- 
romata,  and  goes  out  for  business  or  pleasure.  Before 
the  American  invasion,  the  business  of  the  day  was  nearly 
all  done  before  noon,  and  only  a few  clerks  were  obliged 
to  return  to  the  stores  and  offices  after  tiffin ; is  it  to  be 
wondered  at  that  the  Americans  were  resisted  ? 

The  first  drive  is  to  the  Post  Office,  through  the  Calle 
Rosario,  the  Chinese  shopping  quarters,  and  the  Escolta, 
where  the  better  class  of  foreign  shops — American, 
English  and  Spanish,  with  an  occasional  Chinese,  are 
found.  Then  one  retraces  his  steps  down  the  Escolta, 
crosses  the  Bridge  of  Spain,  which  spans  the  Pasig 
River,  and  drives  into  the  Walled  City  on  the  left  bank 
of  the  river,  or  down  to  the  Luneta  overlooking  the  bay. 

The  Walled  City,  perhaps  a mile  square,  contains  the 


54 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


Cathedral,  the  Augustinian,  Dominican  and  other 
churches ; the  St.  Thomas  University  and  other  institu- 
tions of  learning ; the  Palace,  used  as  the  headquarters  of 
the  Civil  Government;  Fort  Santiago,  the  headquarters 
of  the  military ; a large  Spanish  hospital  and  several 
hotels ; the  Army  and  Navy  Club ; many  shops,  a market, 
and  not  a few  houses  still  occupied  by  Spaniards,  and  the 
building  occupied  by  the  Young  Men’s  Christian  Asso- 
ciation, the  Methodist  Printing  Press  and  the  American 
Bible  Society. 

The  scene  on  the  Luneta  at  sunset,  when  the  band 
plays,  is  brilliant.  Hundreds  of  carriages  drive  along 
the  shore  facing  the  bay,  or  stop  for  a few  moments  as 
near  the  stand  as  possible,  while  gentlemen  alight  to  talk 
to  friends  in  other  carriages.  Americans,  Spaniards, 
Filipinos,  Chinese  meet  here,  the  turnouts  of  some  of  the 
brown  and  yellow  people  not  a whit  behind  in  style  or 
expense  those  carrying  paler  faces.  The  music  is  of  a 
high  order,  but  it  is  of  secondary  importance;  every  one 
who  can  go  to  the  Luneta  must  go  there  to  be  in  the 
swim.  It  is  said  that  clergymen  go  there  to  make  pas- 
toral calls. 

In  the  business  and  residence  part  of  Manila  the  houses 
are  built  of  native  woods,  after  the  Spanish  style  of 
architecture.  Glass  is  seldom  seen  in  the  windows — a 
translucent,  but  not  transparent,  sea  shell  being  substi- 
tuted for  it.  The  ground  floor  is  generally  used  as  a 
carriage  house,  although  the  Americans  are  utilizing  the 
space  for  reception  rooms,  dining  rooms,  libraries  or  bed- 
rooms. 

In  the  native  districts  of  Manila,  outside  the  fire  lines, 
and  in  nearly  every  town  outside  of  the  capital,  the 


CONGESTION  IN  THE  PASIG 


55 


native  house  is  built  of  bamboo,  with  a roof  of  nipa 
leaves.  This  kind  of  house  is  commonly  called  a nipa 
shack,  the  roof,  which  is  built  first,  giving  the  name  to 
the  entire  building.  After  the  roof  is  completed,  it  is 
raised  to  the  proper  height,  a few  bamboo  poles  are  laid 
for  the  flooring  to  rest  upon,  and  the  family  moves  in, 
finishing  the  house  as  opportunity  offers. 

Just  above  the  Bridge  of  Spain  are  Spanish  and  native 
boats,  which  run  up  the  river  and  across  Laguna  de  Bay, 
supplying  towns  along  the  river  and  lake  with  products 
from  Manila  and  returning  richly  laden  with  produce 
from  the  provinces  toward  the  east.  Other  boats  run  on 
other  rivers  entering  into  the  bay.  Below  the  bridge 
are  many  steamers  which  sail  along  the  northern  coast  of 
Luzon,  perhaps  two  hundred  miles,  while  others  reach  all 
of  the  southern  islands. 

The  mouth  of  the  Pasig  is  at  times,  especially  in  the 
typhoon  season,  practically  choked  with  ships,  launches, 
cascos  and  bancas  which  come  inside  for  protection  from 
the  stoi’m.  The  cascos  are  really  lighters,  although  they 
are  long  rather  than  broad,  and  are  covered  with  bamboo 
roofs  made  in  sections,  which  protect  the  cargo  as  well 
as  the  family  of  the  man  in  charge  of  the  craft.  On 
almost  every  casco  the  owner  lives  with  his  family,  includ- 
ing the  cock  that  crows  not  only  in  the  morn,  but  when- 
ever he  feels  like  it.  It  is  a marvel  how  the  children  who 
live  on  the  cascos  keep  from  falling  overboard;  perhaps 
they  do  not  always  succeed. 

The  motive  power  consists  of  two  or  more  Filipinos 
with  bamboo  poles  from  twenty-five  to  thirty  feet  long. 
Along  the  sides  of  the  boat  run  little  foot  bridges  or 
bamboo  sidewalks,  upon  which  the  sailors  walk  as  they 


56 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


pole  the  boat.  It  seems  incredible  that  two  men,  each 
weighing  less  than  a hundred  pounds,  should  be  able  to 
force  a heavily  laden  boat  against  the  swift  current;  but 
they  do.  Dropping  one  end  of  the  pole  into  the  mud, 
the  barefooted  and  lightly  clothed  native  doubles  himself, 
bringing  his  head  nearly  as  low  as  his  feet  as  he  presses 
the  other  end  against  his  bare  shoulder. 

The  banca  is  a tree  trunk  hollowed  out  and  propelled 
by  a paddle  or  poles,  although  a large  one  may  be 
moved  by  oars  or  a sail.  When  a sail  is  used,  there  is 
always  an  outrigger  attached,  and  the  strength  of  the 
gale  may  be  determined  by  an  onlooker.  It  may  be  a 
“one-man”  breeze,  or  a “two-man”  breeze,  or  the  entire 
crew  of  four  or  eight  men  may  be  standing  on  the  out- 
rigger while  the  heavier  passengers  are  told  to  sit  high 
up  on  the  windward  side.  At  such  a moment  one  not 
accustomed  to  sailing  in  a boat  whose  lee  side  is  under 
water  is  apt  to  inquire  as  to  the  possibility  of  rescue,  if 
the  breeze  should  pass  the  limit  of  the  counter-balance  on 
board. 

It  gives  one  just  arriving  from  America  a bit  of  a 
shock,  as  he  drives  about  the  streets  of  Manila,  to  see 
children  running  around  clad  principally  in  their  brown 
bii’thday  suits,  although  the  majority  of  them  do  have 
a covering  of  a texture  as  fine  as  mosquito  netting,  ex- 
tending nearly  to  the  knees.  The  laboring  men  are  in  all 
stages  of  dress.  Some  of  them  have  scarcely  more  than  a 
cloth  about  their  loins ; this  is  especially  true  of  the  Chi- 
nese coolies.  A large  number  of  the  men  go  barefoot 
and  the  great  majority  are  bareheaded.  With  the 
■women  there  is  greater  modesty  shown,  and  many  of  the 
native  women  might  be  deemed  well-nigh  prudish  in  their 


Poling  a Boat  on  tiie  Pasig  Riveu 


DRESS  OF  THE  WOMEN 


57 


reserve.  Some  of  them  are  barefooted,  but  others  wear 
dainty  little  slippers  with  wooden  bottoms  and  a little 
piece  of  cloth  or  leather  which  covers  three  or  four  toes. 
This  foot  dressing  does  not  allow  great  liberty  of  action 
in  walking,  and  it  is  not  uncommon  to  see  a slipper  left 
behind  for  a moment.  It  is  said  that  in  the  giddy  waltz 
a senorita  will  lose  a slipper  in  the  middle  of  the  floor  and 
catch  it  up  again  when  she  returns  in  the  next  circuit. 

The  dress  of  the  Filipina  woman  is  simple  and  ad- 
mirably adapted  for  a temperature  that  ranges  around 
eighty-five  degrees,  often  reaching  ninety-five,  and  sel- 
dom dropping  below  seventy-five.  The  outer  gannents 
are  a skirt,  with  or  without  a train,  according  to  the 
purpose  for  which  it  is  worn;  a waist  of  thin  material 
with  flowing  sleeves,  called  a camisetta,  and  a handker- 
chief, starched  stiffly  and  folded  diagonally,  which  rests 
lightly  upon  the  shoulders.  Man}7  of  the  younger  women 
have  beautiful  necks  and  shoulders,  which  show  to  the 
best  advantage  in  this  costume.  At  the  reception  given 
by  Governor  Taft  to  General  Davis  upon  his  retirement 
from  the  army,  the  dresses  worn  by  many  of  the  Filipinas 
surpassed  in  beauty,  as  they  apparently  did  in  expense, 
with  their  rich  material  heavily  embroidered,  those  worn 
by  many  of  the  Americans  present.  Now  and  then  a 
Filipina  tries  to  emulate  her  American  teacher  or  friend, 
and  dons  American  shoes  and  corsets  and  gowns ; but  the 
result  is  not  artistically  gratifying. 

The  native  women,  and  ladies  as  well,  have  one  habit 
which  strikes  a visitor  as  repulsive.  It  is  not  at  all 
uncommon  to  see  women  at  work,  and  even  Filipina  ladies 
of  apparent  wealth,  riding  in  their  carriages,  smoking 
not  only  cigarettes,  but  even  cigars  larger  than  those  used 


58 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


in  the  States.  As  for  the  men,  }roung  and  old,  it  is  the 
exception  to  see  one  without  a cigar  or  cigarette. 

At  a concert  the  flute  player  held  a lighted  cigarette 
in  his  left  hand,  and  whenever  he  could  take  a whiff  he 
did  so,  but  he  was  careful  that  this  indulgence  should  not 
disturb  the  harmony  of  the  entertainment.  The  driver  of 
your  carromata,  the  clerk  who  waits  on  you  at  the  coun- 
ter, the  cook  in  the  kitchen,  in  fact  the  great  majority 
of  men  in  Manila — Filipinos,  Chinamen,  Americans  and 
Mestizos  (half-breeds,  Filipino  and  Chinese,  or  Filipino 
and  Spanish),  are  smoking  the  greater  part  of  their 
waking  hours. 

With  the  Filipinos  music  is  well-nigh  a passion. 
Every  town,  village  and  hamlet  has  a band,  and  it  is 
claimed  that  the  best  military  band  in  the  Philippines  is 
a native  one  led  by  a Negro.  Two  or  three  times  a week 
the  Constabulary  band,  under  the  dii*ection  of  Lieutenant 
Loving,  plays  on  the  Luneta.  The  native  bands  have 
rude  instruments,  many  of  them  made  of  bamboo.  The 
story  is  told  of  a Filipino  sailor  who,  with  a flute  impro- 
vised from  a bit  of  piping,  the  holes  punched  with  a red- 
hot  skewer,  could  play  an  extraordinary  range  of  airs 
and  variations  in  perfect  tune  and  with  much  artistic 
feeling. 

Next  to  music,  and  even  greater  in  interest  than  his 
love  for  his  native  instruments,  is  the  Filipino’s  delight 
in  cock-fighting.  The  native  Filipino  is  a born  gambler, 
and  in  cock-fighting  he  finds  his  greatest  joy.  The  gov- 
ernment has  not  deemed  it  best  to  deprive  him  of  his 
favorite  passion,  but  cock-fighting  is  restricted  to  Sun- 
days and  feast  days,  and  before  sundown  on  those  days. 
As  there  are  some  fifty  or  sixty  feast  days  in  a year,  one 


THE  FIGHTING  COCK 


59 


who  is  determined  to  see  this  sport  can  do  so  without 
breaking  the  Sabbath. 

The  fondness  of  the  Filipino  for  his  fighting  cock 
was  illustrated  not  long  ago  when  a large  part  of  the 
Tondo  district  of  Manila  was  burned.  Every  man  saved 
his  combatte,  as  the  rooster  is  termed,  while  the  policemen 
and  firemen  saved  the  women  and  children.  No  matter 
how  poor  a man  may  be,  he  is  a gentleman  if  he  owns  a 
rooster,  which  may  bring  him  in  a large  amount  of  money 
if  it  wins  in  the  next  fight ; and  if  it  is  killed  he  is  sure 
of  a chicken  dinner.  Therefore,  he  is  happy  and  wins, 
whichever  bird  goes  under.  One  cannot  walk  a block 
without  meeting  a man  with  his  rooster  under  his  arm 
or  seeing  him  sitting  on  his  haunches  petting  the  fowl 
as  if  it  were  his  favorite  child.  When  he  grows  tired  of 
holding  it  or  stroking  it,  he  drives  a little  peg  into  the 
ground,  to  which  is  attached  a string  two  or  three  yards 
long  and  tied  to  the  rooster’s  leg.  It  is  said  that  on 
Sunday,  if  the  worshiper  is  pressed  for  time,  he  takes 
his  combatte  to  the  church  door  and  tethers  it  outside, 
while  he  goes  in  to  perform  his  religious  vows,  and  then 
hastens  away  to  the  cockpit,  where  he  spends  the  after- 
noon and  perhaps  earns  enough  to  support  his  family, 
with  the  aid  of  his  wife’s  labor,  during  the  coming  week. 

“Do  the  children  play  games  as  American  children 
do?”  the  writer  asked  an  American  school  teacher.  For 
answer  she  pointed  to  an  enclosure  a dozen  feet  square. 
There  in  a ring  were  a number  of  boys  pitching  pennies. 

“They  are  playing,  jmu  see,  and  playing  for  keeps. 
Playing  for  amusement  is  an  art  wholly  unknown  to  the 
Filipino.” 

Another  teacher  said  that  she  organized  a baseball 


60 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


club  that  her  boys  might  have  proper  recreation.  To 
her  surprise  she  found  that  not  only  were  they  gamblers, 
but  that  they  were  swearing.  When  she  reproved  them 
for  their  profanity,  one  of  the  boys  said  naively: 
“Teacher,  what  shall  I say  when  I miss  a ball?” 


Admiral  Dewey,  U.  S.  N. 


CHAPTER  V 


ADMIRAL  DEWEY’S  VICTORY 


Views  of  John  W.  Foster — Capitulation  of  the  Cap- 
ital— What  America  Received  for  its  Twenty  Millions 
— Mr.  McKinley’s  Hesitation — Appointing  the  Com- 
mission. 

“T  WISH  I had  never  been  born,”  said  John  Wesley. 

-*•  “But  you  are  born,”  was  the  philosophic  reply 
of  his  revered  mother. 

Opinions  differ  as  to  the  wisdom  of  the  retention  of 
the  Philippines  by  Americans,  but  no  one  has  questioned 
our  right  to  destroy  the  Spanish  fleet.  Whether  Admiral 
Dewey  should  have  sailed  away  after  finishing  the  work 
to  which  he  was  specifically  assigned  may  long  remain  a 
subject  of  academic  debate.  Similar  themes  have  been 
discussed  in  other  days. 

“While  the  caution  which  Washington  gave  his 
countrymen  in  his  farewell  address  to  avoid  entangling 
alliances  has  not  lost  its  virtue,  the  Nation  has  attained 
such  a position  among  the  powers  of  the  earth  that  it 
cannot  remain  a passive  spectator  of  international 
affairs.” 

These  words  from  the  pen  of  ex-Secretary  John  W. 
Foster  express  the  conviction  of  one  of  the  best  American 
diplomats  of  recent  decades.  Mr.  Foster  makes  this 
statement  regarding  Admiral  Dewey’s  position  subse- 


62 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


quent  to  the  sinking  of  the  Spanish  fleet : “The  dispatch 
of  his  (Admiral  Dewey’s)  squadron  to  the  Philippines 
was  made  necessary  by  the  exposure  of  American  com- 
merce in  the  Orient  and  of  American  cities  and  towns  on 
the  Pacific  coast  to  the  reprisals  of  the  Spanish  fleet.  He 
fulfilled  his  orders  when  he  destroyed  that  fleet.  But 
there  was  not  a single  harbor  in  all  the  Asiatic  waters 
where  his  squadron  could  remain  in  time  of  war.  His 
only  course  was  to  continue  in  the  harbor  captured  from 
the  enemy  till  he  received  orders  from  his  Government.” 
Comparatively  little  was  known  of  the  Philippines  ten 
years  ago;  to-day  few  children  can  be  found  in  any 
school  who  do  not  know  a good  deal  about  their  location, 
tribes,  products,  languages  and  customs.  Seven  hundred 
miles  from  Hong  Kong,  the  nearest  Chinese  port,  twice 
as  far  from  Shanghai  and  Nagasaki,  the  nearest  port  in 
Japan,  Manila  was  until  recently  out  of  the  ordinary 
lines  of  travel,  east  or  west,  and  was  seldom  visited  ex- 
cept by  freight  steamers  or  those  carrying  Spanish  mili- 
tary and  clergy  and  merchants.  Spain  owned  the  Phil- 
ippines from  the  time  of  their  discovery  in  1521  until 
1898.  A British  fleet  sailed  in  the  Philippine  waters  in 
1762  and  captured  Manila;  but  the  treaty  of  Paris  in 
the  following  February  restored  it  to  the  Spaniards.  It 
stirs  one’s  blood  to  look  over  Manila  Bay  and  recall  the 
action  and  the  result  of  that  eventful  morning  when  an 
American  admiral  focussed  the  attention  of  the  world 
upon  it. 

Admiral  Dewey  with  his  squadron  was  in  Hong  Kong 
when  the  war  with  Spain  was  declared.  In  obedience  to 
a cable  message  from  Washington  to  find  the  Spanish 
Asiatic  fleet  and  destroy  it,  he  sailed  for  the  Philippine 


Corregidoii  Island,  at  the  Entrance  of  Manila  Bay 


THE  WHITE  FLAG  APPEARS 


63 


Islands,  and  three  days  later,  having  failed  to  find  the 
fleet  in  Subig  Bay,  on  the  northwestern  coast  of  Luzon, 
he  entered  Manila  Bay,  disregarding  the  mines  and  tor- 
pedoes guarding  the  entrance,  and  early  the  next  morn- 
ing, Sunday,  May  1,  the  naval  battle  was  fought  which 
destroyed  Spanish  prestige  in  the  Orient.  The  wrecks 
of  the  fleet  have  been  largely  recovered,  although  one 
may  yet  see  evidences  of  the  deadly  fire  from  American 
guns  on  those  still  partly  submerged.  One  was  recently 
raised  and  towed  to  Hong  Kong  for  inspection  and  sub- 
sequent action,  if  found  available  for  use.  Some  of  the 
smaller  boats  have  been  refitted  and  are  now  carrying 
the  American  flag. 

Early  in  the  following  August,  Admiral  Dewey  joined 
with  Major-General  Merritt  of  the  Army  in  a note  to  the 
Governor-General  of  Manila,  informing  him  that  the  city 
might  be  bombarded  any  time  in  forty-eight  hours,  or 
sooner,  if  the  firing  on  the  American  trenches  by  the 
Spanish  troops  was  continued.  No  shot  was  fired  from 
that  time  on  either  side  until  the  final  assault  was  made 
on  August  13,  when  the  fleet  and  the  Army  joined  forces. 
The  Spaniards  surrendered  and  the  white  flag  appeared 
near  the  Luneta.  Immediately  the  Americans  ceased 
firing,  but  the  Filipinos  continued  to  use  their  arms 
against  the  Spaniards,  who,  in  returning  their  fire,  killed 
one  man  and  wounded  two  others  in  the  California  regi- 
ment. 

General  Merritt  with  his  staff  was  then  taken  ashore 
and  the  party  marched  quietly  through  the  deserted 
streets  to  the  Cathedral,  where  the  terms  of  surrender  were 
presented  for  approval.  By  this  time  the  city  was  prac- 
tically starved  out.  The  insurgent  forces  were  gathered 


64 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


outside  of  the  American  lines,  endeavoring  to  gain  admis- 
sion to  the  town ; but  strong  guards  were  posted  and 
General  Aguinaldo  was  given  to  understand  that  none 
of  his  men  would  be  allowed  to  enter  with  arms.  Prior 
to  the  surrender  of  Manila  the  Americans  and  the  insur- 
gents had  apparently  been  friendly  as  against  the  Span- 
iards ; but  afterwards  Americans  and  Spaniards  made 
common  cause  against  the  Filipinos,  who  were  greatly 
disturbed  at  this  treatment. 

To  quote  from  General  Merritt:  “They  had  expected 
that  the  city  would  be  turned  over  to  them,  and  that  they 
would  be  permitted  to  loot  and  burn  and  kill  with  a free 
hand.  The  Spaniards  showed  considerable  fear  that  a 
general  massacre  would  be  attempted  by  the  insurgents, 
and  they  openly  expressed  a desire  to  unite  with  the 
Americans  against  them.  Aguinaldo  refused  to  allow 
the  Americans  to  use  the  water-works,  which  were  in  his 
possession ; at  one  time  it  looked  as  though  they  would 
have  to  be  taken  by  force.  After  repeated  promises  and 
much  parleying,  the  insurgents  juelded  to  a show  of  force 
and  the  water  was  allowed  to  flow  into  the  city,  but  for 
over  a week  we  were  obliged  to  depend  upon  the  rains  for 
water.” 

The  irritation  provoked  by  the  failure  of  Aguinaldo 
to  reap  what  he  considered  the  rightful  fruits  of  victory 
increased  during  the  summer,  and  on  February  4,  1899, 
the  rebellion  led  by  him  broke  out  and  was  not  suppressed 
until  the  spring  of  1901,  when  Aguinaldo  was  captured 
by  General  Funston  and  the  last  of  the  insurgents  sur- 
rendered. In  other  chapters  the  achievements  of  the 
Americans  in  the  years  of  peace  which  have  followed  the 
suppression  of  the  rebellion  will  be  noted  somewhat  fully. 


Oi.d  Wall  and  Moat,  Manila 


MANY  ISLANDS  IN  THE  GROUP 


65 


A word  about  the  islands  for  which  the  United  States 
paid  Spain  $20,000,000.  They  form  the  most  northern 
group  in  the  Malayan  or  eastern  archipelago,  and 
lie  wholly  wdthin  the  tropics,  extending  about  1,150 
miles  north  and  south,  while  the  east  and  west  limits 
are  650  miles  apart.  The  archipelago  is  93  miles  from 
foreign  territory  on  the  north  (Formosa) ; 31  miles 
from  Balambangan,  an  island  near  Borneo  on  the  south; 
510  miles  from  the  Pelew  group  (German)  on  the  east, 
and  515  miles  from  Cochin  China  (French)  on  the 
west. 

The  archipelago  numbers  about  1,600  islands,  most 
of  them  very  small,  and  having  altogether  about  11,500 
miles  of  coast  line.  Two  of  them,  Mindanao  and  Luzon, 
are,  however,  classed  among  the  larger  islands  of  the 
world,  and  eleven  islands- — Luzon,  Mindanao,  Samar, 
Panay,  Negros,  Palawan  (Paragua),  Mindoro,  Leyte, 
Cebu,  Masbate  and  Bohol — are  of  primary  geograph- 
ical importance.  The  others  are  mainly  dependent 
islands  or  islets  along  the  coast  of  the  larger  islands,  or 
subordinate  archipelagoes,  like  the  Sulu  Islands.  The 
area  of  the  total  land  surface  is  computed  at  127,853 
square  miles,  or  a little  larger  than  the  New  England 
States,  New  York  and  New  Jersey  together.  Mindanao 
(45,559  square  miles)  and  Luzon  (43,075  square  miles) 
comprise  about  seven-tenths  of  the  total  land  surface, 
the  area  of  the  other  leading  islands  being:  Samar, 

5,198  square  miles;  Negros,  4,839;  Panay,  4,752;  Pala- 
wan, 4,368 ; Mindoro,  4,050 ; Leyte,  3,872 ; Cebu,  1,668  ; 
Bohol,  1,400,  and  Masbate,  1,230. 

In  1902,  Congress  passed  an  act  authorizing  a census 
which  should  include  all  the  islands  of  the  Philippines 


66 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


and  their  inhabitants  as  far  as  might  be  practicable. 
This  was  done,  with  the  following  result : 

Christian 6,967,011 

Non-Christian 605,188 


Total 7,572,199 

The  area  of  the  Philippines  equals  that  of  England, 
Ireland,  Scotland  and  Wales,  and  it  is  believed  by  those 
who  have  studied  the  situation  carefully  that  the  islands 
are  capable  of  supporting  a population  of  at  least 
100,000,000.  It  is  doubtful  if  an  area  so  large  as  that 
of  the  Philippines  can  be  found  which  contains  such  a 
vast  population,  together  with  such  virgin  resources  in 
every  line  of  industry.  The  fact  that  these  resources 
have  not  been  developed  is  due  to  the  discouraging  prac- 
tices of  Spain.  The  present  Government,  however,  in- 
vites all  honest,  intelligent  and  thrifty  men,  of  whatever 
nationality,  to  assist  in  restoring  to  the  islands  all  that 
the}7  have  failed  to  secure  in  the  past  through  a narrow 
administrative  policy.  There  are  highways  to  build, 
railways  to  construct,  forests  and  mines  to  exploit,  plan- 
tations to  cultivate,  inexhaustible  water  powers  to  har- 
ness, manufactories  to  establish.  Modem  methods  of 
agriculture  and  many  other  fields  of  endeavor  are  open 
to  capital  and  industry.  Men  of  thrift  and  industry  are 
invited  to  settle  in  the  islands  and  help  to  improve  them, 
and  the  first  fruits  will  be  given  to  those  who  first  accept 
the  invitation.  What  the  islands  need  is  a class  of  pio- 
neers such  as  made  the  great  empire  lying  west  of  the 
Mississippi  River,  men  with  willing  hands  and  honest 
hearts  and  a small  amount  of  capital. 


MR.  McKINLEY’S  INTENTIONS 


67 


When  the  war  with  Spain  was  declared,  President  Mc- 
Kinley expected  to  add  no  territory  to  the  United  States 
as  a result  of  the  conflict;  but  the  fact  that  he  changed 
his  mind  in  the  summer  may  be  learned  by  noting  his 
writings  during  the  few  months  when  history  was  making 
rapidly.  In  the  protocol  of  August  12,  which  suspended 
hostilities  and  formed  the  basis  for  the  treaty  of  peace, 
was  the  following  provision : 

“The  United  States  will  occupy  and  hold  the  city,  bay 
and  harbor  of  Manila,  pending  the  conclusion  of  a treaty 
of  peace,  which  shall  determine  the  control,  disposition 
and  government  of  the  Philippines.” 

It  is  clear  from  the  diplomatic  history  of  this  period 
that  the  attitude  of  the  Government  relating  to  the  Phil- 
ippines passed  through  three  stages,  as  Secretary  Foster 
has  pointed  out.  In  the  first,  President  McKinley  was 
not  in  favor  of  demanding  the  sovereignty  and  possession 
of  the  islands,  and  President  J.  G.  Schurman,  of  Cornell 
University,  who  was  a member  of  the  first  Commission 
sent  to  the  Philippines  by  President  McKinley,  quotes 
the  latter  as  follows: 

“In  the  protocol  to  the  treaty  I left  myself  free  not 
to  take  them ; but  in  the  end  there  was  no  alternative.” 

A month  after  the  protocol  was  signed,  Mr.  McKinley 
appointed  these  Commissioners  to  negotiate  a treaty  of 
peace  with  Spain:  W.  R.  Da}7,  C.  K.  Davis,  W.  P. 

Frye,  George  Gray  and  Whitelaw  Reid.  Between  the 
signing  of  the  protocol  and  the  giving  of  the  instructions 
to  the  Commissioners,  the  President,  Mr.  Foster  says,  had 
changed  his  attitude.  These  were  his  words  of  instruc- 
tion : 

“Without  any  original  thought  of  complete  or  even 


68 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


partial  acquisition,  the  presence  and  success  of  our  arms 
at  Manila”  (which  had  been  surrendered  the  day  after 
the  protocol  was  signed)  “impose  upon  us  obligations 
which  we  cannot  disregard.  The  march  of  events  rules 
and  overrules  human  action.”  The  Commissioners  were 
directed  to  ask  for  the  cession  of  the  island  of  Luzon,  and 
for  reciprocal  commercial  privileges  in  the  other  islands 
of  the  Spanish  group. 

The  Commissioners  held  their  first  meeting  with  the 
Spanish  representatives  on  October  1.  The  American 
Commissioners  were  undecided  as  to  what  course  they 
should  pursue,  and  asked  for  further  instructions.  Mr. 
Day  (late  Secretary  of  State)  “doubted  the  wisdom  of 
extending  American  sovereignty  over  the  Philippines, 
but  would  acquiesce  in  the  occupation  of  Luzon  as  a 
commercial  base  and  a naval  station.  Senator  Gray 
opposed  the  taking  of  any  part  of  the  territory.  The 
other  three  Commissioners  favored  a demand  for  the  ces- 
sion of  the  entire  Philippine  group.” 

On  October  26,  Secretary  Hay  cabled  the  Commission 
that  the  President  was  convinced  that,  on  political,  com- 
mercial, and  humanitarian  grounds,  the  cession  must  be 
of  the  whole  archipelago.  He  “is  deeply  sensible  of  the 
grave  responsibilities  it  will  impose,”  but  he  believes  “this 
course  will  entail  less  trouble  than  any  other,  and  besides 
will  best  subserve  the  interests  of  the  people  involved,  for 
whose  welfare  we  cannot  escape  responsibility.” 

Thus  the  third  and  last  stage  in  the  attitude  of  the 
Government  was  reached,  and  a proposition  was  submit- 
ted to  the  Spanish  Commissioners  for  the  cession  of  the 
Philippines,  and  the  payment  to  Spain  of  twenty  millions 
of  dollars.  The  treaty  of  peace  was  signed  which  con- 


J.  G.  SCHUBMAX, 

President  of  First  Philippine  Commission 


REASONS  FOR  THE  CESSION 


69 


tainecf  the  cession  of  the  entire  Philippine  group  to  the 
United  States,  and  three  reasons  were  advanced  for  re- 
quiring this  cession,  based  upon  political,  commercial  and 
moral  grounds.  Concerning  the  latter,  Mr.  Foster  says: 

“The  moral  grounds  for  the  possession  of  the  Philip- 
pines were  that  the  colonial  administration  of  Spain  had 
been  conducted  with  great  cruelty,  injustice,  and  in  dis- 
regard of  personal  rights ; that  it  would  be  inhuman  and 
morally  wrong  to  permit  Spain  to  retain  her  sovereignty ; 
that  the  weakened  power  of  that  government  would  be 
unable  to  tranquilize  the  disordered  and  lawless  conditions 
existing  in  the  islands,  to  protect  life  and  property,  and 
to  perform  the  obligations  incident  to  government;  and 
that  it  was  for  the  interest  of  the  people  of  the  Philip- 
pines in  particular,  and  mankind  in  general,  to  extend 
to  the  archipelago  the  principles  of  civil  liberty,  equality 
and  self-government,  which  form  the  basis  of  American 
institutions,  and  that  to  do  so  was  a duty  to  the  world 
which  the  United  States  could  not  rightfully  ignore.  It 
is  impossible  to  read  the  utterances  of  President  McKin- 
ley during  and  following  the  negotiations  without  being 
satisfied  that  these  latter  considerations  exercised  a con- 
trolling influence  with  him  in  determining  the  destiny  of 
the  islands.” 

The  position  of  Mr.  McKinley  in  regard  to  the  Phil- 
ippines may  be  gathered  from  a statement  which  he  made 
to  a party  of  clergymen,  a committee  from  a religious 
gathering  in  Washington,  who  called  upon  him  on  No- 
vember 21,  1899.  After  their  interview,  as  they  arose 
to  go,  the  President  detained  them  for  a moment  to  say, 
as  reported  in  The  Christian  Advocate: 

“Before  you  go  I should  like  to  say  just  a word  about 


70 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


the  Philippine  business.  I have  been  criticised  a good 
deal  about  the  Philippines,  but  I don’t  deserve  it.  The 
truth  is,  I didn’t  want  the  Philippines,  and  when  they 
came  to  us,  as  a gift  from  the  gods,  I did  not  know  what 
to  do  with  them.  When  the  Spanish  war  broke  out,  Dewey 
wyas  at  Hong  Kong,  and  I ordered  him  to  go  to  Manila, 
and  he  had  to;  because,  if  defeated,  he  had  no  place  to 
refit  on  that  side  of  the  globe,  and  if  the  Dons  were  vic- 
torious they  would  likely  cross  the  Pacific  and  ravage  our 
Oregon  and  California  coasts.  And  so  he  had  to  destroy 
the  Spanish  fleet,  and  did  it ! But  that  was  as  far  as  I 
thought  then.  When  next  I realized  that  the  Philippines 
had  dropped  into  our  lap,  I confess  that  I did  not  know 
what  to  do  with  them.  I sought  counsel  from  all  sides — 
Democrats  as  well  as  Republicans — but  got  little  help. 
I thought  first  we  would  take  only  Manila ; then  Luzon ; 
then  other  islands,  perhaps,  also.  I walked  the  floor  of 
the  White  House  night  after  night  until  midnight ; and 
I am  not  ashamed  to  tell  you,  gentlemen,  that  I went 
down  on  my  knees  and  prayed  Almighty  God  for  light 
and  guidance  more  than  one  night. 

“And  one  night  late  it  came  to  me  this  way — I don’t 
know  how  it  was,  but  it  came : ( 1 ) That  we  could  not 

give  them  back  to  Spain — that  would  be  cowardly  and 
dishonorable;  (2)  that  we  could  not  turn  them  over  to 
France  or  Germany — that  would  be  bad  business  and 
discreditable;  (3)  that  we  could  not  leave  them  to  them- 
selves— they  were  unfit  for  self-government — and  they 
would  soon  have  anarchy  and  misrule  over  there  worse 
than  Spain’s  was;  and  (4)  that  there  was  nothing  left 
for  us  to  do  but  to  take  them  all,  and  to  educate  the 
Filipinos,  and  uplift  and  civilize  and  Christianize  them, 


WELFARE  OF  THE  FILIPINOS 


71 


and,  by  God’s  grace,  do  the  very  best  we  could  by  them, 
as  our  fellow-men  for  whom  Christ  also  died.  And  then 
I went  to  bed,  and  went  to  sleep,  and  slept  soundly,  and 
the  next  morning  I sent  for  the  chief  engineer  of  the 
War  Department  (our  map  maker),  and  told  him  to  put 
the  Philippines  on  the  map  of  the  United  States”  (point- 
ing to  a large  map  on  the  wall  of  his  office)  ; “and  there 
they  are,  and  there  they  will  stay  while  I am  President !” 

At  the  McKinley  memorial  services  held  in  1901  in 
Manila,  Major  Elijah  Halford  declared  truly:  “There 
is  no  reason  for  our  being  here;  our  presence  in  these 
islands  cannot  be  justified  either  to  history  or  to  our  own 
consciences,  unless  we  are  here  for  the  sole  purpose  of 
assisting  the  Filipino  people  to  the  enjoyment  of  the 
largest  practicable  measure  of  the  liberty  we  delight  in, 
and  the  blessings  of  our  own  free  institutions,  and  to  the 
achievement  of  a better  and  purer  and  stronger  life 
than  they  could  possibly  have  known  but  for  our  coming.” 

The  Rev.  Arthur  J.  Brown,  D.D.,  who  was  in  Manila 
when  the  McKinley  memorial  service  was  held,  points  out 
in  his  instructive  book,  “The  New  Era  in  the  Philip- 
pines,” three  objects  which  Americans  may  seek  in  the 
Philippine  Islands:  (1)  National  glory;  (2)  commer- 

cial profit,  and  (3)  the  welfare  of  the  Filipinos.  On  this 
last  subject  he  says:  “The  poet  Bailey  was  right  when 

he  said: 

“ ‘There  is  but  one  worthy  quest — to  do  men  good.’ 

“In  all  their  relations  to  the  Philippine  Islands,  the 
American  Government  and  people  should  hold  themselves 
to  a self-sacrificing  sense  of  duty.  The  temptation  to 
seek  a baser  end  is  strong.  But 


72 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


“ ‘Once  to  every  man  and  nation  comes  the  moment  to  decide, 

In  the  strife  of  truth  with  falsehood,  for  the  good  or  evil 
side; 

Some  great  cause,  God’s  new  Messiah,  offering  each  the  bloom 
or  blight, 

Parts  the  goats  upon  the  left  hand,  and  the  sheep  upon  the 
right; 

And  the  choice  goes  by  forever  ’twixt  that  darkness  and  that 
light.’  ” 

President  McKinley,  on  December  2,  1898,  ordered 
the  American  Government  extended  with  despatch  over 
the  Philippine  Archipelago,  and  in  the  following  month 
appointed  Jacob  G.  Schurman,  President  of  Cornell  Uni- 
versity ; Admiral  Dewey  of  the  Navy ; General  Otis  of  the 
Army ; Charles  Denby,  ex-Minister  to  China ; and  Dean 
C.  Worcester,  of  Michigan,  a Commission  of  Conciliation 
and  Investigation.  Before  the  Commission  had  reached 
the  Philippines  the  insurrection  against  American  rule 
had  broken  out,  and  the  Commission  found  that  investi- 
gation was  easier  just  then  than  conciliation. 

The  Commission  began  its  labors  on  March  20,  1899. 
Its  effort  was  to  win  the  people  to  the  American  cause, 
and  to  that  end  the  members  labored  with  great  zeal  and 
discretion,  and  with  considerable  success.  Soon  after 
their  arrival  in  Manila  they  issued  a proclamation  which, 
while  asserting  United  States  supremacy,  assured  the 
Filipinos  that  the  liberty  of  self-government  would  be 
granted  so  far  as  compatible  with  American  rule.  The 
Commission  spent  the  summer  in  the  Philippines  and  was 
recalled  in  September  of  that  year.  Its  conclusions  were, 
in  brief : 

“That  the  United  States  could  not  then  withdraw  from 
the  Philippine  Islands ; that  the  Filipinos  were  not  pre- 


THE  TAFT  COMMISSION 


73 


pared  for  independence;  that  Aguinaldo  had  never  been 
promised  independence ; that  there  was  no  general  public 
opinion  among  the  Filipino  people,  but  that  men  of  prop- 
erty and  education,  who  alone  interested  themselves  in 
public  affairs,  favored  American  suzerainty.” 

Many  problems  of  fact,  law,  policy,  and  ethics  which 
the  Philippine  situation  involved  occupied  the  minds  of 
statesmen  in  the  United  States,  while  the  Army  in  the 
Philippines  was  putting  down  the  insurrection.  Presi- 
dent McKinley,  in  his  message  to  Congress  on  December 
5,  1899,  in  speaking  of  the  Philippine  Islands,  said : 

“As  long  as  the  insurrection  continues  the  military  arm 
must  necessarily  be  supreme.  But  there  is  no  reason  why 
steps  should  not  be  taken  from  time  to  time  to  inaugurate 
governments  essentially  popular  in  their  form  as  fast  as 
territory  is  held  and  controlled  by  our  troops.  To  this 
end  I am  considering  the  advisability  of  the  return  of 
the  Commission,  or  such  of  the  members  thereof  as  can 
be  secured,  to  aid  the  existing  authorities  and  facilitate 
this  work  throughout  the  islands.” 

To  give  effect  to  the  intention  thus  expressed  the  Pres- 
ident appointed  the  Hon.  William  H.  Taft,  of  Ohio; 
Professor  Dean  C.  Worcester,  of  Michigan;  the  Hon. 
Luke  E.  Wright,  of  Tennessee ; the  Hon.  Henry  C.  Ide, 
of  Vermont,  and  Professor  Bernard  Moses,  of  California, 
“Commissioners  to  the  Philippine  Islands  to  continue  and 
perfect  the  work  of  organizing  and  establishing  civil  gov- 
ernment already  commenced  by  the  military  authorities, 
subject  in  all  respects  to  any  laws  which  Congress  may 
hereafter  enact.” 

The  first  work  of  the  Commission,  after  a thorough 
investigation  of  the  needs  of  the  islands  and  the  proper 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


74 

legislation  to  meet  existing  needs,  was  to  organize 
provincial  governments  throughout  the  archipelago. 
The  general  provincial  law  provided  for  a provincial 
government  of  five  officers — the  governor,  the  treasurer, 
the  supervisor,  the  secretary,  and  the  fiscal  or  prosecuting 
attorney.  The  governing  board  is  called  the  provincial 
board,  and  includes  as  members  the  governor,  the  treas- 
urer, and  the  supervisor.  The  prosecuting  attorney  is 
the  legal  adviser  of  the  board  and  the  secretary  of  the 
province  is  its  secretary.  The  first  function  of  the 
provincial  government  is  to  collect,  through  the  provincial 
treasurer,  all  the  taxes,  with  few  exceptions,  belonging  to 
the  towns  or  the  province.  Its  second  and  most  important 
function  is  the  construction  of  highways  and  bridges  and 
public  buildings.  Its  third  function  is  the  supervision, 
through  the  governor  and  the  provincial  treasurer,  of 
the  municipal  officers  in  the  discharge  of  their  duties. 
Within  certain  limitations,  the  provincial  board  fixes  the 
rate  of  levy  for  provincial  taxation. 

On  July  4,  1901,  Judge  Taft,  who  had  been  President 
of  the  Civil  Commission,  was  inaugurated  Civil  Governor 
of  the  Philippine  Islands,  and  General  A.  R.  Chaffee, 
Military  Governor  under  him.  The  theory  on  w’hich  the 
American  Government,  through  its  Commission,  has  pro- 
ceeded from  the  first,  is  that  the  only  possible  method 
of  instructing  the  Filipino  people  in  methods  of  free 
institutions  and  self-government  is  to  make  the  govern- 
ment partly  of  Americans  and  partly  of  Filipinos,  giving 
the  Americans  control  for  some  time  to  come. 

The  Commission  has  been  happy  in  having  first  as  its 
secretary  and  later  as  executive  secretary  of  the  islands, 
Arthur  W.  Ferguson,  who  has  a wonderful  genius  for 


FILIPINOS  ON  THE  COMMISSION  75 


interpretation  from  English  into  Spanish  and  from 
Spanish  into  English.  Governor  Taft  says  of  him: 

“He  has  a dramatic  instinct  and  that  peculiar  knowl- 
edge of  the  two  languages  which  enables  him,  without 
the  slightest  hesitation,  to  make  a smooth,  graphic,  and 
effective  translation  of  each  speech  made  by  native  or 
American.  His  work,  which  was  incessant  night  and  day, 
was  a remarkable  exhibition  of  mental  and  physical 
vigor.” 

On  September  1,  1901,  the  Civil  Commission  as  a legis- 
lative body  was  enlarged  by  the  addition  of  three  Fili- 
pinos. Dr.  T.  H.  Pardo  de  Tavera,  Senor  Benito 
Legarda,  and  Senor  Jose  Luzuriaga.  These  gentlemen, 
the  first  two  of  them  residents  of  Manila  and  the  last  a 
resident  of  the  island  of  Negros,  had  been  most  earnest 
and  efficient  in  bringing  about  peace  in  the  islands.  Dr. 
Tavera  was  the  first  president  of  the  Federal  party,  had 
accompanied  the  Commission  on  its  trips  to  the  southern 
provinces,  and  was  most  useful  in  effective  speeches 
which  he  delivered  in  favor  of  peace  and  good  order  at 
every  provincial  meeting.  Senor  Legarda  had  been  val- 
uable in  the  extreme  to  General  Otis  and  the  American 
authorities  by  the  wisdom  of  his  suggestions,  and  the 
courage  and  earnestness  with  which  he  upheld  the  Ameri- 
can cause  as  most  beneficial  to  this  country.  Senor  Jose 
Luzuriaga  was  a member  of  the  first  government  of  the 
island  of  Negros,  organized,  while  there  was  insurrection 
rife  throughout  the  islands,  as  an  independent  govern- 
ment, under  the  supervision  of  a military  governor,  and 
was  most  active  in  preventing  the  insurrection  from  gain- 
ing any  foothold  in  that  important  island. 

Governor  Taft  resigned  in  December,  1903.  At  that 


76 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


time  these  were  the  members  of  the  Commission:  Dean 

C.  Worcester,  Luke  E.  Wright,  Henry  C.  Ide,  T.  H. 
Pardo  de  Tavera,  Benito  Legarda,  Jose  Luzuriaga  and 
James  F.  Smith,  the  latter  having  succeeded  Commis- 
sioner Wright,  was  appointed  President  of  the  Commis- 
sion, and  Commissioner  Ide,  Vice-President ; President 
Wright  was  inaugurated  Governor  of  the  Islands  on  Feb- 
ruary 1,  1904,  and  Cameron  Forbes  was  later  appointed 
a member  of  the  Commission  to  succeed  Judge  Taft.  In 
February,  1905,  Governor  Wright  received  the  title  of 
Governor-General. 


William  McKinley 


CHAPTER  VI 


FROM  MANILA  TO  DAGUPAN 


Experiences  on  a Railway — Goats,  not  Children, 
Crying — An  Interview  with  a Provincial  Governor — 

An  Address  on  Character. 

ATRIP  of  four  days  was  made  along  the  route  of 
the  Manila  and  Dagupan  Railway.  The  line  is 
English,  both  in  its  construction  and  in  the  compart- 
ments into  which  the  carriages  are  divided.  One  car  suf- 
fices to  take  all  the  first  and  second  class  passengers, 
who  are  kept  apart  by  a door.  The  rest  of  the  train  is 
made  up  of  third-class  coaches,  in  which  people  sit  as 
long  as  sitting  room  is  available,  and  then  stand  or  squat, 
according  to  circumstance  and  inclination. 

A third-class  Filipino  coach  is  a circus,  not  simply 
because  of  the  great  variety  of  colors  displayed  in  the 
dresses  of  the  passengers,  but  because  every  coach  has 
more  or  less  of  a menagerie  in  it.  When  the  train  stops — 
and  it  might  stop  almost  anywhere,  so  gentle  is  its  speed, 
an  express  train  running  fifteen  miles  an  hour! — the 
sounds  that  greet  the  passengers  are  many  and  various. 

Three  or  four  times  on  our  trip  we  thought  we  heard 
children  crying,  but  found  that  the  feet  of  a goat  having 
been  tied  together  and  the  poor  animal  carried  with  his 
feet  up,  he  was  doing  his  best  to  let  the  world  know  of 


78 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


his  humiliation.  Sometimes  a shote  carried  in  the  same 
way  lifted  up  its  voice,  but  no  one  ever  thought  a child 
was  crying  at  such  a time.  Added  to  these  cries,  human 
and  inhuman,  wert  the  shrill  crows  from  the  cocks  travel- 
ing with  their  masters  and  seemingly  having  the  time  of 
their  lives,  grateful  that  it  was  neither  Sunday  nor  feast 
day,  and,  therefore,  they  could  not  legally  be  made  to 
fight. 

The  company  owning  the  only  railroad  in  the  Philip- 
pines has  been  under  heavy  expense  in  constructing  and 
operating  it,  owing  to  the  numerous  rivers  which  it 
crosses,  which  frequently  interrupt  travel,  as  the  bridges 
were  formerly  weakened  or  swept  away.  Under  the  pres- 
ent management,  however,  not  only  are  the  conditions 
changed,  but  the  company  is  able  now  to  build  a branch 
line  which  was  begun  with  formal  ceremonies  while  we 
were  on  our  journey.  It  is  a trifle  humiliating  to  ride  on 
an  English  road  over  American  soil ; but  until  American 
capital  is  ready  to  follow  the  flag  in  sufficient  volume  to 
construct  and  operate  new  railroads,  we  should  be  thank- 
ful that  the  English  are  able  and  willing  to  do  so,  and 
that  they  do  it  so  successfully.  If  they  could  raise  the 
speed  of  one  express  train  to  twenty  or  thirty  miles  an 
hour,  a loud  chorus  of  praise  would  rise  from  thankful 
hearts.  When  Aguinaldo  was  making  his  retreat  before 
the  American  forces,  he  went  north  along  the  railroad. 
We  stopped  at  two  of  the  capitals  of  the  insurgents, 
Malolos  and  Tarlac,  and  at  two  other  towns. 

The  first  stop  was  at  Barasoain ; Malolos,  the  capital 
of  the  Philippine  forces  in  1899,  is  separated  from  this 
town  bjr  a narrow  creek,  so  that  one  scarcely  knows  at 
any  time  which  city  he  is  in.  Our  host  at  Malolos  was 


A DAY  IN  MALOLOS 


79 


Captain  W.  H.  Warren,  the  senior  inspector  of  the  Con- 
stabulary in  the  province.  We  walked  through  the  town, 
visiting  the  native  market  with  its  curious  productions, 
mostly  of  an  edible  nature,  although  some  cloth  and  hats 
and  other  articles  were  for  sale,  and  then  went  to  the 
school  and  met  the  American  teacher  having  charge  of 
a few  classes  and  showing  the  native  teachers  how  to 
instruct  their  little  brown  brothers  and  sisters.  The  walls 
of  the  great  church,  which  was  Aguinaldo’s  headquarters, 
still  remain,  but  only  the  walls  are  standing.  A more 
desolate  place  one  would  not  care  to  visit,  and  yet  this 
American  woman  is  seemingly  as  happy  as  if  she  were 
living  in  New  York  or  Boston.  The  same  is  true  of  the 
young  Methodist  missionary,  and  the  officers  of  the  Con- 
stabulary, one  of  whom  is  a nephew  of  Bishop  Potter, 
of  New  York. 

Before  luncheon  the  Governor  of  the  Province,  Pablo 
Tecson  Ocampo,  called  to  pay  his  respects  to  the  visitors. 
One  must  not  infer  that  the  Governor  is  Mr.  Ocampo; 
he  is  really  Paul  Tecson,  Ocampo  being  his  mother’s 
name.  The  Governor  was  especially  happy  in  talking 
about  his  province,  in  which,  he  says,  there  is  not  an 
American  soldier.  This  does  not  imply  indifference  to 
the  essentials  of  the  Army  or  antipathy  to  its  methods, 
but  satisfaction  that  the  Constabulary  has  done  its  work 
so  well  that  the  Military  is  not  needed.  There  are  two 
hundred  and  fifty  men  under  Captain  Warren,  who  see 
to  it  that  the  ladrones  give  the  province  a wide  berth. 
If  Captain  Warren  were  unable  at  any  time  to  cope  with 
robber  bands  coming  from  an  adjoining  province,  the 
Governor  of  the  Province  would  call  upon  the  Governor 
of  the  Philippines  to  send  soldiers  to  aid  the  Constabulary 


80 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


in  enforcing  the  law.  But  there  is  apparently  no  prob- 
ability that  such  an  order  will  be  necessary. 

Governor  Tecson  said,  in  reply  to  questions  from  the 
writer  regarding  his  province : 

“The  friars  were  here  until  1898,  and  were  then  driven 
out  because  they  were  not  teaching  the  Filipinos  the  right 
way.  It  is  true  that  the  native  priests  are  not  so  well 
educated  as  the  Spanish  were,  but  they  really  teach  better 
than  the  more  educated  Spaniards,  because  their  lives 
more  nearly  correspond  with  what  they  say.  They  do 
not  have  one  standard  for  the  people  and  another  for 
themselves.  About  eighty  per  cent,  of  the  people  in  my 
province  are  good  Roman  Catholics,  and  the  rest  are 
Protestants  or  Aglipayans.  Aglipay  was  one  of  Agui- 
naldo’s  leading  men,  who  was  deposed  by  the  Catholic 
Church,  and  has  started  an  independent  religious  move- 
ment. He  has  only  visited  two  towns  in  this  province, 
but  he  has  quite  a following,  his  chief  success  lying  in 
towns  where  the  padre,  or  priest,  and  the  people  are  not 
on  good  terms.  Generally,  I think,  the  personal  feeling 
enters  into  the  secession  from  the  Catholic  Church.  Few 
of  the  better  class  follow  Aglipay. 

“In  regard  to  Protestantism,  it  is  a matter  I have  not 
looked  into  very  closely.  In  nearly  every  town  there  are 
some  Protestants.  The  greater  part  is  what  we  would 
call  the  common  class  of  people,  but  occasionally  the  bet- 
ter class  become  Protestants,  and  more  of  this  class  be- 
come Protestants  than  Aglipayans.  Personally,  I be- 
lieve that  each  man  should  be  a member  of  the  religious 
body  with  which  his  judgment  best  accords.  The  Ameri- 
can school  teachers  are  splendid  people.  Without  excep- 
tion they  have  shown  themselves  worthy  of  the  country 


Negritos 


LOCUSTS  EXCHANGED  FOR  RICE  81 


which  has  sent  them  out.  We  have  fifteen  of  them  in  the 
province,  and  they  are  doing  excellent  work. 

“In  common  with  other  provinces,  we  have  suffered 
greatly  from  the  results  of  the  war,  and  the  low  state  of 
agriculture  which  has  followed — due  not  only  to  the  war, 
but  to  the  absence  of  rain,  and  to  our  inability  to  raise 
very  much  because  of  the  death  of  our  cattle ; what  we 
have  tried  to  raise  has  been  largely  destroyed  by  the 
locusts.  With  rice  the  principal  product  of  the  province, 
and  that  crop  almost  a total  loss,  you  can  easily  see  what 
our  people  are  suffering.  We  are  striving,  however,  to 
prevent  actual  starvation  by  offering  a bounty  for  the 
bringing  in  of  locusts.  For  every  five  pounds  of  locusts 
which  are  brought  to  the  Government  officials  one  pound 
of  rice  is  given.  On  a single  day  last  week  224,000 
pounds  of  locusts  were  turned  in.  The  following  day 

20.000,  and  the  day  after  16,000,  and  the  next  day 

1.000.  This  shows  that  the  people  are  willing  to  work, 
that  there  was  a great  benefit  received  both  in  the  destruc- 
tion of  the  locusts  and  in  the  securing  of  rice,  which  has 
had  a marked  effect  for  good  upon  them.” 

After  luncheon  the  American  visitors  returned  the  offi- 
cial call  of  the  Governor,  continuing  the  pleasant  inter- 
view of  the  morning.  It  is  interesting  to  add  that  Gov- 
ernor Tecson  was  one  of  Aguinaldo’s  most  skillful  gen- 
erals, and  at  the  same  time  displayed  a sense  of  humanity 
not  surpassed  by  many  American  officers.  He  captured 
at  one  time  an  American  officer,  and  immediately  wrote 
to  the  officer’s  father,  also  an  officer,  saying  that  the 
prisoner  was  in  his  care,  and  that  he  would  be  personally 
responsible  for  his  safety  and  for  his  exchange  as  soon 
as  opportunity  offered.  Not  long  after  this  the  General 


82 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


allowed  the  young  officer  to  go  on  parole  to  visit  his 
father,  the  American  promising  to  return  at  a certain 
time  to  await  the  result  of  the  efforts  to  bring  about  an 
exchange.  It  is  not  pleasant  to  add  that  he  never  re- 
turned. Had  the  Filipino  officer  broken  faith,  there 
would  have  been  this  comment: 

“Whoever  saw  an  honest  Filipino?” 

From  Malolos  we  went  to  San  Fernando,  where  we 
were  met  by  Captain  Thomas  Mair,  the  senior  inspector 
of  the  Constabulary,  with  headquarters  at  Bacolor. 
Nothing  that  he  could  do  to  make  the  visit  complete  was 
lacking.  The  Governor  of  this  province,  as  well  as  the 
American  officers  and  teachers,  wrere  invited  in  to  spend 
the  evening,  which  was  enlivened  by  a concert  by  a native 
band.  The  following  day  we  were  entertained  by  the 
treasurer  of  the  province  and  his  charming  wife,  from 
Newark,  N.  J.  As  we  had  many  friends  in  common,  the 
hours  sped  swiftly,  and,  after  an  American  dinner  served 
in  a Filipino  house,  we  were  driven  to  the  station  and 
took  the  train  for  Dagupan,  the  end  of  the  line. 

At  Dagupan  we  were  the  guests  of  Senor  Don  Mariano 
Nable  Jose.  Senor  Nable  has  entertained  Governor  Taft 
and  every  other  prominent  visitor  of  the  Government, 
and  he  is  an  adept  in  the  art  of  hospitality.  A pros- 
perous ship  owner,  he  was  deeply  interested  in  the  insur- 
rection led  by  his  countrymen ; but  as  soon  as  he  discov- 
ered that  the  insurgents  could  not  succeed  he  was  one 
of  the  first  to  counsel  peace,  and  no  one  in  the  archipelago 
has  accepted  the  new  conditions  more  heartily.  In  his 
home  we  learned  how  well  the  cultured  Filipino  entertains. 
Mrs.  Nable  died  two  years  ago,  leaving  five  children,  one 
of  whom,  the  eldest  sor , is  studying  in  England.  The 


AN  ADDRESS  ON  CHARACTER 


83 


three  daughters  are  well  educated,  lacking  only  English, 
and  they  were  about  to  begin  the  study  of  this  language. 

On  our  return  to  Manila  we  spent  a Sunday  in  Tarlac, 
another  one  of  Aguinaldo’s  capitals,  as  the  guests  of 
Captain  Thomson  and  his  Filipina  wife.  The  province 
of  which  Tarlac  is  the  capital  has  been  known  for  some 
time  as  the  home  of  several  ladrones,  chief  among  them 
being  Felipe  Salvador.  One  evening  while  we  were  there 
a burglary  took  place  not  far  away,  and  a Spanish 
woman  lost  2,000  pesos — about  $1,000.  Captain  Thom- 
son spent  several  hours  with  his  men  looking  for  the 
robbers,  whom  he  finally  found.  The  fact  that  the 
burglary  took  place  within  a block  of  the  municipal 
headquarters,  and  that  the  native  police  did  not  discover 
it,  shows  the  need  of  the  Constabulary,  not  only  to  pro- 
tect the  people  from  riot  leaders,  but  also  from  thieves 
who  enter  private  houses. 

When  the  trip  was  planned,  Captain  Thomson  re- 
quested the  writer  to  stop  at  Tarlac  and  give  an  address 
in  the  evening.  He  felt  sure,  he  said,  that  the  provincial 
officers,  as  well  as  the  Americans  in  the  province,  would 
be  glad  to  hear  a visitor  from  the  Homeland. 

Knowing  that  there  had  been  some  doubt  expressed  as 
to  the  wisdom  of  a clergyman  speaking  in  public  build- 
ings, I asked  Governor  Taft  if  it  would  be  agreeable  to 
him  for  me  to  accept  the  invitation.  With  that  hearty 
manner  which  is  characteristic  of  him,  he  replied: 

“By  all  means,  go  ahead.” 

The  invitation  was  then  accepted.  The  assembly  room 
of  the  Normal  school  was  well  filled,  and  an  address  on 
“Character”  was  given.  Every  American  in  the  province, 
except  two  who  were  ill,  was  present.  The  Governor  and 


84 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


all  the  provincial  officials  were  also  in  attendance,  and  a 
large  number  of  Filipinos.  The  address  was  translated 
into  Spanish  by  a Filipino  officer  of  the  Constabulary. 
The  closest  attention  was  given,  and  at  the  close  of  the 
address  the  Governor  and  a number  of  other  persons 
stopped  to  thank  the  speaker,  and  to  say  that  the  points 
of  his  address  would  be  repeated  within  a few  days 
throughout  the  province  by  those  who  had  heard  it. 


STmn;  N*  TS  IN*  BllU.ICAI.  INSTITUTES,  DaOUI'AK 


CHAPTER  VII 


PRODUCTS  OF  THE  ISLANDS 


Progress  Possible  through  Soil — Agriculture  a Science 
— Cocoanut  Industry  Remunerative — Utility  of  the 
Bamboo — Many  Beautiful  Flowers. 

THE  principal  resources  of  the  Philippine  archipel- 
ago are  in  her  soil.  The  more  attention  is  given  to 
the  development  of  her  agricultural  products,  the  quicker 
and  the  greater  will  be  her  progress.  The  chief  crops 
are  hemp,  rice,  sugar,  copra  and  coffee.  Copra  is  dried 
cocoanut  from  which  oil  is  extracted.  Other  products 
are  maize,  sweet  potatoes,  potatoes  and  cacao.  The  lat- 
ter supplies  the  place  taken  by  tea  or  coffee  among 
Americans.  Castor  oil,  betel-nut  and  areca-nut  are  also 
in  common  use  among  the  people.  Among  the  fruits 
there  may  be  mentioned:  the  banana,  mango,  orange, 
custard  apple,  chico,  lanzones,  jack-fruit,  bread-fruit, 
guava,  mangosteen,  pineapple  and  tamarind. 

To  aid  the  Filipinos  in  their  efforts  to  get  the  most 
out  of  their  land,  an  Insular  Bureau  of  Agriculture  has 
been  established.  This  Bureau  includes  in  its  work  inves- 
tigations and  the  dissemination  of  useful  information 
with  reference  to  the  agricultural  resources  of  the  islands, 
the  methods  of  cultivation  at  present  in  vogue  and  their 
improvement,  the  practicability  of  introducing  new  and 
valuable  agricultural  products,  the  introduction  of  new 


86 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


domesticated  animals  and  the  improvement  of  the  breeds 
of  domestic  animals  now  found  in  the  inlands;  and,  in 
general,  the  promotion  and  development  of  the  agricul- 
tural resources  of  the  archipelago.  The  Bureau  has 
charge  of  two  Government  farms  and  has  several  agri- 
cultural experiment  stations.  The  work  now  provided 
for  in  this  Bureau  follows  practically  the  plan  of  the 
Department  of  Agriculture  in  the  United  States,  and 
includes  the  introduction  of  valuable  seeds  and  plants ; 
distribution  of  the  same;  investigation  of  the  soils  of  the 
islands,  including  mapping  of  tobacco,  hemp,  sugar,  rice, 
cocoanut,  fruit  and  vegetable  soils  of  the  archipelago; 
investigation  of  curing  tobacco  and  originating,  through 
selection  or  breeding,  improved  varieties  of  the  staple 
agricultural  products ; carding  on  an  investigation  of 
grasses,  forage  plants  and  animal  foods,  and  devising 
methods  for  improving  the  forage  supply  of  the  islands; 
investigating  the  medicinal,  poisonous,  fiber  and  other 
economic  plants ; studying  the  history  and  habits  of  in- 
jurious and  beneficial  insects,  the  diseases  of  plants  and 
methods  of  preventing  them ; improving  existing  breeds 
of  domestic  animals,  and  investigating  of  various  lines 
of  work  involved  in  animal  industries.  The  work  is 
therefore  organized  upon  broad  lines. 

In  giving  an  outline  of  the  work  of  this  Bureau,  its 
Chief,  Professor  F.  Lamson-Scribner,  said  recently: 
“There  is  no  more  important  work,  so  far  as  it  affects 
the  well-being  of  the  people  of  the  islands,  than  that 
which  pertains  to  agriculture;  and  nothing  can  more 
effectively  bring  about  peace  and  prosperity  and  increase 
wealth  in  these  islands  than  the  encouragement  and  pro- 
motion of  the  agricultural  industries  b}T  the  introduction 


EXPERIMENTS  OF  THE  BUREAU  87 


of  modem  methods,  improved  agricultural  machinery  and 
the  enlightenment  of  the  people  concerning  the  immense 
agricultural  resources  possible  in  these  islands  under  the 
intelligent  application  of  modern  systems  of  farming  and 
fruit  growing.  No  better  soils  are  to  be  found  any- 
where in  the  world  than  exist  here,  and,  under  the  climate 
of  the  Philippines,  perpetual  growth  may  be  maintained. 
By  irrigation,  and  nearly  all  lands  are  irrigable,  with 
abundant  water  supply,  farming  lands  need  never  be 
idle,  but  one  crop  may  succeed  another  in  rapid  succes- 
sion throughout  the  entire  year. 

“The  cattle  industries  have  been  successfully  followed 
in  many  of  the  provinces  and,  although  serious  loss  has 
at  times  been  experienced  by  the  ravages  of  disease,  hap- 
pily preventive  measures  are  being  discovered  for  check- 
ing these  losses,  and  the  outlook  for  improving  the 
domestic  breeds  of  cattle  and  horses  by  introducing  better 
stock  from  other  countries  is  very  bright.  This  line  of 
work  is  receiving  the  most  careful  consideration,  and 
steps  have  already  been  taken  along  the  lines  here  indi- 
cated. The  general  cattleman  would  find  here  grand 
opportunities,  for  there  are  in  certain  sections  of  Luzon 
and  some  of  the  other  islands  immense  tracts  of  country 
especially  suited  to  grazing.  In  Nueva  Vizcaya  Province 
are  many  thousands  of  acres  covered  with  fine  nutritious 
grass  now  wholly  unoccupied.  No  better  grazing  lands 
exist  anywhere,  and  the  grass  nowT  covering  these  prairies 
and  hillsides  is  as  fine  and  tender,  and  doubtless  as  valu- 
able, as  the  choicest  New  England  hay.” 

The  Bureau  is  also  experimenting  wTith  coffee,  India 
rubber,  gutta  percha  and  other  tropical  products,  import- 
ing animals  for  the  purpose  of  improving  size,  speed, 


88 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


draft  powers  and  the  yield  of  milk,  and  building  labora- 
tories for  the  scientific  studies  of  pests  and  diseases  which 
destroy  life  throughout  the  islands.  Work  at  the  experi- 
ment station  at  Manila  was  considerably  hampered  at 
first  by  the  extraordinary  drought  of  the  past  year  and 
the  lack  of  suitable  facilities  for  irrigation.  Tomatoes, 
onions,  lettuce,  radishes,  lima  beans,  string  beans,  egg- 
plant, peppers,  okra,  sweet  corn,  peas,  sweet  potatoes  and 
beets  were,  however,  successfully  grown. 

The  cultivation  of  rice  in  the  Philippines  is  in  many 
respects  similar  to  that  practiced  in  China,  India,  Japan 
and  other  Oriental  countries,  and  there  is  a crying  need 
for  an  improved  system.  The  consumption  of  rice  in  the 
islands  greatly  exceeds  the  production,  but  it  is  hoped 
that  within  the  next  decade  the  Philippines  will  become 
one  of  the  leading  rice-producing  countries  of  the  world. 
Under  the  present  system  of  rice  cultivation  it  would  not 
be  practicable  to  use  American  implements,  because  the 
rice  is  transplanted  from  the  seed  beds,  and  the  workmen 
wait  until  it  begins  to  rain  every  day  before  they  prepare 
the  land. 

On  a trip  over  the  Manila  and  Dagupan  Railway  one 
sees  many  large  fields,  sometimes  five  hundred  acres  at 
least,  on  a level  stretch,  and  it  would  seem  as  though 
American  machinery  could  be  successfully  used  here,  and 
that  its  introduction  would  be  followed  by  wonderful 
development  of  the  country  along  this  railroad.  The 
plows  used  by  the  natives  are  too  small  to  do  effective 
work.  The  ground  is  simply  scratched,  and  the  harrow 
which  follows  is  little  better  than  the  plow  itself.  When 
a Filipino  first  saw  the  picture  of  an  American  plow,  he 
said : 


HEMP  A LEADING  INDUSTRY 


89 


“Isn’t  it  a fine  idea  to  have  two  handles  on  a plow ; 
when  one  breaks  you  can  use  the  other.” 

There  are  some  sixty-five  million  acres  of  agricultural 
land  in  the  Philippines,  only  five  millions  of  which  are 
subject  to  individual  ownership.  There  is  no  reason  why 
scientific  methods  of  culture  and  modem  agricultural  im- 
plements should  not  place  the  Philippines  at  the  head. 
The  work  of  distributing  garden  and  field  seeds  by  the 
Bureau  of  Agriculture  is  an  important  one,  and  many 
thousand  packages  of  seeds  of  such  plants  are  sent  out 
every  season.  The  United  States  Department  of  Agri- 
culture contributed  to  this  Bureau  ten  thousand  packages 
of  seeds,  containing  fifty  thousand  packets.  The  Civil 
Government,  through  this  Bureau,  has  authorized  the 
purchase  of  a large  variety  of  vegetable  seeds,  and  these 
have  been  put  up  and  distributed  with  directions  in  Span- 
ish and  English  as  to  how  they  should  be  planted.  Nearly 
all  the  varieties  of  American  vegetables  and  field  crops, 
it  is  said,  can  be  grown  in  the  islands. 

One  of  the  principal  industries  of  these  islands,  and 
one  capable  of  being  greatly  enlarged,  is  Manila  hemp. 
Sixty  per  cent,  of  the  exports  of  the  archipelago  to-day 
is  of  this  fiber,  yet  the  industry  is  still  in  its  infancy.  It 
is  estimated  by  hemp  experts  that  the  one  island  of 
Samar  is  capable  of  producing  double  the  amount  of 
hemp  now  harvested  throughout  the  islands,  were  capital 
available  for  planting  and  cultivation.  The  output  is 
not  sufficient  to  meet  the  demands,  and  here  again  the 
lack  of  proper  transportation  is  the  principal  drawback 
to  the  future  extension  of  hemp  cultivation. 

On  the  Government  farm  at  San  Ramon  there  are 
nearly  nine  thousand  cocoanut  trees,  and  of  all  the  agri- 


90 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


cultural  industries  likely  to  prove  the  most  remunerative 
for  the  labor  expended,  the  cocoanut  industry  is  the 
most  promising.  There  is  now  a large  and  rapidly  in- 
creasing demand  for  cocoanut  oil,  and  the  world’s  supply 
of  copra  finds  a ready  market.  Any  increase  of  area  in 
cocoanuts  will  surely  add  to  the  wealth  of  the  islands, 
and  there  are  many  areas,  unsuited  to  other  crops,  where 
cocoanuts  can  be  most  successfully  grown.  Copra  is  not 
the  only  product  of  the  cocoanut  tree.  There  is  scarcely 
any  part  of  it  which  does  not  possess  some  economic 
value,  or  which  is  not  used  either  locally  or  in  commerce. 

There  are  unlimited  possibilities  in  the  islands  for  the 
production  of  coffee.  Varieties  of  wild  coffee  are  found 
here  which  seem  not  to  be  inferior  to  the  better-known 
kinds  in  commerce. 

Philippine  tobacco,  long  held  in  high  esteem  in  the 
Orient,  and  Manila  cigars,  are  among  the  leading  prod- 
ucts of  the  islands,  tobacco  standing  third  among  the 
exports. 

It  would  be  hard  to  overestimate  the  advantages  of  the 
island  for  the  cultivation  of  sugar,  the  soil  being  of  such 
fertility  that  it  has  raised  a crop  in  every  one  of  the 
last  fifty  years  with  little  or  no  fertilizing. 

The  extraordinary  demand  that  has  sprung  up  within 
the  last  few  years  for  gum  chicle  can  be  satisfied,  in  part 
at  least,  by  the  Philippines.  The  tree  that  produces  gum 
chicle  is  found  in  very  many  Filipino  gardens,  where  it 
is  known  as  chico.  It  is  grown  exclusively  for  its  fruit, 
and  a planter,  it  is  said,  should  be  rewarded  with  abun- 
dant yields  of  both  fine  fruits  and  latex.  Chicle  is 
the  foundation  of  all  the  fine  chewing  gums  on  the 
market. 


WOODS  FOR  EVERY  USE 


91 


The  forest  area,  including  all  public  and  private  wood- 
lands, is  estimated  to  be  nearly  fifty  million  acres,  while 
the  timber  cut  and  placed  on  the  market  during  the  last 
3’ear  has  been  entirely  insufficient  to  meet  the  local  de- 
mand, and  millions  of  feet  of  American  pine  and  redwood 
and  of  timber  from  Borneo  and  Australia  have  been 
imported.  The  lack  of  suitable  means  for  transporting 
the  logs  is  the  main  cause  for  the  shortage  of  lumber. 
In  speaking  of  the  timber  still  available  and  awaiting  the 
capitalist  to  introduce  the  lumber  in  the  Manila  markets, 
a recent  writer  saj’s : 

“One  needs  to  live  here  for  a time,  to  push  his  way 
through  forests  where  three  or  four  trees  are  growing  on 
the  space  needed  by  one  for  its  full  development,  to  see 
trees  of  the  most  magnificent  hardwood  rising  eighty 
feet  without  a limb  and  tossing  their  topmost  twigs  a 
hundred  and  fifty’  feet  above  his  head,  before  he  gets  any 
clear  idea  of  the  wealth  of  the  forests.  Then  he  may 
wander  into  some  unpretentious  house  and  find  a circular 
table  with  a top  of  a single  piece  cut  out  of  the  most 
beautiful  wood,  five  or  even  six  feet  in  diameter,  or  per- 
haps five  feet  wide  and  twenty  long,  also  one  single 
piece.  There  are  woods  for  every  possible  use,  wood  of 
a kind  that  withstands  the  attacks  of  the  white  ant,  and 
is  used  for  the  timbers  of  houses;  wood  that  is  not  pene- 
trated by  the  marine-worm,  and  so  is  valuable  for  piling 
and  ships ; wood  that  will  not  rot  when  placed  in  the 
ground,  making  ideal  sleepers  and  posts,  and  woods  of 
exquisite  grain  and  capable  of  receiving  a high  degree 
of  polish,  from  which  wonderfully  beautiful  furniture 
can  be  made.  Then  he  will  find  that  there  are  seventeen 
varieties  of  dyewoods,  the  revenue  from  which  would  be 


92 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


sufficient  to  pay  all  the  expenses  of  the  Bureau  of  For- 
estry.” 

The  Philippines  can  produce  rubber  and  gutta  percha 
in  abundance.  The  planters  estimate  a profit  of  from 
$150  to  $200  an  acre  from  the  rubber  crop  after  the 
trees  have  reached  maturity.  It  is  practicable,  it  is  said, 
to  plant  double  the  number  of  trees  needed,  and  at  the 
end  of  three  years  cut  out  half  of  them.  The  rubber 
secured  from  these  trees  is  sufficient  to  pay  all  the  ex- 
penses up  to  that  time. 

Truck  gardening  is  an  industry  which  Americans  wuth 
small  capital  could  profitably  undertake  near  Manila,  a 
large  part  of  the  vegetables  consumed  in  and  about  the 
capital  being  imported. 

The  flowers  of  the  islands  are  many  of  them  very  beau- 
tiful. Orchids  are  found  in  the  forests.  One  of  the 
most  attractive  flowers  is  that  of  the  tree  called  ililand- 
ihlang,  from  which  the  most  delicious  perfume  is  ex- 
tracted. Instead  of  plucking  the  flowers  the  native  plucks 
the  twigs  and  all,  and  thus  eventually  destroys  the  tree. 
One  of  the  most  interesting  trees  of  the  islands  is  the 
so-called  fire  tree,  which  in  the  winter  months,  when  its 
limbs  are  almost  bare  of  leaves,  is  covered  with  intensely 
red  and  very  beautiful  blossoms. 

The  mother-of-pearl  industry,  while  not  much  devel- 
oped yet,  could  be  there  what  it  is  in  Australia  and  the 
islands  of  the  South  Pacific  Sea. 

The  nipa,  with  which  the  roofs  of  the  houses  are  con-* 
structcd,  is  a palm,  flourishing  in  marsh}r  soil  at  the 
mouths  of  rivers  near  the  sea,  or  in  muddy  regions  near 
the  coast.  The  palm  is  planted  between  the  months  of 
May  and  August.  It  has  a short  stem  from  which  shoot 


The  Rope  Industry 


THE  MOST  USEFUL  CANE 


93 


out  long  leaves,  composed  in  their  turn  of  numerous 
tapering  leaflets.  It  seldom  grows  more  than  twelve  feet 
high,  and  when  intended  for  use  in  thatching  or  for 
making  the  walls  of  a house  the  leaves  are  doubled  up 
and  sewn  together  before  they  are  dried,  so  as  to  keep 
them  in  position.  The  most  useful  cane  that  has  ever 
been  grown  in  the  world  is  the  bamboo,  and  it  is  found  in 
abundance  nearly  everywhere  in  the  Philippines.  A.  H. 
Savage  Landor,  in  “The  Gems  of  the  East,”  thus  de- 
scribed some  of  its  uses: 

“Not  only  is  this  cane  used,  either  split  or  entire,  to 
construct  every  possible  part  of  the  house — floors,  ceil- 
ings, rafters,  walls,  doors,  steps,  fences,  balusters,  and 
house-supports — but  beds  and  furniture  of  all  kinds  are 
manufactured  of  it  with  the  aid  of  bejuco  lacings.  Long 
water-jugs,  cups,  baskets,  chicken-coops,  all  kinds  of 
traps,  bridges,  rafts,  jewsharps,  and  other  musical  in- 
struments, both  string  and  wind,  aqueducts  and  water- 
pipes,  blacksmiths’  bellows,  knives,  spears,  arrow-heads, 
fishing  snares  and  hooks,  carts,  hats,  and,  in  fact,  from 
its  entirety,  from  strips  of  its  polished  skin,  or  from  its 
separated  fiber  can  be  made  well-nigh  everything  imag- 
inable. Indeed,  a country  which  possesses  abundance  of 
good  bamboo,  such  useful  vines  as  we  have  seen,  rattan 
and  others,  nipa,  as  well  as  other  kinds  of  palms  and 
serviceable  thatching  grasses,  a great  variety  of  most 
excellent  woods,  hard  and  soft,  and  a varied  climate,  in 
which  every  possible  fruit,  grain  and  vegetable  can  be 
grown,  has  no  need  to  go  anywhere  else  for  anything.” 

Coal  is  probably  spread  over  the  whole  archipelago. 
It  was  first  discovered  in  the  island  of  Cebu ; then  in 
Negros  and  Mindanao ; later  in  Luzon,  in  the  Camarines 


94 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


and  Albay,  and  in  many  other  islands.  The  wealth  thus 
appears  almost  inexhaustible.  The  coal  in  Cebu  is  of 
the  best  quality,  numerous  experiments  having  shown  it 
to  be  equal  to  Newcastle  coal.  Hernandez  found  four 
seams  running  parallel  from  north  to  south  at  a small 
depth,  and  ninety-five  miles  long.  In  1874  four  further 
seams  were  found  where  Don  Isaac  Conui  worked  the 
Caridad  and  Esperanze  collieries  in  a small  way.  In 
Albay,  one  mile  southeast  of  the  small  harbor  of  Sugod, 
is  one  of  the  most  extensive  of  the  many  seams  which 
have  been  found  in  Albay.  It  is  five  or  six  yards  deep 
and  runs  for  a long  distance.  From  this  mine,  from 
different  places  over  a distance  of  a mile  or  more,  one 
hundred  and  thirty  tons  of  coal  were  dug  and  practically 
tried  on  some  steamers.  According  to  the  reports  of  the 
steamships  Butuan  and  Corregidor,  which  experimented 
with  the  coal,  the  latter  resembles  that  of  Australia, 
with  the  advantage  of  being  less  bituminous.  This  is 
an  agreement  with  the  scientific  analyses  and  experiments 
of  the  coal  made  in  Madrid. 

Iron,  also,  has  been  found  in  many  of  the  islands.  The 
best  is  that  in  Luzon,  in  the  provinces  of  Morong,  La- 
guna, Bulacan,  Nueva  Ecija,  Pampanga  and  Camarines, 
which  compares  most  favorably  in  quality  with  that  of 
Sweden.  In  the  province  of  Bulacan  the  natives  manu- 
facture a very  primitive  iron  plowshare  and  pots  for 
cooking ; but  even  here  there  has  been  a gradual  decline. 
Copper  exists  in  several  provinces. 

It  is  probable  that  gold  occurs  in  every  part  of  the 
archipelago.  In  a small  way  it  has  been  extracted  by  the 
natives  for  many  years  in  certain  places,  particularly  in 
Luzon.  It  is  found  instratified,  and  in  creeks,  from 


BUSINESS  OPPORTUNITIES 


95 


which  the  natives  prefer  to  wash  it.  The  best  known 
sources  are  in  Camarines  Norte,  the  mountains  of  Mam- 
bulao,  Paracale  and  Labo,  and  the  northern  spurs  of  the 
Carabello  Mountains.  Alluvial  gold  is  said  to  exist 
largely  in  Nueva  Ecija,  near  the  village  of  Capan;  in 
Tayabas  the  metal  is  found  in  the  mountains  in  the 
neighborhood  of  the  village  of  Antimonan.  In  Minda- 
nao, where  gold  has  likewise  been  discovered,  it  is  believed 
to  be  present  in  particularly  profitable  quantity.  Min- 
doro and  Panay,  as  well  as  some  other  small  islands,  are 
also  places  where  the  precious  metal  has  been  found. 

At  the  beginning  of  the  seventies,  two  beds  of  galena 
were  discovered  in  Cebu,  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  vil- 
lage of  Consolacion. 

Alabaster  is  found  in  Camarines  Sur,  and  there  is  a 
beautiful  marble  at  Bohol  and  Guimaras,  near  Iloilo. 
Granite  of  excellent  quality  is  quarried  at  Mariveles. 
Rock  oil  was  found  some  years  ago  in  Cebu  and  Paragua 
and  promises  to  be  of  importance. 

Captain  F.  E.  Gi*een,  the  President  of  the  Chamber  of 
Commerce  of  Manila,  in  speaking  of  business  opportuni- 
ties, says: 

“Under  American  rule,  with  more  adequate  protection, 
just  taxation,  property  rights  respected,  importation  of 
modern  farming  implements  and  machinery,  and  with 
the  introduction  of  experimental  farms  and  new  methods, 
with  education  and  improved  sanitation  to  avoid  epidemic 
disease,  and  with  general  imports  greater  than  ever  be- 
fore, there  should  be  development  and  growth  all  over 
the  country.  New  conditions  will  create  new  demands ; 
with  this  will  come  higher  aspirations ; the  things  which 
were  formerly  regarded  as  luxuries  will  now  be  looked 


96 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


upon  as  necessities.  The  result  of  all  this  should  be  an 
unprecedented  stimulation  in  every  phase  of  native  life. 
Ambition  will  be  aroused,  and  every  energy  excited  to 
healthful  activity.”  Captain  Green  believes  that  the  first 
need  in  the  archipelago  is  foreign  labor. 


Ox  the  Upper  Pasig  River 


CHAPTER  VIII 


A DAY  ON  THE  PASIG  RIVER 


Confidence  in  the  Ladrones — An  American  Officer 
Killed  by  a Lad  of  Ten  Years — A Glimpse  of  Life  at 
a Constabulary  Post — Proud  of  his  Province — A Day 
in  a Court  Room. 

THE  superintendent  of  the  Secret  Service  of  the 
Constabulary  is  going  to  Pasig  on  official  busi- 
ness on  a river  launch  to-morrow  morning,  and  we  should 
like  the  pleasure  of  the  company  of  your  wife  and  your- 
self.” 

Armed  with  this  invitation  we  went  to  a landing  desig- 
nated, and  entered  the  Pepe,  a little  launch,  for  the  ride 
of  a dozen  miles  up  the  Pasig  River  to  a village  of  the 
same  name.  The  launch  contained  only  one  other  Ameri- 
can, Captain  Samuel  D.  Crawford.  The  other  members 
of  the  party  on  board  were  Filipinos,  perhaps  a dozen 
or  fifteen  of  them,  ranging  in  age  from  ten  or  twelve 
years  to  thirty  or  forty,  every  one  of  them  ex-insurrec- 
tos.  The  captain  believes  in  his  boys  implicitly,  and 
thinks  that  those  among  them  who  are  termed  ladrones 
were  compelled  against  their  will  to  do  evil  deeds.  In 
any  event  they  have  surrendered  and  made  a clean  breast 
of  their  misdeeds  to  the  captain,  and  are  now  enjoying 
his  confidence,  and  aiding,  by  a native  system  of  turning 


98 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


State’s  evidence,  to  punish  other  ladrones  who  were  not 
bright  enough  to  confess  their  wrong-doings. 

Among  the  captain’s  strong  followers  is  one  lad  of  ten 
years,  who  fired  the  shot  that  killed  an  American  officer 
a short  time  before.  There  are  those  who  believe  that 
under  certain  provocations,  and  these  not  necessarily 
strong  ones,  the  young  murderer  -would  not  hesitate  to 
add  to  his  crimes;  but  Captain  Crawford  lies  down  and 
sleeps  in  his  boat,  or  in  the  country,  with  as  great  con- 
fidence in  his  amigos,  or  friends,  as  if  they  were  brothers 
tried  and  true. 

Passing  under  the  Bridge  of  Spain,  the  launch  soon 
scudded  past  the  Malacanan  Palace,  the  home  of  the 
American  Governor,  and  the  charming  home  of  Dean 
Worcester,  rounding  the  little  headland  that  lies  east  of 
the  town  of  Santa  Anna,  passing  every  craft  going  up 
the  river,  and  meeting  scores  of  launches,  bancas  and 
cascos  going  down  to  Manila  laden  with  individual  prod- 
uce from  the  provinces  lying  north  of  the  city.  One 
boat  contained  stone  from  the  quarries;  one  sand  to  be 
used  in  the  city ; another,  little  packages  of  zacate,  or 
grass,  cut  by  hand  for  the  horses ; still  another,  pottery, 
and  many  carried  farm  produce.  The  course  of  the 
river  is  extremely  circuitous,  and  one  can  see  the  church 
of  Santa  Anna  from  three  points  of  view,  the  last  time 
a mile  or  more  from  where  the  first  sight  was  had.  All 
along  the  river  bank,  on  either  side,  washerwomen  were 
pounding  their  clothing  upon  the  rocks  or  beating  it 
with  their  hands.  Sometimes  men  wash  the  clothing  and, 
in  addition  to  striking  the  rocks  with  the  garment,  they 
swish  it  through  the  water,  this  taking  the  place  of  boil- 
ing. In  the  afternoon  on  our  return  many  of  the  washer- 


PROUD  OF  HIS  PROVINCE 


99 


women  were  bleaching  the  clothing  which  they  had  washed 
in  the  morning,  pouring  water  from  the  river  on  the 
garments  stretched  out  on  the  grassy  plots  above  the 
stream.  Carabaos  were  seen  at  work,  or  lolling  in  the 
streams  enjoying  respite  from  labor. 

Pasig  was  reached  about  noon  and  here  we  had  our 
first  glimpse  of  life  at  a Constabulary  post.  In  a neat 
nipa  shack,  a house  built  on  stilts,  clean  and  cool,  were 
three  American  ladies,  two  of  them  wives  of  officers  at 
the  post  and  the  third  a teacher  from  a neighboring 
province.  Several  officers  of  the  Constabulary,  as  the 
native  soldiers  are  called,  are  stationed  at  Pasig  in  charge 
of  a troop  of  ninety-four  men. 

There  were  two  hundred  and  ninety-four  soldiers  and 
ten  American  officers  in  the  province.  As  the  Presidente 
of  the  town  had  not  improved  the  square  according  to  the 
notion  of  the  American  officers,  they  decided  to  have  the 
prisoners  in  the  town  clear  the  ground  of  weeds  and 
make  the  little  park  presentable.  The  prisoners  ap- 
peared in  all  sorts  of  garments  and,  under  a sun  which 
would  have  broiled  an  American,  performed  their  tasks, 
guarded  by  a squadron  of  soldiers. 

Governor  Arturo  Dancel,  the  head  of  Rizal  Province, 
had  been  invited  to  meet  the  Americans.  Unable  to 
speak  English,  he  conversed  fluently  with  the  officers  in 
Spanish,  and  took  the  visitors  through  the  rooms  near 
his  office,  which  contained  scores  of  articles  prepared  for 
the  World’s  Fair  at  St.  Louis.  Here  were  hammocks  and 
tables,  boats,  hats  and  bedsteads,  pottery  and  mats,  and 
a great  variety  of  other  useful  and  ornamental  articles 
from  other  provinces.  The  Governor  is  justly  proud  of 
what  his  province  is  accomplishing,  especially  in  the  way 


100 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


of  education.  He  did  not  say  much  about  the  uprising 
at  Pasig  which  occurred  on  the  last  Christmas  eve, 
when  three  hundred  natives  attacked  a little  company 
of  eight  Americans  while  the  soldiers  of  the  Constabu- 
lary were  off  in  a church  procession.  The  apparent  ob- 
ject of  the  ladrones,  who  had  taken  note  of  this  feast  of 
the  church,  was  to  kill  every  foreigner  in  the  town ; but, 
with  the  odds  overwhelmingly  against  them,  the  little 
company  stood  its  ground  and  finally  drove  the  natives 
out  of  the  village  before  the  soldiers  returned. 

The  superintendent  of  the  schools  in  Rizal  Province, 
B.  G.  Bleasdale,  spoke  enthusiastically  of  the  work  of  his 
teachers  in  the  province  in  their  nineteen  schools,  one 
high  school,  and  an  elementary  school  in  every  town  but 
two.  There  are  ten  towns  where  native  teachers  only  are 
employed.  There  are  sixteen  American  teachers  who  are 
doing  splendid  work,  not  alone  in  teaching  school,  but 
in  teaching  the  natives  how  to  teach  school.  Evening 
schools  in  Rizal  Province,  as  in  others,  are  a delightful 
feature  of  the  educational  system.  No  one  under  four- 
teen is  allowed  in  the  school,  but  there  is  no  maximum 
age  limit.  The  young  men  are  enthusiastic,  having 
Civil  Service  examinations  for  positions  as  clerks  or 
teachers  in  view,  and  rapid  progress  is  made,  especially 
by  the  younger  people. 

It  was  interesting  to  spend  an  hour  in  the  court  room, 
where  three  languages  were  used,  English,  Tagalog  and 
Spanish.  The  official  court  language  is  Spanish;  but 
one  of  the  witnesses  against  two  prisoners,  whom  Captain 
Crawford’s  men  had  arrested,  spoke  English,  and  the 
witnesses  and  prisoners  spoke  Tagalog.  The  judge  was 
a Mestizo,  partly  Filipino  and  partly  Chinese.  The 


COURT  PROCEEDINGS  UNUSUAL  101 


prosecuting  attorney  was  a Filipino,  as  was  also  the  at- 
torney for  the  defense,  ex-Governor  Flores.  A witness 
dressed  in  white,  barefooted,  with  his  shirt  outside  his 
ti'ousers,  was  seated  before  the  judge,  testifying  in  Taga- 
log.  The  question  and  answer  were  translated  by  the 
judge,  and  written  on  the  typewriter  by  the  clerk  of  the 
court.  As  the  witness  left  the  chair  he  was  required  to 
sign  his  testimony  in  a language  which  he  could  not  at 
all  understand;  but  it  is  safe  to  infer  that  the  translation 
given  by  the  judge  was  correct,  or  the  attorneys  would 
have  interposed  an  objection.  One  prisoner,  a young 
fellow  of  twenty-three  or  twenty-four,  wearing  only  an 
undershirt  and  blue  calico  trousers  tied  about  his  waist 
with  a piece  of  small  rope,  looked  anything  but  the 
ladrone  which  he  was  accused  of  being ; but  so  strong  a 
case  had  Captain  Crawford  worked  up,  and  so  clear  was 
the  evidence  presented,  that  each  of  the  prisoners  re- 
ceived a sentence  of  eight  years  in  prison  and  was  or- 
dered to  pay  a fine  of  2,000  pesos,  an  amount  of  money 
which  probably  neither  of  them  ever  saw  or  will  see. 

Captain  Crawford  was  enthusiastic  over  “our  people.” 
He  sees  great  possibilities  in  the  future  of  the  Filipinos. 
He  is  also  a great  lover  of  nature,  and  apparently  knows 
the  name  of  every  tree  and  shrub  and  flower  that  grows 
along  the  Pasig ; but  his  chief  delight  is  in  the  province 
of  Batangas.  While  every  inch  a soldier,  he  has  the 
heart  of  a woman,  and  not  a Filipina  woman  either;  for, 
according  to  his  testimony  and  that  of  many  of  the 
army  officers,  the  worst  foe  that  the  American  soldier 
met  was  a Filipina,  who  could  handle  a bolo  as  readily 
as  her  husband,  and  who  was  in  every  case  far  more 
dangerous  than  a man  as  a spy.  There  are  many  men 


102 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


in  the  Philippines,  like  Captain  Crawford,  who  are  doing 
their  best  to  solve  the  problems  now  before  the  American 
people,  and  are  doing  it  well. 

“Do  you  know  Henry  T.  McEwan,  of  Amsterdam, 
New  York?”  was  Captain  Crawford’s  parting  question. 

“Yes ; and  no  nobler  American  lives,”  was  the  reply. 

“Give  Henry  my  love,”  added  the  captain  as  the  gang- 
plank was  pulled  in. 


CHAPTER  IX 


FILIPINO  CHARACTERISTICS 


Generalizing  from  Special  Cases — Human  Nature  not 
a Matter  of  Latitude — Superstition  at  Home  and 
Abroad — Sleeping  a Solemn  Matter — Sworn  Enemies 
of  Sanitation. 

WHEN  one  goes  to  the  Philippines  to  study  the 
characteristics  of  the  people  who  lived  for  more 
than  three  hundred  years  under  Spanish  rule,  he  is  in 
danger  of  laying  aside  his  knowledge  of  human  nature 
and  taking  up  the  study  of  the  little  brown  people  as 
though  there  was  no  record  to  the  effect  that  God  had 
made  of  one  blood  all  nations  of  men.  If  a Filipino  is 
kind  to  him,  he  expresses  surprise  and  notes  in  his  mem- 
orandum book  the  remarkable  fact  that  gentleness  is  a 
prevailing  characteristic  of  the  natives ; he  had  expected 
dark-skinned  men  to  be  treacherous  and  lure  him  on  to 
his  death.  If  he  is  deceived  by  a Filipino,  out  comes  the 
note-book  and  a memorandum  is  made  to  the  effect  that 
deceitfulness  is  prevalent  throughout  the  island.  As  he 
walks  through  the  corridors  of  the  hotel  the  muchacho, 
as  the  servant  is  called,  rises  and  bows.  This  entry  is 
then  made:  “The  Filipinos  are  exceedingly  respectful.” 
He  goes  out  to  ride  in  a carromata  and  his  cochero  nearly 
runs  down  a native  woman  carrying  a huge  bundle  on 
her  head.  Immediately  an  impression  for  future  guid- 


101 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


ance  is  recorded  to  this  effect:  “The  Filipinos  are  rude 
and  lacking  in  the  common  elements  of  courtesy  and  re- 
spect.” 

Before  putting  such  impressions  in  a book,  one  needs 
to  recall  a few  experiences  and  observations  in  his  own 
land.  It  is  true  that  Filipinos  lie — some  of  them;  but 
it  must  be  admitted  that  truthfulness  still  needs  to  be 
inculcated  in  some  American  homes.  A }roung  Filipina 
attending  a Normal  school  in  Manila,  and  a resident  of 
that  city,  wished  an  American  friend  to  say  that  the 
girl  lived  in  one  of  the  provinces,  as  it  would  be  to  her 
advantage  to  be  known  as  a student  from  out  of  town. 
This  was  wholly  wrong,  but  it  did  not  seem  so  to  the 
native,  because  she  would  derive  benefit  from  it.  But 
there  is  in  New  York  a clergyman  who  has  been  asked 
repeatedly,  by  members  of  his  congregation,  to  sign  cer- 
tificates stating  that  Charlie  or  Mary  was  fourteen  years 
old,  when  the  minister  and  the  mother  and  the  child  knew 
that  only  twelve  birthdays  had  been  celebrated.  This 
was  wholly  wrong;  but  it  did  not  seem  so  to  the  mother, 
because  she  needed  the  money  which  the  child  would  earn 
if  the  New  York  Board  of  Health  was  assured  that  he 
was  fourteen  years  old. 

A little  boy  tried  to  sell  me  a “swagger  stick”  for  a 
dollar.  Before  he  finished  his  plea  he  was  willing  to  take 
half  that  price  for  it.  It  would  not  be  difficult  to  recall 
an  experience  in  America  where  the  seller  of  an  article 
was  willing  to  take  fifty  per  cent,  less  than  the  marked 
price  in  order  to  make  a bargain. 

Much  is  said  by  those  who  have  not  been  long  in  the 
Philippines  about  native  superstition,  and  undoubtedly 
all  that  is  said  has  more  or  less  foundation.  But  in 


SOLEMNITY  OF  SLEEP 


105 


another  part  of  the  world,  over  which  also  the  American 
flag  floats,  the  Filipinos  could  learn  something  concern- 
ing moving  on  Friday  or  the  thirteenth  of  the  month,  or 
seeing  the  new  moon  over  the  left  shoulder.  There  are 
too  many  brick  houses  with  glass  windows  in  America 
and  England  and  other  countries  far  from  the  Philip- 
pines to  warrant  the  injudicious  flinging  of  cobblestones 
against  the  bamboo  shacks  along  the  Pasig  River.  There- 
fore, without  instituting  further  comparison  or  implying 
that  all  the  virtue  in  the  world  is  on  one  side  of  the 
sea,  it  may  be  interesting  to  note  some  of  the  charac- 
teristics which  are  observed  in  the  Philippines,  with 
the  explanation  that  many  of  them  could  doubtless  be 
duplicated  between  the  White  Mountains  and  the  Golden 
Gate. 

It  is  well  to  pay  the  cochero  who  drives  you  about  the 
city  the  exact  price  for  which  his  card  calls.  If  the  bill 
is  fifty  cents,  and  you  hand  him  that  amount,  he  will 
smile  and  drive  away;  but  if  in  a burst  of  generosity, 
or  in  ignorance  of  the  amount  due,  the  passenger  hands 
sixt}r  cents  to  the  driver,  he  will  make  a long  face,  and, 
with  an  expression  that  would  break  a heart  of  stone, 
he  will  ask  for  a “media  peseta”  more — an  additional  ten 
cents. 

Sleeping,  with  the  natives,  is  a solemn  matter.  In 
the  hottest  nights  they  close  their  windows  to  keep  out 
the  night  air  or  the  evil  spirits,  whichever  way  one  views 
it.  When  a person  is  sick,  the  windows  are  closed  as 
tightly  as  possible  for  the  same  reason.  It  is  said  that 
the  Filipino  thinks  that  during  sleep  the  soul  is  absent 
from  the  body,  and  that  if  slumber  were  suddenly  ar- 
rested, the  soul  mierht  not  have  time  to  return. 


106 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


“If  a question  be  suddenly  put  to  a native,”  it  is  said, 
“he  apparently  loses  his  presence  of  mind,  and  gives  a 
reply  most  convenient  to  himself,  to  save  himself  from 
trouble,  punishment  or  reproach.  It  is  a matter  of  per- 
fect indifference  to  him  whether  the  reply  be  true  or  not. 
Then  as  the  investigation  proceeds,  he  will  amend  one 
statement  after  another,  until  finally  he  has  practically 
admitted  his  first  explanations  to  be  false.  As  this  is 
one  of  the  most  remarkable  characteristics  of  the  natives 
of  both  sexes  in  all  spheres  of  life,  I have  repeatedly 
discussed  it  with  the  priests,  several  of  whom  have  assured 
me  that  the  habit  prevailed  even  in  the  confessional.” 

Here  one  might  substitute  another  nationality  for  that 
of  the  Filipinos  without  being  unjust  or  untruthful.  As 
a matter  of  fact,  the  European  or  American  traveling 
in  the  Philippines  must  necessarily  come  into  contact  with 
Filipinos  from  the  humbler  walks  of  life.  It  would  not 
be  just  to  any  other  country  to  judge  its  better  class  of 
citizens  by  those  who  drive  cabs,  or  black  shoes,  or,  re- 
gardless of  sex  or  age,  bid  you  “step  lively”  as  you  leave 
the  trolley  car. 

The  best  point  of  view  from  which  to  see  the  Filipino 
should  be  that  of  the  native  himself.  Dr.  Ramon  Lala, 
an  educated  Tagalo,  has  said: 

“The  first  thing  that  in  the  native  character  impresses 
the  traveler  is  his  impassive  demeanor  and  imperturbable 
bearing.  He  is  a born  stoic,  a fatalist  by  nature. 
Europeans  often  seem  to  notice  in  him  what  they  deem  a 
lack  of  sympathy  for  the  misfortunes  of  others;  but  it 
is  not  this  so  much  as  resignation  to  the  inevitable.  In- 
comprehensible inconsistencies  obtain  in  neai’ly  every  na- 
tive. Students  of  character  may,  therefore,  study  the 


AMBITIOUS  AND  FOND  OF  GLITTER  107 


Filipino  for  years  and  yet  at  last  have  no  definite  impres- 
sion of  his  mental  or  moral  status.  I myself,  with  all 
the  inherited  feelings,  tastes  and  tendencies  of  my  coun- 
trymen— modified  and  transmuted,  happily — have  stood 
aghast  or  amused  at  some  hitherto  unknown  character- 
istic suddenly  manifesting  itself  in  an  intimate  acquaint- 
ance. Though  calm,  the  native  is  secretive,  but  often 
loquacious.  He  is  naturally  curious  and  inquisitive,  but 
always  polite— especially  to  his  superiors.  He  is  pas- 
sionate and  cruel  to  his  foes.  He  is  very  fond  of  his 
children,  who  are,  as  a rule,  respectful  and  well  behaved. 
The  noisy  little  hoodlums  of  European  and  American 
cities  are  utterly  unknown.  He  venerates  and  cares  for 
the  old.  His  guests  are  always  welcome.  He  is  rarely 
humorous  and  seldom  witty.  He  is  sober,  patient  and 
always  clean.  He  is  superstitious  and  credulous.  He  is 
ambitious  socially  and  fond  of  pomp  and  glitter.” 

The  Filipinos  are  models  in  personal  cleanliness,  but 
they  have  not  learned  the  art  of  sanitary  and  hygienic 
cleanliness.  The  humblest  hombre,  as  the  workman  is 
called,  will  jump  into  the  river  for  his  morning  bath, 
wearing  the  clothes  in  which  he  is  to  work  all  day.  As 
one  goes  along  the  river  he  sees  scores  of  women  bathing, 
their  bathing-suits  being  often  their  regular  clothing 
for  the  day.  As  they  wear  neither  shoes  nor  stockings, 
their  health  does  not  suffer;  for  their  clothing,  which  is 
not  cumbersome,  rapidly  dries.  The  mother  of  a family 
on  a casco  may  be  seen  fully  dressed  standing  on  the 
footbridge  to  wash  her  breakfast  dishes  in  the  dirty 
water  of  the  river  through  which  the  boat  is  passing, 
and  then  using  the  plate  as  a dipper  to  pour  water  over 
her  body.  Her  breakfast  dishes  are  washed  and  her 


108 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


morning  bath  is  taken,  all  in  public,  but  one  wonders 
how  many  germs  were  absorbed  by  the  process. 

Filipinos  of  every  grade  are  sworn  enemies  of  sanita- 
tion. The  health  authorities  get  a little  co-operation 
from  the  leading  men  of  a town,  but  none  from  those  in 
humbler  walks  of  life.  “God  wills  it” ; this  sentiment 
determines  their  actions  when  they  are  ill.  A man  thinks 
that  he  will  get  well  or  die  regardless  of  any  effort 
which  he  or  others  may  put  forth;  and  he  generally  dies 
if  the  disease  is  at  all  severe.  It  is  a marvel,  to  one 
accustomed  to  Eastern  Avays,  to  see  how  Americans  or 
natives  can  live  in  some  villages  throughout  the  prov- 
inces. In  Manila  and  other  cities  of  prominence  the 
Board  of  Health  is  rigid  in  dealing  writh  disease;  but  the 
officials  in  some  toAvns  are  alarmingly  lax  concerning  the 
sanitary  condition  of  their  pueblos.  These  defects  and 
others  will  be  remedied,  however,  when  American  ideas 
are  disseminated. 

It  is  well  ever  to  keep  in  mind  that  one  must  not 
hurry'  too  much  those  who  have  lived  long  in  the  tropics. 
If  he  is  inclined  to  do  so  and  persists  in  his  inclination, 
he  may  find  these  words  true : 

“It  is  not  good  for  the  Christian’s  health  to  hustle  the  Aryan  brown ; 

For  the  Christian  riles,  and  the  Aryan  smiles,  and  he  weareth  the 
Christian  down. 

And  the  end  of  the  fight  is  a tombstone  white  with  the  name  of 
the  late  deceased, 

And  the  epitaph  drear:  ‘A  fool  lies  here  who  tried  to  hustle  the 
East.’  ” 


The  contrast  bettveen  the  Chinaman  and  the  Filipino 
comes  out  strongly  in  Manila.  The  Chinaman  has  his 


Presbyterian  Clergyjian  in  a Caromatta 
Dr.  Hall  Distributing  Tracts  Barbara,  the  Belle  of  the  Transport 

The  Author  Entering  a Caratella 


KINDNESS  AND  JUSTICE  NEEDED  109 


own  way  of  doing  things,  and  nothing  can  move  him 
from  them.  The  Filipino,  on  the  other  hand,  has  no 
idea  except  to  please.  He  will  do  wrhat  he  thinks  you 
wish  him  to  do,  whether  it  seems  to  him  right  or  wrong. 

What  the  Filipino  needs  to  see  in  Americans  is  a spirit 
of  kindness  and  justice.  When  these  characteristics 
shine  out  in  the  life  of  the  white  man,  they  will  be  an- 
swered by  similar  ones  from  the  brown  man;  and  the 
Filipino  and  the  American  will  find  in  each  other  the  best 
that  is  in  both. 


CHAPTER  X 


WATERFALLS  AND  RAPIDS 


Plenty  of  Time  in  the  Orient — Transport  Friends 
Visited — Calling  on  a Padre — Rival  Attractions  near 
Together — The  Pagsanjan  Canon — The  Falls  of  the 
Botocan — The  Best  Time  to  See  the  Waterfalls. 

HE  ride  from  Manila  to  Santa  Cruz  occupies  the 


better  part  of  a day.  The  sailing  hour  is 
7 a.m.  Experience  shows  that  the  advertised  hour  and 
the  sailing  hour  are  an  hour  apart  as  a rule.  But  the 
certain  probability  that  one  will  have  to  wait  an  hour 
or  more — we  waited  three  hours  one  day — does  not  keep 
the  traveler  from  arising  out  of  the  midst  of  his 
beauty  sleep,  eating  a specially  prepared  breakfast 
served  in  his  room  by  the  Chino  boy,  and  driving  pell- 
mell  to  the  landing  before  the  advertised  hour.  It  is 
pleasant  to  sit  on  the  steamer  on  the  Pasig  River  and 
watch  the  cargo  stowed  away  in  the  little  boat  which  is 
to  carry  the  necessaries  of  life  to  American  soldiers  sta- 
tioned in  the  posts  around  the  bay.  Not  far  away  Fil- 
ipino boys  are  giving  their  horses  and  themselves  a 
morning  bath.  Riding  into  the  river  until  only  the  heads 
of  the  horses  are  visible,  the  boys  dismount  and  wash  the 
horses  thoroughly. 

Just  above  the  town  of  Pasig,  a dozen  miles  from  the 
city,  the  boat  turned  from  the  river  into  the  Laguna  de 


CALLING  ON  A NATIVE  PRIEST  111 


Bay,  as  the  lake  is  called,  and  for  a couple  of  hours 
sailed  along  the  southern  shore  until  we  reached  Binan. 
Here  we  were  met  by  Captain  A.  L.  Dade  of  the  Thir- 
teenth Cavalry,  who,  with  his  family,  were  fellow-pas- 
sengers on  the  Logan.  The  steamer,  small  as  it  was, 
could  not  go  near  shore,  and  large  bancas  came  out  to 
meet  us.  These  took  us  to  the  bamboo  pier  built  out  far 
into  the  water.  We  were  told  that  there  was  no  danger, 
that  any  one  was  safe  to  walk  on  it ; but  I confess  the 
pier  did  not  appear  to  warrant  the  statements  made. 
The  trip  in  an  army  wagon  from  Binan  to  Santa  Rosa 
was  novel.  We  rode  through  the  quaint  streets  and 
soon  entered  the  rice  paddies  and  saw  the  devastation 
made  by  the  locusts. 

Santa  Rosa  is  one  of  the  cleanest  towns  and,  therefore, 
one  of  the  most  healthy  towns  that  we  visited.  Like 
every  other  Philippine  town,  it  has  its  square  with  the 
large  church  on  one  side,  houses  built  around  the  other 
three  sides,  and  the  band-stand  in  the  center.  We  were 
taken  to  call  on  the  padre  who  lives  in  the  convent,  as 
the  parish  house  is  called.  The  priest,  who  was  extremely 
cordial  in  his  reception,  expressed  a desire  to  show  us 
the  church.  In  doing  so  he  took  us  through  the  treasure 
rooms,  showing  the  costly  vestments,  the  chalice  of  gold 
studded  with  gems,  and  other  symbols  of  worship. 

A ride  of  a dozen  miles  the  next  morning  carried  us 
to  Calamba,  where  other  Logan  passengers  were  met,  and 
then  a ride  of  two  or  three  hours  on  a native  steamer 
brought  us,  well-nigh  exhausted,  to  Santa  Cruz.  At 
Calamba,  Los  Banos  and  other  ports  of  call  we  observed 
a new  way  of  boarding  steamers.  Huge  bancas,  each 
manned  by  a dozen  natives  with  poles,  would  be  pushed 


112 


IN  THE  PHILimNES 


out  toward  the  incoming  steamer,  and  with  a reckless 
disregard  of  the  safety  of  their  passengers  or  the  rights 
of  their  competitors,  the  polers  would  ram  their  boats 
against  the  steamer’s  side  while  it  was  still  under  good 
headway.  A quick  transfer  of  the  passengers  and  their 
effects  was  made,  and  then  a race  would  start  for  the 
shore.  Usually  the  best  of  feeling  prevailed,  but  now 
and  then  a Filipino  got  “hot  in  his  head,”  to  use  their 
expressive  term,  and  at  least  one  murder  was  averted  by 
the  presence  of  an  officer. 

Calling  one  evening  in  Santa  Cruz  on  Governor 
Cailles,  the  head  of  the  government  in  the  Province  of 
Laguna,  with  a physician  from  California,  the  latter 
said : 

“My  experience  with  Spanish  people  on  the  Pacific 
coast  has  taught  me  how  necessary  it  is  to  be  careful  of 
praising  anything  that  belongs  to  a host.  Now,  if  I 
should  compliment  the  Governor  on  those  deer  horns 
nailed  to  that  pillar”  (motioning  toward  them  with  his 
thumb)  “I  would  have  to  take  a pair  home  or  give 
offense  to  our  new  friend.” 

The  conversation  was  in  English,  but  even  as  the  doc- 
tor spoke  several  sets  of  horns  were  being  torn  from  the 
pillar — the  thumb  motion  was  understood  by  the  Gov- 
ernor. In  vain  protests  were  made;  one  pair  of  horns 
was  taken  to  San  Francisco  and  two  to  New  York.  A 
rifle  was  proudly  exhibited  by  the  host,  who  explained 
that  a hundred  deer  had  fallen  under  its  flash.  Nothing 
was  said  about  its  record  with  the  soldiers  in  khaki ; 
Cailles  was  one  of  the  most  stubborn  insurgent  generals 
during  the  revolution  and  nearly  the  last  one  to  lay  down 
his  arms. 


Paosanjan  Canon- 


TWO  EXCURSION  PARTIES 


113 


Early  one  morning  two  parties  started  from  Santa 
Cruz  on  the  Laguna  de  Bay  to  visit  rival  attractions. 
Mrs.  Devins  and  three  friends  rode  through  the  Pag- 
sanjan  Canon,  five  or  six  miles  to  the  south,  while  the 
writer  and  two  others  set  out  on  a horseback  ride  to 
Botocan  Falls,  twenty  miles  distant. 

Members  of  each  party  are  confident  that  they  had  the 
better  excursion.  The  town  of  Pagsanjan  is  about 
three-quarters  of  an  hour  from  Santa  Cruz,  at  the  foot 
of  a range  of  mountains  through  one  of  whose  gorges 
the  river  flows ; and  the  party,  each  member  in  a separate 
tree  trunk  or  banca,  started  into  the  mountain  gorge. 
The  experience  is  said  to  be  worse  than  that  of  a novice 
riding  a bicycle.  The  banks  of  the  river  are  fringed 
with  high  cocoanut  trees.  In  “Yesterdays  in  the  Phil- 
ippines” Mr.  Stevens  describes  the  trip  which  he  made 
a few  years  ago.  After  speaking  of  the  entrance  of  the 
joys  to  which  reference  has  just  been  made,  he  says: 

“Then  came  the  first  rapids,  with  backgrounds  of  rich 
slopes  showing  heavy  growths  of  hemp  and  cocoa  palm. 
Another  short  paddle  and  the  second  set  of  rapids  was 
passed  on  foot.  A clear  blue  lane  of  water  then  stretched 
out  in  front  of  us,  and  reached  squarely  into  the  moun- 
tain fastnesses  through  a huge  rift  where  almost  perpen- 
dicular walls  were  artistically  draped  with  rich  foliage 
that  concealed  birds  of  many  colors,  a few  chattering 
monkeys,  and  many  hanging  creepers.  Again  it  seemed 
like  a Norwegian  fjord  or  the  Via  Mala,  but  here, 
instead  of  bare  rocks,  were  deeply  verdured  ones.  Above, 
the  blue  sky  showed  in  a narrow,  irregular  line ; below, 
the  absolutely  clear  water  reflected  the  heavens ; the  cliff  s 
rose  a thousand  feet,  the  water  was  five  hundred  feet  deep, 


Ill 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


the  birds  sang,  the  creepers  hung,  the  water  dripped, 
and  we  seemed  to  float  through  a sort  of  El  Dorado,  a 
visionary  and  unreal  Paradise. 

“At  last  we  glided  in  through  a specially  narrow  lane, 
not  more  than  fifty  feet  wide;  a holy  twilight  prevailed; 
the  cliffs  seemed  to  hold  up  the  few  fleecy  clouds  that 
floated  far  over  our  head,  and  we  landed  on  a little  jut- 
ting point  for  bathing  and  refreshments.  It  seemed  as 
if  we  were  diving  into  the  river  Lethe  or  being  introduced 
into  the  boudoir  of  Nature  herself.  In  an  hour  we 
pushed  on,  passed  up  by  three  more  rapids,  and  halted 
at  last  at  the  foot  of  a bridal  veil  waterfall  that  charmed 
the  eye  with  its  beauty,  cooled  the  air  with  its  mists,  and 
set  off  the  green  foliage  with  its  white  purity.  Here  we 
lunched  and  drank  in  the  beauties  of  the  scenery.  The 
return  was  a repetition  of  the  advance,  except  that  we 
shot  one  or  two  of  the  rapids  and  that  the  banca  holding 
the  boy  and  the  provisions  upset  in  a critical  place, 
wetting  the  crackers  that  were  labelled  ‘Keep  dry.’  We 
got  back  to  our  house  by  early  afternoon  and  all  agreed 
that  an  inimitable,  unexcelled,  wouldn’t-have-missed-it- 
for-the-world  excursion  had  passed  into  history.” 

Mrs.  Devins  says  that  that  description  is  very  satis- 
factory, except  that  her  banca  shot  all  the  rapids,  and 
she  thinks  the  height  of  the  gorge  could  be  lessened  a 
few  hundred  feet,  and  also  the  depth  of  the  water;  the 
beauties  of  the  scenery  could  stand  a few  more  descrip- 
tive adjectives,  she  thinks,  than  Mr.  Stevens  has  given. 
Loyal  as  she  is  to  the  Homeland,  she  does  not  believe  that 
many  places  even  among  the  Rockies  greatly  exceed  the 
beauty  of  the  Canon  of  the  Pagsanjan. 

The  ride  to  the  falls  of  the  Botocan  River  was  mostly 


A DESERTED  VILLAGE 


115 


over  a trail  leading  up  the  mountain  side  a thousand  feet 
or  more,  over  rocks  and  through  defiles  that  taxed  even  the 
sure-footed  ponies  which  we  rode.  While  the  canon  may 
be  all  that  Mr.  Stevens  and  others  say,  certainly  the 
view  from  the  mountain  ridge  was  beautiful  every  mile  of 
the  way.  A turn  in  the  road  gave  one  a glimpse  of  the 
lake  twenty-five  miles  or  more  in  extent ; another  emi- 
nence gained  showed  cocoanut  groves  stretching  from  the 
lake  to  the  mountain  side  and  covering  hundreds  of  acres. 
It  is  said  that  no  greater  number  of  cocoanut  palms  is 
visible  from  any  part  of  the  archipelago.  Two  or  three 
cities  nestling  under  the  mountain  slope  invited  us  to 
turn  aside  from  our  trail,  as  the  day  grew  warmer,  but 
Botocan  was  our  goal. 

Shortly  after  noon  we  reached  Luisania.  A more 
deserted-looking  town  I never  saw.  The  abandoned 
farms  of  the  Berkshire  Hills  in  Massachusetts  do  not  seem 
more  completely  dreary.  While  there  were  houses  on  one 
or  two  streets  running  out  from  the  square,  no  person 
was  seen  until  we  reached  the  buildings,  when  suddenly 
in  every  window  from  five  to  seven  persons,  mostly 
women  and  children,  were  seen.  Toward  nightfall  the 
absence  of  the  men  was  explained ; they  had  been  to  a 
cock-fight  and  a fiesta  in  the  neighboring  town. 

At  the  home  of  the  only  European  family,  the  members 
of  our  party  had  a Spanish  dinner,  and  then  pushed  on 
to  the  falls,  two  or  three  miles  to  the  south.  When 
Governor  and  Mrs.  Taft  went  to  see  the  falls  in  1902 
they  were  carried  up  the  mountain  side  in  large  chairs 
by  the  natives.  Foreman,  in  his  work  on  the  Philippines, 
estimates  the  height  of  the  falls  at  six  hundred  feet. 
Foreman  was  not  an  engineer.  The  exact  height,  as 


116 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


given  to  us  by  the  Government  engineer,  is  two  hundred 
feet.  The  width  is  about  sixty  feet.  While  it  is  not  a 
Niagara,  it  is  a fine  waterfall,  even  at  low  water,  as  we 
saw  it. 

“The  best  time  to  see  the  waterfall  here,”  said  the 
engineer,  “is  when  the  roads  are  so  bad  you  cannot  get 
here.” 

The  river  is  so  rapid  that  the  water  soon  runs  down 
to  the  lake.  It  is  expected  that  within  a short  time  a 
report  will  be  completed  showing  that  it  is  possible  to 
send  the  power  of  the  falls  to  Manila,  seventy-five  miles 
distant.  The  report  may  advocate  the  damming  of  the 
river  above  the  falls  to  retain  the  water,  which  will  then 
be  carried  along  the  mountain  crest  until  a point  is 
reached  where  it  can  be  dropped  eight  hundred  feet. 
This  will  destroy  the  present  falls,  but  beauty  must 
give  place  to  utility’-. 

Starting  from  Luisania  at  five  o’clock,  we  reached 
Santa  Cruz  at  ten-thirty,  without  being  disturbed.  It 
was  a moonlight  night,  but  the  travelers  were  in  a coun- 
try recently  in  insurrection  and  containing  at  that  time 
man}’  ladrones  or  robbers.  As  we  learned  subsequently, 
a marauding  band  entered  a town  a few  miles  from  our 
trail  while  we  were  on  the  road,  carrying  off  considerable 
plunder;  the  sighing  of  the  bamboos  through  which  we 
rode  produced  a fearful  nerve  tension,  nearly  as  great  in 
fact  as  if  the  ladrones  had  sprung  upon  us. 


CHAPTER  XI 


THE  NEW  SUMMER  CAPITAL 


Character  of  the  Heat  in  Manila — A Native  in  a 
Crematory — The  Philippine  Thirst — Baguio,  the  Simla 
of  the  Philippines — Considerations  not  to  be  Ignored. 

“TT  isn’t  the  hotness  I mind  so  much,  mamma,  but  the 
wetness  of  the  hotness,”  said  a little  girl  who  had 
not  learned  to  use  the  terms  “atmosphere”  and  “humid” 
and  “enervating.”  She  did  not  need  to  use  those  terms ; 
her  expression  was  clear  to  any  one  who  has  been  in 
Manila  during  the  heated  term. 

It  was  a bit  trying  when  the  mercury  was  hovering 
between  eighty  and  ninety  degrees  to  be  told  by  the  old 
resident — of  five  years’  standing:  “You  are  fortunate 

not  to  be  here  during  the  hot  weather.”  For  a heat  that 
blisters  and  burns,  that  withers  and  consumes,  that  seems 
to  dry  the  marrow  while  it  boils  the  flesh,  commend  the 
writer  to  a day  in  Manila,  “just  after  the  heated  term.” 
When  one  retired  even  a sheet  was  a burden,  so  intense 
was  the  heat ; toward  morning  one  needed  a light  blanket 
and  was  in  danger  of  taking  cold  because  the  mercury 
had  fallen  ten  degrees. 

A story  current  in  the  Philippines  regarding  the  effect 
of  the  extreme  heat  upon  the  natives  may  be  repeated  as 
an  illustration,  although  its  accuracy  is  not  vouched  for. 


118 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


A Filipino  traveling  in  Europe  died.  His  family  de- 
sired to  have  his  body  cremated  so  that  at  least  his  dust 
might  be  carried  to  his  home.  The  body,  prepared  for 
cremation,  was  placed  in  a retort  and  the  customary 
heat  applied.  After  waiting  the  usual  length  of  time 
the  attendants  opened  the  retort  to  remove  the  ashes.  As 
the  cover  was  removed  the  men  were  horrified  to  see  the 
lately  deceased  gentleman  sitting  bolt  upright ; to  add  to 
their  astonishment,  the  stranger  said  with  a snap  in  his 
tone,  ‘Shut  that  door,  I feel  a draught.’ 

“Explanations  followed,  when  it  was  discovered  that 
the  man  had  not  really  died,  but  was  numbed  by  a 
temperature  of  forty  degrees,  and  was  simply  revived  by 
the  heat  of  the  crematory,  which  approximated  that  of 
his  own  fair  island.” 

If  the  story  is  apocryphal  it  is  well  known  that  a 
Filipino  can  stand  a temperature  that  will  lay  most 
Americans  and  Europeans  in  the  shade. 

Twice  within  twenty-four  hours  after  reaching  Manila 
my  watch  needed  a new  main-spring.  The  jewelers  who 
repaired  the  watch  said  that  my  experience  was  not  an 
unusual  one ; watches  as  well  as  men  had  to  become  ac- 
climated. One  effect  of  the  trying  climate  was  the  pro- 
duction of  a thirst  that  it  was  difficult  to  satisfy.  Almost 
as  soon  as  we  landed  I wanted  a drink  of  ice  water,  or 
tea,  or  coffee — anything  that  would  “cheer  but  not  in- 
ebriate.” Going  into  a drug-store,  I secured  a glass  of 
lemonade.  As  the  clerk  was  preparing  it  he  apologized 
for  lack  of  ice  to  cool  it;  a transport  was  loading  for  the 
trip  home  through  the  Suez  Canal  and  every  pound  of 
ice  manufactured  in  the  Government  ice  plant  was  being 
put  into  the  ice-box  of  the  transport.  I have  drank 


BEER  CHEAPER  THAN  LEMONADE  119 


worse  concoctions  from  a glass,  but  never  without  a 
physician’s  prescription. 

Another  day,  wishing  to  secure  an  “American  lemon- 
ade,” I went,  this  time  with  a physician,  into  a summer 
garden  connected  with  a hotel.  The  lemonade  was  fairly 
good — the  transport  had  sailed  and  we  had  ice  this  time. 
The  two  glasses  cost  forty  cents. 

“What  would  have  been  the  bill  if  I had  ordered  beer  ?” 
I asked,  seeing  other  men  with  glasses  of  that  beverage 
before  them. 

“Ten  cents  a glass,”  was  the  reply. 

I was  willing  to  pay  the  difference,  of  course,  but  it 
wTas  easier  to  understand  why  soldiers  and  other  Ameri- 
cans with  small  incomes  and  without  strict  temperance 
principles  should  prefer  some  other  beverage  than  lemon- 
ade. The  soda  water  fountain  of  the  Young  Men’s 
Christian  Association  in  the  walled  city  ought  to  be 
duplicated  in  many  places  throughout  the  provinces.  In 
the  hotel  one  can  get  cold  tea,  and  the  new-comers  drink 
it  in  large  quantities ; I drank  more  tea  in  two  months  in 
the  Philippines  than  in  any  five  years  in  America.  The 
Philippine  thirst  needs  to  be  experienced  in  order  to  be 
understood;  the  Christian  Association  men  understand  it 
and  are  doing  much  to  quench  it  without  enfeebling  the 
bodies,  shattering  the  nerves  and  deranging  the  intellects 
of  those  who  are  suffering  from  it. 

But  more  than  cold  tea  and  soda  water  is  needed  to 
fit  one  to  remain  very  long  in  the  Philippines  without 
suffering.  The  Civil  Commission  early  set  its  members 
to  ascertain  what  could  be  done  to  offset  or  to  lessen  the 
effect  of  the  intense  heat,  so  that  the  health  of  the  Army 
and  Civil  employees,  as  well  as  of  the  Commissioners 


120 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


themselves,  might  be  preserved.  It  was  suggested  that 
in  the  Province  of  Benguet  a summer  capital  similar  to 
Simla  in  the  Himalayas  might  be  established.  Taking 
the  Manila  and  Dagupan  Railway  to  Dagupan,  and  the 
shortest  possible  route  for  a railway  from  this  point  to 
Baguio,  the  distance  from  Manila  is  about  a hundred 
and  twenty-seven  miles. 

Commissioners  Wright  and  Worcester  were  appointed 
to  gather  all  available  information  on  the  subject  of  a 
sanitarium  at  Baguio,  and  were  directed  by  the  Commis- 
sion to  investigate  conditions  existing  in  the  Province  of 
Benguet.  In  the  vicinity  of  Baguio  there  is  a region 
admirably  suited  to  serve  as  a health  resort  for  the  Phil- 
ippines and  the  neighboring  China  coast.  The  Com- 
missioners found  an  extensive  highland  region,  peopled 
by  a friendly,  harmless  tribe,  with  pure,  cool,  invigorat- 
ing air  and  abundant  water;  free  from  tropical  vegeta- 
tion, affording  pasturage  in  plent}r,  and  suited  to  the 
production  of  many  of  the  fruits,  vegetables  and  grains 
characteristic  of  the  temperate  zone.  It  is  hard  to  con- 
ceive of  a region  affording  a more  delightful  temperature 
than  Baguio,  where  it  is  always  cool,  and  yet  never  cold. 
The  highest  temperature  recorded  during  August,  Sep- 
tember and  October  was  76.8°  ; the  absolute  minimum 
during  that  part  of  the  year  when  the  skies  are  clear  and 
the  air  is  dry  was  about  45°.  The  bracing  character  of 
the  atmosphere  is  attested  by  every  one  who  has  visited 
the  Province  of  Benguet,  and  its  purity  is  shown  by  the 
fact  that  fresh  meat  will  keep  without  ice  for  from  three 
to  six  days,  according  to  the  season. 

The  Commission  concludes  that,  on  the  whole,  health 
conditions  are  surprisingly  good  in  the  Philippines,  and 


The  Manila  and  Dagupan  Railroad 


CHANGE  OF  CLIMATE  NECESSARY  121 


that  no  tropical  islands  in  the  world  enjoy  a better  cli- 
mate. While  that  is  true,  it  admits  that  two  classes  of 
diseases  have  to  be  reckoned  with.  These  are,  first,  dis- 
eases common  to  temperate  and  tropical  countries,  and, 
second,  diseases  especially  characteristic  of  the  latter 
region.  While  many  of  the  islands  are  extremely  health- 
ful, they  vary  widely  in  this  particular,  as  do  different 
localities  on  the  same  islands.  Recuperation  from  severe 
wounds  or  wasting  diseases  takes  place  slowly  in  the 
tropical  regions.  Thus  far  it  has  proved  necessary  to 
send  a considerable  number  of  sick  soldiers  either  to 
Japan  or  to  the  United  States  for  recuperation,  in  either 
case  involving  heavy  expense  and  frequently  loss  of  life. 
Experience  has  shown  that  an  occasional  change  to  a 
cooler  climate  is  very  desirable,  even  for  those  who  live 
in  the  more  healthful  parts  of  the  archipelago.  Espe- 
cially is  this  true  of  white  children,  who  usually  do  very 
well  in  the  islands  up  to  the  age  of  eight  or  ten  years 
and  then  seem  to  require  a change. 

The  Spaniards  were  familiar  with  the  remarkable  cli- 
matic conditions  found  in  Benguet.  Many  persons  who 
have  been  at  Baguio  are  anxious  to  secure  building  lots 
there  that  they  may  erect  cottages  and  send  their  fam- 
ilies to  Benguet  during  the  hot  season.  The  establish- 
ment of  homes  wdiere  the  families  of  Civil  officers  and 
employees  can  at  any  time  and  at  small  expense  get  the 
beneficial  effects  of  a bracing  climate,  will  greatly  add 
to  the  stability  of  the  Civil  service.  When  this  can  be 
done,  men  wTho  now  hesitate  to  take  their  families  to  the 
Philippines  will  feel  safe  in  sending  for  them.  Many  who 
went  to  the  Civil  sanitarium  started  in  Baguio  were  in 
need  of  a change  of  climate,  but  could  not  properly  be 


U2 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


classed  as  patients.  Practical  experience  in  the  sani- 
tarium has  confirmed  the  conclusion  previously  reached 
by  the  Commission,  that  substantially  the  same  results 
are  obtained  by  a visit  to  Baguio  which  would  come  from 
a transfer,  for  the  same  length  of  time,  to  some  temper- 
ate region  in  the  United  States.  It  is  the  purpose  of  the 
Insular  government  to  make  it  feasible  for  any  officer 
or  employee  who  needs  a temporary  change  to  a tem- 
perate climate  to  get  it  promptly  and  at  a cost  within 
his  means. 

The  missionary  boards  have  also  instructed  their  rep- 
resentatives to  procure  land  and  erect  buildings  so  that 
they,  like  the  Civil  employees,  shall  have  the  advantage 
of  this  temperate  climate  during  a part  of  every  year 
when  they  feel  the  need  of  a change.  Dr.  Arthur  J. 
Brown,  secretary  of  one  of  the  boards,  gives  this  judi- 
cious advice  regarding  the  health  of  the  foreigners  in  the 
tropics,  based  upon  his  experiences  there: 

“The  foreigner  who  expects  to  keep  his  health  in  the 
Philippines  will  protect  his  head  from  the  midday  sun 
by  a pith  helmet  or  an  umbrella,  or  both,  will  avoid 
intoxicating  liquors,  will  insist  on  having  his  drinking 
water  boiled,  will  eschew  unripe  or  overripe  fruit,  will 
see  that  vegetables  which  are  to  be  eaten  uncooked  are 
thoroughly  washed  in  boiled  water,  and  wrill  be  cautious 
about  eating  raw  shellfish  and  cold  meats  which  have 
been  standing  in  exposed  places.  A temperate  diet  of 
freshly  cooked  foods,  with  comparatively  little  meat,  is 
the  one  most  conducive  to  health  in  that  tropical  climate. 
It  may  appear  ‘smart’  to  ignore  these  considerations,  eat 
anything  that  is  handy  and  drink  what  one  pleases.  But 
the  result  is  pretty  sure  to  be  an  attack  of  dysentery  and 


DIFFERENT  KINDS  OF  WEATHER  123 


perhaps  a funeral.”  Dr.  Brown  refers  facetiously  to  the 
better  part  of  the  year  euphemistically  called  “winter,” 
and  to  Mark  Twain’s  use  of  that  term  in  India,  a term 
he  said  which  “is  used  merely  for  convenience  to  distin- 
guish weather  that  will  melt  a brass  dooi’-knob  and 
weather  that  will  make  it  only  mushy.” 


CHAPTER  XII 


MARRIAGES- PURE  AND  MIXED 


S soon  as  American  missionaries  had  secured  the 


confidence  of  the  Filipinos,  there  was  a great  rush 
of  young  people  and  old  to  the  missionaries  to  be  mar- 
ried. Methodist  preachers  in  Manila  alone  married  more 
than  two  thousand  couples  in  three  years — 1901-3. 
Sometimes  little  children,  and  not  infrequently  grown-up 
children,  accompanied  their  parents  when  for  the  first 
time  words  were  spoken  which  made  them  husband  and 
wife.  In  many  places  under  Spanish  rule  it  cost  so 
much  to  have  the  marriage  performed  that  a couple  fond 
of  each  other  would  dispense  with  the  formal  require- 


Very rarely  is  the  bride’s  property  settled  on  her  hus- 
band or  passed  to  him  after  the  death  of  the  wife.  If 
the  husband  is  poor  and  the  wife  well  off  when  they  are 
married,  so  they  remain,  the  husband  acting  as  the  ad- 
ministrator of  her  property  and  depending  upon  her 
liberality  to  supply  his  needs.  A married  woman  often 
signs  her  maiden  name,  sometimes  adding  “de,”  her  hus- 
band’s surname.  If  she  survives  her  husband  she  may 


Children  with  their  Parents  at  the  Marriage  Altar- 
Why  a Double  Signature  is  Used — The  Position  of 
Women  in  the  Philippines — Mixed  Marriages  De- 
nounced— Meeting  his  Wife  without  a Blush. 


ment. 


MANY  RELATIVES  CARED  FOR 


125 


resume  her  maiden  name  among  her  friends,  and  add 
“widow  of”  for  the  public. 

It  shows  how  far  the  power  of  woman  extends  in  the 
Philippines,  that  one  of  the  Governors,  on  whom  we 
called,  bears  the  surnames  of  both  father  and  mother,  the 
latter  coming  last,  and  one  must  know  the  custom  of  the 
country  or  he  will  call  a man  Smith  when  his  real  name 
is  Jones.  Inquiry  discovered  the  reason  for  this  action; 
no  legal  document  would  be  considered  properly  signed 
unless  it  bore  the  double  name.  An  American  unaccus- 
tomed to  this  practice  was  asked  why  she  did  not  sign  her 
mother’s  name.  Was  she  ashamed  of  it?  Or  worse,  was 
her  father’s  name  not  known,  and  was  the  name  used 
that  of  her  mother?  The  double  signature  was  adopted 
in  many  cases  to  avoid  criticism  and  to  leave  no  doubt  in 
the  minds  of  those  who  were  honestly  perplexed. 

A newly  married  couple  seldom  begin  housekeeping 
alone.  Few  couples  live  alone.  If  they  do  not  remain 
with  the  wife’s  parents,  probably  the  parents  of  both  the 
wife  and  the  husband  will  come  to  live  with  them,  while 
brothers  and  sisters  and  cousins  and  other  relatives,  to 
the  third  and  fourth  degree,  join  the  new  household. 
This  is  true  when  the  husband  is  an  European  or  an 
American  as  well  as  when  he  is  a native.  When  one  calls 
upon  an  official  he  frequently  sees  four  or  five  or  six  or 
more  men  and  women  in  addition  to  the  regular  family. 
Sometimes  it  is  difficult  to  tell  which  are  pensioners. 
Where  family  cares  permit,  the  wife  is  often  active  in  the 
business  which  bears  her  husband’s  name.  If  he  is  busy 
in  one  part  of  the  city,  she  may  superintend  the  workmen 
engaged  in  the  store  or  office  in  another  part  of  the  town. 
I have  in  mind  one  family  of  considerable  wealth  where 


126 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


the  wife  pays  the  two  or  three  hundred  workmen  every 
week ; not  because  she  owns  the  property  exclusively,  but 
because  it  is  considered  proper  for  her  to  do  so,  and  it  is 
her  contribution  to  the  management  of  the  firm.  Among 
no  other  people  of  the  East,  it  is  said  b}T  those  who  have 
traveled  extensively,  is  the  position  of  woman  so  high  as 
in  the  Philippines. 

Marriage  between  Spaniards  and  native  women  were 
not  infrequent  formerly,  and  are  still  in  vogue.  A num- 
ber of  Americans  have  married  Filipina  women ; and,  as 
one  of  our  hosts  was  of  that  number,  it  may  seem  un- 
gracious to  criticise  the  custom.  But  it  is  difficult,  as 
Foreman  said  in  his  interesting  volume  on  the  Philip- 
pines, when  writing  of  mixed  marriages  between  Span- 
iards and  Filipinos,  “to  apprehend  an  alliance  so  incon- 
gruous, there  being  no  affinity  of  ideas,  and  the  only 
condition  in  common  is  that  they  are  both  human  beings 
professing  Christianity.”  Foreman  adds:  “The  Euro- 
pean husband  is  either  drawn  toward  the  level  of  the 
native  by  this  heterogeneous  relationship,  or,  in  despair 
of  remed3ung  the  error  of  a passing  passion,  he  prac- 
tically ignores  his  wife  in  his  own  social  connections. 
Each  forms,  then,  a distinct  circle  of  friends  of  his,  or 
her,  own  selection,  whilst  the  woman  is  refractory  to 
mental  improvement,  and  in  manners  is  but  slightly 
raised  above  her  own  class  by  European  influence  and 
contact.  There  are  some  exceptions,  but  I have  fre- 
quently observed  in  the  houses  of  Europeans  married  to 
native  women  in  the  provinces,  that  the  wives  take  up 
their  chief  abode  in  the  kitchen,  and  are  only  seen  by  the 
visitor  when  some  domestic  duty  requires  them  to  move 
about  the  house.  Familiarity  breeds  contempt,  and  these 


THE  QUERIDA  SYSTEM 


127 


mesalliances  diminish  the  dignity  of  the  superior  race  by 
reducing  the  birth  origin  of  both  races  to  a common  level 
in  their  children.” 

We  saw  in  a southern  city  a discharged  soldier  who 
has  learned  more  about  the  rights  of  Filipino  women 
since  he  became  the  husband  of  one  of  them  than  he  had 
known  before.  She  had  before  marriage  a considerable 
amount  of  property.  She  had  been  his  wife  for  a year 
or  two,  and  still  owned  the  property.  To  his  relatives 
and  friends  he  speaks  of  “my  house  and  lot,”  and  “my 
summer  home.”  Those  who  know  the  facts  say  that  he 
supports  himself  by  running  an  American  saloon,  of 
which  he  is  the  real  proprietor;  but  the  house  and  lot, 
the  summer  home,  and  other  property  to  which  he  lays 
claim  are  in  the  wife’s  name,  and  will  remain  there  as 
long  as  she  lives  and  after  her  death  they  will  go  to  her 
relatives. 

The  American  members  of  the  Philippine  Commission 
have  set  the  stamp  of  their  disapproval  upon  the  querida 
system  of  the  East — a European  or  American  man  living 
with  a native  woman  without  a marriage  ceremony. 
While  they  do  not  encourage  mixed  marriages,  they  feel 
that  even  these  are  better  than  the  evil  practice  which 
helped  to  make  the  name  “European”  offensive  in  the 
Philippines.  Frequently  a Spaniard,  soldier  or  civilian, 
when  he  returned  home  would  leave  his  common-law  wife 
with  a little  family  to  support. 

“We  do  not  mean  to  have  America  suffer  a similar 
reproach,”  said  Governor  Taft.  “Our  attitude  is  this: 
When  it  is  known  that  an  American  employee  of  the 
Government  is  living  with  a native  woman,  he  is  told  to 
bring  a marriage  certificate  or  present  his  resignation. 


128 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


A soldier  found  deserting  his  native  wife  was  taken  from 
the  ship  in  the  harbor  on  which  he  was  starting  for  the 
Homeland  and  forced  to  support  her.” 

To  show  how  far  the  querida  system  is  carried  in  the 
East,  in  Civil  as  well  as  in  Military  life,  I was  told  of  an 
English  gentleman  with  a large  business  in  a Chinese 
city  who  sent  for  his  nephew,  a graduate  from  one  of 
the  English  universities,  to  enter  his  employ.  As  soon 
as  he  introduced  him  to  the  routine  of  the  office,  he  said : 
“There  is  one  other  subject  to  which  I wish  to  refer. 
You  are  a moral  young  man,  and  I wish  you  to  remain 
so.  As  soon  as  you  can,  select  a young  Chinese  woman 
as  your  friend,  and  then  keep  away  from  all  houses  and 
places  which  destroy  the  vitality  as  well  as  the  morality 
of  so  many  young  Englishmen.” 

“I  came  from  England  to  enter  your  firm;  but  if  this 
is  the  standard  of  morality  which  prevails  among  the 
leading  business  men  in  this  city,  I am  going  home.” 
And  he  sailed  for  England  on  the  next  steamer. 

The  Philippines  need  more  men  with  the  spirit  of  this 
young  Englishman,  willing  to  fight  for  the  flag  or  to 
serve  their  country  in  civil  life,  and  also  willing  to  plant 
their  heels  firmly  upon  immorality  under  whatever  guise 
it  is  presented.  There  are  many  men  in  the  Army  and 
Civil  employment  having  the  spirit  of  the  constabulary 
captain  who  said  to  me  with  an  air  of  manliness : 

“I  expect  my  wife  from  the  States  soon,  and  I want  to 
meet  her  without  a blush.” 


CHAPTER  XIII 


CHINESE  OR  FILIPINOS? 


HO  shall  be  the  manual  laborer  in  the  Philippines  ? 


This  is  the  question  which  divides  Americans  in 


Manila  more  than  any  other.  On  the  one  side  stand  the 
business  men  who  have  gone  from  America  to  invest  cap- 
ital or  to  manage  property.  Almost  without  exception 
they  say  that  the  islands  cannot  be  properly  developed 
by  native  labor;  with  them  stand  nearly  every  traveler 
and  writer  on  the  question  from  Juan  de  la  Concepcion, 
two  centuries  back,  to  Archibald  R.  Colquhoun,  one  of 
the  last  men  to  appear  in  print  on  this  theme.  Opposed 
to  this  view,  resolutely  and  by  resolutions,  stand  Gov- 
ernor Taft,  his  associates  on  the  Commission,  Govern- 
ment contractors  and  others  who  see  a menace  in  Chinese 


Concepcion  said  of  the  Philippines:  “Without  the 

trade  and  commerce  of  the  Chinese,  these  dominions 
could  not  have  subsisted.”  “The  Chinese  are  really  the 
people  who  gave  the  natives  the  first  notions  of  trade, 
industry  and  fruitful  w'ork,”  says  another  writer.  “They 
taught  them,  among  many  other  useful  things,  the  ex- 


Two  Views  Strongly  Advocated — Is  the  Chinese 
Laborer  Needed — The  Government  Favors  the  Na- 
tives— Raising  the  Standard  of  Life. 


labor. 


130 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


traction  of  saccharine  juice  from  the  sugar  cane,  the 
manufacture  of  sugar,  and  the  working  of  wrought  iron. 
They  introduced  into  the  colony  the  first  sugar  mills  with 
vertical  stone  crushers  and  iron  boiling  pans.” 

Dr.  Brown,  already  quoted,  makes  this  comment : “It 
is  difficult  to  find  a rational  reason  for  excluding  the 
Chinese.  They  came  to  the  Philippine  Islands  before 
either  Spaniards  or  Americans.  They  are  more  numerous 
than  we  are.  They  have  settled  in  homes  and  in  long- 
established  houses.  Through  their  intermarriage  with 
the  Filipinas,  they  are  introducing  a more  virile  strain 
into  the  native  blood,  so  that  the  strongest  type  of  char- 
acter in  the  islands  to-day  is  to  be  found  in  the  Chinese- 
Filipino  mestizo.  They  are  industrious,  peaceful  and 
law-abiding.  They  pay  more  taxes  in  proportion  to 
their  numbers  than  any  other  class.  They  could  not  be 
banished  without  throttling  the  trade  of  the  islands,  and 
they  are  so  absolutely  indispensable  to  industrial  and 
commercial  development  that  unless  our  American  cap- 
italists and  employers  can  have  the  benefit  of  their  labor, 
the  Philippines  can  never  return  to  the  United  States 
half  of  what  they  will  cost  us.” 

Professor  J.  W.  Jenks,  who  has  studied  the  Chinese 
question  in  nearly  every  Oriental  country,  declares  that 
in  all  these  countries  the  Chinaman  is  clearly  needed; 
indeed  he  has  been  practically  indispensable  to  their  in- 
dustrial development.  Professor  Jenks  opposes  the  pre- 
vailing opinion  in  America  when  he  adds:  “Moreover, 

he  does  not  seem  to  have  made  the  condition  of  the  native 
worse ; rather  he  has  raised  their  standard  of  living.  He 
has  been  willing  to  do  the  work  that  they  were  unwilling 
to  do,  and  his  diligence  and  thrift  have  supplied  capital 


OPINION  OF  COLQUHOUN 


131 


and  a consequent  demand  for  the  lighter,  more  pleasing 
kinds  of  labor,  which  they  are  willing  to  perform.  Be- 
sides that,  this  greater  prosperity  has  furnished  a demand 
at  higher  prices  for  the  products  which  they,  as  inde- 
pendent land-holders  or  fishermen,  were  willing  to  supply. 
The  conditions  in  the  Philippines  seem  likewise  to  de- 
mand outside  assistance  such  as  the  Chinese  can  give 
better  than  any  other  people.” 

Mr.  Colquhoun,  the  English  writer,  is  stronger  in  his 
statements,  declaring  without  reserve:  “There  is  no  one 
who  believes  the  Filipino  to  be  capable,  unaided,  of  doing 
anything  for  himself,  and  the  history  of  Malayan  peo- 
ples in  every  case  supports  this  view.  They  are  neither 
a commercial  nor  industrial  race  by  instinct,  and  although 
agriculture  has  been  their  avocation,  they  employ  to  the 
present  day  the  most  primitive  tools.  All  the  progress 
made  by  Malayans  in  any  of  their  habitats  may  be  traced 
directly  to  Hindoo,  Arab,  or  European  influence,  and 
especially  to  actual  discipline  on  the  part  of  the  dominant 
race.  The  intense  aristocratic  prejudice  with  which  the 
race  is  permeated  lost  its  picturesqueness  under  the 
Spaniards  through  the  destruction  of  tribal  organization, 
but  was  retained  and  intensified  in  a contempt  for  com- 
mercial and  industrial  pursuits.  The  Chinese  and  their 
half-breeds  became  the  merchants  and  petty  traders  of 
the  islands  and  also  the  only  skilled  workmen.  They 
swelled  the  ranks  of  local  politicians  and  undermined  the 
social  and  commercial  fabric  of  society  with  their  secret 
societies  and  their  talent  for  intrigue.” 

On  the  other  hand,  against  all  of  these  opinions  the 
Philippine  Commission  stands  with  the  Filipino.  Its 
view  of  the  problem  may  be  gathered  from  this  statement 


132 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


of  Judge  Beekman  Winthrop,  a former  secretary  of 
Governor  Taft’s : 

“The  Commission  realizes  that,  while  the  admission  of 
Chinese  labor  would  hasten  the  development  of  the  coun- 
try and  promote  the  prosperity  of  Americans  financially 
interested  there,  it  would  reduce  the  Filipino  to  the  low- 
est imaginable  condition.  Where  he  has  been  given  a 
chance  under  proper  supervision,  he  has  made  an  excel- 
lent workman.  With  Chinamen  in  the  land,  the  Filip- 
inos never  will  be  induced  to  work,  and  gradually  would 
be  obliterated  altogether.  The  Commission  is  not  likely 
to  sacrifice  the  Filipino  for  the  sake  of  hastening  the 
development  of  the  Philippine  Islands.  They  will  first 
make  a man  of  him,  and  then  with  his  help  make  some- 
thing worth  while  of  his  land.” 

The  Commission  justifies  its  position  by  an  appeal  to 
facts.  Governor  Taft,  in  December,  1903,  said:  “I  am 
convinced  that  the  Filipino,  as  conditions  settle,  can  be 
made  a good  laborer;  not  so  good  as  the  American,  not 
so  good  as  the  Chinaman,  but  one  with  whom  it  wTill  be 
entirely  possible  to  carry  on  great  works  of  construction. 
We  are  now  employing  2,500  Filipino  laborers  on  the 
Benguet  road,  and  our  engineer  reports  that,  wages  con- 
sidered, they  are  doing  good  work.  The  city  engineer’s 
and  the  street-cleaning  departments  of  Manila  employ 
an  equal  number,  and  they  all  report  that  the  labor  is 
satisfactory.  Mr.  Higgins,  manager  of  the  Manila  and 
Dagupan  Railroad  Company,  who  built  the  original 
road  with  Filipino  labor,  and  is  now  building  the  branches 
authorized  by  the  Commission,  says  that  he  finds  no  diffi- 
culty with  the  work  or  the  workmen ; while  the  manager 
of  the  Street  Railway  Company  in  Manila  also  expresses 


NEW  AMBITIONS  AROUSED 


133 


his  satisfaction  with  the  native  labor.  The  Atlantic, 
Gulf  and  Pacific  Company,  which  is  engaged  in  building 
the  great  Manila  port  works,  needing  in  its  employ  five 
hundred  to  one  thousand  men,  has  adopted  the  system  of 
making  the  laborers  comfortable  and  at  home,  and  now 
can  procure  more  labor  than  it  needs,  and  good  labor, 
too.” 

My  own  view  is  that  the  truth  lies  between  those  ex- 
tremes. The  Filipino  is  neither  as  industrious  nor  as 
lazy  as  he  is  painted.  It  cannot  be  denied  that  he  shares 
with  all  Malays  an  indolence  that  irritates  both  English- 
men and  Americans.  Partly  from  the  debilitating  climate 
and  partly  from  the  lack  of  necessity  for  unceasing 
labor,  he  is  the  victim  of  circumstances.  It  is  so  easy  for 
an  American  to  acquire  indolent  habits  in  the  tropics  that 
he  needs  to  be#  charitable  toward  one  who  lengthens  and 
broadens  the  siesta  period.  With  new  ambitions  aroused 
by  contact  with  Americans  and  new  desires  created  by 
higher  wages,  the  Filipino  will  doubtless  respond  to  these 
increasing  demands  upon  him  for  ordinary  and  skilled 
labor.  How  much  of  the  difficulty  has  been  due  to  un- 
settled conditions,  and  how  much  to  race  characteristics, 
one  cannot  easily  decide.  The  tranquilizing  of  the 
provinces  has  already  made  labor  better  and  easier  to 
get,  though  it  is  still  far  from  satisfactory  when  measured 
by  American  standards.  Throughout  the  archipelago 
wages  have  doubled  and  in  many  cases  trebled  since 
1898.  The  immediate  result  of  doubling  the  wage  was 
to  induce  the  laborer  to  work  half  as  many  days  as  for- 
merly, but  that,  too,  is  a condition  that  will  readily  adjust 
itself. 

I fully  concur  in  the  view  advanced  by  Mr.  Colquhoun 


134 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


that  the  most  hopeful  policy  is  that  of  raising  the 
standard  of  life  by  improvements  in  dwelling-houses,  san- 
itation, and  so  forth,  which  will  bring  home  to  the  Fil- 
ipino the  advantages  of  a regular  wage  at  a rising  scale. 
“The  next  generation,”  he  adds,  “with  improved  educa- 
tion, will  be  even  more  amenable  to  such  practical  con- 
siderations, and  in  time  the  people  may  attain  to  a sound 
economic  position,  which  will  make  genuine  co-operation 
possible.  The  greatest  danger  they  have  to  fear  is  to 
be  made  the  tools  of  politicians ; and  until  they  have 
reached  a higher  level,  socially,  economically,  they  can- 
not appreciate  their  own  interests  or  protect  them.  It 
is  a cruel  kindness  to  affect  to  put  political  power  into 
the  hands  of  such  a democracy  as  this,  and  the  expert 
ment  can  lead  to  nothing  but  misunderstanding  and  con- 
fusion, which  will  become  chaos  the  minute  the  strong, 
guiding  hand  and  open  purse  of  America  are  withdrawn.” 
Governor  Taft  has  felt  from  the  first  that  it  would  be 
to  the  detriment  of  the  Filipinos  to  allow  unlimited  Chi- 
nese immigration.  Such  an  act  on  the  part  of  the 
United  States  Government  would  relegate  the  Filipino 
to  the  position  which  the  Malay  occupies  in  the  Straits 
Settlements.  The  Chinese  laborer  becomes  a merchant 
within  a year  or  two  after  he  reaches  the  island,  and 
then  begins  a competition  with  the  Filipino  tradesman, 
which  in  the  end  drives  the  Filipino  out  of  business.  The 
polic}7  of  the  Commission  seems  to  be  to  give  the  Filipinos 
a chance  to  work  out  their  own  salvation,  aided  by  a 
friendly  administration,  but  if,  after  a reasonable  period, 
the  Filipinos  fail  in  this  task — but  why  anticipate?  The 
first  step  is  being  taken  now,  and  when  the  second  step  is 
necessary,  it  too  will  be  taken. 


CHAPTER  XIV 


CEMETERY  PRIVILEGES 


One  Child  out  of  Two  Dies — Funerals  without 
Hearses — Suggestive  Music  at  a Funeral — Vaults 
Rented  by  the  Year. 

THE  death-rate  in  the  islands  is  very  heavy.  Among 
children  it  is  fifty  per  cent,  in  Manila.  The 
Health  Board  is  doing  everything  possible  to  decrease 
that  ratio,  and  with  rigid  enforcement  of  health  laws  and 
the  introduction  of  American  trained  physicians,  nurses 
and  midwives,  it  is  probable  that  a larger  proportion  of 
children  born  in  the  city  will  live.  Vitality  among  the 
natives,  young  and  old,  is  comparatively  low.  Few  sur- 
vive an  attack  of  smallpox,  cholera  or  plague;  the  same 
is  true  of  Chinamen  ; and  few  Americans  are  immune  from 
these  three  diseases. 

Funerals  among  the  Filipinos  vary  with  the  wealth  of 
the  family  and  the  age  of  the  deceased  person.  In  Iloilo 
we  met  a funeral  procession  on  its  way  to  the  cemetery, 
consisting  of  a man  carrying  upon  his  shoulder  a coffin 
containing  the  body  of  a child.  Not  only  was  there  no 
hearse,  but  also  no  carriage  and  only  one  other  person 
in  sight. 

In  Manila,  on  the  other  hand,  the  funeral  procession 
may  be  an  imposing  affair.  I passed  one  on  the  way  to 
church  one  Sunday  morning.  There  were  six  horses  at- 


136 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


tached  to  the  hearse,  three  of  which  were  ridden,  and  on 
either  side  of  the  hearse  and  horses  were  men  dressed  as 
footmen,  wearing  powdered  wigs  and  cockaded  hats  and 
knee  breeches.  The  sight  would  have  been  amusing  had 
the  circumstances  not  imposed  solemnity.  Soon  after  the 
military  came  here,  in  1898,  the  natives  learned  that 
music  wTas  a proper  adjunct  of  a funeral  service.  The 
class  of  music  appropriate  for  such  an  occasion  wTas  not 
always  duly  considered,  and  one  frequently  heard  the 
band  in  front  of  a hearse  containing  the  body  of  a Fil- 
ipino announcing: 

“There’ll  be  a hot  time  in  the  old  town  to-night.” 

Later  the  natives  learned  that  light  music  was  appro- 
priate only  when  returning  from  the  cemetery. 

One  afternoon  we  were  driving  in  Paco,  one  of  the 
suburbs  of  Manila,  and  entered  the  churchyard.  A little 
child  had  died  and  the  priest  was  reading  the  service 
over  the  body.  While  this  was  in  progress  a number  of 
men  and  women  were  walking  toward  the  part  of  the  yard 
where  three  or  four  men  were  opening  a part  of  the  wall 
which  surrounds  the  churchyard.  In  a short  time  the 
coffin  was  carried  from  the  church  to  the  opening  thus 
made  and  placed  in  the  wall,  much  as  one  would  place 
his  box  in  a safe-deposit  vault.  The  opening  was  then 
sealed,  and  the  remains  of  the  little  child  will  be  undis- 
turbed for  five  years,  the  term  for  which  the  rental  has 
been  paid  by  the  family.  If,  at  the  end  of  that  time, 
the  rent  for  another  period  is  not  forthcoming,  and  the 
vault  is  needed  by  a family  that  will  pay  for  its  use,  the 
coffin  will  be  taken  out  and  the  remains  will  be  buried 
in  the  Potter’s  Field.  The  price  for  a vault  for  five 


Schooi.  The  First  Pupils 


RENTAL  SYSTEM  REMAINS 


137 


years  is  thirty-five  pesos,  about  seventeen  dollars;  for 
two  hundred  pesos,  paid  at  once,  the  vault  is  permanently 
endowed. 

Our  guide  explained  that  this  was  one  of  the  changes 
made  by  the  American  Government.  When  Manila  fell 
in  1898  there  was  a “boneyard,”  as  he  expressed  it,  and 
he  showed  us  the  place,  filled  with  remains  taken  from 
the  vaults  and  exposed  to  the  elements. 

“No  boneyard  now,”  he  added.  “Americans  put  all 
the  bones  into  the  ground.”  But  the  rental  system  still 
remains.  It  seems  a little  hard,  after  one  has  met  the 
landlord  or  agent  monthly  for  fifty  or  sixty  years,  that 
his  friends  must  continue  to  pay  rent  in  order  to  insure 
a covering  for  his  remains  during  the  centuries  to  come. 
It  is  a satisfaction  to  know,  however,  that  from  this  time 
on  a man’s  body  will  always  be  under  cover  of  one  sort 
or  another. 


CHAPTER  XV 


THE  OPIUM  TRAFFIC 


Prevention  of  Smuggling  Practically  Impossible — 
Missionaries  Appeal  to  President  Roosevelt — Argu- 
ments before  the  Commission— The  Sale  of  Opium  to 
be  Prohibited. 

REPORTS  from  various  provinces  and  information 
' from  other  sources  convinced  the  Commission  that 
the  smoking  of  opium  has  been  spreading  among  the 
Filipino  people.  Under  the  Spanish  regime  they  were 
under  penalty  of  fine  or  imprisonment  if  convicted 
of  smoking  opium,  and  opium  joints  or  smoking  places 
were  licensed  to  be  used  only  by  Chinamen.  Under  the 
tariff  act  now  in  force  the  duty  on  opium  was  somewhat 
reduced,  on  the  theory  that  a high  tax  on  the  importation 
of  the  drug  increased  the  smuggling  of  it.  The  result 
has  been  that,  except  for  the  tariff,  there  is  no  restriction 
at  all  on  the  sale  of  opium,  except  that  town  councils 
are  required  to  pass  ordinances  suppressing  opium  joints. 

China  is  so  near  to  the  Philippines,  and  the  coast  line 
of  the  islands  is  so  long,  that  it  would  be  difficult,  if  not 
impossible,  in  the  opinion  of  the  Commission,  to  prevent 
smuggling.  By  granting  the  exclusive  right  to  import, 
prepare  and  sell  opium  to  one  person,  to  be  known  as 
the  opium  farmer,  the  Commission  believed  that  it  could 
confine  the  use  of  opium  to  Chinamen,  with  the  aid  of  the 


INTEREST  IN  THE  LAW 


139 


farmer,  whose  interest  it  would  be  to  act  with  the  Com- 
mission in  preventing  smuggling  and  improper  selling 
of  the  drug. 

Three  days  in  July,  1903,  were  given  to  the  public 
consideration  of  an  opium  bill,  which  Commissioner 
Moses  had  been  appointed  to  draft ; on  his  resignation 
the  task  fell  to  Commissioner  Smith.  This  bill  forbade 
the  use  of  opium  by  Filipinos,  or  the  sale  of  it  to  Fili- 
pinos, and  provided  for  the  granting  of  the  monopoly 
for  the  sale  of  opium  to  Chinamen  for  one  year  to  the 
highest  bidder.  The  maintaining  of  a public  place  for 
the  smoking  of  opium  was  punished  by  a fine,  and  every 
Chinaman  was  forbidden  to  smoke  opium  except  on  his 
own  premises. 

Great  interest  was  manifested  in  the  proposed  law, 
which  was  strongly  opposed  by  Protestant  missions  gen- 
erally, and  by  Protestant  Church  interests  in  the  islands. 
Not  only  did  the  missionaries  voice  their  protest  in 
Manila,  but  their  representatives  sent  a telegram  to  Pres- 
ident Roosevelt,  as  did  also  the  editors  of  three  news- 
papers in  Manila,  strongly  urging  him  to  prevent  the 
adoption  of  the  measure. 

The  fight  against  the  proposed  measure  was  led  by 
the  Rev.  Homer  C.  Stuntz,  D.D.,  presiding  elder  of  the 
Methodist  Episcopal  Church  and  chairman  of  the  Evan- 
gelical Union,  who  delivered  a remarkably  clear  and 
forceful  address  against  the  bill.  He  urged  that,  what- 
ever might  be  the  opinion  of  the  Americans  new  to  the 
East,  the  conviction  of  more  than  fifty  millions  of  the 
best  brain  and  blood  and  character  of  Christendom  was 
final  and  irrevocable  as  to  the  highest  bidder  opium  mo- 
nopoly. They  believe,  he  said,  that  it  is  a blot  on  Chris- 


140 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


tian  civilization,  and  they  will  never  rest  content  while 
such  a law  remains  upon  a single  statute  book  on  the 
face  of  the  earth.  “Back  of  the  Evangelical  Union,” 
he  added,  “stands  a constituency  not  less  than  thirty 
millions  strong  in  the  United  States  alone,  and  that 
constituency  stands  here  this  day  and  goes  on  record  as 
unalterably  opposed  to  the  fundamental  principle  of  this 
bill  and  to  nearly  all  its  details.  If  defeated  to-day  they 
will  resume  the  agitation  with  redoubled  zeal  to-morrow. 
They  will  pray  and  petition  and  vote  for  the  repeal  of 
legislation  which  their  representatives  were  not  able  to 
prevent.” 

Concerning  the  use  of  opium,  Dr.  Stuntz  said : “It  is 
easily  the  most  deadly  vice  known  to  the  human  race. 
It  kills  manhood,  it  ruins  homes,  it  destroys  the  morals 
and  the  economic  value  of  its  victims  to  society.  It  has 
an  awful  power  over  its  consumers.  Its  grip  can  seldom 
be  shaken  off.  It  is  responsible  now  in  this  city  for 
more  suffering  and  far  more  economic  disturbances  than 
leprosy  or  bubonic  plague,  in  the  opinion  of  those  most 
closely  in  touch  with  the  real  inner  lives  of  the  people.” 
Statistics  were  given  from  India,  Java,  Formosa  and 
other  countries,  showing  how  the  sales  had  increased 
under  the  opium-farmer  bill.  From  these  statistics  he 
drew  the  conclusion  that  the  concessionaire,  if  given  ex- 
clusive right  to  sell  opium  in  the  Philippines,  would 
extend  the  sale  of  opium  in  every  part  of  every  province 
in  order  to  make  the  most  of  his  opportunities. 

A petition  signed  by  ten  thousand  Chinamen  was  also 
submitted,  in  which  the  petitioners  declared  that  the  bill, 
if  passed,  would  “increase  the  use  of  opium,  it  will  de- 
bauch our  countrymen,  it  will  encourage  our  young  men 


A STRONG  PROTEST  MADE 


141 


to  start  the  use  of  opium  by  giving  it  an  air  of  respect- 
ability, and  it  will  endanger  our  business  by  ruining  our 
clerks  and  laborers.” 

Dr.  Stuntz  closed  with  this  paragraph : “In  the  name 
of  the  Evangelical  Union,  therefore,  I protest  against 
the  enactment  of  the  proposed  bill  into  law.  I protest 
in  the  names  of  its  millions  of  conscientious,  God-fearing 
constituents.  I protest  in  the  name  of  the  best  ideals 
of  America.  I protest  in  the  name  of  the  Filipino  people, 
and  I protest  in  the  name  of  the  Chinese,  who  are  deliv- 
ered, bound  hand  and  foot  by  the  opium-farmer  bill.  I 
protest  in  the  name  of  China  and  Japan,  whose  standard 
this  bill  will  lower  in  the  Far  East.  I protest  in  the 
name  of  William  McKinley,  the  statesman  without  re- 
proach. I protest  against  it  in  the  name  of  Almighty 
God.” 

Bishop  Brent,  the  head  of  the  Episcopalian  work  in 
the  archipelago,  followed  Dr.  Stuntz,  and  also  made  a 
strong  plea  against  the  proposed  bill.  Two  or  three 
Chinamen  were  heard  in  its  defense,  each  of  them  stating 
frankly  that  he  vTas  interested  in  the  passage  of  the  bill, 
and  would  make  a bid  to  become  the  concessionaire  pro- 
vided for  in  it.  Commissioner  Smith  surprised  the  op- 
ponents by  reading  another  act  prohibiting  entirely  the 
sale  and  use  of  opium  in  the  islands ; but  he  did  not  offer 
it  as  a substitute  at  that  time,  saying  that  he  would  do 
so  if  he  could  not  secure  the  passage  of  the  proposed  law. 

Two  days  were  given  to  the  hearing,  and  the  next  week 
Governor  Taft,  in  an  impressive  address,  analyzed  the 
evidence  taken  before  the  Commission,  showing  how  the 
opium  trade  had  increased  in  the  islands  during  American 
occupation,  and  emphasizing  the  prohibitive  act  so  far 


U2 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


as  Americans,  foreigners,  Moros  or  Filipinos  were  con- 
cerned. In  other  words,  the  bill,  he  said,  was  prohibitive 
concerning  seven  million  Filipinos  and  it  gave  restricted 
permission  to  one  hundred  thousand  Chinamen.  He 
stated  that  the  object  of  the  Commission  in  introducing 
the  bill  was  to  prevent  the  use  of  opium  by  the  Filipinos, 
and  to  restrict  its  use  by  Chinamen,  and  he  added  that 
he  was  positive  if  the  bill  were  passed  it  would  accomplish 
that  purpose.  He  said,  further,  that  his  judgment  was 
based  upon  the  operation  of  the  Spanish  system  in  the 
islands,  which  cut  down  the  use  of  opium  by  Chinamen 
and  prevented  its  use  by  Filipinos.  The  Governor  dis- 
sected the  testimony  with  the  practiced  mind  of  a judge. 
He  was  not  blind,  he  said,  to  the  strength  of  the  argu- 
ment of  Dr.  Stuntz  and  others,  as  to  the  motive  which 
the  opium  monopolists  would  have  for  extending  the 
opium  trade,  but  he  believed  that  any  effort  on  the  part 
of  the  concessionaire  to  increase  trade  would  be  more 
than  offset  by  the  necessary  rise  in  the  price  of  opium. 
Prohibition  of  the  opium  trade  in  the  Philippines  he 
believed  to  be  impossible,  because  of  the  extensive  coast 
line  of  the  islands,  which  would  require  the  presence  of 
the  entire  navy  of  the  United  States  to  prevent  smug- 
gling. 

Governor  Taft  affirmed  his  belief  that  the  great  ma- 
jority of  people  in  the  islands  was  in  favor  of  such  a 
bill  as  the  Commission  had  prepared,  but  at  the  same 
time  he  admitted  that  the  Commission  had  not  given  suf- 
ficient weight  to  public  opinion  in  America.  “With  re- 
spect to  that,”  he  added,  “I  do  not  differ  widely  from 
Dr.  Stuntz.  The  truth  is,  the  American  public,  as  it  is 
now  advised  concerning  the  opium  habit,  makes  no  dis- 


APPOINTING  A COMMISSION 


143 


tinction  between  eating,  drinking  or  smoking  opium, 
makes  no  distinction  between  its  use  by  a Chinaman  or 
an  Indian,  a Filipino  or  an  American.  It  looks  upon 
the  smoking  of  opium,  however  little,  as  a vice  which 
cannot  be  too  strongly  condemned.  It  associates  its  use, 
however  moderate,  with  those  awful  pictures  of  the  hor- 
rible opium  dens  in  which  its  victims  are  stretched  out 
in  helpless  stupor  and  drunkenness.  It  holds  that  there 
can  be  no  moderate  use  of  the  drug  which  will  not  quickly 
and  certainly  lead  to  the  destruction  of  the  soul  and 
body.  It  does  not  know  the  facts.  It  does  not  know 
the  peculiar  conditions  of  these  islands.  It  does  not 
know  the  difference  in  the  use  of  opium  for  smoking  by 
the  Chinamen  and  the  much  more  vicious  and  pernicious 
use  of  the  drug  by  other  people.  It  believes,  as  Bishop 
Brent  believes,  that  the  use  of  opium  has  no  “unvicious” 
side.  I feel  confident,  however,  that  when  the  American 
people  understand  better  just  the  situation  here,  it  will 
have  the  same  opinion  as  to  the  best  method  of  restricting 
the  smoking  of  opium  by  the  Chinese  in  these  islands  as 
it  has  as  to  the  best  methods  of  restricting  the  liquor  habit 
in  America;  that  is  to  say,  that  it  will  favor  the  high 
license  as  the  most  effective  restraint.” 

The  address,  which  had  been  carefully  prepared  and 
was  read,  was  temperate  in  language  and  fair  toward 
those  who  differed  from  the  Commission,  imputing  high 
motives  to  the  opponents  of  the  bill,  yielding  to  public 
opinion  of  America,  and  expressing  a desire  to  have  con- 
ditions in  other  countries  studied. 

The  result  was  that  the  Commission  hesitated  to  take 
action  before  a more  thorough  investigation  could  be 
made  into  the  methods  of  dealing  with  opium  smoking  in 


144 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


Oriental  countries.  Accordingly  a law  was  passed  under 
which  a committee  was  to  be  appointed  by  the  Civil 
Governor  to  visit  various  Oriental  countries  and  make  a 
report  upon  the  methods  of  restricting  the  sale  and  use 
of  opium  in  force  in  the  East.  Major  Carter,  surgeon, 
United  States  Army,  and  Commissioner  of  Health  of  the 
Philippine  Islands ; Bishop  Charles  H.  Brent,  of  Manila, 
and  Dr.  Jose  Albert,  a prominent  Filipino  physician  of 
Manila,  were  appointed  to  serve  on  this  committee.  The 
committee  visited  Japan,  including  Formosa,  China, 
Java  and  Burma,  and  studied  the  report  on  a similar 
inquiry  made  by  a British  Commission  in  India.  Its 
report,  presented  nearly  a year  after  its  appointment, 
embraced  these  points : ( 1 ) That  the  opium  traffic  be 

made  a Government  monopoly  at  once;  (2)  that  at  the 
end  of  three  years  the  importation  of  opium  be  abso- 
lutely prohibited,  with  the  exception  of  what  is  needed 
as  medicine;  (3)  that  only  confirmed  users  of  the  drug 
who  are  over  twenty-one  years  old  shall  receive  a smoker’s 
license;  (1)  that  an  educational  campaign  against  the 
use  of  opium  be  started  in  the  schools;  (5)  that  the 
habitual  users  of  the  drug  be  treated  free  of  charge  in 
Government  hospitals;  and  (6)  that  the  punishment  of 
Chinese  found  guilty  of  importing  opium  be  deportation 
from  the  island. 

Dr.  Stuntz  sent  the  following  telegram  when  asked  for 
his  opinion  of  these  recommendations: 

“Report  of  Government  opium  commission  satisf actory 
to  Protestant  forces.  Legislation  based  thereon  will 
allow  no  private  profit,  and  permit  only  those  who  are 
already  confirmed  victims  of  the  habit  to  purchase.  Pro- 
hibition will  be  complete  after  three  years.” 


~\r 


Native  Chitmes 


ADOPTING  THE  FORMOSA  PLAN  115 


The  plan  recommended  by  the  Commission  is  known  as 
the  Formosa  Plan.  Japan  found  a condition  on  that  is- 
land similar  to  that  which  faced  America  in  the  Philip- 
pines, and  solved  it  within  three  or  four  years,  ending 
with  absolute  prohibition. 

Secretary  Taft  was  able  on  March  1,  1905,  to  secure 
the  passage  by  Congress  of  the  Philippine  Tariff  bill, 
which  contained  this  provision  relating  to  the  importa- 
tion and  sale  of  opium : 

“After  March  1,  1908,  it  shall  be  unlawful  to  import 
into  the  Philippine  Islands  opium  in  whatever  form,  ex- 
cept by  the  Government,  and  for  medicinal  purposes 
only,  and  at  no  time  shall  it  be  lawful  to  sell  opium  to 
any  native  of  the  Philippine  Islands  except  for  medicinal 
purposes.” 

This  is  a happy  solution  of  a vexed  question  and  one 
that  will  commend  itself  abroad  as  well  as  at  home. 


CHAPTER  XVI 


HARBOR  IMPROVEMENTS 


The  Need  of  Changes  in  Manila — A Breakwater  and 
Piers  now  Building — Removing  Cargo  on  Lighters — 
Railroad  Construction  under  Difficulties — Road-beds 
Carried  away  by  Rain. 

TWO  steps  looking  to  the  improvement  of  the  Philip- 
pines were  taken  early  by  the  American  authori- 
ties. One  related  to  the  construction  of  roads  throughout 
the  islands  and  the  other  to  the  improvement  of  Manila 
harbor. 

There  are  few  deep-water  harbors  in  the  Philippine 
Islands.  Those  of  the  large  cities  need  to  be  deepened 
and  improved.  The  Government  is  confining  its  atten- 
tion to  the  harbor  of  Manila  at  present,  as  this  city  is 
the  chief  port  of  the  islands,  and  to  make  the  necessary 
improvements  there  will  require  all  the  funds  which  are 
at  present  available  for  work  of  this  character.  Large 
vessels  having  a draft  of  more  than  sixteen  feet  are  now 
compelled  to  lie  two  miles  or  more  off  shore.  Those  of 
less  draft  than  this  find  entrance  into  the  Pasig  River. 
The  bay  is  so  large — thirty-five  miles  long  and  twenty- 
five  wide — that  it  feels  the  full  effects  of  every  storm. 
One  might  as  well  try  to  unload  a cargo  during  a storm 
a hundred  miles  from  shore  as  in  this  bay  when  the  sea 
is  running  high  and  swift.  No  boat  or  lighter  floats 


A FINE  BREAKWATER 


147 


that  can  approach  an  ocean  steamer  at  such  a time.  The 
Commission  early  decided  to  build  a breakwater  behind 
which  ships  could  ride  in  safety ; to  dredge  the  harbor 
inside  the  breakwater,  so  that  ships  of  large  carrying 
capacity  could  enter,  and  to  erect  piers  with  sheds  upon 
them,  the  rental  of  which  would  help  to  defray  the  ex- 
pense of  construction,  while  the  convenience  of  the  piers 
to  passengers  and  merchants  alike  would  be  extremely 
helpful.  It  was  decided  also  to  use  the  dredging  to  make 
land  upon  which  to  build  the  sheds.  This  settled  the 
question  of  disposing  of  the  dredging  matter,  and  also 
made  valuable  a part  of  the  harbor  which  was  previously 
worthless. 

The  only  method  by  which  large  vessels  anchoring  in 
the  bay  at  present  can  take  on  or  discharge  cargo  is  by 
lightering.  At  best,  and  when  the  bay  is  calm,  this  is 
a tedious  and  expensive  process,  and  during  rough 
weather  becomes  impossible.  Moreover,  during  the  prev- 
alence of  typhoons,  which  are  not  infrequent,  the  safety 
of  vessels  thus  situated  is  much  endangered.  On 
October  20,  1882,  a typhoon  drove  eleven  ships  and 
one  steamer  ashore  from  their  anchorage,  besides  dismast- 
ing another  vessel  and  causing  three  more  to  collide. 

The  entrance  to  the  Pasig  River  is  between  two  moles, 
which  run  out  westward,  respectively,  from  the  citadel  on 
the  south  bank  and  from  the  business  suburb  of  Binondo 
on  the  north  bank.  At  the  outer  extremity  of  the  north- 
ern mole  is  a lighthouse,  showing  a fixed  red  light, 
visible  eight  miles.  Vessels  drawing  up  to  thirteen  feet 
can  enter  the  river.  In  the  middle  of  1887  a few  electric 
lights  were  established  along  the  quays  from  the  river 
mouth  to  the  first  bridge,  and  one  light  on  the  bridge,  so 


14-8 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


that  steamers  can  enter  the  river  after  sunset.  The 
wharfage  is  wholly  occupied  by  steamers  and  sailing 
craft  trading  within  the  archipelago. 

As  may  be  readily  understood  from  the  foregoing,  the 
cost  of  doing  business  in  this  port  is  excessive  and  con- 
stitutes a very  heavy  burden  upon  commerce.  Freight 
rates  from  Manila  to  Hong  Kong,  a distance  of  about 
seven  hundred  miles  only,  are  as  much  as  and  sometimes 
more  than  from  San  Francisco  to  Hong  Kong,  a distance 
of  eight  thousand  miles.  In  spite  of  these  drawbacks, 
and  while  the  policy  of  the  United  States  with  reference 
to  these  islands  is  uncertain,  the  volume  of  trade  is 
steadily  growing,  and,  it  is  believed,  will  continue  to  do 
so  in  an  increased  ratio  with  the  influx  of  capital  and  the 
application  of  American  ideas  and  methods.  The  para- 
mount need,  therefore,  for  a thoroughly  protected  har- 
bor, with  sufficient  depth  of  water  to  accommodate  the 
largest  ships,  wherein  they  cannot  only  lie  in  safety,  but 
can  load  and  discharge  cargo  in  all  weathers,  is  ap- 
parent. 

The  dredging  is  done  by  a monster  hydraulic  dredge, 
delivering  twenty-five  thousand  cubic  yards  a day  and 
working  with  great  regularity.  The  breakwater  which  is 
to  protect  the  harbor  from  the  southwest  monsoon  has 
been  filled  to  a depth  of  thirty  feet,  so  that  it  is  visible  at 
high  water.  There  will  be  no  finer  harbor  in  the  Orient 
than  Manila  will  have  when  this  great  work  is  accom- 
plished. Two  millions  of  dollars  have  already  been  ap- 
propriated, and  it  will  probably  cost  two  millions  more, 
perhaps  three  millions,  before  everything  connected  with 
the  port  is  completed,  including  wharves  and  suitable 
warehouses.  However,  the  Government  will  have  one 


EXTENSION  OF  RAILROADS 


149 


hundred  and  sixty  acres  of  valuable  property  which  it 
may  sell  and  which  will  go  far  toward  recouping  the 
outlay.  The  tonnage  of  shipping  coming  into  this  har- 
bor has  increased  so  much  that  the  wisdom  of  the  engi- 
neers and  of  the  Commission  in  enlarging  the  harbor 
beyond  the  projected  lines  of  the  Spanish  engineers  and 
government  has  already  been  vindicated. 

After  Manila  has  been  provided  for,  the  Government 
will  undertake  to  improve  Iloilo  and  Cebu  harbors.  No 
one  has  yet  been  willing  to  make  a contract  for  the  work. 
The  company  engaged  in  the  Manila  harbor  improvement 
is  unable  at  present  to  undertake  additional  contracts, 
and  the  work  may  be  done  by  the  Government  with  its 
own  engineers  and  workmen. 

The  Government  has  advocated  earnestly  during  the 
last  two  or  three  }Tears  the  extension  of  railroads  through- 
out the  islands,  having  secured  surveys  to  parts  of  the 
country  which  seem  most  ready  for  development. 

The  Philippine  Commission  has  felt  that  a number  of 
short  lines  of  railroad  could  be  constructed  without  Gov- 
ernment aid,  but  that  there  are  other  lines  of  longer  and 
more  difficult  construction  which  could  hardly  be 
attempted  without  actual  financial  encouragement  from 
the  Government.  The  Commission  early  recommended 
that  a franchise  for  the  construction  of  a road  should  be 
granted  by  which  an  income  not  exceeding  four  per  cent., 
and  probably  not  exceeding  three  per  cent.,  should  be 
guaranteed  on  the  investment,  the  amount  of  which 
should  be  fixed  by  law.  In  tropical  countries  the  cost  of 
construction  and  maintenance  of  a railroad  is  much  less, 
as  compared  with  that  of  the  construction  and  mainte- 
nance of  a wagon  road,  than  in  the  temperate  zone.  The 


150 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


effect  of  the  rains  on  wagon  roads  is  so  destructive  that 
their  maintenance  each  year  is  almost  equal  to  their 
original  cost  of  construction  in  many  places  in  the  Phil- 
ippines where  good  road  material  is  difficult  to  obtain. 
It  becomes,  therefore,  more  important  in  these  islands  to 
have  railroads  than  to  build  wagon  roads,  and  it  is  be- 
lieved that  a stimulation  of  the  construction  of  railroads 
by  Government  guaranty  is  fully  warranted. 

The  experience  in  building  a wagon  road  to  Baguio  in 
the  Province  of  Benguet  is  suggestive.  The  result  of 
the  survey  showed  that  the  road  could  be  built  at  a cost 
of  $3,000  per  mile  upon  easy  grade,  and  that  there  were 
no  serious  engineering  difficulties  to  be  overcome.  The 
appropriation  asked  for  was  made,  but  it  was  soon  dis- 
covered that  the  estimate  was  much  too  small  and  that  it 
would  require  probably  twice  the  sum  orginally  estimated 
to  complete  it.  After  a large  amount  of  w'ork  had  been 
done  on  the  road  along  the  line  projected,  and  wdien  an 
early  completion  seemed  in  sight,  the  authorities  were 
much  disappointed  to  find  that,  ow’ing  to  the  shifting 
character  of  the  soil  and  rock  through  wdiich  it  ran,  the 
road  as  surveyed  was  impracticable.  In  several  places, 
where  the  road  ran  along  the  shoulders  of  the  mountains, 
after  heavy  rains  loose  rock  and  soil  w’ould  slide  down 
upon  it,  and  the  bottom  of  the  road  itself  would  fre- 
quently drop  out  into  the  valley  below.  More  careful 
investigation  showed  that  this  was  due  to  the  fact  that 
the  mountains  themselves  were  composed  of  small  broken 
rock  mixed  with  volcanic  mud  which,  wdien  cut  into  in 
building  the  roads,  caused  the  downward  movement  men- 
tioned. It  was  also  found,  upon  investigation  and  after 
experiment,  that  this  could  not  be  prevented  even  by 


DIFFICULTY  IN  ROAD-BUILDING  151 


building  heavy  retaining  walls,  because  the  roadbed  it- 
self when  saturated  with  heavy  rains  would  and  did  give 
way,  carrying  the  retaining  wyalls  with  it. 

Later  another  route  was  adopted  and  it  wras  decided 
to  build  a substantial  road  along  the  banks  of  the  Bued 
River  above  the  flood  line ; but  this  route  involved  the 
expenditure  of  at  least  a million  dollars,  as  much  of  the 
route  runs  through  solid  rock.  The  Commission  deter- 
mined that,  notwithstanding  the  great  outlay  of  money 
involved,  the  accruing  benefits  warranted  the  expenditure 
and  directed  the  work  to  proceed.  It  has  been  prose- 
cuted under  many  difficulties  in  procuring  both  labor  and 
competent  supervising  engineers.  The  road  is  now  rap- 
idly approaching  completion.  It  was  built  upon  com- 
paratively easy  grades  and  of  a proper  width,  so  that 
it  may  be  used  for  an  ordinary  highway  or  for  an  elec- 
tric or  steam  road.  Three  thousand  men  have  been 
engaged  at  a time  upon  the  work,  twenty-five  hundred 
of  whom  are  Filipinos. 


CHAPTER  XVII 


AMERICAN  ARMY:  HUMANE 


HE  American  Army  is  the  most  humane  in  the 


world,”  said  an  English  official  in  Manila,  who 
had  closely  observed  its  operations  during  the  years 
1898-1901.  Sometimes  it  seemed  to  the  soldiers  as  if 
their  officers  were  too  humane. 

“When  we  were  guarding  the  water-works  near  Manila 
we  were  forbidden  to  fire  upon  the  insurgents  whatever 
they  might  do  to  us,”  said  a soldier  returning  to  the 
Philippines  with  the  writer  on  the  Logan.  “One  night 
they  fired  upon  us  and  we  returned  the  fire,  with  the 
usual  effect — they  ran  to  cover  and  their  officers  com- 
plained of  us  to  the  commanding  officers  in  Manila.  In 
an  hour  we  received  a severe  reprimand  from  headquar- 
ters : 

“ ‘Explain  your  action  in  firing  upon  the  Filipinos. 
Have  I not  given  orders  that  you  must  not  fire  until  you 
receive  directions  from  this  office?’ 

“The  commanding  officer  was  right,  of  course,”  added 
the  soldier  with  a smile,  “but  lie  had  given  orders  to  the 


Opinion  of  an  English  Officer — Orders  Given  to  only 
one  of  the  two  Opposing  Forces — Defending  the 
Water  Cure — Praise  from  President  Roosevelt — 
Strength  of  the  Military  in  the  Islands. 


AMIGOS  NOT  FAITHFUL 


153 


soldiers  on  only  one  side  of  the  river.  He  should  have 
been  impartial  in  his  favors.” 

“It  was  very  trying  in  the  early  days,”  said  a captain 
of  cavalry,  “to  feel  perfectly  sure  that  the  gentlemen 
who  on  Sundays  or  feast  days  came  into  our  fort  lines  as 
‘amigos’  (friends),  dressed  in  their  best,  were  mentally 
measuring  our  strength  and  getting  points  which  they 
used  against  us  before  the  next  week  was  over.  Their 
wives  coming  in  with  vegetables  and  other  products  to 
sell  were  also  acting  as  spies.  Our  men  would  be  riding 
over  one  of  the  country  roads  when  a bolo  would  come 
whizzing  through  the  bamboo  grove.  One  of  the  men 
would  fall  from  his  horse  dead.  His  companions  setting 
out  immediately  in  pursuit  of  the  murderer  would  find  a 
very  benevolent  looking  Filipino  cutting  firewood. 
Morally  certain  though  they  were  that  he  had  killed  their 
friend,  they  could  not  prove  it  and  he  escaped.” 

With  strong  feelings,  before  he  reached  the  Philip- 
pines, against  the  “water  cure”  by  American  soldiers,  the 
writer  was  surprised  to  hear  a clergyman,  an  Army  chap- 
lain and  an  Association  secretary  defend  this  form  of 
dealing  with  certain  classes  of  Filipinos. 

“While  the  ‘water  cure’  may  be  overdone,  and  should 
never  be  allowed  without  proper  medical  inspection,” 
said  the  clergyman,  “I  think  it  had  its  legitimate  place 
in  the  recent  war  here.  Take  Iloilo  as  an  illustration. 
The  leading  men  all  became  ‘amigos’  as  soon  as  the 
American  troops  landed;  they  were  under  the  protection 
of  our  flag  and  professed  a suspicious  amount  of  loy- 
alty. At  the  same  time  there  were  outbreaks  all  around 
the  place.  American  outposts  were  attacked  and  many 
soldiers  killed.  When  an  attack  was  near  a village,  if  it 


154 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


were  thought  that  the  people  were  responsible,  the  sol- 
diers would  burn  the  village  by  way  of  punishment  and 
warning.  In  a day  or  two  another  outbreak  would  take 
place  perhaps  miles  away.  Finally  it  was  pretty  clearly 
proved  that  one  of  the  loudest  professors  of  friendship 
for  the  Americans  was  the  chief  instigator  of  these  up- 
risings, hoping  to  keep  them  up  until  the  Americans 
were  forced  off  the  islands.  I did  not  see  this  professor 
of  friendship  punished,  but  I was  told  that  he  was 
treated  to  a greater  amount  of  water  than  he  was  accus- 
tomed to  drinking;  it  may  have  been  salt  and  therefore 
disagreeable,  but  it  did  not  hurt  him  permanently.  The 
effect  was  magical.  The  outbreaks  ceased;  the  lives  of 
many  American  soldiers  and  officers  were  preserved  and 
the  lives  and  property  of  the  natives  were  saved.  So  far 
as  we  could  see  at  the  time,  it  was  better  that  one  offend- 
ing hypocrite  should  suffer  physical  discomfort  for  a 
few  moments  than  that  scores  of  lives  should,  at  his 
instigation,  be  sacrificed.” 

“One  priest  died  under  the  ‘water  cure,’  ” said  the 
chaplain  when  discussing  the  subject,  “but  by  the  rules 
of  every  civilized  army  he  ought  to  have  died  before  he 
was  made  to  drink  the  water.  Professing  friendship  for 
us,  he  led  deliberately  a squad  of  American  soldiers  into 
an  ambush,  where  the  majority  were  killed.  The  traitor 
should  have  been  court-martialed,  perhaps,  and  then  shot, 
or  shot  without  a trial,  so  clearly  was  it  known  that  he 
had  planned  the  ambush  and  was  responsible  for  the 
murder  of  trusting  men.” 

Whatever  excesses  may  be  charged  against  individual 
officers  or  men,  the  testimony  of  the  English  observer, 
given  at  the  beginning  of  this  chapter,  was  well  sane- 


FEW  SOLDIERS  INTOXICATED 


155 


tioned  by  statements  made  by  civilians  in  the  Philippines. 
Few  enlisted  men  were  seen  by  the  writer  under  the  influ- 
ence of  liquor ; none  outside  of  Manila.  Only  two  officers 
were  seen  intoxicated,  and  one  of  them,  a major,  wTas 
so  drunk  on  an  inter-island  transport  that  some  of  the 
women  passengers  were  in  terror;  a captain’s  wife  placed 
a fierce-looking  revolver  under  her  pillow,  as  she  could 
not  lock  her  door.  This  fact  she  took  pains  to  have 
known;  she  confided,  however,  to  one  of  her  friends,  that 
while  she  should  not  hesitate  to  draw  the  revolver  if  the 
major  annoyed  her,  there  was  not  a cartridge  in  it,  nor 
did  she  have  one  with  her.  When  the  major  reached  the 
port  to  which  he  was  assigned  he  was  taken  to  the  hos- 
pital suffering  from  delirium  tremens. 

President  Roosevelt,  on  July  4,  1902,  issued  an  order 
to  the  Army  of  the  United  States,  in  which  these  para- 
graphs appear  concerning  the  soldiers  in  the  Philippines : 

“The  President  thanks  the  officers  and  enlisted  men 
of  the  Army  in  the  Philippines,  both  regulars  and  volun- 
teers, for  the  courage  and  fortitude,  the  indomitable 
spirit  and  loyal  devotion  with  which  they  have  put  down 
and  ended  the  great  insurrection  which  has  raged 
throughout  the  archipelago  against  the  lawful  sover- 
eignty and  just  authority  of  the  United  States.  The 
task  was  peculiarly  difficult  and  trying.  They  were  re- 
quired at  first  to  overcome  organized  resistance  of 
superior  numbers,  well  equipped  with  modern  arms  of 
precision,  intrenched  in  an  unknown  country  of  mountain 
defiles,  jungles  and  swamps,  apparently  capable  of  in- 
terminable defense.  When  this  resistance  had  been 
overcome  they  were  required  to  crush  out  a general  sys- 
tem of  guerrilla  warfare  conducted  among  a people 


156 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


speaking  unknown  tongues,  from  whom  it  was  almost 
impossible  to  obtain  the  information  necessary  for  suc- 
cessful pursuit  or  to  guard  against  surprise  and  am- 
bush. 

“The  enemies  by  whom  they  were  surrounded  were 
regardless  of  all  obligations  of  good  faith  and  of  all  the 
limitations  which  humanity  has  imposed  upon  civilized 
warfare.  Bound  themselves  by  the  laws  of  war,  our 
soldiers  were  called  upon  to  meet  every  device  of  unscru- 
pulous treachery  and  to  contemplate  without  reprisal  the 
infliction  of  barbarous  cruelties  upon  their  comrades  and 
friendly  natives.  They  were  instructed,  while  punishing 
armed  resistance,  to  conciliate  the  friendship  of  the 
peaceful,  yet  had  to  do  with  a population  among  whom 
it  was  impossible  to  distinguish  friend  from  foe,  and  who 
in  countless  instances  used  a false  appearance  of  friend- 
ship for  ambush  and  assassination.  They  were  obliged 
to  deal  with  problems  of  communication  and  transporta- 
tion in  a country  without  roads  and  frequently  made 
impassable  by  torrential  rains.  They  were  weakened  by 
tropical  heat  and  tropical  disease.  Widely  scattered  over 
a great  archipelago,  extending  a thousand  miles  north 
to  south,  the  gravest  responsibilities,  involving  the  life 
or  death  of  their  commands,  frequently  devolved  upon 
young  and  inexperienced  officers  beyond  the  reach  of 
specific  orders  or  advice. 

“Under  all  these  adverse  circumstances  the  Army  of 
the  Philippines  has  accomplished  its  task  rapidly  and 
completely.  In  more  than  two  thousand  combats,  great 
and  small,  within  three  years,  it  has  exhibited  unvarying 
courage  and  resolution.  . . . With  admirable  good 

temper,  sympathy  and  loyalty  to  American  ideals,  its 


Insurgents  Surrendering  to  the  American  Army 


THE  CANTEEN  QUESTION 


157 


commanding  generals  have  j oined  with  the  civilian  agents 
of  the  Government  in  healing  the  wounds  of  war  and 
assuring  to  the  people  of  the  Philippines  the  blessings 
of  peace  and  prosperity.  Individual  liberty,  protection 
of  personal  rights,  civil  order,  public  instruction,  and 
religious  freedom  have  followed  its  footsteps.  It  has 
added  honor  to  the  flag  which  it  defended,  and  has  justi- 
fied increased  confidence  in  the  future  of  the  American 
people,  w'hose  soldiers  do  not  shrink  from  labor  or  death, 
yet  love  liberty  and  peace.” 

The  canteen  question  was  the  topic  of  conversation 
many  times  between  Army  officers,  soldiers,  civilians  and 
the  writer.  Almost  without  exception  the  canteen  was 
favored  by  the  officers  and  men;  and  the  temperance 
sentiment  in  the  United  States  that  killed  the  canteen 
was  unsparingly  condemned  as  being  based  upon  igno- 
rance of  conditions  in  the  Army.  No  liquor  is  sold  nowT 
within  two  miles  of  an  Army  post,  and  there  is  little 
opportunity  for  securing  it  except  bj7  an  absence  that 
usually  results  in  the  offender  finding  himself  in  the 
guard-house.  There  is  little  doubt  that  the  absence  of 
the  canteen  increases  the  number  of  prisoners  in  a regi- 
ment. So  far  as  records  go,  the  company  or  regiment 
has  a lower  standard  than  it  would  have  if  light  liquors 
were  allowed  in  a canteen  under  Army  control.  Men 
accustomed  to  drinking  stimulants  before  entering  the 
Army,  feeling  a desire  or  possibly  a craving  for  beer  or 
whiskey,  angered  perhaps  by  the  attempt  of  the  Govern- 
ment to  prevent  their  getting  it,  leave  the  post  without 
permission,  absent  themselves  from  roll-call  if  necessary, 
and  take  their  punishment  philosophically. 

But  there  is  another  side,  according  to  statements  made 


158 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


by  those  who  are  not  interested  in  the  canteen  sales. 
Many  men  not  accustomed  to  drinking  before  enlisting, 
or  at  least  not  constant  drinkers,  are  able  to  restrain 
themselves  now  far  better  than  they  did  before  the  can- 
teen was  abolished;  before,  with  temptations  to  drink 
ever  present,  they  helped,  as  did  the  heavy  drinkers,  to 
swell  the  receipts  for  the  canteen.  The  nature  of  an 
Army  canteen  must  be  understood  in  order  to  judge 
wisely  on  the  merits  of  the  question.  No  spirituous 
liquors — whiskey,  rum,  etc. — were  sold  in  a canteen. 
Beer,  cigars  and  mineral  waters  were  sold  by  the  soldier 
detailed  for  that  purpose.  Many  articles  besides  those 
mentioned  were  also  on  sale — clothing,  stationery,  candy 
and  other  delicacies.  The  profits  from  sales  belonged  to 
the  company,  and  from  the  fund  thus  collected  many 
delicacies  found  their  way  to  the  tables  of  officers  and 
men.  As  the  profit  on  beer  was  greater  than  that  on 
most  articles,  the  heavy  beer  consumer  was  a “public  bene- 
factor.” 

The  conclusion  reached  by  the  writer  after  a study  of 
conditions  without  the  canteen,  and  the  testimony  of 
those  in  and  out  of  Army  life  who  have  seen  the  working 
of  the  canteen,  is  that  the  canteen  should  be  restored  to 
the  soldiers,  but  that  beer  is  not  necessary  to  its  success, 
and  that  the  present  Army  regulations  should  be  contin- 
ued, no  beer  or  other  intoxicant  to  be  sold  within  two 
miles  of  an  Army  post.  If  that  does  not  seem  feasible, 
the  Government  may  wisely  give  still  further  aid  to  the 
effort  of  the  Young  Men’s  Christian  Association  to  pro- 
vide reading  and  writing  rooms,  soda-water  stands  and 
lunch  counters  at  established  posts. 

In  1900  there  were  in  the  Philippine  Islands  2,367 


REDUCING  THE  ARMY 


159 


American  officers  and  71,727  enlisted  men;  in  1901  the 
number  had  been  reduced  to  1,111  officers  and  42,128 
men;  in  1903  to  843  officers  and  14,667  men,  and  in 
September,  1904,  the  Secretary  of  War  was  considering 
the  wisdom  of  withdrawing  three  more  regiments,  leaving 
an  average  of  one  American  soldier  to  every  600  Fil- 
ipinos. The  actual  strength  of  the  Regular  Army, 
including  those  in  Cuba,  Porto  Rico,  the  Hawaiian 
Islands,  China  and  Alaska,  as  well  as  those  in  the  United 
States  and  the  Philippines  in  November,  1903,  was  less 
than  60,000  men  and  officers,  considerably  less  than  the 
number  in  the  Philippines  alone  three  years  before. 
Those  who  fear  that  our  country  is  to  be  afflicted  with 
the  spirit  of  militarism  will  read  with  satisfaction  that 
the  net  decrease  during  the  year  1903  was  11,978.  The 
policy  of  drawing  the  soldiers  together  in  Army  posts  in 
the  Philippines  and  removing  them  from  the  temptations 
of  city  life  is  to  be  commended.  It  is  believed  that  in 
this  way  their  discipline,  health  and  opportunities  for 
instruction  will  be  improved  and  the  cost  of  maintenance 
will  be  decreased.  Such  smaller  posts  as  are  required  will 
be  generally,  and  now  to  a considerable  extent,  occupied 
by  the  Philippine  Scouts.  In  conversation  with  the 
writer,  Brigadier-General  George  W.  Davis,  in  command 
of  the  Army  of  the  Philippines  until  relieved  by  General 
Wade,  laid  great  stress  upon  the  efficiency  of  the  Fili- 
pinos, both  as  Scouts  and  Constabulary.  There  has  been 
talk  of  combining  the  two  native  forces  and  forming  a 
new  Army,  after  the  manner  of  the  native  regiments  in 
India,  but  it  will  be  some  time — perhaps  some  years — 
before  the  change  will  be  brought  about  or  even  seriously 
contemplated  by  the  authorities.  The  question  was  raised 


160 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


in  the  interview  whether  it  was  the  part  of  wisdom  to 
make  the  proportion  of  armed  natives  so  large,  prac- 
tically fifty  per  cent,  of  the  armed  force. 

“History  proves,”  said  General  Davis,  “that  the 
best  soldiers  for  dealing  with  the  black  man,  the  red 
man,  the  yellow  man,  and  the  brown  man,  are  the 
black  man,  the  red  man,  the  yellow  man,  and  the  brown 
man.” 

“Does  not  the  experience  of  Spain  arming  the  natives 
who  later  fought  against  Spain  militate  against  this 
argument?”  said  the  writer. 

“Not  at  all.  Spain  had  two  kinds  of  natives  in  her 
Army ; one  class  were  the  prisoners  who  were  put  into  the 
Army  as  a punishment,  and  political  offenders  who  were 
also  made  to  serve  Spain  against  their  countrymen. 
These  became  easily  the  enemies  of  the  country  which 
forced  them  into  this  position  against  their  will.  The 
other  class  of  the  native  Army  under  Spanish  rule  was 
the  Guardia  Civil,  composed  of  well-meaning  natives, 
but  their  wages  were  far  behind  and  they  were  angry  at 
the  Government  for  this  reason.  You  can  readily  see, 
therefore,  that  Spain  had  little  to  depend  upon  when  the 
issue  came.” 

“But  would  there  not  be  danger  of  the  native  forces 
under  American  rule  revolting  if  a grievance,  real  or 
supposed,  should  arise?” 

“With  the  treatment  that  the  Americans  show  the 
Filipinos  there  is  little  if  any  danger  of  such  an  ex- 
igency ever  arising.  We  can  trust  the  natives  with  whom 
we  deal  fairly.” 

From  the  last  report  of  General  Davis  some  interesting 
statements  are  taken  referring  to  the  government  of  the 


The  Native  Constabulary 


MOROS  A CLASS  BY  THEMSELVES  161 


country  inhabited  by  non-Christians,  in  Mindanao  and 
the  neighboring  islands,  where  the  General  was  in  com- 
mand before  coming  to  Manila.  He  says: 

“There  is  no  civilized  inhabitant  of  the  Philippine 
Islands — American,  Spanish  or  Filipino — who  would 
even  suggest  that  the  Moros  are  capable  of  civilized  and 
enlightened  self-government,  for  a government  of  law — 
i.e.,  regulated  liberty — is  absolutely  unknown  to  and  un- 
thinkable by  them.  The  Koran  furnishes  a religious 
code,  and  combines  with  it  a moral  and  secular  one.  It 
is  the  proud  boast  of  the  Mussulman  that  a people  who 
live  in  accordance  with  the  teachings  of  the  Prophet  have 
no  need  for  other  codes,  constitutions,  charters  and  bills 
of  rights ; for  they  say  that  a rule  to  regulate  every 
possible  human  action,  or  remedy  every  wrong  or  injus- 
tice, is  to  be  found  in  the  inspired  writings  of  Mohammed, 
as  recorded  in  the  Koran. 

“With  such  a class  of  people  it  is  useless  to  quote  the 
bill  of  rights  or  to  assert  the  sin  and  wrong  of  slavery. 
The  Sultan,  and  Datto,  and  Pandita  will  not  for  an 
instant  tolerate  a suggestion  that  their  royal  and  priestly 
functions  could  be  taken  away  or  assigned  to  another  by 
or  through  some  process  we  call  ‘voting,’  a word  as 
meaningless  to  them  as  the  act  would  be  absurd.  They 
know  that  from  time  immemorial  there  have  been  over- 
lords  and  priests,  that  the  present  incumbents  have  inher- 
ited their  prerogatives,  and  the  right  of  succession  had 
never  been  questioned. 

“Americans  have  come  here  to  teach  and  convince 
these  people  that  all  men  are  born  free  and  equal,  and 
that  there  is  no  such  thing  as  inherited  caste  or  privilege. 
The  working  out  of  this  doctrine  and  the  enforcement  of 


162 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


it  means  the  upsetting  of  the  whole  system  of  tribal  and 
patriarchal  government  among  the  Moros,  but  they  do 
not  yet  fully  realize  this.  They  ask  us  what  we  wish — 
why  we  have  come  among  them — and  what  they  are  to 
do?  Hitherto  it  has  not  been  possible  to  answer  these 
questions,  and  they  do  not  understand  us  in  the  least. 
All  we  have  said  and  could  say  is,  ‘Keep  quiet  and  wait.’  ” 


CHAPTER  XVIII 


NATIVE  GUARDIANS  OF  PEACE 


HEN  the  rebellion  in  the  Philippines  was  put  down 


in  1901  and  its  leader  had  sworn  allegiance  to 


the  American  flag,  the  authorities  began  at  once  to  form 
plans  for  reducing  the  military  forces  in  the  islands. 
While  the  Government  believes  that  the  American  soldier 
is  unsurpassed  in  war,  as  it  is  understood  by  civilized 
people,  it  does  not  think  that  he  makes  the  best  police- 
man, especially  among  a people  whose  language  and 
customs  are  new  and  strange  to  him,  and  should  not  be 
put  to  that  use  when  a better  substitute  is  at  hand.  This 
is  found  in  the  natives  themselves,  and  more  than  twenty- 
two  thousand  Filipinos  are  aiding  the  fifteen  thousand 
American  soldiers  in  preserving  peace  throughout  the 
islands.  The  American  troops  who  formerly  numbered 
more  than  seventy  thousand  men  and  occupied  about  six 
hundred  posts  are  now  in  less  than  one  hundred  posts, 
leaving  the  main  part  of  the  islands  to  be  cared  for  by 
the  Filipinos.  The  native  guardians  of  the  peace  are: 
(1)  Municipal  Police;  (2)  Constabulary;  (3)  Scouts. 

The  Municipal  Police  are  appointed,  maintained  and 


Filipino  Police,  Scouts  and  Constabulary — The  Na- 
tional Guard  of  the  Archipelago — Native  and  Ameri- 
can Soldiers  Quell  an  Uprising — Giving  Poison 
because  He  was  Told  to  Do  So. 


164 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


directed  by  local  authorities ; and  they  may  be  detailed 
for  work  outside  of  their  own  towns.  The  work  of  the 
Police  Force  of  Manila  under  Captain  Harding,  and 
especially  that  of  the  detective  bureau  under  Captain 
Trowbridge,  has  fallen  within  the  observation  of  General 
Henry  T.  Allen,  the  Chief  of  the  Philippine  Constabu- 
lary, who  says  that  it  gives  him  “pleasure  to  commend 
the  efficiency  of  this  force  as  well  as  the  good  field  work 
done  b}r  detachments  put  at  his  disposition  by  the  Chief 
of  Police  of  Manila  and  commanded  by  Captains  Green 
and  Luthi.”  The  Municipal  Police  forces  throughout  the 
islands  comprise  10  captains,  171  lieutenants,  688  ser- 
geants, 1,181  corporals,  and  7,873  privates,  a total  of 
9,925. 

The  Constabulary  is  a comprehensive  police  organiza- 
tion, separate  and  distinct  from  the  Army,  having  for  its 
head  an  officer  of  rank  and  pay  commensurate  with  the 
importance  of  the  position,  with  a sufficient  number  of 
assistants  and  subordinates  to  exercise  thorough  direction 
and  control.  It  sustains  the  relation  to  the  Army  in  the 
Philippines  that  the  National  Guard  does  to  the  Regular 
Army  in  this  country.  This  organization  embraces 
every  township  in  the  islands,  and  is  so  constituted  that 
the  police  of  several  contiguous  townships  can  be  quickly 
mobilized.  The  chief  officers  of  this  organization  are 
Americans,  but  the  men  and  some  of  the  subordinate  offi- 
cers are  natives  who  are  to  serve  in  their  own  provinces, 
with  proper  provision  for  their  advancement  as  a reward 
for  loyal  and  efficient  service.  The  Constabulary  numbers 
330  officers  and  6,805  men,  occupying  212  stations.  The 
Constabulary  is  under  the  control  of  the  general  Govern- 
ment at  Manila,  but  the  Governor  of  a province  may 


General  Henry  T.  Ai.i.en 


VALUE  OF  THE  SCOUTS 


165 


summon  the  Constabulary  of  his  province  to  aid  him  in 
maintaining  peace  if  the  Municipal  Police  fail  at  any 
place,  or  if  ladrones  appear  in  his  province. 

With  the  advancing  implantation  of  Civil  Government 
the  Constabulary  has  been  called  upon  to  assist  in  various 
works  extraneous  to  the  duties  laid  down  for  it  in  the 
organic  act.  Constabulary  officers  in  certain  provinces 
are  acting  as  postmasters ; in  others  they  are  charged 
with  guarding  jails,  expediting  mails,  maintenance  of 
quarantine,  transferring  prisoners  between  provinces  and 
from  outlying  provinces  to  Manila,  supplying  commis- 
saries to  insular  and  provincial  officials,  and  maintenance 
of  telegraph  and  telephone  lines. 

The  creation  of  a native  force  to  release  a large  part 
of  the  American  Army  from  the  necessity  of  remaining 
in  the  Philippines  was  recommended  in  1900  by  Secretary 
Root  of  the  War  Department.  Authority  was  granted 
the  following  year,  Congress  empowering  the  President 
to  proceed  in  his  discretion  b}f  successive  steps,  beginning 
with  a simple  organization  of  Scouts  and  following  by 
the  more  complicated  and  fully  officered  organization  of 
the  Regular  Army.  The  Scouts  are  officered  by  Ameri- 
cans and  are  under  the  directions  of  the  Military  Com- 
mander of  the  Philippines.  Unlike  the  Constabulary, 
the  Scouts,  like  the  native  regiments  in  India,  usually 
serve  in  provinces  other  than  those  in  which  they  live. 
In  December,  1903,  there  were  100  officers  and  1,978  men 
in  the  Scout  organization. 

In  speaking  of  the  value  of  the  Scouts,  Secretary 
Root  said  in  1902  in  his  report  on  the  Army:  “They 
enable  us  to  reduce  the  force  of  American  troops  in  the 
Philippines  more  rapidly  than  we  could  without  them, 


166 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


and  their  knowledge  of  the  country,  language  and  the 
ways  of  the  people  make  them  especially  valuable  in 
hunting  down  ladrones,  which  for  a good  while  to  come 
will  be  an  urgent  business.  The  relations  between  this 
body  of  Scouts,  maintained  at  the  expense  of  the  United 
States,  and  the  Insular  Constabulary,  maintained  at  the 
expense  of  the  Philippine  Government,  will  have  to  be 
worked  out  hereafter  when  we  have  had  longer  experience 
of  the  working  of  the  two  forces  under  peaceful  condi- 
tions, and  know  better  what  revenues  can  be  relied  upon 
by  the  Insular  Government  under  like  conditions.  Both 
forces  are  now  useful  agents  in  maintaining  order. 
Whether  that  shall  be  ultimately  accomplished  through 
one  force  or  the  other,  or  both,  can  hardly  as  yet  be 
profitably  discussed.” 

Sometimes  the  Scouts  and  the  Constabulary  work  to- 
gether. In  1903  twenty-nine  companies  of  Scouts  were 
turned  over  to  General  Allen  by  Governor  Taft  for  duty 
in  suppressing  disorder,  or  putting  down  uprisings  in 
various  provinces,  as  necessity  arose  for  their  assistance. 
It  is  stated  officially  that  the  greater  number  of  Scouts 
turned  over  to  the  Chief  of  the  Constabulary  were  re- 
quired in  Tagalo  provinces  or  in  the  provinces  where  the 
Tagalos  have  caused  disturbance. 

General  Allen  says  that,  although  it  is  somewhat  anom- 
alous for  one  department  or  Bureau,  in  this  case  the 
Military,  to  organize,  equip  and  maintain  an  armed  force 
to  be  utilized  in  active  operation  by  another,  in  this  case 
the  Constabulary,  he  wishes  to  emphasize  the  fact  that 
the  co-operation  of  all  concerned  has  been  so  complete 
that  there  has  been  scarcely  a suspicion  of  friction. 
Credit  for  this  is  largely  due,  he  says,  to  the  instructions 


SPEEDY  AND  EFFECTIVE  ACTION  167 


given  by  the  Commanding  General  of  the  Division  and 
the  several  Department  Commanders. 

At  one  time  in  1903  Constabulary  and  Scouts  and 
American  soldiers  joined  in  putting  down  an  uprising 
which  had  proved  too  severe  for  the  small  Constabulary 
force  in  the  province.  In  Surigao,  in  North  Mindanao, 
a Constabulary  garrison  was  surprised,  Captain  Clark 
killed  and  a relatively  large  number  of  guns  and  revolvers 
secured  by  a band  of  outlaws  led  by  long-term  convicts. 
General  Allen  says : “The  outlaws  of  Misamis  in  the 

adjoining  province  hoped  to  make  a coalition  with  the 
Surigao  band.  Both  provinces  were  undoubtedly  agi- 
tated by  exaggerated  reports  from  the  Tagalog  prov- 
inces. The  killing  of  Captain  Overton,  U.  S.  Cavalry, 
in  the  mountains  back  of  Cagayan,  Misamis,  occurred 
about  this  time,  and  the  fanatical  mountaineers  there  and 
other  ignorant  classes  elsewhere  had  been  made  to  believe 
that  American  troops  could  not  or  would  not  be  employed 
against  them.  To  disillusion  the  people  in  this  respect 
and  for  other  reasons  it  was  decided  to  turn  over  these 
provinces  to  the  Commanding  General,  Department  of 
the  Visayans,  at  first  General  Lee,  afterwards  General 
Wint.  The  Constabulary  forces  of  the  two  provinces 
and  detachments  sent  from  other  provinces  there  were 
duly  ordered  to  report  to  the  Commanding  General  for 
duty,  but  continued  to  be  subsisted  and  maintained 
through  Constabulary  channels. 

“The  speedy  and  effective  action  taken  prevented  the 
Surigao  bands  from  reaching  Misamis.  The  latter 
province  was  quickly  brought  to  terms,  but  Colonel 
Myer,  of  the  Eleventh  Infantry,  in  charge  of  operations 
in  Surigao,  had  no  easy  task  in  recapturing  the  outlaws 


168 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


and  guns  in  the  very  difficult  interior,  in  spite  of  a liberal 
quota  of  forces — Americans,  Scouts  and  Constabulary. 
Success  was  attained,  however,  the  American  troops  with- 
drawn entirely,  and  the  provinces  returned  to  their  normal 
status.  Other  than  in  General  Bell’s  brigade  during  the 
Malvar  campaign,  and  then  in  only  a very  limited  degree, 
this  was  the  first  realization  of  a combined  operation  of 
the  three  military  elements  in  the  Philippines.” 

General  Allen,  the  Chief  of  the  Constabulary,  is  pe- 
culiarly fitted  to  grapple  with  the  difficult  problems  to 
which  he  has  been  assigned — to  train  natives  to  preserve 
order  in  their  own  provinces,  constables  in  name,  but  sol- 
diers in  fact  and  in  discipline.  After  almost  daily  con- 
tact for  many  weeks  with  officers  of  the  Constabulary  in 
Manila  and  in  the  other  provinces,  the  writer  has  only 
words  of  warm  commendation  for  this  branch  of  Govern- 
ment service.  Early  in  his  stay  in  Manila  he  began  a 
careful  study  of  this  department,  since  so  many  other 
problems  depend  upon  the  solution  of  the  question : “Must 
we  always  maintain  a large  army  in  the  Philippines?” 
General  Allen  was  in  the  northern  part  of  Luzon  at  the 
time  and  Colonel  Scott,  the  Assistant  Chief,  was  in 
charge  of  the  Department,  with  Captain  F.  E.  Cofren, 
the  efficient  adjutant,  assisting  him.  The  Manila  detach- 
ment was  seen  on  review,  then  marching  in  the  Fourth  of 
July  parade,  winning  well-deserved  applause  as  it 
passed  before  Governor  Taft  and  General  Davis,  the 
reviewing  officers. 

In  seven  provinces  north,  east  and  south  of  Manila, 
the  Constabulary  headquarters  were  visited,  the  com- 
manders interviewed,  and  Americans  and  Filipinos  not  in 
Government  employ  questioned.  The  impression  gained 


SILENT  SYMPATHY  SHOWN 


169 


in  Manila  of  the  excellent  work  of  the  Constabulary 
was  deepened  as  one  went  from  post  to  post  and  saw  the 
fine  order  and  efficient  work  of  these  “little  brown  broth- 
ers.” The  Governors  of  nearly  all  the  provinces  visited 
were  asked  specifically  regarding  the  work  of  this  Peace 
Army,  and  without  exception  they  were  unanimous  in 
praise  of  it.  The  officer  in  charge  of  the  Constabulary 
post  in  one  province  did  not  hesitate  to  declare  that  the 
ladrones  who  caused  him  so  much  trouble  had  at  least  the 
silent  sympathy  of  the  Governor— a stronger  word  than 
“silent”  was  used  by  the  officer,  and  his  condemnation  of 
the  Governor  was  shared  by  every  American  in  the  prov- 
inces with  whom  the  writer  conversed.  This  was  the  only 
provincial  Governor  accused  by  Americans  with  being 
dislo}Tal  to  the  American  Government.  This  exception 
was  worthy  of  note;  as  the  loj’al  Governors  found  in  the 
Constabulary  their  strongest  allies  in  maintaining  order 
— in  this  case  the  Constabulary  put  down  disorder  in 
spite  of  the  Governor. 

In  the  guard-house  at  Tarlac  we  saw  among  the  pris- 
oners one  man  who  was  of  special  interest  because  of  the 
boldness  of  the  crime  which  he  had  committed  a few  days 
previous.  A Constabulary  company  was  to  pass  through 
the  town  of  which  he  was  the  teniente — the  vice-presi- 
dent, he  might  be  termed.  When  the  party  arrived  he 
invited  the  members  to  luncheon.  The  officer  and  one 
soldier  had  friends  to  whom  they  went,  but  the  rest  of 
the  company,  eight  in  number,  accepted  the  teniente’s 
hospitality.  When  the  officer  with  his  companion  re- 
turned to  the  place  where  the  dinner  was  given,  he 
was  surprised  to  find  several  soldiers  on  the  ground 
writhing  in  pain  and  all  the  rest  exhibiting  signs  of 


170 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


sickness.  Quickly  comprehending  the  situation,  he  lifted 
his  rifle  and  placed  the  teniente  and  all  the  residents  who 
were  present  under  arrest.  He  then  had  the  soldiers,  who 
were  extremely  ill,  taken  to  a house,  where  remedies  were 
given  and  relief  secured. 

The  singular  part  of  the  confession  which  the  teniente 
made  consists  of  his  statement  in  answer  to  the  question : 

“Why  did  you  poison  the  soldiers?” 

“Salvador  told  me  to  do  it.”  He  explained  that  he 
had  poisoned  the  drinking  w'ater  in  order  to  stupefy  the 
men  that  he  might  secure  their  guns  and  ammunition  for 
Salvador.  This  Adamite  answer,  while  not  satisfactory 
to  the  officers  of  the  law,  led  to  a new  search  for  Felipe 
Salvador,  the  leader  of  ladrones  in  the  province.  Sal- 
vador professed  to  exercise  miraculous  and  supernatural 
power,  and  had  been  attempting  to  rouse  the  people  of 
his  neighborhood  to  resistance  to  lawful  authority  and 
association  with  him  in  a kind  of  religious  rite.  Its 
religious  character,  however,  did  not  prevent  Salvador 
and  his  friends  from  constituting  a ladrone  band  preying 
on  the  neighboring  country.  Salvador  made  one  or 
two  raids  on  towns,  but  he  was  punished  severely  in  sev- 
eral engagements  with  the  Constabulary,  and  later  with- 
drew' into  an  obscure  part  of  Nueva  Ecija. 

When  the  teniente  was  made  to  realize  that  his  act, 
under  Spanish  law,  which  is  still  in  force,  might  mean  a 
life  sentence  in  prison,  if  not  execution  on  the  charge  of 
attempted  murder,  he  left  no  stone  unturned  to  secure 
the  capture  of  Salvador.  In  this  effort  he  was  aided  by 
all  his  relatives  and  friends,  who  were  willing  to  sacrifice 
Salvador  in  order  that  the  teniente  himself  might  escape 
a severe  sentence. 


A CHILD  LIKE  ANSWER 


171 


The  conduct  of  the  teniente  illustrates  a phase  of  Fil- 
ipino character.  The  man  had  no  gi'udge  against  the 
members  of  the  Constabulary,  and  he  did  not  really  wish 
them  harm;  but  to  please  a friend,  or  at  the  command 
of  a leader,  he  was  willing  to  injure  men  who  had  never 
harmed  him  and  with  whom  he  was  in  most  cordial  rela- 
tions. His  child-like  answer  exhibited  a striking  Filipino 
characteristic : 

“Salvador  told  me  to  do  it.” 

It  is  said  that  in  the  days  of  the  insurrection  Filipinos 
friendly  to  the  Americans  would  come  into  the  camp  and 
ask  an  officer,  whom  they  could  trust,  how  much  he  was 
willing  to  pay  to  have  a certain  insurrecto  who  was 
troubling  them  brought  in  or  “removed.”  Sometimes, 
to  test  the  sincerity  of  the  questioners  or  to  ascertain  the 
value  placed  on  human  life,  the  officer  would  ask  what  it 
would  cost  to  have  the  man  “brought  in”  or  “removed.” 
The  usual  price  was  $5,  but  for  a leader  of  prominence, 
whose  death  might  excite  an  inquiry  among  his  relatives 
and  lead  to  possible  search  on  their  part,  $10  was  desired 
— the  risk  was  too  great  to  undertake  the  “removal”  for 
a smaller  sum. 

“As  an  instance  of  the  character  of  people,  that  in  the 
mountain  districts  of  these  islands  are  reported  as  insur- 
rectos  sometimes,  as  ladrones  at  other  times,  as  Pula  janes 
at  other  times,  and  as  mere  ordinary  outlaws  at  others,” 
a report  from  Lieutenant  Guild  in  regard  to  the  action 
of  three  ladrones  is  pertinent.  In  September,  1903,  two 
ladrones,  Ompong  and  Tuest,  accompanied  by  an  un- 
known person,  entered  the  barrio  of  Ilijan  and  murdered 
thirteen  women  and  children.  The  Constabulary  began 
a search  of  the  criminals.  One  arriving  at  the  barrio 


172 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


no  trace  of  the  ladrones  could  be  found,  nor  could  any 
information  be  obtained  from  the  inhabitants,  as  they 
seemed  terror-stricken.  The  officer  adds : “The  only  in- 
formation of  any  value  at  all  .was  that  the  leader  of  the 
ladrones,  Ompong,  had  a Remington  rifle  and  twenty 
rounds  of  ammunition,  but  that  his  companions  had  only 
spears  and  bolos.  As  far  as  can  be  learned,  the  killing 
was  not  done  for  the  sake  of  gain,  but  for  the  sake  of 
one  of  the  customs  of  the  mountaineers.  The  child  of 
Ompong  having  died  of  cholera,  he,  as  is  their  custom, 
went  out  and  had  these  others  killed  so  he  might  have 
company  and  servants  in  the  other  world.  The  killing 
was  all  done  with  bolos  and  spears,  Ompong  simply 
threatening  the  men  of  the  barrio  with  his  gun  while  the 
women  and  children  were  being  murdered.  The  killing 
of  the  people  could  never  have  occurred  had  the  men  of 
the  barrio  interfered,  instead  of  looking  on  and  doing 
nothing.” 

Incidents  like  these  coming  under  the  observation  of 
the  travelers  in  the  Philippines  lead  one  to  think  that  a 
part  of  the  people,  while  eager  for  “liberty,”  have  not 
fully  grasped  the  American  idea  of  that  inspiring  word. 

Concerning  the  disturbances  in  some  of  the  provinces, 
rumors  of  which  assumed  startling  proportions  on  their 
journey  across  the  sea  to  the  Homeland,  General  Allen 
says : 

“The  district  chiefs  in  setting  forth  the  special  events 
of  the  year  in  their  respective  commands  have  shown 
that  the  disturbances,  which  were  the  aftermath  of  a 
long  period  of  warfare,  have  been  largely  aggravated 
b}'  plagues  affecting  man  and  beast.  It  is  also  evident 
from  the  ease  with  which  many  of  the  people  of  the 


Gun.  Gonzat.es,  the  Last  to  Surrender 


EXTERMINATION  OF  BANDS 


173 


mountains  and  in  remote  localities  can  be  deceived  by 
skillful  intriguers,  that  we  must  be  prepared  to  meet  fre- 
quent local  uprisings  for  a long  term  of  years.  Until 
the  plane  of  a higher  civilization  and  a better  education 
have  been  reached  throughout  the  archipelago,  it  will  be 
necessary  to  garrison  such  a number  of  places  as  will 
permit  all  inhabited  localities  being  reached  by  frequent 
patrols.  This  is  not  said  in  disparagement  of  the  numer- 
ous educated  Filipinos  who  are  extremely  desirous  to  see 
thorough  and  consistent  order  maintained,  but  rather  in 
corroboration  of  their  sentiments. 

“The  past  year  has  witnessed  the  extermination  of 
bands  led  by  Rios  in  Tayabas  and  Laguna,  San  Miguel 
in  Bulacan  and  Rizal,  Modesto  Joaquin  in  Pampanga, 
Roman  Manalang  in  Zambals  and  Pangasinan,  Protacio 
Flores  in  Pangasinan,  Timoteo  Pasay  and  the  Feliz 
brothers  in  Rizal,  Dalmacio  and  Rufo  in  Western  Negros, 
Flores  in  Misamis,  Anugar  in  Samar,  Concepcion  in 
Surfgao,  Colache  in  Sorsogon,  Encarnacion  in  Tayabas 
and  numerous  others  of  lesser  note.  The  following 
‘Popes’  have  been  captured:  Rios  of  Tayabas,  Faustino 
Ablena  of  Samar,  and  Fernandez  of  Laguna.  Margarita 
Pullio  and  Catalina  Furiseal,  two  women  posing  as 
‘saints’  and  who  were  interested  in  the  distribution  of 
‘anting-antings,’  were  also  captured.  There  still  remain 
‘Papa’  Isio  in  the  mountain  fastnesses  of  Negros  and 
‘King’  Apo  in  Pampanga  and  Nueva  Ecija.” 

In  closing  his  review  of  the  work  of  the  year,  General 
Allen  says : “Although  the  disturbances  during  the  year 
have  been  frequent,  especially  in  the  Tagalog  provinces, 
they  have,  for  the  most  part,  not  been  grave,  the  bands 
having  been  wanting  in  unity  of  action  and  cohesion. 


174- 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


Trials  and  convictions  have  been  speedy  and  evildoers 
now  recognize  that  the  days  of  pardon  and  amnesty  are 
gone.  There  are  still  among  the  people  certain  influen- 
tial ones  who  continue  to  seditiously  agitate,  but  they 
have  not  yet  been  caught  in  acts  cognizable  by  the  law. 
The  firm  stand  taken  by  the  Government  toward  crim- 
inals who  pose  as  patriots,  the  consistent  work  of  the 
courts,  the  field  service  of  the  Constabulary  and  Scouts, 
and  the  vigilance  of  the  division  of  information,  have 
been  effective  in  reducing  vicious  elements  and  in  encour- 
aging loyal  ones  interested  in  the  prosperity  and  general 
welfare  of  the  Philippines.  This  work  continues  un- 
abated, and  it  may  be  truly  said  that  since  American 
occupation  peace  conditions  have  never  been  so  real  as 
at  present  nor  has  the  outlook  for  the  future  been  so 
favorable.” 

A word  about  the  American  troops  may  be  added: 
“Without  taking  into  consideration  the  strategic  impor- 
tance of  the  Philippines  as  a military  supply  depot 
where  troops  and  war  material  may  be  kept  for  Oriental 
emergencies,  I believe,”  says  General  Allen,  “that  for 
some  time  to  come  the  number  of  American  troops  to  be 
kept  here  should  be  a direct  function  of  the  number  of 
guns  put  into  the  hands  of  natives.  After  extensive 
warfare,  however  humanely  conducted,  several  years 
must  elapse  before  there  will  be  a mental  pacification,  and 
during  this  period  of  adjustment  to  new  conditions  it  is 
unwise  to  ignore  the  great  moral  effect  of  a strong  armed 
force  above  suspicion.”  There  were  in  July,  1901,  four- 
teen regiments  of  infantry,  eight  troops  of  cavalry,  three 
batteries  of  artillery,  with  the  corresponding  quota  of 
technical  and  staff  troops,  amounting  in  round  numbers 


BRIGANDAGE  IS  CHRONIC 


175 


to  eighteen  thousand  men,  occupying  seventy  posts,  in 
addition  to  about  five  thousand  Scouts. 

The  Constabulary  has  had  its  critics  from  the  outset. 
It  was  a new  plan  both  for  the  Americans  and  the  Fili- 
pinos. Five  years  of  guerrilla  warfare  had  not  prepared 
the  Filipinos  to  have  men  of  their  own  nationality  placed 
over  them  as  constables  or  military.  It  is  the  belief,  howT- 
ever,  of  those  most  competent  to  judge,  that  it  is  most 
important  that  Filipinos  should  suppress  Filipino  dis- 
turbances and  arrest  Filipino  outlaws.  But  this  plan  did 
not  work  well  at  first.  Some  men  armed  by  the  govern- 
ment had  relatives  and  friends  among  the  ladrones,  and 
the  difficulty  of  keeping  the  latter  in  check  without  caus- 
ing coldness  in  family  relations  can  be  imagined.  On 
this  point  Dr.  Stuntz  says : “Brigandage  is  chronic  in 

the  Philippines.  It  has  been  so  for  more  than  a century. 
No  possible  provision  could  have  been  made  for  its  im- 
mediate eradication.  Industrial  and  commercial  prosper- 
ity will  greatly  ease  the  burdens  borne  now  by  the  Con- 
stabulary and  the  courts.  War,  plague,  cholera,  locusts 
and  rinderpest  have  formed  a condition  that  leads  many 
into  lawlessness.”  This  careful  observer  is  undoubtedly 
correct  in  saying:  “Municipal  and  provincial  govern- 

ment would  to-day  collapse  if  the  strong  arm  of  the 
Constabulary  were  withdrawn,  and  it  would  become  neces- 
sary to  summon  the  military  force  which  was  their  first 
deliverer  and  protector.” 

The  chief  objection  urged  to  the  employment  of  na- 
tives as  soldiers  and  constables  is  that  their  loyalty  may 
be  questioned,  and  that  it  might  prove  a source  of  danger 
to  put  arms  in  their  hands  at  present.  The  Commission 
considered  this  view,  but  decided  that  the  objection  is  not 


176 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


insuperable.  It  was  expected  that  there  would,  from 
time  to  time,  be  isolated  cases  of  defection,  but  it  was 
believed  that  judicious  selection  and  discipline  could  cre- 
ate a native  force  both  reliable  and  effective.  “The 
history  of  the  Filipino  soldier,”  sa}rs  the  Commission, 
“when  serving  under  the  Spanish  flag,  supports  this 
view.  For  many  years  prior  to  the  outbreak  of  1896 
the  Spaniards  had  less  than  5,000  Peninsular  troops  in 
the  islands.  All  the  rest  were  natives.  The  latter,  as  a 
rule,  remained  loyal  to  Spain  until  it  was  manifest  that 
her  sovereignty  was  ended.  This  was  the  case  although 
the  masses  from  which  these  native  soldiers  were  drawn 
were  cruelly  oppressed  by  the  Spaniards,  and  they  them- 
selves were  poorly  fed  and  paid  inadequately  and  rarely. 
Besides,  the  Spanish  officers,  as  a rule,  would  compare 
very  unfavorably  with  the  American  in  personnel  and 
equipment,  and  presumably  were  unable  to  impress  them- 
selves upon  the  native  so  as  to  secure  his  respect  and 
affection,  as  would  our  officers. 

“The  experience  of  England  in  dealing  with  condi- 
tions practically  the  same  as  those  which  we  are  called 
on  to  meet,  as  she  has  frequently  done,  and  her  success, 
furnishes  a precedent  for  our  guidance  which  should  not 
be  overlooked.  Though  she  has  had  here  and  there  un- 
fortunate experiences,  as  a general  rule  she  has  been 
served  faithfully  by  her  native  soldiers,  even  against 
their  own  brethren.  The  fact  is,  every  soldier  has  a 
natural  feeling  of  loyalty  for  the  flag  under  which  he 
serves.  Respect  for  his  officers  and  obedience  to  their 
orders  become  to  him  a habit  of  life.  When  decently 
treated,  he  becomes  sincerely  attached  to  them  and  cheer- 
fully obeys  their  orders.  It  is  our  deliberate  judgment 


COLLEGE  MEN  NEEDED 


177 


that  not  only  is  the  organization  of  native  regiments 
here  not  premature,  but  it  might  safely  have  been  begun 
at  least  a year  ago.” 

One  difficulty  with  which  the  Government  has  had  to 
contend  has  been  its  inability  to  secure  a sufficient  num- 
ber of  trustworthy  officers  to  fill  responsible  positions  in 
the  Constabulary.  Several  defalcations  have  occurred, 
and  a number  of  men  have  been  dismissed  for  other  of- 
fenses. General  Allen  has  recently  sent  letters  to  college 
presidents  and  superintendents  of  academies  in  America 
asking  them  to  open  recruiting  stations  for  the  commis- 
sioned strength  of  the  Philippine  Constabulary,  which 
it  is  hoped  to  fill  up  with  young  collegians  to  a large 
extent.  The  letters  are  accompanied  by  circulars  show- 
ing the  nature  of  the  service,  the  scheme  of  promotion 
and  the  pay  of  the  different  grades.  “From  fifteen  to 
twenty-five  young  men,”  he  says,  “will  be  appointed 
yearly,  and  the  Constabulary  offers  a good  career  for 
young  men  of  energy  and  initiative  who  have  special 
aptitude  for  dealing  with  natives  and  for  military  work.” 
General  Allen  desires  to  reach  young  men  who  have  been 
graduated  from  college  in  the  last  five  or  six  3rears, 
“without  conditions,  and  whose  habits,  antecedents  and 
stability  of  character  and  judgment  are  such  as  you  or 
other  responsible  members  of  your  faculty  could  recom- 
mend as  being  men  who  will,  so  far  as  can  be  told,  grow 
and  develop  into  men  of  strong  character  and  integrity.” 


CHAPTER  XIX 


CONTAGION  AT  CLOSE  RANGE 


OULD  you  like  to  visit  the  San  Lazaro  Hos- 


of  the  Health  Department  of  Manila. 

“I  should  like  to  visit  any  place  in  the  Philippines 
that  will  give  me  an  insight  into  the  work  of  the  Ameri- 
can Government.” 

“Then  I will  call  for  you  at  nine  o’clock  to-morrow 
morning.” 

At  the  hour  appointed,  Dr.  Marshall  and  the  writer 
started  for  San  Lazaro  Hospital.  Something  like  two 
hundred  and  fifty  years  ago,  when  Christianity  first  en- 
tered Japan,  a shipload  of  Japanese  lepers  entered  the 
harbor  of  Manila. 

“You  Christians  seem  very  fond  of  those  who  are  in 
trouble.  Try  your  hand  on  these  lepers” — so  ran  in 
effect  a note  accompanying  the  large  company  of  unfor- 
tunate people.  At  first  the  authorities  refused  admission 
to  the  lepers  and  were  about  to  send  them  back  to  Japan ; 


A Morning  in  San  Lazaro  Hospital — Safeguarding 
Young  Americans — The  First  Suggestion  of  Leprosy 
— A “Fine”  Case  of  Smallpox — From  the  Cholera 
Hospital  to  the  Plague  Ward — Infant  Mortality. 


pital?”  said  Dr.  Marshall,  the  chief  inspector 


ENEMIES  OF  FAMILY  LIFE 


179 


but  after  some  consideration  of  the  subject  they  decided 
that  what  the  Japanese  had  said  in  jest  was  true,  and 
that  the  Catholic  Church,  which  had  already  made  in- 
roads in  Japan,  and  was  the  only  Christian  body  in  the 
Philippines,  should  not  turn  a deaf  ear  to  those  in  dis- 
tress. A hospital  called  the  San  Lazaro  was  constructed, 
and  after  the  centuries  it  still  stands  and  is  used  for  the 
same  purpose  for  which  it  was  built.  But  lepers  are  not 
the  only  people  who  are  treated  on  the  San  Lazaro  estate 
now.  There  are  several  hospitals  for  contagious  dis- 
eases, and  it  was  to  visit  these  that  Dr.  Marshall  had 
invited  the  visitor  to  take  the  morning  ride. 

“These  are  Filipinas,”  said  the  guide  as  we  passed 
through  a room  containing  about  eighty  women.  No 
other  remark  was  made  at  the  time ; as  we  passed  through 
the  door  into  another  ward  the  doctor  said,  “These  are 
Japanese,”  and  nothing  was  added  to  this  information. 

A third  room  contained  thirteen  European  women  and 
one  American.  I had  gone  to  the  hospital  to  see  lepers, 
but  it  was  evident  that  these  women — nearly  one  hundred 
and  seventy-five  of  them — were  not  suffering  from  lep- 
rosy. 

I learned  later  that  they  were  disorderly  women.  The 
Government  does  not  license  this  class  of  women,  but  it 
treats  them  as  it  would  other  people  suffering  from 
any  other  form  of  contagion.  Without  favoring  segrega- 
tion, the  authorities  believe  that  by  inspection  and  treat- 
ment of  several  hundred  women,  it  is  safeguarding  young 
men  whom  it  cannot  prevent  from  forming  the  acquaint- 
ance of  these  enemies  of  family  life.  Here  as  elsewhere 
in  its  dealing  with  problems  in  the  Philippines,  the  Gov- 
ernment seeks  to  better  conditions  which  it  cannot  wholly 


180 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


remove,  and  this  it  does  without  taking  an  extreme  posi- 
tion. 

“We  will  go  into  the  leper  hospital  next,”  said  Dr. 
Marshall.  There  are  said  to  be  about  six  thousand 
lepers  in  the  archipelago,  four  hundred  and  thirty-four 
of  whom  are  segregated  in  leper  hospitals.  The  rest  are 
cared  for  by  their  families  or  friends. 

“This  bo}T  has  no  appearance  of  being  a leper  that  I 
can  discover,”  suggested  the  writer. 

“Look  at  the  swollen  lobe  of  the  left  ear.  This  is  the 
first  evidence  in  his  case  of  the  dread  disease.” 

There  are  several  children  among  the  two  hundred 
lepers  in  the  hospital,  few  of  them  showing  to  a layman 
any  evidence  of  the  malady  which  had  marked  them  as 
special  objects  of  medical  care;  but  the  majority  of  the 
patients  did  not  need  a doctor  to  indicate  the  character 
of  their  ailment.  For  the  most  part,  the  lepers  seemed 
happy ; a good  many  were  playing  games  and  a few  were 
bemoaning  their  fate.  Whatever  can  be  done  to  make 
their  condition  comfortable  is  done.  The  Government 
purposes  to  establish  a leper  colony  on  the  island  of 
Culion,  but  this  project  has  not  gone  far  enough  yet  to 
warrant  the  removal  of  the  lepers  to  the  island.  The 
two  hundred  and  two  lepers  at  San  Lazaro  Hospital  are 
well  cared  for  and  seem  to  be  comfortable  and  contented. 
The  disease  generally  appears  to  be  of  a very  slowly 
progressive  type,  and  there  is  relatively  little  disfigure- 
ment and  mutilation  as  compared  with  the  results  of  this 
disease  in  other  countries.  Apparatus  for  the  treatment 
of  leprosy  by  the  use  of  the  X-ray  and  of  the  Finsen 
ray  has  been  supplied  to  the  hospital ; but  the  apparatus 
having  been  only  recently  received,  no  statement  can  be 


DEATH  PRODUCES  SORROW 


181 


made  as  to  the  efficacy  of  this  method  of  treatment. 
During  the  year  only  one  leper  died  in  Manila. 

“And  now,”  said  Dr.  Marshall,  with  a smile  as  if  he 
had  a rare  treat  to  offer,  “we  will  go  into  the  smallpox 
hospital.”  The  number  of  patients  was  small,  but  it  was 
sufficiently  large  to  warrant  the  visitor  in  walking 
through  the  room  without  stopping. 

“Wait  a moment,”  said  Dr.  Marshall,  “I  want  you  to 
see  this  remarkably  fine  case ! Come  back  and  look  at 
this  boy.”  While  the  request  Avas  more  a suggestion  than 
a command,  one  would  not  wish  to  be  uncivil  or  to  give 
evidence  of  fear,  however  great  his  anxiety  was  lest  he 
should  carry  the  contagion  to  some  one  who  might  meet 
him  after  he  left  the  hospital.  Opinions  differ  as  to  the 
meaning  of  the  adjective  “fine,”  which  the  doctor  em- 
ployed. The  reader  shall  not  have  even  a word  picture 
of  that  face,  which  frequently  comes  before  the  writer 
A\Then  thousands  of  miles  separate  him  from  the  hos- 
pital. 

“The  next  building  is  the  cholera  ward.  I am  glad 
that  it  is  so  nearly  empty,”  said  the  Doctor  cheerfully 
as  he  entered  the  room,  adding:  “though  for  your  sake 
I should  like  to  have  the  room  full  of  patients.” 

“Thank  you,  Doctor.  One  will  suffice.”  We  lingered 
about  the  bed  of  the  little  sufferer  for  some  time  while 
Dr.  Marshall  talked  with  the  nurse  and  patient  and  gave 
directions  to  the  nurse,  and  then  we  went  to  the  next 
ward. 

“Why,  nurse,  what  has  become  of  the  patient  who  was 
brought  here  with  the  plague  this  morning?” 

“He  died  about  two  hours  ago.” 

“Where  is  his  body?” 


182 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


“In  the  morgue;  the  doctors  haA'e  just  made  an  au- 
topsy.” 

“Then  we  will  go  to  the  morgue,”  said  the  guide,  and 
we  did  and  found  the  body  of  a splendid  looking  young 
Filipino  who  had  been  in  the  plague  ward  only  a few 
hours  before  his  death. 

If  one  infers  that  by  this  time  the  visitor  was  willing 
to  seek  fresh  air  and  plan  for  the  return  home,  he  will 
not  be  far  from  the  truth — leprosy,  smallpox,  cholera 
and  plague.  Suppose  a person  should  have  all  these  dis- 
eases and  all  at  the  same  time ! While  not  especially 
nervous  over  the  outcome,  there  was  a sense  of  relief 
experienced  when  a fortnight  had  passed  and  no  ill  re- 
sults followed  the  morning  call  at  San  Lazaro. 

During  the  year  1903  there  were  ninety-nine  cases  of 
smallpox  in  Manila  with  sixteen  deaths ; nine  of  these 
cases  with  four  deaths  occurred  among  Americans,  sev- 
eral of  whom  were  not  protected  by  vaccination.  During 
the  j^ear  there  were  about  two  hundred  cases  of  bubonic 
plague  in  the  city,  a small  number  when  other  Oriental 
cities  are  considered.  The  cholera  epidemic  which  broke 
out  in  1902  had  practically  worn  itself  out  when  we 
visited  the  hospital. 

On  March  3,  1902,  notification  was  received  at  Manila 
that  Asiatic  cholera  had  appeared  at  Canton,  China,  and 
five  days  later  it  was  reported  at  Hong  Kong.  As  a con- 
siderable part  of  the  green  vegetables  imported  at 
Manila  comes  from  Canton  and  its  vicinity,  the  United 
States  quarantine  officer  at  Hong  Kong  was  immediately 
notified  that  no  vegetables  not  certified  to  by  him  would 
be  admitted,  and  an  order  absolutely  forbidding  the  im- 
portation of  such  vegetables  was  issued  by  the  chief 


BALKING  THE  AUTHORITIES 


183 


quarantine  officer  on  March  19th.  On  the  following  day 
two  patients  at  the  San  Juan  de  Dios  Hospital  in  Manila 
developed  symptoms  of  Asiatic  cholera.  The  disease 
spread  rapidly  in  spite  of  all  the  efforts  of  the  health 
authorities.  The  deaths  resulting  from  it  were  more 
than  ninety  per  cent,  of  the  early  cases.  Relatives  were 
allowed  to  claim  their  dead  and  bury  them  in  quicklime, 
under  the  supervision  of  health  officers,  but  bodies  not 
claimed  in  twenty-four  hours  were  cremated. 

The  rigorous  measures  against  cholera  enforced  by  the 
Board  of  Health  provoked  bitter  opposition  from  the 
first.  For  weeks  the  presence  of  cholera  was  denied  by 
ignorant,  misinformed  and  ill-intentioned  persons.  The 
more  ignorant  Filipinos  refused  to  believe  in  its  exist- 
ence because  the  daily  deaths  did  not  reach  up  into  the 
thousands.  The  minds  of  the  common  people  were  poi- 
soned by  tales  of  horrible  abuses  in  the  detention  camps 
and  of  deliberate  murder  of  patients  at  the  cholera  hos- 
pitals. The  story  was  widely  circulated  that  the  houses 
of  the  poor  were  burned  in  order  to  make  room  for  the 
future  dwellings  and  warehouses  of  rich  Americans. 
These  absurd  tales  gained  credence  among  the  populists, 
and,  together  with  some  actual  abuses  committed  by 
ignorant,  inexperienced,  or  over-zealous  health  inspectors, 
produced  a state  of  popular  apprehension  which  proved 
a very  serious  factor  in  the  situation,  as  it  led  to  the 
concealment  of  the  sick,  the  escape  of  contacts  and  the 
throwing  of  dead  bodies  into  the  esteros  or  public  sewers 
daily  washed  by  the  tides,  and  the  Pasig  River,  the 
glutted  waters  of  which  were  fruitful  sources  of  infec- 
tion. 

Between  March  20  and  October  31,  1902,  there  were 


184 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


4,174  cases  of  cholera  in  Manila  with  3,146  deaths,  and 
103,076  cases  and  66,837  deaths  in  the  provinces;  the 
per  cent,  of  mortality  in  Manila  was  75  and  in  the  prov- 
inces 64;  and  by  September  1,  1903,  157,036  cholera 
cases  and  102,109  deaths  had  been  reported. 

These  numbers,  according  to  the  Board  of  Health,  do 
not  represent  more  than  two-thirds  of  the  cases  of  death 
which  have  actually  occurred,  as  in  many  towns  there 
were  no  physicians  or  other  persons  capable  of  recog- 
nizing cholera,  so  that  numerous  cases  were  not  propei'ly 
diagnosed.  “In  numerous  instances  the  sick  were  con- 
cealed and  false  statements  made  as  to  the  cause  of  death, 
so  that  official  returns,  where  they  exist,  cannot  be  ac- 
cepted as  complete. 

The  highest  death-rate  in  Manila  is  in  Bilibid  Prison, 
due  to  its  unhealth  fulness.  There  were  213  deaths 
among  the  convicts  in  1903,  with  an  average  daily  num- 
ber of  2,152  imprisoned;  this  gives  an  annual  death-rate 
of  99  per  1,000,  nearly  three  times  greater  than  that  of 
the  general  population  of  Manila  during  the  same  period. 
Malarial  disease  is  less  common  and  dangerous  in  the 
Philippines  than  in  many  other  tropical  countries.  The 
deaths  in  Manila  from  malaria  during  the  year  1903 
were  only  226,  while  236  persons  died  from  dysentery,  a 
disease  which  seems  to  result,  according  to  the  testimony 
of  the  health  authorities,  from  impure  water.  “The  city 
water,”  says  Commissioner  Worcester,  “is  unsafe  and 
unquestionably  carries  the  organisms  which  produce 
dysentery.  When  pure  water  has  been  made  available 
for  drinking  purposes  the  mortality  from  this  disease 
should  rapidly  decrease.”  Beriberi,  a disease  peculiar  to 
Oriental  countries  and  characterized  by  paralysis  and 


aim  on  Shampoo 


THOUSANDS  OF  LIVES  SAVED 


185 


effusions,  is  one  of  the  more  important  causes  of  death 
among  Filipinos  and  Chinese,  and  is  especially  prevalent 
among  the  poorer  classes.  Very  few  cases  of  it  occur 
among  whites ; there  were  three  hundred  and  thirteen 
deaths  from  it  during  the  year,  but  no  white  person  was 
attacked. 

The  City  of  Manila  has  been  brought  into  a sanitary 
condition  never  approached  under  the  previous  adminis- 
tration, and  its  death-rate  has  been  so  reduced  as  to  com- 
pare favorably  not  only  with  that  of  other  tropical 
cities,  but  even  with  that  of  many  cities  of  the  United 
States.  It  is  hoped  that  eventually  these  results  will 
appeal  to  the  popular  mind. 

Sanitary  inspection  has  been  maintained  under  the 
direction  of  the  chief  health  inspector  by  an  average 
force  of  115  regular  and  emergency  sanitary  inspectors. 
During  the  year  1,951,990  inspections  and  reinspections 
of  houses  were  made;  211,806  houses  were  cleaned  as  a 
result  of  sanitary  inspection;  1,196  houses  were  white- 
washed and  painted;  7,336  houses  were  disinfected;  82 
houses  were  condemned  and  removed;  11,256  cesspools 
and  vaults  were  cleaned;  161,117  cleanings  of  yards  were 
carried  out;  1,757  yards  were  repaired,  repaved,  etc.; 
531  cholera  cases,  71  smallpox  cases,  and  185  plague 
cases  were  reported;  5,179  sanitary  orders  were  complied 
with  by  householders ; and  216  persons  were  convicted 
for  violation  of  food  prohibition  orders. 

A high  death-rate  among  infants  is  the  chief  factor 
in  the  general  mortality,  11.23  per  cent,  of  the  total 
number  of  deaths  having  occurred  in  infants  under  one 
year  of  age.  For  the  month  of  June  the  deaths  re- 
ported from  “convulsions  of  children”  alone  exceeded  the 


186 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


combined  mortality  from  Asiatic  cholera,  bubonic  plague, 
smallpox,  malarial  fevers,  typhoid  fever,  and  beriberi. 
“This  shocking  infant  mortality,”  say  the  health  offi- 
cers, “is  largely  the  result  of  ignorance  concerning  their 
proper  care  and  feeding  and  of  difficulty  in  obtaining 
suitable  food  for  those  who  cannot  be  nursed  by  their 
mothers.” 

Much  trouble  has  been  caused  the  Board  of  Health 
by  the  floating  population  of  Manila,  consisting  of  about 
fifteen  thousand  people  who  live  upon  cascos,  lorches, 
launches  and  other  small  vessels  plying  on  the  river,  the 
esteros  and  the  bay.  They  are  an  unruly  set  and  diffi- 
cult to  keep  under  supervision  on  account  of  the  constant 
movements  of  their  floating  habitations.  It  has  not 
proved  practicable  to  prevent  their  polluting  the  river 
and  the  esteros  with  refuse,  nor  can  they  be  restrained 
from  using  infected  waters  for  drinking,  cooking  and 
bathing.  Cholera  has  occurred  among  this  class  to  a 
larger  extent  than  among  any  other  class  of  the  popula- 
tion. Only  too  often  they  hurry  their  sick  ashore  and 
abandon  them,  or  weight  the  bodies  of  the  dead  and  drop 
them  into  the  water  at  night,  in  order  to  escape  having 
their  crafts  disinfected.  The  sanitary  problems  pre- 
sented by  this  population  are  very  difficult  of  solution. 
They  cannot  well  be  compelled  to  take  up  their  residence 
on  shore,  nor  can  their  vessels  be  obliged  to  anchor  in 
the  bay.  An  adequate  supply  of  good  drinking  water 
should  be  made  available  for  them  at  convenient  points, 
so  that  the}'  may  have  no  excuse  for  drinking  river  water. 


CHAPTER  XX 


THE  AMERICAN  TEACHER 


The  Ladrones  Respect  the  Instructor — Church  and 
State  Kept  separate  in  the  Islands — Little  Filipinos 
Sing  “My  Country”  also — Higher  Education  Greatly 
Appreciated — Benjamin  Franklin  an  Ideal  American. 

ANEW  army  of  occupation  entered  Manila  Bay  on 
August  23,  1901,  when  the  transport  Thomas 
arrived  from  San  Francisco  having  on  board  five  hundred 
and  forty-two  American  teachers.  No  single  feature  of 
woi’k  by  Americans  in  the  Philippines  has  been  more 
heroic  or  productive  of  better  results  than  that  done  by 
these  teachers.  Many  of  them  were  married,  but  the 
majority  were  single.  The  military  were  met  on  their 
arrival  with  armed  resistance ; in  some  places  the  Civil 
Government  has  been  viewed  with  distrust  or  jealousy. 
Not  so  the  American  teacher — armed  only  with  the  sim- 
plest of  English  text-books,  he  has  led  the  Filipinos 
captive  without  a struggle ; women  teachers  in  the  prov- 
inces far  from  Manila  have  been  as  safe  as  those  under 
the  protection  of  Fort  Santiago. 

From  the  beginning  the  relations  of  the  American 
teacher  have  been  pleasant  and  agreeable.  Even  in 
provinces  where  there  was  more  or  less  disturbance  and 
ladronism,  the  almost  sacred  regard  in  which  the  teacher 
was  held  exempted  him  from  violence,  and  the  school 


188 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


authorities  know  of  no  one  who  came  to  grief,  except 
four  who  were  killed  while  traveling  in  the  mountains, 
where  their  status  was  unknown ; one  of  them  being  mis- 
taken for  the  provincial  treasurer  and  stabbed  to  death 
to  secure  the  money  which  it  was  thought  he  carried, 
another  losing  his  life  while  leading  an  armed  party 
against  the  ladrones,  and  one  being  robbed  of  his  watch 
and  money,  but  not  otherwise  molested.  So  clearly  have 
the  people  manifested  their  predilection  for  the  American 
instructor  that  a failure  on  his  part  to  maintain  a warm 
local  interest  in  the  success  of  his  school  is  usually  at- 
tributed by  the  Department  rather  to  some  cause  per- 
sonal to  himself  than  to  any  popular  sentiment  against 
the  school.  Several  have  died  from  smallpox,  cholera  and 
tropical  diseases. 

When  the  members  of  the  Civil  Commission  in  1900 
were  leaving  the  United  States,  President  McKinley,  who 
appointed  them,  announced  that  one  of  their  duties  would 
be  “to  promote  and  extend,  and,  as  they  may  find  occa- 
sion, to  improve  the  system  of  education  alread}^  inaugu- 
rated by  the  military  authorities.  In  doing  this,  they 
should  regard  as  of  first  importance  the  extension  of  a 
system  of  primary  education  which  shall  be  free  to  all 
and  which  shall  tend  to  fit  the  people  for  the  duties  of 
citizenship,  and  for  the  ordinary  avocations  of  a civilized 
community.  . . . Special  attention  should  be  at 

once  given  to  affording  full  opportunity  to  all  the  people 
of  the  islands  to  acquire  the  use  of  the  English  lan- 
guage.” The  instructions  of  President  McKinley  have 
been  so  thoroughly  carried  out  that  it  is  probable,  as 
the  authorities  assert,  that  more  English  was  spoken  in 
the  islands,  three  years  after  the  American  teachers 


Dp..  F.  A.  Atkinsojt 


DOCTRINES  NOT  ALLOWED 


189 


arrived,  than  there  was  Spanish  spoken  at  the  end  of 
three  centuries. 

One  of  the  earliest  laws  passed  by  the  Civil  Commission 
was  the  School  Act,  adopted  on  January  1,  1901,  which 
made  the  English  language  the  basis  of  all  public  instruc- 
tion. The  following  section,  No.  16,  in  regard  to  re- 
ligious instruction,  shows  how  completely  Church  and 
State  have  been  kept  separate  in  the  Philippines: 

“No  teacher  or  other  person  shall  teach  or  criticise  the 
doctrines  of  any  church,  or  religious  sect,  or  denomina- 
tion, or  shall  attempt  to  influence  pupils  for  or  against 
any  church  or  religious  sect  in  any  public  school  estab- 
lished under  this  Act.  If  any  teacher  shall  intentionally 
violate  this  section,  he  or  she  shall,  after  due  hearing,  be 
dismissed  from  the  public  service:  Provided,  however, 
that  it  shall  be  lawful  for  the  priest  or  minister  of  any 
church  established  in  the  pueblo  where  a public  school  is 
situated,  either  in  person  or  by  a designated  teacher  of 
religion,  to  teach  religion  for  one-half  an  hour  three 
times  a week  in  the  school  building  to  those  public  school 
pupils  whose  parents  or  guardians  desire  it,  and  express 
their  desire  therefor  in  writing  filed  with  the  principal 
teacher  of  the  school,  to  be  forwarded  to  the  division 
superintendent,  who  shall  fix  the  hours  and  rooms  for 
such  teaching.  But  no  public-school  teacher  shall  either 
conduct  exercises  or  teach  religion,  or  act  as  a designated 
religious  teacher  of  the  school  building  under  the  fore- 
going authority,  and  no  pupil  shall  be  required  by  any 
public-school  teacher  to  attend  or  receive  religious  in- 
struction herein  permitted.  Should  the  opportunity  thus 
given  to  teach  religion  be  used  by  a priest,  minister,  or 
religious  teacher  for  the  purpose  of  arousing  disloyalty 


190 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


to  the  United  States,  of  discouraging  the  attendance  of 
pupils  at  such  public  schools,  of  creating  a disturbance 
of  public  order,  or  of  interfering  with  the  discipline  of 
the  school,  the  division  superintendent,  subject  to  the 
approval  of  the  general  superintendent  of  public  in- 
struction, may,  after  due  investigation  and  hearing, 
forbid  such  offending  priest,  minister,  or  religious 
teacher.” 

Under  Spanish  rule  a system  of  primary  schools  was 
established  in  the  islands.  The  Spanish  regulations  pro- 
vided that  there  should  be  one  male  and  one  female 
teacher  for  each  five  thousand  inhabitants.  The  Schur- 
man  Commission  showed  clearly  that  even  this  inadequate 
provision  was  never  carried  out.  It  said:  “Taking  the 
entire  population  at  eight  millions,  we  find  that  there  is 
but  one  teacher  to  each  4,179  inhabitants.  There  were 
no  schoolhouses,  no  modern  furniture  and  no  text-books 
until  the  Americans  came.  The  schools  were  held  in  the 
residences  of  the  teachers  or  in  buildings  hired  by  the 
municipalities  and  used  by  the  principals  as  dwellings. 
In  these  primary  schools  reading,  writing,  sacred  history 
and  the  catechism  were  taught.  Girls  were  also  taught 
embroidery  and  needlework.  The  little  school  instruc- 
tion which  the  average  Filipino  had  under  Spanish  rule 
did  not  tend  to  broaden  his  intelligence  or  to  give  him 
power  of  independent  thought.  It  is  said  on  good  au- 
thority that  when  the  Spaniards  went  to  the  Philippines 
several  of  the  tribes  could  read  and  write  their  own 
language,  but  after  three  hundred  years  of  the  Spanish 
domination,  the  bulk  of  the  people  could  not  do  so.” 

The  Filipino  people  have  never  been  welded  into  a 
nation  through  a common  tongue.  While  Christian 


THE  AMERICAN  THEORY 


191 


training  was  given  to  all  by  the  priesthood,  it  was 
through  the  medium  of  various  dialects,  and  never  in 
Spanish.  It  was  held  to  be  unwise  to  teach  the  natives  a 
common  tongue ; to  keep  them  tractable  it  was  deemed 
necessary  to  keep  them  divided. 

The  American  theory  is  this:  Although  a common 

tongue  may  bring  rebellion  and  war,  even  that  is  better 
than  a peace  maintained  only  by  denying  the  Filipino 
people  the  first  requisite  to  national  progress ; and  there- 
fore the  introduction  of  American  schools  and  American 
school-teachers.  General  Otis  started  American  schools 
under  military  rule.  He  desired  his  officers  to  open  as 
many  schools  as  possible  and  selected  and  ordered  text- 
books which  were  in  use  when  the  present  educational 
system  was  developed.  The  public  school  was  started  in 
Manila  as  soon  as  law  prevailed  in  that  city.  On  the 
Fourth  of  July,  1899,  “America”  was  sung  by  Filipino, 
Spanish  and  Chinese  school  children,  and  the  “Salute  of 
the  Flag”  was  early  adopted  as  a feature  of  the  exer- 
cises in  the  Manila  schools.  On  Washington’s  Birthday, 
1900,  the  thirty-six  schoolhouses  in  Manila  received 
each  a gift  of  an  American  flag  from  the  LaFayette 
Post,  G.  A.  R.,  of  New  York.  The  schoolhouses  were 
crowded  with  natives,  including  teachers,  pupils,  parents 
and  friends,  and  many  Americans  also,  because  of  their 
interest  in  seeing  “Old  Glory”  rise  and  fall  for  the  first 
time  on  the  Philippine  breezes  over  American  public 
schools.  In  September  of  that  year,  Dr.  F.  W.  Atkinson 
assumed  the  duties  of  general  superintendent  of  educa- 
tion and  also  for  a time  those  of  superintendent  of  the 
schools  of  Manila.  Later,  Dr.  David  P.  Barrows  became 
the  Manila  superintendent  and,  after  the  resignation  of 


192 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


Dr.  E.  B.  Bryan,  who  succeeded  Dr.  Atkinson,  general 
superintendent  for  the  archipelago. 

The  ideal  school — a non-sectarian  graded  school  with 
a prescribed  course  of  study  and  definite  standards  for 
each  year  under  charge  of  trained  teachers  and  housed 
in  suitable  buildings — has  been  modified  somewhat  to 
bring  the  means  of  instruction  within  reach  of  the  entire 
population  of  the  islands.  But  the  ideal  is  kept  in  mind 
and  each  year  is  pressed  a little  more  to  the  front,  as 
the  native  teachers  are  able  to  grasp  it. 

Soon  after  his  appointment  as  Superintendent  of 
Schools,  Dr.  Atkinson  was  authorized  to  secure  teachers 
from  America  to  teach  English  in  the  public  schools  and 
to  train  Filipinos  in  the  principles  of  education  from  an 
American  point  of  view.  The  number  was  increased 
until  nearly  1,000  American  teachers  were  assigned  to 
positions  in  different  parts  of  the  archipelago  during  the 
first  year  after  the  system  was  organized;  between  Janu- 
ary, 1901,  and  September,  1902,  the  number  was  1,071. 
The  teachers  were  chosen  in  two  ways — either  directly 
by  the  general  superintendent  or  by  persons  or  institu- 
tions in  the  United  States  authorized  to  select  a definite 
number ; a number  were  also  appointed  who  were  already 
in  the  Philippines.  Among  the  latter  were  discharged 
volunteer  and  regular  soldiers,  and  wives  and  relatives  of 
officers  and  civilians.  At  the  outset  those  who  were  sent 
into  the  more  remote  towns  suffered  certain  hardships, 
not  the  least  of  which  was  their  isolation.  Their  food 
was  often  such  as  they  were  unaccustomed  to,  and  the 
change  from  the  conditions  was  often  such  as  to  cause 
homesickness  and  a certain  measure  of  dissatisfaction 
with  their  lot.  The  main  object  of  taking  the  teachers 


INTEREST  OF  PEOPLE  AROUSED  193 


to  the  Philippines  was  to  train  Filipinos  to  become  teach- 
ers of  native  children.  Division  Superintendent  S.  C. 
Newson  of  Pangasinan  Province  says : “The  example 

set  by  a good  American  teacher  in  controlling  and  teach- 
ing a school  has  taught  the  Filipino  more  than  his  daily 
lesson  in  English  and  arithmetic.  The  object-lesson  thus 
furnished  is  being  learned  slowly,  but  without  doubt 
surely.” 

The  capacity  of  the  Filipinos  for  education  gives 
promise  of  permanent  results.  The  change  from  fee  to 
free  schools  has  been  an  important  one  and  a prime  factor 
in  arousing  the  interest  of  the  people  in  education.  In 
this  interest  lies  in  great  part  the  success  of  the  move- 
ment. There  is  a desire  for  American  teachers  and  schools 
everywhere ; even  political  enemies  have  been  friendly  to 
the  educational  movement.  Eagerness  is  shown  not  only 
by  the  children,  but  also  by  the  old  people.  “We  must 
not,  however,  assume  too  much,”  explains  a superintend- 
ent. “Native  dialects  will  continue  to  be  spoken ; but 
English  will  become  the  official  language,  the  medium 
for  the  transmission  of  modern  currents  of  thought — in 
short,  modern  civilization.  Japan  serves  as  a good  illus- 
tration of  this.  And  herein  lies  the  justification  of  the 
present  educational  movement.  A preparation  both  for 
the  pursuit  of  practical  life-sustaining  occupation,  and 
for  the  best  of  past  and  present  civilization  in  literature, 
culture  and  art.” 

Many  letters  have  been  received  by  the  Department 
of  Education  in  Manila  regarding  the  work  of  the  Ameri- 
can teachers.  The  following  is  from  General  Henry  T. 
Allen,  chief  of  the  Constabulary:  “Referring  to  your 

letter  of  January  25th,  it  gives  me  pleasure  to  inform  you 


194 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


that  with  scarcely  a single  exception  I have  heard  only 
good  reports  of  the  work  being  done  by  the  teachers  of 
English  in  the  various  parts  of  the  islands.  In  a word, 
they  are  proving  by  their  acts  as  well  as  words  the  wis- 
dom of  the  policy  adopted  in  regard  to  education  here. 
These  teachers  afford  the  people  an  opportunity  of 
learning  in  a most  expedient  and  practical  way  what  good 
American  citizens  are  and  what  may  be  expected  from 
American  control.  Without  them  the  ideas  of  these  peo- 
ple would  be  formed  largely  from  those  with  whom  they 
have  come  in  contact  during  the  unfortunate  times — the 
soldiers.  I have  had  occasion  to  learn  from  various 
sources  that  the  teachers  are  on  extremely  good  terms 
with  the  people  of  their  towns,  who  are  beginning  to 
rely  upon  them  for  counsel  and  advice  in  nearly  all  mat- 
ters of  importance.  This  means  that  the  body  of  teach- 
ers, in  addition  to  their  value  as  instructors,  will  have  a 
tremendous  influence  in  maintaining  order  and  peace  in 
the  archipelago.  The  influence  of  the  eight  hundred  or 
nine  hundred  teachers  under  your  supervision,  dispersed 
throughout  the  islands  giving  instruction,  both  by  ex- 
emplary habits  and  books,  will  produce  a far-reaching 
effect  scarcely  attainable  by  any  other  method.” 

Although  the  number  of  American  teachers  in  the 
Philippines  had  fallen  to  723  in  December,  1903,  owing 
to  expiration  of  contract,  ill-health  or  resignations,  the 
number  of  primary  schools  had  risen  to  2,000,  the  number 
of  Filipino  teachers  to  3,000,  and  the  number  of  pupils 
to  150,000,  about  one  child  in  ten  of  school  age.  The 
poverty  of  municipalities  retards  the  building  of  new 
schoolhouses  and  the  employment  of  a larger  force  of 
English  teachers  and  some  Filipino  teachers  with  English 


FOR  EXCEPTIONAL  PEOPLE 


195 


training.  The  second  condition  which  necessarily  retards 
the  extension  of  our  educational  system,  says  Superin- 
tendent Barrowrs,  “is  the  fact  that,  in  spite  of  the  empha- 
sis which  has  been  laid  from  the  beginning  upon  the 
training  of  Filipino  teachers  and  their  instruction  in 
English,  the  supply  of  young  men  and  young  women 
equipped  for  even  the  most  primary  work  of  instruction 
is  far  too  small.  This  lack  is  being  met  in  every  possible 
way- — by  daily  instruction  on  the  part  of  the  American 
teacher,  not  only  of  the  Filipino  teachers  working  under 
his  supervision,  but  also  of  classes  of  candidates  for 
teachers’  appointment  or  aspirantes ; by  normal  institutes 
held  in  all  provinces  last  year,  whose  importance  will  be 
still  further  emphasized  this  coming  spring ; by  the  work 
of  the  Manila  Normal  School,  which  contains  to-day  an 
enrollment  of  over  four  hundred  well-advanced  pupils ; 
and  by  special  emphasis  upon  normal  training  in  the 
thirty-five  provincial  high  schools.  To  cover  prop- 
erly the  field  we  need  a force  of  about  ten  thousand 
Filipino  primary  teachers  and  at  least  four  times  the 
amount  of  school-room  space  that  we  at  present 
possess.” 

While  the  Government  has  been  dealing  with  the  bright 
youth  of  Manila  and  other  important  centers,  it  has  not 
neglected  the  Igorrotes  among  the  interior  mountains  of 
northern  Luzon,  who  seem  to  desire  neither  the  religion 
nor  the  clothes  furnished  by  the  Americans;  neither  has 
it  forgotten  the  feeble  and  declining  tribes  of  Negritos, 
who  lead  the  wandering  life  of  wild  men  in  the  mountains 
of  some  of  the  provinces ; nor  yet  are  the  Moros  in  the 
southern  islands  overlooked,  although  “the  education  of 
the  Moro  must  follow  his  awakening  to  an  appreciation 


196 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


of  his  feebleness  as  contrasted  with  the  powers  of  a civil- 
ized nation.” 

During  the  last  year  a high  school  has  been  organized 
in  every  school  division.  While  not  actively  called  for 
by  the  completion  of  the  primary  course,  by  large  num- 
bers of  students,  it  was  considered  necessary  and  justi- 
fiable on  the  ground  that  the  Filipino,  in  order  to  support 
the  primary  school,  has  to  see  before  him  the  opportunity 
for  higher  education  in  the  English  language.  The  same 
consideration  further  urges  the  Government  and  the  de- 
partment to  complete  the  educational  system  in  the  islands 
b}r  the  organization  of  under-graduate  collegiate  courses 
and  the  opening  of  schools  of  professional  training,  so 
that  there  may  be  presented  to  the  Filipino  a complete 
public  school  system,  beginning  with  the  primary  schools 
and  leading  by  successive  courses  to  the  completion  of  a 
profession. 

Perhaps  the  most  important  single  institution  organ- 
ized in  the  Bureau  of  Education  has  been  the  Manila 
Normal  School,  for  upon  it  depends  the  training  of  the 
teachers  who  are  to  bear  the  brunt  of  the  education  of 
the  j’oung  Filipinos  in  the  coming  years.  The  normal 
instruction  in  the  provincial  schools  is  designed  to  the  sole 
end  that  the  pupils  who  complete  two  years  of  the  work 
in  these  schools  may  complete  the  last  two  years  in  the 
Manila  Normal  School. 

A flourishing  nautical  school  was  opened  in  Manila  in 
September,  1899,  with  a course  of  instruction  extending 
over  three  years.  The  methods  of  instruction,  the  system 
of  marks  and  records,  and  the  discipline  of  the  school 
were  based  on  those  of  the  United  States  Naval  Academy. 
The  increasing  need  of  skillful  seamen  to  conduct  the 


PRACTICAL  INQUIRIES  MADE 


197 


growing  inter-island  trade  demands  the  enlargement  of 
this  school  from  year  to  year.  The  Commission  early 
recommended  a military  school,  an  agricultural  school, 
trade  schools,  an  orphanage,  reform  schools  and  schools 
for  the  deaf,  dumb  and  blind.  The  Manila  Trade  School 
was  organized  in  1901,  and  the  principal  and  teachers 
for  this  school  arrived  on  the  Thomas  with  the  other 
American  teachers.  A school  in  telegraphy  was  also 
started  about  this  time.  In  the  latter  part  of  1901  an 
investigation,  under  the  direction  of  R.  P.  Gleason, 
supervisor  of  industrial  education,  was  made  into  the 
trades  of  Manila  with  a view  to  gaining  an  idea  of  the 
tools  used,  the  quality  of  work  done  and  the  wages  paid, 
in  order  to  judge  of  the  degree  of  advancement  made  in 
various  lines  of  industry  here.  The  following  trades 
were  studied:  Mechanical  drawing,  carpentry,  cabinet- 

work, wood  carving,  saw  and  planing  mill  work,  masonry, 
plastering,  wall  decorations,  house  and  sign  painting, 
plumbing,  tinsmithing,  pattern  making,  foundry  and 
machine-shop  work,  harness  and  carriage  making,  car- 
riage painting,  printing,  the  manufacture  of  musical 
instruments,  bamboo  and  rattan  work,  clay  modeling,  die 
sinking,  tailoring  and  rope  making — a list  of  twenty-five 
industries. 

These  questions  were  kept  in  mind  during  the  investi- 
gation: “Do  the  Filipinos  control  these  industries?  If 
not,  who  does?  Do  they  do  the  best  or  the  higher  class 
of  work?  Who  does  the  best  work  if  the  Filipino  does 
not?  What  wages  do  they  earn?  Do  they  make  good 
artisans?  Can  they  ever  become  masters  industrially? 
Are  they  faithful  and  industrious  and  to  be  depended 
upon?  Do  they  work  well  with  those  of  other  countries? 


198 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


etc.  The  kinds  of  tools  used  and  the  methods  employed 
were  carefully  observed.  A list  of  places  visited  was 
kept,  with  a record  of  the  work  done  at  each.”  The  con- 
sensus of  opinion  of  those  who  gathered  the  information 
was  that  few  natives  were  in  control  of  the  leading  in- 
dustries, and  that,  while  they  were  doing  much  of  the 
rougher  class  of  work,  with  careful  and  patient  instruc- 
tion, they  were  capable  of  better  things ; that  there  was 
much  latent  mechanical  ability,  and  in  time  they  could 
rise  and  take  their  places  as  leaders ; not  immediately,  not 
in  the  near  future,  not  in  one  generation,  but  they  have 
the  qualities  in  them  to  do  the  work.  They  are  slow, 
take  life  leisurely,  putter  over  their  work  and  lack  re- 
sponsibilit}’.  They  no  doubt  lack  energy  to  do  the  work, 
and  also  the  knowledge.  With  knowledge,  ambition  may 
be  aroused  and  the  results  may  be  such  that  in  time  the 
Filipino  may  become  not  the  “helper”  that  he  is  to-day, 
but  the  leader  in  all  industrial  enterprises  that  will  help 
to  put  the  archipelago  on  a higher  plane. 

Not  only  have  the  day  schools  been  successful  in 
Manila  and  the  towns  throughout  the  provinces,  but  in 
the  larger  cities  night  schools  have  been  established. 
Those  attending  represent  every  occupation,  from  poor- 
est field  laborers  to  presidentes  and  provincial  governors, 
all  with  the  practical  object  in  view  of  studying  the 
English  language.  An  incident  occurred  in  the  town  of 
Olongapo,  Zambales,  which  indicates  the  presidente’s  idea 
of  the  importance  of  the  night  school: 

There  was  a wedding  in  town  one  night,  and  when  the 
school  opened  there  were  in  attendance  only  six  men  in 
one  room  and  four  in  the  other.  The  presidente,  one  of 
the  pupils,  is  an  old  man,  but  gets  angry  like  a boy  and 


SCHOOLHOUSE  OR  JAIL 


199 


stamps  his  foot  and  pouts.  He  noticed  the  small  attend- 
ance in  the  rooms,  then  blew  his  whistle  for  the  police  and 
ordered  them  to  bring  all  the  men  who  were  enrolled  on 
the  night-school  sheet  to  either  the  schoolhouse  or  the 
jail.  There  was  a full  attendance  at  the  school,  all  of  the 
scholars  dressed  in  wedding  garments. 

The  night  schools  of  Manila  have  been  successful  from 
the  start.  They  were  organized  for  the  instruction  of 
persons  who  had  passed  beyond  the  age  when  they  could 
be  expected  to  attend  primary  schools.  These  were 
chiefly  young  men  who  wished  to  learn  English  that  they 
might  use  it  in  their  business  or  in  clerkships.  Filipino 
teachers  also  attended  these  schools  to  prepare  themselves 
for  the  contemplated  change  from  Spanish  to  English  as 
the  language  of  instruction.  When  the  pupils  had  ac- 
quired a sufficient  knowledge  of  English  to  enable  them 
to  use  it  with  some  degree  of  facility  in  their  studies,  the 
curriculum  of  the  night  school  was  made  to  embrace  cer- 
tain subjects  that  had  a practical  value  for  those  in 
attendance.  Some  of  the  schools  introduced  bookkeeping, 
stenography,  typewriting  and  telegraph}’,  and  more  of 
them  history,  arithmetic  and  geography.  They  have 
been  attended  by  young  men  wishing  to  enter  civil  ser- 
vice, in  order  to  acquire  the  necessary  knowledge  of  Eng- 
lish, and  by  persons  already  in  the  service  to  fit  themselves 
for  promotion  to  higher  grades. 

One  evening  Mrs.  Taft,  the  wife  of  Governor  Taft, 
Mrs.  Devins  and  the  writer  visited  several  of  the  evening 
schools  in  Manila  under  the  guidance  of  Superintendent 
O’Reilly.  In  every  school  there  were  two  or  three  Ameri- 
can teachers,  but  the  majority  of  the  teaching  was  done 
by  Filipinos.  The  class  rooms  were  filled  and  in  some  of 


200 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


them  were  more  pupils  than  could  be  properly  accommo- 
dated. Hard  at  work  all  day,  some  of  them  in  the  schools, 
others  in  stores  or  offices,  and  others  still  too  old  to  attend 
the  day  school,  the  pupils  were  eager  for  advancement 
and  many  of  them  showed  unusual  efficiency.  We  saw 
some  compositions  written  by  the  scholars  which  would 
have  done  credit  to  American  children  in  corresponding 
grades.  The  fundamentals  of  English — reading,  writ- 
ing, arithmetic  and  grammar — were  taught,  and  the 
deep  interest  manifested  by  the  children  and  young  people 
was  remarkable.  Their  knowledge  of  their  own  islands 
was  considerable,  and  it  was  interesting  to  see  how  much 
they  had  absorbed  in  the  short  time  they  had  been  under 
the  instruction  of  the  American  teachers  concerning 
American  history  and  institutions. 

It  was  the  week  following  the  Fourth  of  July  when  we 
were  there,  and  there  was  some  curiosity  to  know  what 
the  children  had  learned  regarding  the  origin  of  Ameri- 
can independence.  Some  of  the  teachers  were  timid  on 
this  question.  One  of  them  said : 

“I  did  not  feel  that  I could  say  very  much  about  inde- 
pendence, even  American,  fearing  lest  I should  ignite 
powder  which  I knew  lay  all  about  me.  I could  not 
conscientiously  describe  the  struggle  in  America  without 
making  allusion  to  the  struggle  for  Philippine  indepen- 
dence, which  I know  is  very  dear  to  the  heart  of  many  of 
my  pupils.” 

It  would  seem  wiser  to  face  the  situation  as  many  of 
the  teachers  did,  and  tell  the  scholars  plainly  Avhy  the 
Americans  had  rebelled  against  England’s  rule,  the  posi- 
tion of  those  who  had  taken  that  stand,  the  principles  for 
which  they  stood,  the  degree  of  education  which  they  had 


Legaspi  Statue  Mortuary  Chapel,  Paco 


MRS.  TAFT  PLEASED 


201 


previously  acquired,  the  character  of  the  men  who  were 
leading  in  the  struggle  for  independence  and  the  progress 
made  in  following  up  the  victories  gained. 

Mrs.  Taft  was  greatly  pleased  with  what  she  saw  and 
heard,  as  were  the  other  visitors.  A sequel  to  the  inspec- 
tion is  interesting,  and  probably  is  not  known  outside  the 
Philippine  Commission.  Mrs.  Taft  said  to  the  writer  a 
few  days  later: 

“You  will  be  interested  to  know  the  result  of  our  visit 
to  the  schools  last  week.  I never  interfere  with  the  work 
of  the  Government,  but  at  a meeting  of  the  Commission 
held  in  the  palace  I could  not  help  overhearing  a propo- 
sition that  the  appropriation  for  night  schools  should  be 
lessened.  I could  not  resist  the  temptation  to  ask  the 
gentleman  who  made  the  suggestion  if  he  had  visited  the 
schools.  When  he  admitted  that  he  had  not  done  so,  I 
told  him  what  I had  seen,  and  urged  him  to  see  for  him- 
self what  had  been  accomplished  before  he  voted  to  reduce 
the  appropriation.  Not  only  was  it  not  reduced,  but  it 
was  actually  enlarged,  and  I feel  very  happy  over  the 
result.” 

When  we  visited  the  Normal  School  in  Iloilo,  the  sub- 
ject under  discussion  in  one  of  the  classes  was  Benjamin 
Franklin. 

“Would  you  like  to  say  a word,  or  ask  a question?” 
said  the  superintendent.  The  invitation  was  accepted 
and  the  conversation  ran  along  this  line : 

“How  many  scholars  would  like  to  be  like  Benjamin 
Franklin?”  Nearly  every  hand  was  raised.  Pointing  to 
one  of  the  young  men  who  raised  his  hand,  this  question 
was  asked: 

“Why  would  you  like  to  be  like  Benjamin  Franklin?” 


202 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


“Benjamin  Franklin  was  a wise  man.  I wish  to  be  a 
wise  man.”  Another  student  was  asked  to  give  his  rea- 
son for  wishing  to  resemble  the  Philadelphian. 

“Benjamin  Franklin  was  a wise  man;  a wise  man  is  a 
good  man.  I wish  to  be  a good  man.” 

Another  hand  shook  until  the  finger  tips  rattled. 

“And  why  do  you  wish  to  be  like  Benjamin  Frank- 
lin?” 

“Benjamin  Franklin  was  a wise  man;  a wise  man  is  a 
rich  man ; I wish  to  be  a rich  man.”  This  bright  youth 
will  probably  take  the  first  transport  going  to  the  United 
States  in  order  to  accomplish  his  purpose,  or  else  fill  some 
office  in  Manila  and  learn,  all  too  late,  that  wfisdom  and 
riches  do  not  always  find  their  way  under  the  same  hat. 

Then  a little  Filipina  girl  was  questioned  as  to  her 
desire  to  resemble  the  great  American. 

“Benjamin  Franklin  was  a wise  man;  a wise  man  is  a 
helpful  man.  I wish  to  become  a teacher  and  help  my 
sisters  in  the  Philippines  as  my  American  teachers  have 
helped  me  and  other  girls  in  Iloilo,  therefore  I wish  to 
be  like  Benjamin  Franklin.” 

It  is  recognized  by  intelligent  persons  in  different  parts 
of  the  archipelago  that  the  quickest  and  surest  way  for 
Filipino  youth  to  acquire  the  English  language  and  to 
arrive  at  an  understanding  of  Western  civilization  as  it 
exists  in  America  is  to  live  among  Americans  in  the 
United  States  and  be  taught  in  American  schools.  The 
Commission  has  adopted  a plan  of  sending  to  America 
each  year  for  education  an  average  of  one  hundred  boys 
and  girls  of  high-school  age,  to  enable  them  to  become 
teachers,  lawyers,  doctors  or  engineers,  on  condition  that 
for  five  years  after  their  return  they  shall  be  subject  to 


STUDENTS  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES  203 


call  by  the  Government  for  public  service.  One  hundred 
boys  were  sent  in  October,  1903.  Seventy-five  of  the  ap- 
pointments were  allotted  to  the  provinces  in  proportion  to 
school  population  and  interest  in  the  schools  shown  in  the 
provinces ; twenty-five  were  selected  at  large  by  the  Civil 
Governor.  The  party  left  Manila  in  charge  of  Professor 
and  Mrs.  Sutherland,  and  went  to  southern  California, 
where  they  remained  during  the  winter.  In  the  summer 
they  visited  the  World’s  Fair  in  St.  Louis  for  a month 
before  being  distributed  among  the  preparatory  schools 
and  colleges  of  the  East. 

Two  English  writers  who  have  visited  the  Philippines 
recently — A.  H.  Savage  Landor  and  Archibald  R.  Col- 
quhoun — do  not  favor  the  present  American  educational 
system  in  the  islands.  Their  comments  are  interesting, 
even  if  their  conclusions  do  not  accord  with  the  American 
idea  of  educating  the  natives.  Mr.  Colquhoun  says  in 
“Greater  America” : 

“The  educational  policy  of  the  United  States  toward 
the  Philippines  has  been  influenced  by  the  same  motive 
which  dictated  her  whole  policy — a desire  to  do  for  the 
Filipinos  what  had  never  before  been  done  for  an  Oriental 
people.  The  example  of  Japan  might  have  been  followed 
more  closely,  so  far  as  patient  laying  of  foundations  was 
concerned  ; but  the  democratic  craze,  and  the  general  feel- 
ing that  salvation  must  come  in  a couple  of  years  or  not 
at  all,  have  combined  to  mar  what  might  have  been  the 
most  interesting  educational  experiment  of  the  age. 
Thanks  to  the  generosity  of  the  United  States  in  present- 
ing him  with  a ready-made  social,  political  and  educa- 
tional system,  the  Filipino,  before  he  is  rudimentarily 
educated,  will  be  plunged  in  the  vices  of  over-civilization, 


204. 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


and  the  chances  are  that  he  will  pass  from  childhood  to 
decay  without  ever  reaching  maturity.” 

Mr.  Landor  does  not  look  with  favor  upon  the  present 
educational  syTstem.  In  “The  Gems  of  the  East”  he  says : 
“In  the  education  of  the  natives,  as  I have  already  hinted, 
the  Americans  are  somewhat  overstepping  the  mark — or, 
in  other  words,  they  are  beginning  fi'om  the  wrong  end. 
Trade,  industrial  and  agricultural  schools  will  be  a ben- 
efit to  the  country.  On  a curriculum  of  literature,  history, 
higher  mathematics,  and  American  songs,  I fear,  those 
boys  who  do  not  receive  Government  employment  will 
eventually'  be  led  to  starvation  or  crime.  . . . It  is 

a pity  that  some  of  the  money  thrown  away  in  importing 
hundreds  upon  hundreds  of  American  teachers — or, 
rather,  Americans  as  teachers — is  not  spent  instead  in 
opening  new  roads  and  trails  and  repairing  old  ones,  and 
in  establishing  some  sort  of  regular  postal  and  telegraph 
service,  as  well  as  in  encouraging  communication  from 
one  island  to  the  other.” 

“I  am  aware,”  said  Governor  Taft  in  his  last  official 
report  to  Washington,  “that  our  plans  for  education  have 
been  the  subject  of  considerable  criticism  by  men  whose 
experience  in  Eastern  countries  entitles  their  views  to 
great  weight,  on  the  ground  that  by  giving  education 
to  the  people  we  unfit  them  for  agricultural  and  other 
manual  pursuits  and  inspire  them  with  a desire  to  succeed 
only  as  clerks  and  professional  men.  That  the  result  of 
higher  education  upon  a people  unfitted  by  training  and 
moral  stamina  to  use  it  to  good  purpose  may  be  produc- 
tive of  evil  need  not  here  be  denied  or  discussed.  That 
superficial  education  frequently  produces  discontent  and 
brings  about  social  disturbances  may  also  be  conceded. 


IGNORANCE  A PERIL 


205 


The  condition,  however,  which  is  most  productive  of  social 
disturbances  is  the  existence  of  a vast  mass  of  ignorant 
people  easily  and  blindly  led  by  the  comparatively  few 
of  their  superficially  educated  countrymen  into  insurrec- 
tion and  lawless  violence  without  any  definite  knowledge 
or  certainty  as  to  the  beneficial  results  therefrom.  The 
theory  upon  which  we  justify,  even  on  political  grounds, 
the  spread  of  education  is  that  the  more  the  mass  of 
ignorant  persons  is  reduced  in  number  by  diffusing 
among  them  common  school  education,  the  less  likely  are 
they  to  be  led  away  by  degenerate  political  fakirs  into 
experiences  and  projects  that  can  lead  to  nothing  but 
disaster.  The  common  school  education  does  not  unfit 
either  the  Oriental  or  the  Occidental  laborer  for  manual 
effort,  but  it  does  enlighten  him  as  to  a more  civilized 
life,  and  does  increase  his  wants  and  thus  does  furnish  a 
native  for  more  continuous  and  harder  labor.” 

Governor  Taft  is  very  careful  to  specify  that  he  favors 
“common  school”  education ; the  English  critics  doubtless 
had  in  mind  the  academic,  collegiate  and  university  edu- 
cations of  India.  English  officials  in  India  are  facing  a 
problem:  What  shall  be  done  with  A.B.  men?  The 

civil  offices,  the  railway  positions  needing  educated  men, 
and  the  schools,  are  all  filled,  and  still  men  with  degrees 
clamor  for  clerical  work.  The  remedy  in  India  is  being 
applied — raising  the  standard  so  high  that  only  the  best, 
and  a limited  number  at  that,  can  receive  degrees. 


CHAPTER  XXI 


A MORNING  WITH  AGUINALDO 


The  Recognized  Leader  of  the  Insurgents — Luzon  the 
Home  of  Revolution — Aguinaldo’s  Banking  Scheme — 

The  Treaty  of  Peace  with  Spain — Influence  of  Rizal, 
the  Idol  of  the  Filipinos. 

ITH  a friend  who  speaks  excellent  Spanish,  I went 


one  morning  to  have  an  interview  with  Emilio 


Aguinaldo,  the  recognized  leader  of  the  insurgents,  or 
revolutionists  as  they  prefer  to  call  themselves,  in  their 
fight  against  Spanish  rule  in  1896-7  and  against  Ameri- 
can rule  in  1898-1901.  I use  the  word  “recognized” 
advisedly  after  many  interviews  writh  Americans  and 
Spaniards  and  Filipinos.  The  opinion  is  general  in 
Manila  that  the  real  leader  of  the  Filipinos  during  their 
years  of  revolution  was  Mabini,  the  “brains  of  the  Revo- 
lution,” who  died  in  May,  1903,  from  cholera.  Mabini 
was  not  a general  nor  even  a soldier  in  the  army,  but  a 
paralytic,  and  is  affectionately  termed  by  the  Filipinos 
“The  Sublime  Paralytic.”  It  is  admitted  also  that  two 
or  three  other  men  who  were  active  in  the  field,  General 
Luna  among  the  number,  were  Aguinaldo’s  superiors  in- 
tellectually, and  that  it  was  a recognition  of  this  fact 
which  led  to  the  assassination  of  Luna. 

When  Mr.  Rodgers  and  I called  at  the  home  of  Agui- 
naldo in  Calle  Real,  Manila,  we  were  shown  into  the  re- 
ception room,  and  in  a few  moments  the  young  agitator 


THE  INSURGENT  A HALF  BREED  207 


appeared  and  gave  us  a cordial  greeting.  Mr.  Rodgers 
had  been  interpreter  for  another  visitor  some  months  be- 
fore, and  the  interview  had  been  so  formal  that  he  was 
not  anxious  to  repeat  the  experience.  A change  in  Agui- 
naldo’s  attitude  was  marked  at  the  time  of  our  interview. 
Perhaps  this  was  due  in  part  to  the  fact  that  Mr.  Rodgers 
and  he  each  had  a son  about  seven  years  of  age  who  had 
been  schoolmates  in  the  Bo}rs’  School  of  Malate.  Mr. 
Rodgers  explained  that  I was  a “periodista”  (journal- 
ist), and  that  put  us  in  our  true  relation  at  the  outset. 

I had  expected  to  find  a Filipino,  but  the  man  before 
us  was  more  a Chinaman  in  his  looks  and  bearing  than 
he  was  a representative  of  the  people  for  whose  recogni- 
tion by  the  Powers  of  the  world  he  had  vainly  pleaded. 
His  high  cheek-bones,  his  manner  of  asking  questions, 
his  air  of  reserve,  as  well  as  his  color,  marked  him  at  once 
as  having  mixed  blood — Spanish,  Tagol  and  Chinese 
strains,  it  is  said. 

The  Province  of  Luzon  is  the  home  of  the  revolution- 
ist, and  the  mestizo  more  than  the  pure-blooded  Filipino 
is  the  natural  disturber  of  the  established  order;  he  is 
restive  and  seeks  a change.  It  is  significant  that  the 
majority  of  the  leaders  of  the  last  Revolution  were  mesti- 
zos. A member  of  the  Philippine  Commission  says  that 
nearly  all  the  ranking  families  in  Manila  were  more  or 
less  Chinese  in  origin.  The  Chinese  ancestor  may  have 
entered  the  Philippine  family  line  a half  dozen  genera- 
tions back,  but  in  every  case  he  left  his  imprint. 

“Have  you  traveled  much  through  the  islands?”  said 
Aguinaldo  in  Spanish ; and  then  explained  apologetically 
that  he  had  picked  up  considerable  English  when  he  was 
a prisoner,  through  his  contact  with  American  soldiers, 


208 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


but  that  he  now  spoke  only  Spanish  and  was  losing  what 
little  English  he  had  learned.  Being  told  that  we  had 
visited  the  leading  provinces  of  the  archipelago,  includ- 
ing the  capital  cities  of  the  insurrection,  he  asked  our 
opinion  of  the  islands  and  the  people.  This  gave  an 
opportunity  to  speak  of  the  native  Governors  of  the  civil 
provinces  whom  we  had  met — the  ablest  men  in  the  prov- 
inces, we  were  told. 

“The  Governors,  your  friends,  spoke  very  highly  of 
you,”  said  the  visitor. 

“That  was  kind  of  them,”  replied  the  young  leader 
thoughtfully.  The  friends  who  had  spoken  kindly  of 
him  are  now  office-holders  under  the  new  Government  and 
have  other  offices  at  their  disposal,  while  their  leader  of 
three  years  before  is  living  alone,  without  a following 
and  apparently  without  material  resources.  The  man  to 
whom  a salary  of  $50,000  was  granted  three  years  be- 
fore has  practically  no  income  now. 

After  explaining  the  conditions  in  the  various  islands 
as  he  had  seen  them,  the  visitor  asked  this  question : 

“What  would  have  been  their  condition  to-day  if  the 
Revolutionists  had  been  successful  in  their  contest  with 
the  Americans?” 

Mr.  Rodgers  apparently  thought  this  question  might 
be  misunderstood  if  translated  literally,  and  the  transla- 
tion which  Aguinaldo  received,  softened  as  it  was  by 
many  pleasant  words  and  not  a few  parentheses,  was  still 
too  strong  for  an  answer  in  terms.  A shrug  of  the 
shoulders  was  the  only  reply. 

“When  the  great  American  Civil  War  was  settled  in 
1865,  the  situation  was  accepted  at  once  by  those  who  had 
lost,”  said  the  interviewer.  “The  men  returned  from 


Emii.io  Aguinaldo 


NO  MESSAGE  FOR  AMERICA 


209 


their  battlefields  to  resume  their  work  on  the  farms  and 
in  the  shop  as  opportunity  offered.” 

“But  there  was  a difference,”  replied  the  Lee  of  the 
Philippines.  “Those  men  were  of  one  nationality.  The 
Southern  men  were  defeated  by  men  of  their  own  race 
and  blood.  They  were  never  conquered  by  an  enemy 
from  the  outside.”  In  this  statement  alone  was  there  the 
least  irritation  shown,  and  in  a moment  the  former  spirit 
of  reserve  and  self-control  was  regained. 

“What  do  your  friends  and  you  think  of  the  future 
of  the  islands  under  American  rule?”  With  another 
shrug  of  the  shoulders  Aguinaldo  replied: 

“As  for  my  friends,  you  have  been  in  the  provinces 
and  have  doubtless  learned  how  they  feel;  as  for  myself, 
my  opinions  are  the  same  as  they  have  always  been.  The 
American  people  know  them  well.” 

“Have  you  any  message  for  the  people  of  America?” 
“I  thank  you  for  your  courtesy.  I should  rather  not 
avail  myself  of  it,  however.  What  I should  say  might 
excite  rancor  and  ill-feeling.  I am  out  of  politics.  I am 
spending  my  time  at  present  studying  what  may  be  done 
for  the  welfare  of  my  people.” 

“Along  what  lines  have  your  studies  taken  you?” 

“I  am  especially  anxious  to  have  a banking  system 
established  throughout  the  provinces  which  shall  help  the 
farmers  and  serve  to  undo  the  ravages  of  war  and  devas- 
tation which  followed  from  the  locusts,  the  rinderpest  and 
the  cholera.” 

Aguinaldo’s  banking  scheme,  while  containing  many 
excellent  points,  was  not  deemed  practical  by  the  Govern- 
ment. It  contemplated  the  establishment  of  a national 
currency  system  for  the  Filipinos,  guaranteed  by  the 


210 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


United  States,  of  one  hundred  million  dollars.  The 
money  was  to  be  issued  in  the  Philippines  and  loaned  to 
the  farmers  at  a low  rate  of  interest,  after  the  manner 
of  the  Agrarian  banks  of  Europe.  The  burdens  to  which 
Aguinaldo  referred  have  been  many,  and  in  not  a few 
of  the  provinces  it  is  a struggle  for  the  people  to  keep 
from  starvation,  while  in  others  the  farmers  are  prac- 
tically unable  to  cultivate  the  land  which  they  own  or 
which  they  can  lease.  Congress  recognized  this  condition 
in  1902,  making  a grant  of  three  million  dollars  to  re- 
lieve the  distress  in  the  islands. 

“Have  you  presented  your  financial  plan  to  Governor 
Taft  and  the  Commission?” 

“Yes ; I have.” 

“How  was  it  received?” 

“V  ery  drily.  It  was  read  and  sent  to  Washington, 
and  nothing  more  came  of  it.” 

There  was  more  in  the  manner  than  in  the  words  of 
the  answer.  It  was  clearly  a disappointment  to  Agui- 
naldo that  his  plan,  which  he  deemed  practicable,  should 
have  so  “dry”  a reception.  The  discussion  then  turned 
to  the  honors  which  have  come  to  many  of  the  leaders 
of  the  Revolution.  In  fact,  there  is  a jest  in  Manila 
that  one  might  have  been  a Revolutionist  to  receive  any 
office  which  the  people  control.  Nearly  all  of  the  Gov- 
ernors who  have  been  elected,  for  instance,  were  insurgent 
generals.  The  Civil  Government  has  also  placed  a great 
many  men  in  positions  of  trust  who  formerly  bore  arms 
against  the  United  States  forces.  Aguinaldo  admitted 
this  fact,  but  said  that  the  same  was  true  in  Spanish 
times,  adding: 

“The  Spaniards  had  many  natives  in  the  Government 


AGLIPAYANS  SECOND  GRADE 


211 


service,  but  it  is  probably  true  that  there  are  more  men 
in  the  higher  positions  under  American  than  under  Span- 
ish rule.” 

Referring  to  the  suggestion  made  some  time  ago  that 
Aguinaldo  would  visit  America  in  the  near  future,  he 
was  asked  if  he  had  any  plans  toward  that  end.  To  this 
he  replied: 

“It  has  been  my  hope  for  many  years  to  visit  your 
country,  but  I cannot  tell  whether  I shall  be  able  to 
accomplish  it,  at  least  for  some  time  to  come.  I desire 
very  much  to  go  and  I may  do  so  in  the  future.” 

Turning  from  political  and  social  questions,  reference 
was  made  to  the  Protestant  work  which  Mr.  Rodgers  had 
begun  in  Cavite  Viejo,  the  native  town  of  Aguinaldo. 

“Yes,”  he  replied,  “when  this  work  was  started  many 
of  my  fellow  townsmen  came  to  me  and  asked  my  opinion 
of  the  movement.  I told  them  it  was  a good  thing,  and 
that  they  would  do  well  to  favor  it.” 

“Aglipay,  the  priest  who  was  deposed  by  the  Catholic 
authorities,  and  is  now  seeking  to  destroy  the  power  of 
Rome  in  the  Philippines,  was  one  of  your  friends.  What 
do  you  think  of  his  present  work?” 

“It  is  a step  in  the  right  direction,  and  will  lead  to 
better  things  here.” 

“Does  it  satisfy  you?” 

“I  may  call  it  the  second  grade ; the  first  grade  in 
time  will  be  the  Protestant  Church.” 

After  some  general  remarks  about  the  condition  of  the 
islands,  the  interview  ended,  the  Americans  bidding  their 
host  farewell  as  he  thanked  them  for  calling  and  offered 
to  serve  them  in  any  wa}^  in  his  power. 

That  evening  we  met  Aguinaldo  again,  this  time  a 


212 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


guest  at  the  Malacanan  Palace  at  the  farewell  reception 
which  Governor  and  Mrs.  Taft  gave  to  General  and  Mrs. 
Davis,  who  were  about  to  return  to  the  United  States. 

Aguinaldo  was  born  in  Cavite  in  March,  1869,  and  was 
a schoolmaster  at  Silan  when  the  Revolution  of  1896 
broke  out.  The  Provinces  of  Cavite  and  Batangas  were 
the  chief  centers  of  the  rebellion  against  Spain,  or,  more 
literally,  against  the  Spanish  friars.  The  rebels  estab- 
lished their  quarters  near  Silan  at  the  base  of  the  Sun- 
gay  Mountains,  where,  in  the  numerous  ravines  that 
reached  to  the  Lake  of  Taal,  they  were  safe  from  any 
enemy.  Aguinaldo  had  recently  passed  his  twenty-sev- 
enth birthday  when,  on  August  31st,  he  sent  out  his  first 
pronunciamento  and  became  the  recognized  leader  of  the 
rebels.  From  this  time  on  he  continued  the  issuance  of 
manifestoes,  in  one  of  which  he  said: 

“We  aspire  to  the  glory  of  obtaining  the  liberty,  inde- 
pendence and  honor  of  the  country.  . . .We  as- 

pire to  a government  representing  all  the  live  forces  of 
the  country,  in  which  the  most  able,  the  most  worthy  in 
virtue  and  talent,  may  take  part  without  distinction  of 
birth,  fortune  or  race.  We  desire  that  no  monk  or  friar 
shall  sully  the  soil  of  any  part  of  the  archipelago,  nor 
that  there  shall  exist  any  convent,  etc.,  etc.” 

The  rebellion  against  Spain  continued  with  varying 
fortunes  for  more  than  a year,  when  Aguinaldo  and  his 
staff  agreed  to  a treaty  which  was  signed  on  December 
14,  1897,  at  Biac-na-Bato,  a mountain  fortress  in  the 
Province  of  Bulacan,  about  sixty  miles  from  Manila. 
Aguinaldo  signed  the  treaty  for  his  party;  Pedro  A. 
Paterno,  as  attorney  for  the  Captain-General,  acted  in 
the  name  of  the  Spanish  Government.  The  end  of  the 


Area  ix  Front  of  Mai.acaxax  Pai.ace 
The  Bridge  of  Spaix 


FILIPINOS  FEAR  THE  SPANIARDS  213 


Revolution  was  received  with  great  rejoicing  in  Madrid 
as  well  as  in  Manila. 

Under  this  treaty  the  rebels  undertook  to  deliver  up 
their  arms  and  ammunition  of  all  kinds  to  the  Spaniards ; 
to  evacuate  the  places  held  by  them ; to  conclude  an 
armistice  for  three  years  for  the  application  and  develop- 
ment of  the  reforms  to  be  introduced  by  the  Spaniards, 
and  neither  to  conspire  against  Spanish  sovereignty  in 
the  islands,  nor  to  aid  or  abet  any  Government  calculated 
to  counteract  the  reforms.  Aguinaldo  and  thirty  other 
leaders  agreed  to  quit  the  islands  and  not  to  return  until 
authorized  to  do  so  by  the  Spanish  Government.  By  the 
terms  of  the  treaty  the  rebels-in-arms  were  to  receive  from 
the  Spanish  Government  $1,000,000  and  the  families 
that  had  sustained  loss  by  reason  of  the  war,  $700,000. 
Of  the  $1,000,000  promised  to  the  rebels,  $100,000  was 
to  be  paid  in  Hong  Kong  when  Aguinaldo  and  his  com- 
panions reached  that  port. 

The  Revolutionists  were  taken  to  Hong  Kong  by  John 
T.  McLeod,  a Scotchman,  the  manager  of  the  Compania 
Maritima,  and  the  first  payment  promised  by  the  Spanish 
Government  was  handed  to  Aguinaldo  in  Hong  Kong  by 
Mr.  McLeod.  In  describing  to  the  writer  the  trip  to 
China,  Mr.  McLeod  said  that  Aguinaldo  requested  that 
he  should  accompany  the  party,  as  Aguinaldo  did  not 
trust  the  Spaniards.  The  insurgents  believed  them  in- 
sincere, and  that,  as  soon  as  the  open  sea  was  reached, 
they  would  throw  the  Filipinos  overboard.  To  prevent 
this,  the  latter  requested  to  be  allowed  to  retain  their 
arms,  and  demanded  that  the  Spaniards  should  be  de- 
prived of  theirs. 

The  journey  was  without  special  incident.  The  little 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


214 

brown  men  were  not  drowned.  They  received  their 
money — the  $400,000  promised  by  Spain.  In  six  months, 
false  to  their  promise,  they  were  back  in  the  islands 
assisting  the  Americans  to  rout  the  common  foe.  They 
asserted  that  the  Spaniards  failed  to  keep  faith  with 
them,  refusing  to  pay  the  balance  of  the  money  due  them 
b}r  the  terms  of  the  treaty,  and  charged  the  Spaniards 
with  failing  to  make  the  reforms  promised.  Within  three 
months  of  their  return  to  Manila  the  Revolutionists 
turned  against  the  Americans  because  they  were  not 
allowed  the  privileges  which  would  have  been  theirs  if 
they  had  been  successful  unaided — entering  the  city  of 
Manila  as  victors. 

Then  came  the  struggle  against  the  Americans,  be- 
ginning in  February,  1899,  and  ending  with  the  capture 
of  Aguinaldo  by  General  Funston  in  March,  1901. 
Some  of  the  leaders  came  in  subsequent  to  this  time,  but 
the  Revolution  was  really  at  an  end  when  its  leader  was 
taken  to  Manila.  For  some  months  he  was  kept  a military 
prisoner,  and  then  suddenly  released,  much  to  his  sur- 
prise and  also,  it  is  said,  much  against  his  will,  for  he 
feared  that  his  life  would  not  be  safe  without  military 
protection.  It  is  surmised  also  that  his  friends,  if  not 
himself,  would  have  enjojed  the  fiction  that  he  was  a 
prisoner;  but  that  was  not  permitted.  He  sees  friends 
without  restriction,  attends  receptions  and  goes  about  the 
city  at  pleasure,  though  he  usually  rides  in  a closed 
carriage. 

One  of  the  questions  before  the  Schurman  Commission 
appointed  by  President  McKinley  in  1899,  was  to  ascer- 
tain on  what  terms  Aguinaldo  had  returned  from  Singa- 
pore to  Manila  the  previous  summer.  The  claim  was 


ESTIMATE  OF  AGUINALDO 


215 


made  that  Admiral  Dewey  or  some  other  American  official 
had  promised  Aguinaldo  that  the  Filipinos  should  have 
their  independence  after  the  Spaniards  were  driven 
from  the  islands,  and  that  the  insurgent  returned  to  aid 
the  Americans  in  routing  their  common  enemy  in  order 
that  independence  might  follow  for  his  people.  A great 
deal  of  evidence  was  taken  by  the  Commission.  It 
showed  that  Aguinaldo  was  allowed  to  return  to  Manila 
by  Admiral  Dewey  after  giving  Consul  Wildman  at 
Hong  Kong  two  pledges : ( 1 ) That  he  would  obey 

unquestioningly  the  commander  of  the  United  States 
forces  in  the  Philippine  Islands”;  and  (2)  that  he  would 
“carry  on  his  military  movements  on  civilized  lines.” 

Chancellor  E.  Benjamin  Andrews,  in  “The  United 
States  in  Our  Own  Time,”  says  of  Aguinaldo:  “Judg- 
ing  by  appearances — his  zeal  in  1896,  bargain  with 
Spain  in  1897,  fighting  again  in  Luzon  in  1898,  acqui- 
escence in  peace  with  the  United  States,  reappearance  in 
arms,  capture,  and  instant  allegiance  to  our  flag — he  was 
a shifty  character,  little  worthy  of  the  great  honor  he 
received  among  his  own  people,  and,  for  long,  here. 
But  if  he  lacked  in  constancy,  he  excelled  in  enterprise. 
Spaniards  never  missed  their  reckoning  more  completely 
than  in  thinking  they  had  quieted  Aguinaldo  by  sending 
him  to  China  with  a bag  of  money.  He  simply  held  the 
treasure  for  future  use  as  a war  fund.  Since  Spain  had 
not  redressed  and  showed  no  disposition  to  redress  Phil- 
ippine abuses,  he  regarded  the  Spanish- American  war 
as  an  auspicious  chance  for  renewed  activity  in  the  cause 
of  Filipino  home  rule.” 

The  testimony  taken  by  the  Schurman  Commission 
concerning  the  revolt  of  Aguinaldo  against  the  American 


216 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


forces  may  be  summarized  under  these  four  points:  (1) 

That  Aguinaldo  was  helped  to  arms  on  the  understand- 
ing that  he  was  to  use  them  entirely  under  American 
direction  in  weakening  Spanish  power;  (2)  that  no 
sooner  had  he  gathered  a force  about  him  than  he  broke 
out  into  inexcusable  insubordination  against  the  man  and 
the  forces  to  whose  presence  and  gift  of  arms  he  was 
entirely  indebted  for  his  ability  to  return  to  the  Philip- 
pines, and  to  take  up  a warlike  attitude  toward  his  for- 
mer enemy;  (3)  that  hostility  to  the  Americans  was 
settled  upon  in  his  own  mind  long  before  they  had  time 
or  opportunity  to  formulate  or  declare  any  policy  for 
the  Philippines;  (4)  that  personal  ambition  was  the  rul- 
ing motive  with  him  in  the  early  stage  of  the  embroilment. 

Much  of  this  testimony  was  given  by  Senor  Benito 
Legarda,  for  a few  months  one  of  Aguinaldo’s  officials, 
and  now  one  of  the  members  of  the  Civil  Commission. 
From  this  testimony  this  extract  is  taken : 

“Q.  Did  Aguinaldo  expect  to  enter  Manila  with  his 
troops  with  the  Americans?” 

“A.  Yes,  sir.” 

“Q.  Was  there  any  disappointment  among  the  troops 
of  Aguinaldo  that  they  were  not  permitted  to  plunder 
the  city  ? Was  there  any  plan  to  plunder  the  city  ?” 

“A.  Yes,  sir;  there  had  been  such  a plan.” 

“Q.  Tell  us  about  the  plan.” 

“A.  They  wished,  of  course,  to  come  into  Manila  after 
having  robbed  it,  for  there  was  a plan  to  rob  the  whole 
city.  Aguinaldo  himself,  while  in  Bacoor,  pointed  out 
crowds  of  people  to  me,  passing,  carrying  sacks,  who,  he 
said,  were  on  their  way  to  Manila  to  sack  the  city  when 
they  were  able.” 


DYING  WORDS  OF  RIZAL 


217 


“What  is  death  to  me?  I have  sown  the  seed;  others 
are  left  to  reap.” 

In  his  last  moments  Dr.  Jose  Rizal,  one  of  the  most 
notable  Filipinos  whom  the  islands  have  produced,  penned 
these  words  which  are  quoted  through  the  archipelago. 
Generations  will  pass  before  the  name  of  Rizal  will  cease 
to  be  a household  word  among  the  Filipinos.  Born  a 
Catholic,  distinguished  as  a student  in  the  Jesuit  school 
at  Manila,  Rizal  went  to  Europe  to  continue  his  studies 
in  Madrid,  Paris  and  Germany. 

National  life  in  southern  Europe  furnished  this  young 
Filipino  a theme  to  which  he  gave  much  attention.  He 
was  thoroughly  convinced  that  the  Philippines  could  not 
be  at  rest,  nor  the  people  developed  as  they  should  be, 
unless  the  friars  were  recalled  by  the  Catholic  Church  or 
expelled  by  the  people.  His  first  public  effort  toward 
changing  conditions  in  the  islands  of  which  he  was  so 
fond  was  the  publication  of  a novel  entitled  “Noli  Me 
Tangere,”  a vivid  picture  of  the  conduct  of  the  friars 
and  the  sufferings  of  the  people.  “El  Filibusterismo,” 
a political  book,  soon  followed  his  novel  and  was  also  pub- 
lished in  Europe.  Dr.  Rizal  returned  to  the  Philippines 
and  led  in  a protest  against  the  claim  to  the  title  of  a 
large  estate  made  by  the  Dominican  order  in  his  native 
community.  Concluding  that  he  was  safer  in  Europe 
than  in  the  Philippines,  he  left  the  archipelago ; but 
his  absence  did  not  satisfy  his  persecutors,  and  his  family 
was  driven  from  its  lands.  In  vain  the  members  protested 
that  they  were  submissive  to  the  Church  of  Rome  and 
loyal  to  its  orders. 

Rizal  desired  to  return  to  Manila  in  1893  and  came  as 
far  as  Hong  Kong.  There  he  corresponded  with  the  gov- 


218 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


ernor-general  and  the  Spanish  consul,  both  of  whom 
assured  him  that  he  was  at  perfect  liberty  to  return  to 
the  Philippines.  When  he  arrived  in  the  harbor  of 
Manila  he  was  arrested  charged  with  having  in  his  per- 
sonal baggage  seditious  papers.  The  papers  were  there, 
of  that  there  could  be  no  doubt,  but  it  was  the  belief  of 
Dr.  Rizal  and  of  his  friends  that  they  had  been  placed 
there  by  bribed  agents.  The  friars  demanded  that  he 
should  be  executed,  but  a compromise  was  affected 
and  he  was  banished  to  Mindanao,  where  he  lived  for 
three  years  and  practiced  his  profession  with  marked 
success. 

Dr.  Rizal  was  always  loyal  to  Spain,  and  when  the 
Spanish  War  was  declared  he  offered  his  services  as  a 
physician  and  started  for  Cuba  by  way  of  Spain.  Before 
he  reached  Barcelona  a cable  message  containing  accusa- 
tions against  him  had  been  received  there.  Imprisoned 
again  and  sent  back  to  Manila,  he  was  there  tried  and 
convicted  of  sedition  and  rebellion.  As  a prisoner  of 
state  for  three  years  in  a distant  island,  his  claim  that 
he  had  not  aided  the  insurrectionists  should  have  had  or- 
dinary weight,  but  on  December  30,  1896,  “the  brightest 
intellectual  light  that  has  shone  thus  far  in  the  Philip- 
pines” was  publicly  blindfolded  and  shot  in  the  back  on 
the  execution  grounds  facing  the  Manila  Bay. 

“As  a result  of  this  murder — for  it  was  nothing  else, 
though  sanctioned  by  law” — adds  Dr.  Stuntz,  “the  friars 
suffered  far  more  than  did  the  family  of  Rizal,  for  his 
brother,  Ponciano  Rizal,  took  the  field  against  Spanish 
authority,  gathered  a large  force,  and  fought  his  way 
into  the  interior.  He  drove  all  of  the  Spaniards  out  of 
his  province,  Laguna  de  Bay,  captured  this  garrison 


MISTAKE  MADE  BY  THE  FRIARS  219 


with  its  arms,  and  also  lake  gunboats  and  other  materials 
later  used  against  the  Spaniards.” 

On  one  of  our  trips  we  passed  through  Calamba,  the 
birthplace  of  Rizal,  and  heard  at  first  hand  the  story 
given  so  dramatically  by  Foreman.  No  mistake  made 
by  the  friars  in  the  Philippines  in  many  decades  was  so 
grievous  for  them  as  killing  the  hero  of  the  people.  It 
was  a knowledge  of  this  error  that  made  General  Mc- 
Arthur insist,  when  General  Funston  set  out  to  capture 
Aguinaldo,  that  under  no  circumstances  should  the  leader 
of  the  insurrection  be  killed  or  even  wounded.  Aguinaldo 
alive  is  harmless ; Aguinaldo  dead,  like  Rizal  dead,  would 
be  a power  against  the  Government  well-nigh  irresistible. 


CHAPTER  XXII 


TWO  TYPES  OF  PATRIOTS 


Mabini  and  Paterno  the  Representatives— The  Former 
Deported  for  a Time — The  Latter  Seeking  Reform  by 
Evolution — Advice  to  a Leader  of  Ladrones — Mod- 
esty of  a Filipino  Trained  in  Europe. 

ITH  the  capture  of  Aguinaldo  the  American 


Government  found  it  had  to  deal  with  two  classes 


of  patriots : those  who  were  loyal  to  the  “Lost  Cause,” 
and  those  who,  by  profession  at  least,  were  delighted 
that  the  insurgents  had  lost  their  cause.  The  one  con- 
tented itself  with  holding  secret  meetings  and  placing 
responsibility  for  the  failure  of  the  insurgents  upon  this 
or  that  leader,  and  the  other  stood  in  front  of  the  desks 
of  the  officials,  with  hat  in  hand,  ready  to  receive  any 
cocoanuts  or  bananas  that  might  be  falling  that  day.  It 
is  true  that  certain  followers  of  the  silent  class  tried  to 
bring  about  by  brigandage  what  their  leaders  had  lost 
by  insurrection,  and  the  charge  is  made  that  some  of 
the  amigos  were  secret  instigators  of  open  brigandage. 

Reference  has  been  made  already  to  the  statement 
current  in  the  Philippines  that  Apolinario  Mabini,  and 
not  Emilio  Aguinaldo,  was  the  “Brains  of  the  Revolu- 
tion” against  the  Americans.  Mabini  refused  to  take 
the  oath  of  allegiance  after  the  crushing  of  the  insur- 


Royal  Gate,  Walled  City,  Manila 
Gate  at  Pagsanjan 


ATTITUDE  OF  MABINI 


221 


rection,  and  was  sent  to  Guam,  where  he  remained  until 
1903,  when  he  landed  in  the  Philippines,  having  at  last 
taken  the  customary  oath.  Shortly  after  his  arrival  in 
Manila  he  died  from  cholera,  and  was  followed  to  his 
grave  by  a great  procession  of  men  whom,  because  of  his 
chronic  infirmity — paralysis — he  had  never  seen  on  the 
battle-field. 

The  true  attitude  of  Mabini  toward  the  American 
Government,  after  he  acknowledged  its  authority  over 
him,  may  be  gathered  from  a letter  which  he  sent  to  one 
San  Miguel,  a bandit,  who  professed  to  be  the  appointee 
of  a junta  representing  the  Filipino  Republic.  San 
Miguel  drew  his  forces  from  the  purlieus  of  Manila  and 
from  well-known  ladrone  fields  and  other  criminals  to  be 
found  in  the  towns  and  provinces  which  were  disturbed 
by  his  marauding  bands.  In  one  of  the  engagements 
with  the  Constabular}'  and  Scouts  more  than  sixty  la- 
drones  were  killed,  among  them  their  leader,  San  Miguel. 
Upon  the  latter’s  body  was  found  the  visiting  card  of 
Mabini,  who  had  written  the  bandit  in  response  to  his 
request  for  advice,  that  he  had  not  been  long  enough  in 
the  islands  to  answer,  but  that  he  would  write  him  a letter. 
Mabini’s  card  was  sent  to  Governor  Taft,  and  forwarded 
by  him  to  Senor  Pedro  Alejandro  Patemo,  to  whom  ref- 
erence will  be  made  later  in  this  chapter;  the  Governor 
expressed  surprise  that  so  soon  after  taking  the  oath  of 
allegiance  Mabini  should  open  communication  with  men 
in  arms  against  the  Government. 

The  following  is  the  letter  which  Mabini  had  sent  to 
San  Miguel  on  March  27,  1903,  but  which  did  not  reach 
him  before  his  death : 

“Since  you  ask  me  my  opinion  concerning  your  action, 


222 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


I will  clearly  inform  you  in  accordance  with  my  method 
of  thinking. 

“I  do  not  consider  that  the  liberty  enjoyed  to-day  in 
this  archipelago  can  be  followed  by  independence  through 
means  of  arms  at  the  present  time.  The  people  do  not 
move  because  they  have  no  arms,  and  even  if  they  had 
them  they  would  have  nothing  to  eat.  Although  you 
might  find  another  nation  that  would  like  to  furnish 
arms  and  supplies,  this  nation  also  would  like  to  annex 
this  territory,  and  if  this  should  happen  our  misfortune 
would  be  still  greater. 

“If  we  should  proceed  gradually,  as,  in  fact,  you  are 
doing,  the  war  would  continue  and  possibly  our  nation 
never  would  enjoy  prosperity,  because  the  war  would 
finally  turn  into  a poisonous  disease  which  would  greatly 
increase  our  weakness.  Understand  well  that  we  are  now 
killing  each  other. 

“It  seems  to  me  that  at  the  present  time  we  should  en- 
deavor to  secure  independence  through  the  paths  of 
peace.  Let  us  cease  that  the  people  may  rest,  that  it 
may  work  to  recover  from  its  recent  proprietary  losses. 
Let  us  conform  to  the  opinion  of  the  majority,  although 
we  may  recognize  that  by  this  method  we  do  not  obtain 
our  desires.  This  is,  I believe,  the  surest  and  most  fit 
method  in  obtaining  the  welfare  of  all. 

“Let  us  deliberate  and  hold  an  assembly  to  treat  of 
these  matters.  In  case  you  are  in  conformity  with  this 
and  return  to  peace,  determine  upon  the  necessary  con- 
ditions that  you  should  ask  in  order  to  save  yourselves 
from  any  vexations,  and  if  3-011  think  that  I should  trans- 
mit your  petition  to  the  constituted  authorities  I am  dis- 
posed to  compty  at  any  time. 


POVERTY  BORN  OF  WAR 


223 


“There  are  those  who  say  your  procedure  is  the  cause 
of  many  abuses  and  methods  which  are  unfavorable  to 
the  country,  but  I believe  that  the  remedy  for  this,  if 
true,  is  not  comparable  to  the  great  poverty  which  would 
be  born  of  a war  apparently  interminable.  I believe  that 
as  long  as  the  Filipinos  do  not  endeavor  to  liberate  them- 
selves from  their  bonds  the  period  of  their  liberty  will  not 
arrive. 

“Excuse  me  for  telling  you  this.  If,  perchance,  you 
are  not  in  accord  with  my  opinion,  this  will  not,  as  far 
as  I am  concerned,  be  a motive  for  destroying  our 
former  friendship  and  companionship.  Order  your  hum- 
ble servant  whenever  you  see  fit.” 

In  answer  to  Governor  Taft’s  inquiry  Mabini 
addressed  to  him,  April  9,  1903,  the  following 

letter : 

“A  few  days  after  my  arrival  at  this  capital  I re- 
ceived a message  from  the  late  San  Miguel,  sending 
greetings  of  welcome,  and  requesting  my  opinion  in  re- 
gard to  his  attitude.  In  reply  I sent  him  a card,  thank- 
ing him  for  his  welcome  and  informing  him  that  I had 
not  as  yet  formed  any  opinion,  since  I had  only  just 
arrived  and  did  not  know  the  conditions. 

“Weeks  after,  when  I had  acquired  some  knowledge 
of  the  true  state  of  affairs,  I wrote  a letter,  in  which  I 
endeavored  to  prove  that  armed  contention  is  ruinous  to 
the  country  and  that  the  present  condition  of  things  per- 
mits only  of  a pacific  contention  for  the  political  ideals 
that  one  might  strive  after.  I prepared  this  letter 
against  the  time  when  San  Miguel  should  ask  me  for  the 
second  time  for  my  opinion.  On  the  morning  of  the  27th 
of  March  last  a messenger  came  for  the  said  opinion,  and 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


224 

I gave  him  the  letter.  But  on  the  following  day  the 
messenger  came  back  to  inform  me  that  the  letter  had 
not  reached  the  hands  of  San  Miguel,  who  had  been 
killed,  but  had  been  delivered  to  an  officer  of  his  band 
for  him  to  deliver  to  the  second  in  command.  Later  I 
turned  over  the  rough  copy  of  the  letter  to  Mr.  Pedro  A. 
Paterno,  in  order  that  he  might  inform  you  in  regard  to 
its  contents. 

“I  have  just  been  informed  that  the  letter  is  in  the  pos- 
session of  Faustino  Guillermo,  chief  of  the  band,  who, 
with  his  people,  is  disposed,  so  they  say,  to  follow  the 
counsels  given  in  the  said  letter.  But  there  exists  another 
and  larger  band,  under  the  command  of  Alejandro  San- 
tiago and  Apolonio  Samson;  this  Alejandro  Santiago  is, 
according  to  reports,  the  successor  of  San  Miguel.  These 
chieftains  have  not  received  the  letter  yet,  for  the  reason 
that  the  frequent  expeditions  and  patrols  of  the  Con- 
stabulary render  communication  very  difficult ; no  one 
dares  to  search  for  them,  for  fear  of  falling  into  the 
hands  of  the  officers  of  public  order.  They  tell  me  that 
it  is  necessary  that  the  persecution  should  not  be  so  active, 
if  only  for  a few  days,  for  them  to  secure  an  opportunity 
to  hold  intercourse;  or  that  a safe-conduct  should  be  fur- 
nished them,  so  that  they  can  send  a person  to  look  f ci- 
thern and  deliver  the  letter. 

“I  must  confess  frankly  that  the  late  San  Miguel  was 
an  old  acquaintance  and  even  friend  of  mine;  but  the 
chiefs  above  mentioned  I do  not  know  personally,  and  I 
am  not  acquainted  with  their  antecedents.  With  these 
data,  I await  your  determination,  signing  myself  your 
humble  and  obedient  servant.” 

Governor  Taft  replied  to  Mabini,  informing  him  of 


Spanish  Mestizo 


OUTLAWRY  CURSES  A PEOPLE  225 


the  leniency  which  the  Government  had  shown  toward 
those  who  hau  been  disturbing  law  and  order,  declaring 
that  negotiations  had  fallen  through,  because  the  men 
who  made  up  these  bands  belonged  to  the  criminal  class, 
and  were  confirmed  ladrones,  and  escaped  fugitives  from 
justice,  and  were  all  banded  for  lawless  life.  Its  conclu- 
sion was  as  follows : 

“They  are  unworthy  of  either  the  encouragement  or 
sympathy  of  any  Filipino  of  honor  and  integrity,  no 
matter  what  his  views  as  to  the  present  Civil  Government 
or  the  independence  of  the  islands.  It  is  difficult  for  those 
who  are  sincerely  irreconcilable  not  to  sympathize  with 
any  disturbance  involving  attacks  upon  the  peace  and 
order  of  the  community,  because  they  hardly  repress  the 
hope  that  such  disturbance,  whatever  the  motive,  may 
embarrass  the  present  Government  and  ultimately  germi- 
nate into  a new  insurrection.  In  the  blindness  of  their 
zeal  they  are  willing  to  sacrifice  their  own  people — for  it 
is  their  own  people  who  suffer  by  such  outlawry— to  a 
vague  hope  that  out  of  pure  ladronism,  murder  and  rob- 
bery may  grow  a successful  revolution  based  on  patriotic 
sentiment. 

“Those  whose  duty  it  is,  however,  to  keep  informed 
as  to  the  character  and  nature  of  these  persons  who  keep 
up  such  disturbances  know  that  while  these  persons  may 
receive  encouragement  and  even  material  assistance  from 
irreconcilable  persons  of  respectability,  they  are  essen- 
tially only  robber  bands,  thieves,  murderers,  and  kidnap- 
pers for  ransom,  determined  to  live  on  their  neighbors  and 
willing  to  sacrifice  any  number  of  Filipinos  to  the  enjoy- 
ment of  an  outlaw  life.  They  masquerade  at  times  as 
revoluctonarios  in  order  to  win  the  assistance  just  men- 


226 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


tioned,  but  they  are  nothing  but  ladrones  and  should  be 
punished  only  as  violators  of  the  law. 

“Were  there  established  in  these  islands  a self-respect- 
ing and  responsible  independent  Filipino  Government, 
almost  its  first  duty  would  be  the  suppression  and  pun- 
ishment of  exactly  this  class  of  persons,  who  in  their 
hearts  recognize  no  law  and  wish  no  condition  of  affairs 
save  that  of  violence  and  rapine,  for  in  no  other  can  they 
acquire  a livelihood  or  attain  the  position  of  prominence 
or  influence  which  their  vanity  demands.” 

Senor  Pedro  Alejandro  Paterno,  the  president  of  the 
Filipino  Congress,  called  together  by  Aguinaldo  pre- 
vious to  the  outbreak  of  the  Filipinos  in  1899,  is  a 
patriot  of  quite  a different  t}'pe.  He  it  was  who  nego- 
tiated the  Peace  of  Biac-na-bato  between  Aguinaldo  and 
the  Spanish  before  the  outbreak  of  the  Spanish- American 
War.  He  was  born  in  Manila,  educated  under  the  direc- 
tion of  the  Jesuit  fathers,  and  became  doctor  of  civil  and 
canon  law  after  studies  in  Madrid.  He  has  written  a 
number  of  volumes,  including  “The  Ancient  Civilization 
of  the  Philippine  Islands,”  “Tagalog  Music,”  “The 
Social  Influence  of  Christianity,”  and  “Christianity  in 
the  Ancient  Tagalog  Civilization.” 

The  following  is  taken  from  a personal  memoir  and  is 
reproduced  here  to  show  the  possibilities  of  the  Filipinos 
and  the  moderate  (?)  estimate  which  one  of  them  places 
upon  himself.  Senor  Paterno,  as  this  sketch  shows,  is  not 
the  victim  of  undue  modesty.  It  is  not  fair  to  infer  from 
this  estimate,  however,  that  all  Filipinos  are  egotists,  but 
it  illustrates  the  danger  of  educating  natives  in  a new 
environment.  He  says:  “There  is  but  little  concerning 
my  life  in  Madrid  that  can  prove  of  general  interest. 


GRATIFYING  EVERY  TASTE 


Being  possessed  of  ample  income,  I could  afford  to 
gratify  my  every  taste  in  literary  and  artistic  pursuits, 
and  was  soon  upon  terms  of  the  closest  intimacy  and 
friendship  with  all  the  great  men  of  that  period  at 
Madrid.  My  salon  was  a place  of  reunion  for  the 
brightest  lights  in  politics,  in  literature,  in  art,  in  science, 
and  religion.  And  the  very  foremost  among  this  number 
was  Emilio  Castelar,  to  my  mind,  first  and  last,  the  great- 
est of  all  Spain’s  great  men.  He  was  my  friend  and 
counselor,  and  from  him  I drew  all  the  best  inspirations 
of  my  youth. 

“From  this  environment,  while  at  Madrid,  I drew  the 
very  best  inspirations  for  my  own  works,  and  there  I 
imbibed  a social  and  moral  philosophy  which  has  shaped 
the  ends  of  my  subsequent  life.  If  I have  attained  any 
eminence  in  the  field  of  letters,  whatever  success  that  may 
spell,  I must  attribute  to  the  impressions  instilled  in  me 
in  those  golden  days  of  intellectual  companionship  at 
dear  old  Madrid. 

“From  Madrid  I returned  to  the  Philippines  toward 
the  end  of  1882,  being  then  brought  in  contact  for  the 
first  time  with  Dr.  Rizal,  to  whom  I gave  letters  of  intro- 
duction to  Senor  Sagasta  Moret,  the  present  prime  min- 
ister, Leon  y Castillo,  now  the  Spanish  minister  at  Paris, 
and  to  numerous  others.  Rizal  was  extremely  radical  in 
his  views,  and  to  him  my  unfailing  text  was  moderation, 
my  best  judgment  being  always  to  avoid  the  extremes 
of  demagogy  and  cultivate  a spirit  of  conservatism. 
Rizal,  in  opposition  to  my  repeated  counsels,  at  this  time 
wrrote  his  famous  work  ‘Noli  me  Tangere,’  and  had  openly 
proclaimed  therein  many  opinions  set  forth  by  myself  in 
a work  written  by  me  some  little  time  previously,  ‘Ninay’ 


228 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


—and  which  opinions  I had,  upon  mature  consideration, 
deemed  it  best  to  suppress.  These  expressions  of  view 
were  distinctly  not  favorable  to  the  methods  of  the 
Religious  Orders  and  to  a further  continuance  of  their 
presence  in  the  Philippines.  Subsequent  to  this,  in  1891, 
and  again  contrary  to  my  advice,  Rizal  returned  to 
Manila,  and  shortly  thereafter,  at  the  instigation  of  the 
friars,  was  imprisoned  by  the  authorities  and  deported 
to  Dapitan,  Mindanao,  Despujol  being  then  Civil  Gov- 
ernor of  the  Philippine  Islands.  After  remaining  there 
for  five  years  a prisoner,  with  more  or  less  liberty,  he 
wrote  to  Despujol  seeking  permission  to  return  to 
Manila,  and,  upon  this  being  granted,  he  was  re-arrested 
by  the  Government,  at  the  instigation  of  the  frailes,  and 
then  followed  the  event  which  is,  and  ever  shall  be  so  long 
as  there  remains  a living  Filipino,  the  saddest  memory  in 
the  annals  of  the  Philippines — the  execution  of  the  Fili- 
pino martyr-patriot,  Jose  Rizal,  in  pursuance  of  the 
orders  of  the  Military  Governor  Polavieja. 

“I  myself  was  in  no  little  danger  at  this  time,  as  Arch- 
bishop Nozaleda  and  the  friars  generally  were  clamoring 
for  my  execution  likewise,  upon  the  ground  that  I was 
the  real  arch-plotter  and  Rizal  the  tool.  They  accused 
me  to  Blanco  Polavieja  and  Primo  de  Rivera  as  being  a 
‘fillibusterer’  and  the  head  of  all  the  insurrectionists  and 
revolutionists  in  the  country,  but  these  charges  had  no 
weight  with  the  Spanish  commanders,  the  latter  having 
known  me  in  Spain  and  also  in  the  Philippines,  and 
being  thoroughly  familiar  with  my  life,  belief,  and 
theories. 

“And  not  only  they,  but  all  my  friends  in  Spain  like- 
wise, defended  me,  well  knowing  that  I had  never  been  a 


PEACE  BROUGHT  ABOUT 


229 


revolutionist,  and  that  whatever  ideas  I had  held  in 
regard  to  reform  for  the  Philippines  had  been  consist- 
ently proclaimed  before  the  Spanish  Government,  in  the 
broad  light  of  day ; and  in  consequence  all  these  false 
accusations  proved  futile  to  harm  me. 

“The  revolution  broke  out,  and  the  Spanish  Governor 
Rivera  endeavored,  first  through  himself  and  General 
Polavieja,  then  through  the  Jesuits,  and  finally  through 
the  medium  of  the  Spanish  Casino,  by  its  president,  Don 
Rafael  Coinonge,  to  pacify  and  bring  to  terms  the  in- 
surgents ; but  all  attempts  in  this  direction  were  abortive. 
The  Rivera  confided  the  mission  to  me;  and,  in  August, 

1897,  I started  out  on  a quest  from  mountain  to  moun- 
tain, and  through  forest  after  forest,  to  seek  out  and 
meet  for  the  first  time  Aguinaldo  and  his  followers,  none 
of  whom  I had  ever  seen  or  had  any  dealings  with.  I 
managed,  by  good  fortune,  not  only  to  find,  but  to  tri- 
umph. It  was  only  after  five  months’  effort,  but  finally 
I did  succeed  in  inducing  them  to  consent  to  a peace, 
notwithstanding  their  repeated  declarations  that  they 
would  prefer  to  die  rather  than  to  ever  consent  to  a sur- 
render of  any  kind;  and  the  result  was  that,  in  Januarjr, 

1898,  the  treaty  of  peace  of  Biac-na-Bato  was  signed. 

“This  peace  was  maintained  until  the  declaration  of 

war  by  the  United  States,  in  April,  1898.  Then  fol- 
lowed the  events  of  the  American  occupation.  On  Sep- 
tember 29,  1898,  the  Ratification  of  Filipino  Indepen- 
dence was  proclaimed  at  Malolos,  and  I was  elected  presi- 
dent of  the  Congress.  The  Constitution  of  the  Philippines 
was  drafted  and  the  Filipino  Republic  was  proclaimed 
in  January,  1899.  I was  empowered  by  a meeting  of  the 
Congress  held  in  San  Isidro  to  propose  to  General  Otis 


230 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


a plan  of’  Filipino  autonomy,  under  an  American  protec- 
torate, in  order  to  put  an  end  to  the  war,  but  was  pre- 
vented by  General  Luna  from  coming  to  Manila  to  under- 
take the  negotiations.  I was  then  named  president  of 
the  Council  of  Ministers  by  Aguinaldo,  and  sent  as  one 
of  the  commission  presided  over  by  Senor  Gonzaga,  and 
among  w7hose  members  was  General  Alejandrano,  to 
confer  with  General  Otis  in  reference  to  this  matter,  but 
there  was  no  result ; and  I retired  to  the  mountains  of 
Benguet,  where  I was  concealed  from  the  Americans,  and 
the  war  followed. 

“I  wish  to  say,  in  conclusion,  that  I have  never  been 
an  insurrecto.  I have  always  believed  in  reform  by  evo- 
lution— never  by  revolution.  I was  never  in  insurrection 
against  Spain,  believing  as  I do  that  fidelity  to  those  at 
whose  hands  benefits  have  been  received  is  a simple  due 
on  the  part  of  those  who  have  received ; and  having  re- 
ceived my  education,  and  whatever  it  may  have  done  for 
me,  from  Spain,  I could  never  have  turned  on  her,  my 
alma  mater.  I would  have  been  faithful  to  and  followed 
her  to  the  end,  accepting,  had  she  seen  fit  to  grant  it,  in- 
dependence at  her  hands  and  under  her  protection.  Like- 
wise, and  in  accordance  with  my  life-long  principles,  do  I 
feel  tow'ard  the  American  Republic. 

“In  1883-4,  in  a tour  of  the  world,  comprising  China, 
Japan,  Europe,  and  the  United  States,  I visited  and  spent 
some  time  in  all  of  the  larger  cities  of  the  Republic : San 
Francisco,  from  which  point  I visited  the  wonders  of  the 
greatest  of  valleys — the  Yosemite — and  the  giant  red- 
wood trees,  Salt  Lake  City,  Chicago,  New7  York,  Boston, 
Washington,  Baltimore,  Richmond,  Virginia,  Philadel- 
phia, and  in  fact  the  principal  centers.  I had  also  the 


SEEKING  THE  ANTIQUE 


231 


pleasure  of  marveling  at  that  most  colossal  of  structures, 
the  Brooklyn  Bridge. 

“But  in  the  midst  of  the  vastness,  the  bustle  and 
activity  that  I encountered  upon  every  hand,  and  in  spite 
of  my  enthusiasm,  there  ever  lurked  in  my  mind  a sense 
of  something  lacking.  In  my  hours  of  rest  I was  always 
seeking  the  ‘gusts  of  time,’  something  old,  antique,  and 
time-worn — something  to  call  to  mind  that  to  which  all 
my  life  I had  been  accustomed  in  the  cities  of  Europe, 
the  only  one  which  I had  hitherto  known.  Impossible 
not  to  be  amazed  at  the  striking  evidences  of  physical 
and  mental  progress  on  every  hand,  visible  to  the  same 
extent  and  degree  in  no  other  part  of  the  globe ; but,  in 
spite  of  it  all,  I was  ever  seeking  the  antique  ideal,  the 
illusion  and  poesy  of  the  past,  the  glamor  of  the  olden 
time.  For  to  me  olden  time  has  always  seemed  the  most 
poetical.  I perceived,  however,  that  the  practical  ad- 
vantages more  than  compensated ; that,  in  America, 
Christianity  was  a practical  reality — something  I had 
never  seen  nor  known  in  Rome  nor  elsewhere;  that  right 
was  realized  in  practice;  that  liberty  was  fulfilled  in  prac- 
tice; political  ideals,  which  had  been  considered  the 
grandest  in  theory,  realized  in  practice  in  America ; that 
things  which  would  be  considered  the  most  radical  and 
subversive  in  any  other  part  of  the  world  were,  in 
America,  the  most  advanced  and  the  most  matter  of 
course,  what  in  the  Old  World  might  appear  the  most 
‘unrealizable’  was  to  be  found  in  its  most  realizable  per- 
fection in  the  United  States. 

“As  I said  to  Emilio  Castelar  and  friends  in  Spain, 
in  1880 : ‘The  history  of  the  oceans  is  the  history  of  civi- 
lization: as  the  waters  of  the  Mediterranean  Sea  bear  in 


232 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


their  depths  the  reflection  of  the  civilization  of  ancient 
Greece  and  Rome,  as  the  great  Atlantic  Ocean  has  long 
typified  the  progress  of  modern  times,  so  shall  the  still 
vaster  Pacific  witness  and  exemplify  the  irresistible  on- 
ward and  upward  advance  of  the  future.  For  on  her 
wTaters  shall  meet  the  greatest  nations  of  the  earth  and 
the  most  powerful  engines  of  war;  Russia,  China,  Japan, 
the  United  States,  Great  Britain  and  the  continental 
powers ; Filipinas  is  weak,  but  she  is  the  key  to  the  cir- 
cumnavigation of  the  globe — a powerful  factor  in  all  the 
coming  conflict.’ 

“They  termed  me  the  ‘child  prophet,’  but  the  prophet 
was  not  then  in  his  own  country.  The  Philippines  are 
weak,  I then  told  them,  but  they  are  the  key  to  the  coming 
kingdom.  Shall  you  be  found  strong  enough  to  hold  that 
key?  I did  not  believe  so,  and  my  belief  at  that  time  was 
that  the  eventual  destiny  of  the  Philippines  was  to  lie 
between  Great  Britain  and  the  United  States  with  the 
greater  chances  in  favor  of  the  United  States,  the  latter 
being  the  daughter  growing  up  and  Great  Britain,  the 
mother,  already  advancing  in  age.” 


CHAPTER  XXIII 


CATHOLICISM  IN  THE  ISLANDS 


The  Civil  Commission  Friendly — Calling  for  Armed 
Intervention — Strength  of  the  Orders — The  Friar 
Lands — Testimony  Regarding  Clerical  Misrule. 

THE  attitude  of  the  Civil  Commission  toward  the 
Roman  Catholic  Church  in  the  Philippines  has 
been  one  of  friendliness,  as  it  should  be.  This  does  not 
mean  that  it  has  been  partial  toward  that  Church  or  its 
representatives  in  laws  made  or  interpretations  given. 
Aglipa}r,  the  sworn  enemy  of  the  hierarchy,  has  been 
protected  in  his  legal  rights  in  spite  of  the  protests  made 
by  American,  Spanish  and  Italian  dignitaries.  Protest- 
ants have  found  in  the  members  of  the  Commission  a 
willingness  to  see  that  their  services  were  held  without 
interference ; if  the  Commissioners  have  not  given  the 
missionaries  the  support  of  their  presence,  it  has  ap- 
parently been  due  to  personal  and  not  official  reasons. 

This  principle  concerning  the  Catholic  Church  early 
laid  down  by  the  Commission  must  commend  itself  to 
impartial  readers : 

“As  the  Catholic  Church  is  and  ought  to  continue  a 
prominent  factor  in  the  life,  peace,  contentment  and 
progress  of  the  Philippine  people,  it  would  seem  the  wis- 
est course,  wherever  it  is  possible  to  do  so  without  infring- 


234 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


ing  upon  the  principle  that  Church  and  State  must  be 
kept  separate,  to  frame  civil  laws  which  shall  accord 
with  views  conscientiously  entertained  by  Catholics — 
priests  and  laymen — and  which  shall  not  deal  unfairly 
with  a people  of  a different  faith.” 

When  a presidente,  a Catholic,  caused  the  arrest  and 
imprisonment  of  a body  of  Protestants,  Governor  Taft 
released  them  the  moment  his  attention  was  called  to  the 
matter,  and  then  with  rare  tact  directed  a Catholic  official 
to  make  an  investigation.  When  the  report  was  pre- 
sented, favoring  the  Protestants  and  criticising  severely 
the  over-zealous  presidente,  the  Catholic  Society  heartily 
commended  the  action  of  the  Governor.  A similar  re- 
port by  a Protestant  wTould  not  have  had  half  the  force  in 
influencing  public  opinion. 

“What  you  should  do,  Mr.  Governor,”  said  an  Ameri- 
can Augustinian  who  went  from  Massachusetts  to  cham- 
pion the  cause  of  the  friars,  “what  you  should  do  is  to 
send  back  these  Godly  men  to  the  churches  from  which 
they  were  driven  and  send  a regiment  of  soldiers,  if 
necessary,  to  protect  them.” 

Governor  Taft  had  many  plans  presented  to  him  and 
to  the  Commission  for  solving  the  numerous  problems  that 
present  themselves.  This  was  the  last  one  that  he  had 
received  when  the  writer  called  at  his  office  one  afternoon. 
He  smiled  as  he  related  the  interview  calling  for  armed 
intervention  in  behalf  of  the  friars.  He  did  not  say 
that  the  project  had  received  the  serious  consideration 
of  the  Commission  or  been  sent  to  Washington.  It  is 
given  here  to  show  the  policy  of  a party  in  the  Catholic 
Church  that  is  wholly  un-American  in  its  sentiments. 
The  friars  are  members  of  mendicant  monastic  orders 


STRENGTH  OF  THE  FRIARS 


235 


established  in  Europe  in  the  early  part  of  the  Nineteenth 
Century.  They  were  sent  to  the  Philippines  by  the 
Catholic  Church  and  became  parish  priests  and  teachers 
throughout  the  islands.  The  number  of  friars  in  the 
archipelago  in  1898  was  as  follows:  Dominicans,  233; 
Recoletos,  327;  Augustinians,  346;  Franciscans,  107 — 
a total  of  1,013. 

“The  four  orders  of  friars,  the  Dominicans,  the  Au- 
gustinians, the  Recoletos,  and  the  Franciscans,  all  of 
them  Spaniards”  (for  natives  are  not  admitted  to  the 
orders),  sa}’s  Governor  Taft,  “were  the  parish  priests 
among  the  Christian  Filipino  people,  and  these  orders, 
except  the  Franciscans,  became  the  owners,  through  pur- 
chase and  otherwise,  of  four  hundred  thousand  aci'es  of 
agricultural  land,  two  hundred  and  fifty  thousand  of 
which  are  situated  near  the  city  of  Manila,  and  include 
some  of  the  richest  lands  in  the  islands.  The  better  lands 
lie  in  the  populous  provinces  of  Cavite,  Laguna,  Bula- 
can,  old  Manila  (now  Rizal),  and  Cebu.  One  hundred 
and  twenty-five  thousand  acres  lie  in  the  province  of 
Cavite,  and  it  is  significant  that  of  the  three  revolutions 
against  Spain  (if  that  of  1870  can  be  called  a revolu- 
tion), all  began  in  this  province,  showing  that  the  agra- 
rian question  of  the  ownership  of  these  lands  by  the 
friars,  while  it  was  not  the  only  issue,  had  much  to  do 
with  the  dissatisfaction  which  led  to  the  armed  resistance 
to  Spanish  authority.  The  title  of  the  friars  to  these 
lands  is,  from  a legal  standpoint,  good.  Indeed,  there 
is  probably  no  better  title  in  the  islands.” 

The  revolutions  in  the  Philippines  in  1896  and  1898 
were  directed  not  so  much  against  the  Spanish  Govern- 
ment, then  in  control  of  the  islands,  as  against  the  friars, 


236 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


who  to  the  people  represented  that  government.  Once 
settled  in  a parish,  the  friar  stayed,  becoming  the  founda- 
tion of  the  civil  government.  The  influence  of  the  friars 
was  felt  by  many  Spanish  officers  as  well  as  by  the 
natives.  Following  the  death  of  Dr.  Rizal,  “the  most 
learned  and  distinguished  Malay  ever  known,”  as  one 
has  called  him,  forty  friars  were  killed  and  four  hundred 
and  forty-three  imprisoned  by  the  insurgents  until  re- 
leased by  the  Americans  in  1898. 

The  fact  that  the  Filipinos  were  good  Catholics  all  the 
time  that  they  were  rebelling  against  Spain  and  killing 
the  friars,  has  been  explained  by  Governor  Taft  as  fol- 
lows : 

“Under  the  Spanish  rule  in  the  Philippines,  the  friars 
discharged  the  most  important  civil  functions.  Great 
credit  is  due  to  the  religious  orders  for  the  work  which 
they  did  in  Christianizing  the  archipelago,  and  in  bring- 
ing about  the  civilization  which  to-day  exists  in  the 
islands,  but  in  the  last  half-century  the  Spanish  Govern- 
ment, apparently  without  objection  by  the  friars, 
imposed  upon  them  extensive  civil  duties  in  connection 
with  municipal  and  provincial  governments,  until  sub- 
stantially all  the  political  power  exercised  in  municipal 
government  became  absorbed  by  the  friars.  The  friar 
priest  in  each  parish  became  the  chief  of  police,  and  the 
chief  of  detectives  in  government  work.  Every  man  who 
was  punished,  especially  if  he  were  punished  for  a politi- 
cal offense,  charged  it  to  the  agency  of  the  friar,  and 
the  deportations  and  executions  which  went  on  under 
Spanish  rule  were  all  laid  at  the  door  of  the  religious 
orders.  To  the  people  of  the  pueblos,  the  friar  was  the 
crown  of  Spain,  and  every  oppression  by  the  Spanish 


DISTURBANCE  AND  RIOT 


237 


Government  was  traced  by  them  to  the  men  whose  political 
power  had  far  outgrown  that  exercised  by  them  as 
priests.  When  the  revolution  came,  therefore,  deep  hos- 
tility was  manifested  by  the  insurgents  against  the  fri- 
ars. They  had  to  flee  for  their  lives.  Fifty  of  them 
were  killed  and  three  hundred  of  them  were  imprisoned, 
and  during  their  imprisonment  were  subjected  to  the 
most  humiliating  indignities  and  to  the  greatest  suffering. 

“The  feeling  of  the  people  against  the  friars  was 
wholly  political.  The  people  were  generally  good  Cath- 
olics and  enjoyed  and  wished  for  the  sacraments  of  their 
Church.  With  a population  such  as  that  of  the  Christian 
Filipinos,  with  ninety  per  cent,  so  densely  ignorant, 
speaking  eight  or  ten  different  languages,  it  is  hardly 
possible  to  say  that  there  is  any  public  opinion  as  we 
understand  it ; but  to  this  general  remark  must  be  made 
the  exception  that  there  is  a universal  popular  hatred  of 
the  four  religious  orders  which  have  been  under  discus- 
sion. It  is  entirely  aside  from  the  point  to  question  the 
justice  of  this  feeling.  It  exists  and  must  be  reckoned 
with  by  those  who  are  charged  with  the  responsibility 
of  carrying  on  civil  government  in  the  islands.  The 
friars  were  driven  out  of  all  the  parishes  in  the  archipel- 
ago, except  those  of  the  city  of  Manila,  where  the  Ameri- 
can forces  have  always  been.  A few  of  their  number 
have  returned  to  Cebu,  to  Vigan,  and  to  Tuguebarao  in 
the  province  of  Cagayan,  but  the  great  body  of  them 
still  remain  in  Manila,  and  are  unable  to  return  to  the 
parishes  because  of  the  expressed  hatred  of  the  people. 
If  they  should  attempt  to  return  in  any  numbers,  it  is 
quite  likely  that  the  result  wrould  be  disturbance  and 
riot.” 


238 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


Whatever  may  have  been  the  truth  regarding  the 
charge  of  clerical  misrule,  the  Philippine  Commission, 
which  made  searching  inquiry  into  the  attitude  of  the 
people  toward  the  friars,  made  this  statement  in  its  first 
official  report : “Every  abuse  leading  to  the  revolutions 
of  1896  and  1898  the  people  charged  to  the  friars;  and 
the  autocratic  power  which  each  friar  exercised  over  the 
civil  officials  of  his  parish  gave  them  a most  plausible 
ground  for  belief  that  nothing  of  injustice,  of  cruelty, 
of  oppression,  of  narrowing  liberty,  was  imposed  on 
them  for  which  the  friar  was  not  entirely  responsible. 
The  revolutions  against  Spain  began  as  movements 
against  the  friars.”  In  speaking  of  the  killing  of  the 
friars  in  the  two  revolutions  against  Spain,  this  statement 
is  made : 

“We  are  convinced  that  a return  of  the  friars  to  their 
parishes  will  lead  to  lawless  violence  and  murder,  and  that 
the  people  will  charge  the  course  taken  to  the  American 
Government,  thus  turning  against  it  the  resentment  felt 
toward  the  friars.  It  is  to  be  remembered  that  the  Fili- 
pinos who  are  in  sympathy  with  the  American  cause  in 
these  islands  are  as  bitterly  opposed  to  the  friars  as  the 
most  irreconcilable  insurgents,  and  they  look  with  the 
greatest  anxiety  to  the  course  to  be  taken  in  the  matter.” 

“The  influence  of  the  Spanish  parish  priest,”  says 
Foreman  in  the  volume  already  mentioned,  “was  ex- 
tremely wide.  He  was  consulted  by  all  classes  of  people ; 
he  was,  by  force  of  circumstances,  often  compelled  to 
become  an  architect — to  build  the  church  in  his  adopted 
village — an  engineer  to  make  or  mend  roads,  and  more 
frequently  a doctor.  His  word  was  paramount  in  his 
parish,  and  in  his  residence  he  dispensed  that  stern  sever- 


RELATION  OF  CHURCH  AND  STATE  239 


ity  of  conventual  discipline  to  which  he  had  been  accus- 
tomed in  the  peninsula.  Hence  it  was  really  here  that 
his  mental  capacity  was  developed — his  manners  im- 
proved— and  that  the  raw  sacerdotal  peasant  was  con- 
verted into  the  man  of  thought,  study  and  talent — 
occasionally  into  a gentleman.  In  his  own  vicinit}7,  when 
isolated  from  European  residents,  he  was  practically  the 
representative  of  the  government  and  of  the  white  race 
as  well  as  of  social  order.  His  theological  knowledge 
was  brought  to  bear  upon  the  most  secular  subjects. 
His  thoughts  necessarily  expanded  as  the  exclusiveness 
of  his  religious  vocation  yielded  to  the  realization  of  a 
social  position  and  political  importance  of  which  he  had 
never  entertained  an  idea  in  his  native  country.” 

Commissioner  Taft,  to  whom  questions  relating  to  the 
friars  were  assigned  for  investigation  in  1900,  declared 
in  his  report  to  the  Government  at  Washington  that  in 
the  pacification  of  the  Philippines  it  was  impossible  to 
ignore  the  great  part  which  the  question  of  Church  and 
State  pla}^ed  in  the  Philippines.  Excepting  the  Moros, 
who  are  Moslems,  and  the  wild  tribes,  that  are  pagans, 
nearly  all  the  Philippine  people  belong  to  the  Roman 
Catholic  Church.  The  Catholic  Church  register  in  1898 
was  6,559,998.  To  care  for  these  people  in  that  year 
there  were  in  the  archipelago  957  parishes ; of  the  regu- 
lar parishes,  716,  all  but  150  were  administered  by  Span- 
ish monks  of  the  Dominican,  Augustinian  or  Franciscan 
orders.  There  were  also  engaged  in  missions  and  mis- 
sionary work  Jesuits,  Capuchins  and  Benedictines. 

The  questions  asked  during  the  investigation  covered 
all  the  charges  made  against  the  friars,  the  feeling  of 
the  people  toward  them,  the  extent  of  their  property, 


24-0 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


the  part  they  took  in  the  politics  and  government  of  the 
islands,  and  the  possibility  of  their  return  to  their  par- 
ishes. This  investigation  was  subsequently  published  in 
United  States  Senate  Document  190,  entitled  “Church 
and  Church  Lands  in  the  Philippines.” 

Concerning  the  much-discussed  question  of  immorality 
among  the  friars,  and  the  charge  that  the  popular  hos- 
tility against  them  was  due  to  that  fact,  the  Commission 
declared  that  there  was  enough  evidence  in  each  province 
to  give  considerable  ground  for  the  general  report.  It 
was  also  said  that  immorality  was  not  the  chief  ground 
of  hostility  to  the  friars;  this  was  their  tyranny  and 
oppression. 

Among  those  whose  testimony  is  given  in  Senate  Doc- 
ument No.  190  were  bishops,  priests,  friars,  officials  of 
monastic  orders,  doctors,  lawyers,  business  men  and 
teachers,  all  residents  of  the  Philippines.  The  following 
testimony  of  a lawyer  by  the  name  of  Constantino  may 
be  found  on  page  151  of  that  report: 

“Question.  I want  to  ask  you  whether  the  hostility 
against  the  friars  is  confined  to  the  educated  and  better 
element  among  the  people? 

“Answer.  It  permeates  all  classes  of  society,  and 
principally  the  lower,  for  they  can  do  nothing;  the  upper 
classes,  by  reason  of  their  education,  can  stand  them  off 
better  than  the  lower  classes,  and  this  is  the  reason  that 
the  friars  don’t  want  the  public  to  become  educated. 

“Q.  Do  the  friars  still  retain  any  influence  over  the 
women  of  the  lower  orders? 

“A.  Over  some  very  fanatical  women;  yes. 

“Q.  But  do  you  think  that  feeling  is  not  general 
among  them? 


Bixondo  Church,  Manila 
Cathedral,  Manila 


MORALITY  OF  THE  FRIARS 


241 


“A.  The  hatred  is  general.  The  Commission  may  find 
the  proof  of  this  by  sending  a trustworthy  man  to  every 
pueblo  in  the  archipelago  to  ask  of  the  inhabitants  if 
they  want  a friar  curate,  and  all  of  them  will  answer, 
‘No.’ 

“Q.  Does  the  feeling  exist  against  all  the  orders? 

“A.  Yes;  against  all  the  orders;  but,  of  course,  prin- 
cipally against  all  the  orders  who  have  acted  as  curates. 
Of  course,  it  is  true  there  can  be  had  an  opportunity  to 
commit  the  acts.” 

Don  Felipe  Calderon,  a Manila  lawyer,  discussed  the 
friars  in  strong  terms.  He  wras  asked: 

“Q.  Now,  as  to  the  morality  of  the  friars,  have  you 
had  much  opportunity  to  observe  this? 

“A.  Considerable,  from  my  earliest  youth.  With  re- 
spect to  their  morality  in  general,  it  was  such  a common 
thing  to  see  children  of  friars  that  no  one  ever  paid  any 
attention  to  it  or  thought  of  it,  and  so  depraved  had  the 
people  become  in  this  regard  that  the  women  who  were 
the  mistresses  of  friars  felt  great  pride  in  it,  and  had 
no  compunction  in  speaking  of  it.  So  general  had  this 
thing  become  that  it  may  be  said  that,  even  now,  the 
rule  is  for  a friar  to  have  a mistress  and  children,  and 
he  who  has  not  is  the  rare  exception,  and  if  it  is  desired 
that  I give  names,  I could  cite  right  now  one  hundred 
children  of  friars. 

“Q.  In  Manila,  or  in  the  provinces? 

“A.  In  Manila  and  in  the  provinces.  Everywhere. 
Many  of  my  sweethearts  have  been  daughters  of  friars. 

“Q.  Are  the  friars  living  in  the  islands  still  who  have 
had  those  children? 

‘‘A.  Yes;  and  I can  give  their  names,  if  necessary, 


242 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


and  I can  give  the  names  of  the  children,  too.  Begin- 
ning with  myself,  my  mother  is  the  daughter  of  a Fran- 
ciscan friar.  I do  not  dishonor  myself  by  saying  this, 
for  my  family  begins  with  myself.” 

Governor  Taft  outlined  the  friar  situation  thoroughly 
in  a volume  entitled  “The  Philippines,”  published  by  the 
Outlook  Company.  He  said,  in  speaking  of  Philippine 
problems : 

“The  second  difficulty  which  confronts  the  Civil  Gov- 
ernment is  to  be  found  in  the  questions  which  grow  out 
of  the  former  relations  of  the  Roman  Catholic  Church 
to  the  Spanish  Government  in  the  islands.  Under  the 
Spanish  rule  the  property  and  political  interests  of  the 
government  were  so  inextricably  confused  with  those  of 
the  Church  that  now,  when,  under  the  Treaty  of  Paris, 
the  interests  of  the  Spanish  Government  have  been 
transferred  to  the  United  States,  which  by  a law  of  its 
being  cannot  continue  the  partnership  between  Church 
and  State,  it  is  extremely  difficult  justly  to  separate  the 
interests  of  the  Church  and  the  State.  For  instance, 
there  are  a number  of  charitable  and  educational  trusts 
which,  under  the  Spanish  Government,  were  generally 
administered  by  clerical  agents.  Some  of  these  trusts 
were  probably  purely  civil  trusts,  and  an  issue  of  the 
utmost  nicety  is  presented  when  decision  must  be  given 
as  to  which  are  civil  and  which  are  religious  trusts,  so 
that  the  one  may  be  administered  under  the  Government 
of  the  United  States  and  the  other  by  the  Roman  Catho- 
lic Church. 

“Again,  under  the  agreement  between  the  Spanish 
crown  and  the  Church,  the  Government  furnished  com- 
pensation for  the  priests,  and  also  agreed  to  aid  in  the 


A QUESTION  OF  OWNERSHIP 


213 


construction  of  churches  and  so-called  conventos  or 
priests’  rectories.  So  close  was  the  relation  between  the 
Church  and  the  State  that  it  was  not  thought  necessary 
to  obtain  a patent  from  the  Government  to  the  bishop  of 
the  diocese  for  the  public  land  upon  which  the  church 
and  rectory  were  built,  so  that  probably  a majority  of 
the  churches  and  rectories  of  the  island  (and  there  are  a 
church  and  a rectory  in  nearly  every  pueblo  in  the 
island)  stand  upon  what  the  records  show  to  be  public 
land,  and  which,  as  such,  passed  to  the  Government  of 
the  United  States  under  the  Treaty  of  Paris.  In  such 
a case,  however,  it  may  very  well  be  urged  that  while  the 
legal  title  is  in  the  Government,  the  equitable  title  is  in 
the  Catholics  of  the  parish,  and  that  in  accordance  with 
the  canonical  law,  releases  should  be  made  by  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  United  States  to  the  bishop  of  the  diocese 
for  the  benefit  of  the  Catholics  of  the  parish.  In  some 
pueblos,  however,  the  municipalities  claim  an  interest  in 
the  conventos,  and  indeed  in  the  churches,  on  the  ground 
that  they  furnished  the  labor  or  materials  with  which  the 
churches  and  rectories  were  constructed,  and  in  some  in- 
stances they  have  attempted  to  assert  an  ownership  in 
these  buildings.” 

The  hatred  of  the  people  against  the  friars  was  due 
in  part  to  the  greed  of  the  priests,  especially  in  demand- 
ing exorbitant  marriage  fees. 

Dr.  Stuntz,  presiding  elder  of  the  Methodist  Episcopal 
Church  in  the  Philippines,  relates  this  experience:  “I 

married  a man  and  woman  sixty  or  more  years  of  age  two 
years  ago,  who  had  lived  together  under  a contract  of 
marriage  for  over  thirty  years.  They  had  their  seven 
children  at  the  wedding  in  my  rooms,  and  when  witnesses 


244 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


to  the  ceremony  were  needed  the  old  man  offered  his 
oldest  son  and  daughter  without  the  faintest  notion  of 
either  the  pathos  or  the  humor  which  the  offer  contained! 
He  told  me,  with  some  of  the  heat  of  the  old  injury  yet 
aflame  in  his  eyes,  that  when  he  was  a young  man  and 
wanted  to  marry  this  woman  the  friar  to  whom  he  went 
demanded  six  months  of  his  salary  as  his  fee.  He  could 
not  and  would  not  pay  it,  and  the  only  alternatives  were 
to  give  up  the  idea  of  having  a home,  or  enter  into  the 
customary  contract  of  marriage.  He  chose  the  latter, 
and  told  me  with  no  little  heat  that  he  believed  that  if 
there  was  any  sin  in  the  case,  God  would  adjudge  the 
major  part  to  the  friar  who  demanded  the  excessive  fee. 
I was  not  prepared  to  argue  the  friar’s  side  of  the  case.” 
Concerning  the  death  and  burial  of  the  people,  Dr. 
Stuntz  said  that  they  also  are  a source  of  large  income 
to  the  friars:  “They  charge  for  the  djung  consolations 

of  religion  according  to  the  robes  worn,  and  the  length 
and  kind  of  prayers  offered.  Every  stroke  of  the  church 
bell  announcing  the  death  costs  from  ten  cents  to  a dollar. 
The  funeral  itself  can  be  ordinary,  solemn,  or  most  sol- 
emn, with  proportionate  fees.  Burial  charges  are  extra. 
If  the  friar  goes  all  the  way  to  the  grave,  it  is  twice  as 
expensive  as  if  he  goes  only  half  way.  If  death  and 
funeral  fees  are  not  forthcoming,  there  can  be  no  bells 
rung,  no  service  held,  and  the  body  may  not  be  permitted 
to  rest  in  ‘holy’  ground.  I was  told  of  a case  in  one  of 
the  provinces  in  which  the  friar  absolutely  refused  to 
inter  a body  until  thirty  pesos  ($15)  were  paid  as  fees. 
The  relatives  put  together  their  pitiful  little  store  and 
it  amounted  to  but  $8.  They  begged  him  to  accept  that. 
He  sent  them  away,  telling  them  roughly  that  they  only 


Cathedral  at  Zamuoanga 


PRIESTS  SECURE  DEPORTATION  245 


wasted  their  time  and  his  to  come  to  him  again  with  less 
than  the  amount  demanded.  At  last,  by  borrowing  from 
their  friends,  the  indigent  relatives  scraped  the  entire  sum 
together,  and  the  remains  were  buried  with  ceremonies  in 
the  name  of  the  compassionate  Nazarene!” 

From  the  report  of  the  Civil  Commission  this  testi- 
mony concerning  the  hatred  of  the  people  toward  the 
friars,  because  of  their  despotism  exercised  over  all 
classes,  is  of  interest:  H.  Phelps  Whitmarsh,  who  was 

sent  to  the  Philippines  as  an  American  correspondent, 
and  who  was  chosen  as  first  governor  of  the  hill  province 
of  Benguet,  was  asked  by  the  Commission  what  grounds 
the  people  of  the  provinces  visited  by  him  gave  for  their 
hostility.  This  is  his  reply : 

“Mainly  that  the  priests  held  them  under,  oppressed 
them,  robbed  them,  and  that  they  used  their  women  and 
daughters  just  as  they  pleased.” 

“Did  you  hear  of  any  instances  of  deportation  through 
the  agency  of  the  priest?” 

“Yes ; I have  heard  that  nobody  was  allowed  in  certain 
sections  to  go  away  from  the  town  without  the  permit 
of  the  friar,  and  that  the  friar  often  sent  him  away,  and 
that  they  were  under  the  thumb  of  the  friar.” 

During  the  four  years  that  Judge  Taft  was  in  the 
Philippines  one  of  the  most  vexing  problems  that  came 
before  him  and  the  Commission  was  this : How  shall  the 
friar  land  question  be  settled?  Conference  after  confer- 
ence was  held  in  Manila,  in  Washington,  in  Rome  even, 
and  when  no  satisfactory  conclusion  could  be  reached  the 
Vatican  sent  an  apostolic  delegate  to  Manila,  whose 
chief  business  was  to  settle  the  land  question  and  others 
relating  to  it.  The  friars  owned  a great  deal  of  valu- 


246 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


able  land.  The  people,  while  fond  of  the  Catholic  re- 
ligion, had  been  in  rebellion  against  the  friars.  They 
would  not  pay  rent  for  land  held  in  the  name  of  the 
orders,  declaring  that  the  friars’  titles  were  not  valid  in 
many  instances,  and  that  no  one  could  tell  which  were 
and  which  were  not  valid.  While  the  writer  was  in 
Manila,  Governor  Taft  offered  the  friars  $7,500,000 
for  their  land. 

“Is  that  a fair  price?”  I asked  a legal  representative 
of  the  Catholic  Church. 

“It  would  have  been  perhaps  six  months  ago,  but  the 
situation  has  changed  a good  deal  since  then.  There  is 
too  much  backing  and  filling  in  this  matter.” 

“Will  the  friars  accept  the  offer?” 

“I  doubt  it,  now ; they  might  have  done  so  six  months 
ago.” 

It  was  impossible  to  get  from  this  gentleman,  or  from 
any  other,  a statement  showing  in  what  respects  the  situ- 
ation had  changed.  This  gentleman,  a lawyer  from  Chi- 
cago, used  the  pronouns  “we”  and  “they”  with  great 
care:  “we,”  the  Catholic  Church,  and  “they,”  the  friars. 
He  also  explained  that  the  Catholic  Church  had  no  part 
in  the  controversy  regarding  the  friars. 

On  December  22,  1903,  a few  days  before  Governor 
Taft  sailed  from  Manila  to  take  up  his  new  duties  in  the 
War  Department  in  Washington,  he  signed  the  contract 
with  the  owners  of  the  friars’  lands,  by  which,  for  a 
lump  sum  of  $7,239,000,  all  the  agricultural  holdings  of 
the  friars  in  the  Philippines  were  agreed  to  be  transferred 
to  the  Philippine  Government,  except  about  10,000  acres. 
By  these  contracts  something  more  than  400,000  acres, 
three-fifths  of  which  have  been  highly  cultivated  land 


AMERICANIZING  THE  CATHOLIC  CHURCH  217 


and  are  thickly  inhabited  by  thousands  of  tenants,  were 
transferred  to  the  Government.  This  step  had  been  rec- 
ommended by  the  Commission  in  its  previous  reports,  by 
the  Paris  Peace  Commission  and  by  the  Schurman  Com- 
mission, as  important  in  producing  permanent  tranquility 
in  the  islands.  Many  of  the  tenants  have  urged  the  pur- 
chase upon  the  Government. 

Governor  Taft  had  said  previously:  “If  the  purchase 
of  the  lands  of  the  friars  and  the  adjustment  of  all  the 
other  questions  arising  between  the  Church  and  the  State 
should  include  a withdrawal  of  the  friars  from  the  islands, 
it  would  greatly  facilitate  the  harmony  between  the  Gov- 
ernment and  the  people,  and  between  the  Church  and  the 
State.”  In  his  report  of  the  settlement  of  the  land  ques- 
tion he  was  able  to  add : 

“The  Commission  is  in  a position  to  say  that  the  num- 
ber of  Spanish  friars  in  the  islands  is  being  gradually 
reduced,  and  that  the  policy  of  the  Church,  therefore,  in 
not  sending  back  to  the  parishes  Spanish  friars  where  it 
can  be  avoided,  or  where  they  will  not  be  well  received  by 
the  people,  has  been  sufficiently  shown  by  the  facts.  The 
intention  of  the  Roman  Catholic  Church  to  Americanize 
the  church  in  the  Philippines  is  also  shown  by  the  ap- 
pointment of  American  Catholic  bishops  and  one  Filipino 
bishop  to  fill  the  episcopal  see  of  the  islands.  Not  one 
Spanish  friar  bishop  remains.  It  is  also  understood  from 
the  correspondence  with  Cardinal  Rampolla  and  subse- 
quent information  received,  that  of  the  money  to  be  paid 
under  the  purchase  to  the  religious  orders  by  present 
owners,  a large  part  will  be  devoted  to  church  purposes 
in  the  islands  by  the  supreme  authority  of  the  church. 
It  can  be  safely  stated,  therefore,  that  the  most  important 


248 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


of  the  matters  which  the  President  and  the  Secretary  of 
War  proposed  to  adjust  by  sending  the  Civil  Governor 
to  Rome  to  confer  concerning  matters  of  difference  be- 
tween the  Roman  Church  and  the  Philippine  Government 
have  been  adjusted,  or  are  on  a fair  way  to  satisfactory 
settlement. 

“There  still  remain  the  fixing  of  the  amount  due  for 
rent  or  for  damages  to  buildings  belonging  to  the  Church, 
occupied  by  the  United  States  troops,  from  the  United 
States  Government,  and  the  adjustment  of  certain  trusts, 
the  character  of  which,  as  to  being  secular  or  religious, 
is  in  dispute.  The  disposition  of  the  friars’  lands  agreed 
to  be  purchased  will  entail  a very  heavy  burden  upon  the 
Philippine  Government,  but  it  is  thought  that  in  the 
course  of  ten  or  fifteen  years  the  distribution  of  the  lands 
can  be  successfully  effected  to  those  now  lawfully  in  pos- 
session as  tenants.” 

The  American  people  may  congratulate  themselves 
that  they  had  a diplomat  handling  this  question  who  is 
worthy  to  stand  beside  Foster  and  Hay ; a rash  man  or  a 
weak  one  in  charge  of  the  Friar  problem  would  have 
needed  a much  larger  army  than  is  now  in  the  Philippines 
to  prevent  another  revolution. 

The  attitude  of  the  Catholic  Church  to  the  American 
schools  varies  according  to  the  view  of  the  priest  in  any 
given  town.  The  Philippine  Commission  has  not  objected 
to  the  spread  of  Church  schools,  but  it  has  insisted  that 
a proper  standard  of  education  should  be  maintained  in 
them ; it  has  also  emphasized  the  fact  that  English  should 
be  taught  in  every  school.  This  is  done  in  order  that 
the  coming  generation  all  over  the  islands  shall  be  able  to 
speak  English.  Under  the  Spanish  regime  only  a fa- 


ENGLISH  MUST  BE  LEARNED 


249 


vored  few  were  allowed  to  learn  Spanish,  while  the  schools 
in  which  the  native  languages  were  taught  were  hardly 
worthy  the  name.  Only  as  English  is  spoken,  enabling 
the  Filipinos  to  study  the  literature  of  America,  as  well 
as  to  read  current  periodicals,  newspapers  and  other 
books,  will  the  people  understand  what  is  meant  by  the 
institutions  and  the  civilization  behind  them  which  Ameri- 
cans in  the  Philippines  represent. 

We  have  it  on  good  authority  that  when  the  Spaniards 
went  to  the  Philippines  the  islanders  could  read  and 
write  their  own  languages.  After  three  hundred  years 
the  mass  of  the  people  had  been  taught  so  mechanically 
that  they  could  hardly  do  more  than  this.  The  Spanish 
minister  for  the  colonies,  in  a report  made  on  December 
5,  1870,  points  out  by  what  process  of  absorption  by  the 
religious  orders  education  became  concentrated  in  their 
hands.  He  says:  “While  every  acknowledgment  should 
be  made  for  their  services  in  earlier  times,  their  narrow, 
exclusively  religious  system  of  education  and  the  imper- 
viousness to  modern  or  external  ideas  and  influence, 
which  every  day  become  more  and  more  evident,  rendered 
secularization  of  instruction  necessary.” 

Teaching  the  rudiments  of  the  Catholic  religion  seemed 
to  satisfy  both  teachers  and  scholars  in  the  average 
provincial  school  before  the  American  teachers  arrived. 
A religious  primer  had  been  read  in  the  native  language, 
and  later  Christian  doctrine  had  been  taught.  The  text- 
books found  in  the  schools  were  crude  and  embraced  a 
considerable  amount  of  religious  instruction.  Pupils 
were  obliged  tediously  to  learn  by  heart  the  exact  words 
of  the  text -book.  The  teacher,  book  in  hand,  heard  one 
pupil  at  a time ; the  others  at  the  same  time  studied  aloud, 


250 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


doing  their  best,  it  would  seem,  to  drown  out  the  voices 
of  the  teacher  and  the  pupil  reciting.  The  teacher  asked 
only  the  questions  that  were  written  down  in  the  book. 
To  the  visitor  it  would  seem  as  if  instruction,  as  carried 
on  by  the  native  teachers,  was  tediously  mechanical, 
noisy,  and  hardly  effective  or  economical.  The  teachers 
did  not  have  fixed  daily  programmes,  and  so  the  school 
hours  were  not  well  distributed.  On  the  average  those 
■who  attended  the  schools  did  so  from  their  seventh  to 
their  tenth  year.  The  teachers  were  classified  according 
to  the  importance  of  the  towns  where  they  served.  Com- 
pensation was  so  small  that  the  calling  of  a teacher  had 
come  to  be  looked  down  upon.  There  were  no  courses  for 
those  engaged  in  teaching.  There  was  no  professional 
enthusiasm.  Appointments  were  governed  too  much  by 
the  terms  of  service  of  the  teacher,  while  the  quality  of 
his  service  was  not  considered.  It  is  asserted  by  practical 
parties  that  in  1897  there  were  in  these  islands  2,167 
public  schools. 

Some  idea  of  the  courses  of  study  in  the  better  class 
of  the  Catholic  schools  in  provincial  towns  since  American 
occupations  may  be  gained  from  the  following  letter 
which  Dr.  Stuntz  of  Manila  received  from  a friend:  “In 
the  school  that  I spoke  to  you  about,  three  books  are 
used,  namely,  ‘Catecismo  de  la  Doctrina  Cristiana,’  by 
Gaspar  Astete;  ‘The  Manual  de  la  Infancia,’  prepared 
by  the  Jesuits  and  for  sale  in  Manila;  and  ‘Paginas  de 
la  Infancia,’  a Spanish  reading-book  composed  of  short 
stories  with  morals.  The  first  book  is  nothing  but  an 
ordinary  catechism,  small  and  very  simple.  The  second 
book,  ‘Manual  of  Infancy,’  is  a general  text-book  of 
octave  size  and  416  pages.  Its  chapters,  translated  from 


A VARIED  CURRICULUM 


251 


the  Spanish,  are  the  following:  ‘Sacred  History’ ; or  a 
short  digest  of  the  important  events  of  the  Old  and  New 
Testaments;  ‘Religion,’  which  deals  largely  with  the  doc- 
trine of  the  Catholic  Church;  ‘Morality’  (or  Morals  in 
Spanish),  which  is  something  like  our  ‘Ethics,’  but  with 
a strong  leaning  toward  the  Catholic  doctrine ; ‘Polite- 
ness,’ or  Courtesy,  rules  for  social  life ; English  Gram- 
mar ; Spanish  Grammar ; Arithmetic ; Geometry  ; Geogra- 
phy, and  History  of  the  Philippines.  All  these  subjects 
are  included  in  one  book  of  416  pages,  and  the  greatest 
space  is  given  to  the  treatment  of  Sacred  History,  Re- 
ligion, Morality  and  Courtesy.  English  and  Spanish 
Grammar,  History,  Geography,  Arithmetic  and  Geome- 
try are  comprised  in  less  than  200  pages.” 


CHAPTER  XXIV 


THE  AGLIPAY  MOVEMENT 


MONG  the  problems  which  have  disturbed  the 


Civil  Government  from  the  outset  have  been  those 
connected  with  the  Roman  Catholic  Church.  The  insur- 
rection against  the  Spanish  power,  preceding  by  two 
years  the  arrival  of  Admiral  Dewey,  was  really  an  up- 
rising by  the  Filipinos  against  the  Spanish  friars.  There 
was  no  thought  of  leaving  the  Catholic  Church,  and  no 
turning  away  from  the  padres  or  native  priests;  but 
there  was  intense  feeling  against  the  Spanish  friars. 
Governor  Taft  has  shown  a very  earnest  desire  to  main- 
tain a course  which  shall  not  only  be  absolutely  impartial 
between  contending  religious  factions,  but  also  appear 
to  both  to  be  impartial.  He  has  protected  the  Protes- 
tants against  the  persecution  of  officials  who  desired  him 
to  forbid  the  holding  of  Protestant  services,  and  he  has 
at  the  same  time  tried  to  deal  justly  with  the  friars. 

A movement  against  the  Roman  Catholic  Church  was 
begun  by^  a native  named  Gregorio  Aglipay,  in  1901, 
and  it  has  spread  throughout  several  of  the  islands  under 


Charges  and  Counter-Charges — Governor  Taft  En- 
lightens a Prelate — Separation  of  Church  and  State — 
Proclamation  of  Peaceable  Possession — Hungry  for 
Spiritual  Food. 


Senor  A.  O.  Reyes  axd  Mrs.  Reyes 


ENLIGHTENING  A DIGNITARY 


253 


the  name  of  the  Independent  Catholic  Church  of  the 
Philippines.  Charges  have  been  made  by  him  and  his 
followers  that  the  Roman  Catholic  Church  has  persecuted 
him,  and  counter-charges  have  been  made  against  him 
and  his  followers  by  the  Roman  Catholics.  So  far  as 
possible  the  Governor  has  advised  peace  and  has  in  every 
case  held  that  the  right  to  worship  God  according  to  the 
dictates  of  one’s  conscience  must  not  be  interfered  with 
by  any  one. 

It  is  difficult  for  many  Roman  Catholic  authorities, 
who  have  been  trained  to  believe  that  the  Governor  had 
absolute  control  in  matters  relating  to  both  Church  and 
State,  to  understand  why  Governor  Taft  tolerated  Agli- 
pay,  whom  the  Archbishop  has  “unfrocked,”  and  his  fol- 
lowers, some  of  whom  Aglipay,  acting  as  Archbishop, 
has  “frocked.” 

“Why  do  you  allow  this  fellow  to  officiate  in  any 
church  in  the  Philippines?”  asked  a representative  of  the 
Hierarchy,  sent  to  Manila  to  see  that  the  friars’  claims 
were  duly  fortified. 

“He  and  his  followers  have  peaceable  possession  of 
many  of  the  churches,”  responded  the  Governor. 

“But  they  shouldn’t  have  possession  of  them,  and  it  is 
in  your  power  to  put  them  out.” 

“But  there  are  some  things  a Governor  cannot  do.” 

“Isn’t  his  po-wer  absolute?” 

“By  no  means.” 

“Who  has  more  power  than  the  Governor,  I should 
like  to  know?” 

“The  Supreme  Court;  and  let  me  tell  you  further, 
that  the  President  of  the  United  States  himself  may  be 
impeached  and  removed  from  office.”  The  fact  that  the 


251- 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


power  of  the  Governor  was  not  unlimited  taxed  the  cre- 
dulity of  the  delegate ; the  statement  concerning  the  Pres- 
ident nearly  caused  a collapse.  The  clerical  visitor  retired 
as  quickly  as  possible  to  consult  his  counsel  to  see  whether 
he  had  been  correctly  informed. 

The  legal  question  at  issue  between  the  Roman  Catho- 
lics and  the  Aglipayans  is  the  ownership  of  churches  and 
rectories  when  congregations  have  gone  over  to  the  new 
movement.  The  Catholics  contend  that  the  property  is 
theirs  because  it  was  dedicated  under  Roman  Catholic 
authority;  the  people  who  have  revolted  from  Rome  de- 
clare that  they  or  their  ancestors  erected  the  buildings, 
furnishing  both  the  money  and  the  labor,  and  that,  there- 
fore, from  every  sense  of  justice,  the  property  belongs  to 
them  or  to  the  municipality.  A bright  young  presidente 
wrhom  I met  in  one  of  the  provinces  said : 

“Our  church  needs  repairing,  and  we  are  waiting  to 
have  it  decided  who  owns  the  property.  If  it  belongs  to 
Rome,  let  Rome  take  care  of  it ; if  it  belongs  to  the  peo- 
ple, we  are  ready  to  keep  it  in  repair.” 

Aglipayanism  is  spectacular  rather  than  substantial. 
A deposed  priest  styling  himself  Archbishop,  and  placing 
other  priests  in  bishoprics,  is  amusing  rather  than  edify- 
ing. Apparently  the  man,  while  dead  in  earnest,  does  not 
see  the  incongruity  of  assuming  and  transmitting  eccle- 
siastical authority  with  no  organized  body  behind  him ; 
and  he  goes  forth  armed  only  with  uncertain  power.  That 
he  has  power,  and  that  his  movement  must  be  reckoned 
with  by  the  Civil  as  well  as  the  religious  authorities,  are 
evident  from  Governor  Taft’s  report  and  from  interviews 
which  I had  in  many  towns  with  a large  number  of 
people. 


A SKETCH  OF  THE  REFORMER  255 


In  the  latter  part  of  1902,  the  Governor  wrote  a letter 
concerning  the  complications  growing  out  of  the  Aglipay 
movement  and  disturbing  the  peace  of  the  islands,  in 
which  he  said: 

“The  policy  of  complete  separation  of  Church  and 
State  is  enjoined  upon  those  who  serve  under  the  Ameri- 
can sovereignty.  This  does  not  mean  that  officers  of  the 
State,  as  individuals,  may  not  attend  church  and  take 
part  in  l’eligious  controversies,  and  may  not  aid  in  the 
churches  of  which  they  are  members ; but  it  does  mean 
that  no  officer  of  the  Government  has  the  right  to  use  his 
official  position  or  the  authority  which  he  exercises  as  an 
official  to  further  the  interests  of  the  church  of  which  he 
is  a member  against  the  rights  and  claims  of  other 
churches  to  which  he  may  be  opposed  in  religious 
views.” 

Aglipay  is  thought  by  Dr.  Stuntz,  the  presiding  elder 
of  the  Methodist  Episcopal  Church  in  the  Philippines, 
to  have  drawn  at  least  a million  and  a half  Filipinos  away 
from  the  Roman  Catholic  Church.  He  is  an  excommuni- 
cated Catholic  priest  about  forty  years  of  age.  An 
Ilocano  by  birth,  he  was  educated  for  the  priesthood  and 
ordained  in  Manila  about  1890.  He  was  trusted  by  his 
friar  superiors  and  had  charge  of  important  and  delicate 
interests.  Coming  under  the  displeasure  of  the  Catholic 
authorities,  he  was  excommunicated  and  cast  his  lot  with 
the  Insurrecto  Government,  becoming  Vicar-General 
under  Aguinaldo.  Once  or  twice  he  led  troops  in  action. 

In  a report  sent  to  Washington, Governor  Taft  gave  an 
interesting  statement  concerning  the  Aglipay  movement, 
which  he  thinks  may  have  an  important  bearing  upon 
future  conditions,  and  may  perhaps  add  much  to  the 


256 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


labor  of  maintaining  peace  and  order  in  the  archipelago. 
He  said  in  his  report: 

“Actively  engaged  with  Aglipay  in  the  formation  of 
the  Independent  Filipino  Catholic  Church  was  Isabelo  de 
los  Rej^es,  the  former  editor  of  an  insurrecto  paper  pub- 
lished in  Madrid,  called  ‘Filipinas  ante  Europa,’  and  an 
agitator  of  irresponsible  and  irrepressible  character. 
Padre  Aglipay  early  secured  the  active  and  open  co-op- 
eration of  a number  of  native  priests,  fifteen  of  whom  he 
at  once  appointed  bishops,  himself  having  the  title  of 
archbishop.  He  has  held  masses  in  many  different  places 
in  and  about  Manila;  his  services  have  attracted  large 
gatherings  of  people.  Most  of  the  churches  in  the  Phil- 
ippine Islands  were  built  by  the  labor  of  the  people  of  the 
respective  parishes,  and  devoted  to  the  Roman  Catholic 
Church ; but  the  people  have  a sense  of  ownership,  and 
when  a majority  of  them  separate  themselves  from  the 
Roman  Catholic  Church  and  accept  a new  faith,  it  is 
difficult  for  them  to  understand  that  they  have  not  the 
right  at  once  to  possess  the  old  building.” 

An  illustration  of  the  difficulties  which  beset  the  Gov- 
ernor may  be  gained  from  this  statement: 

“In  the  case  of  a church  at  Pandacan,  the  women  of 
the  parish,  in  the  temporary  absence  of  the  priest,  took 
possession  of  the  church,  obtaining  the  keys,  and  Father 
Aglipay  celebrated  mass  in  the  church.  I sent  for  him 
and  for  his  counsel  and  advised  them  of  the  unlawful 
character  of  the  action  of  the  women,  and  directed  them 
to  see  that  possession  was  restored.  They  promised  to  do 
so,  but  found  the  women  so  obdurate  that  I called  in  the 
women  and,  after  a somewhat  lengthy  discussion,  told 
them  that  I must  have  the  keys.  The  leader  of  the  women 


DISCLOSURE  OF  A PLAN 


257 


delivered  the  keys  to  me  with  a statement  that  they  would 
deliver  the  keys  to  the  Governor,  but  not  to  the  fraile. 
The  new  priest  who  has  been  appointed  was  not  a fraile, 
but  he  was  a Paulist  Father.  They  announced  to  me 
that  they  had  separated  from  the  Roman  Catholic  Church 
and  were  standing  with  Aglipay.  I turned  the  keys 
over  to  the  Chief  of  Police,  and  have  put  the  regularly 
appointed  priest  in  possession  of  the  church,  and  quiet 
now  reigns  there.” 

In  August,  1902,  Aglipay  sought  private  conferences 
with  several  Protestant  ministers  to  discuss  the  religious 
situation  in  the  Philippines,  outlining  his  own  plans  and 
seeking  some  form  of  co-operation,  if  union  of  effort 
proves  impracticable.  Dr.  Stuntz,  in  “The  Philippines 
and  the  Far  East,”  thus  describes  the  meeting: 

“The  conference  was  held  in  the  office  of  the  American 
Bible  Society  in  the  Walled  City,  Manila.  Those  present 
were:  Rev.  Jay  C.  Goodrich,  agent  of  the  American 

Bible  Society;  Rev.  James  B.  Rodgers,  senior  missionary 
of  the  Presb}derian  Church;  Rev.  J.  L.  McLaughlin, 
and  myself,  of  the  Methodist  Episcopal  Church,  and 
Senor  Isabelo  de  los  Reyes,  a Filipino  gentleman  of  good 
education,  and  an  inveterate  fondness  for  agitation.  We 
spent  several  hours  in  hearing  the  first  disclosure  of  a 
plan  to  rend  the  Roman  Church  in  the  Philippines  in 
twain.  Senor  Aglipay,  with  great  clearness,  set  forth 
the  situation  as  he  saw  it.  He  pictured  the  popular  ha- 
tred of  the  friars  as  we  had  seen  it.  He  pointed  out  the 
systematic  ill-treatment  of  the  native  clergy  by  the  for- 
eign friar,  and  the  unrest  which  this  caused  among  the 
entire  native  community.  He  showed  us  proofs  of  the 
passionate  fervor  of  all  Filipinos  for  their  own  islands. 


2.58 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


He  then  told  us  that  he  proposed  to  lead  in  the  establish- 
ment of  an  independent  Catholic  Church  in  the  Philip- 
pines, and  that  he  wished  us  to  make  common  cause  with 
him.  The  first  item  on  his  programme  was  separation 
from  the  papac}r  and  complete  autonomy  in  the  Philip- 
pines. His  next  step  was  to  declare  for  and  stand  ‘for 
Catholic  doctrine  in  its  purity.’  Other  details  were  of 
less  importance. 

“We  pointed  out  to  him  the  impossibility  of  any  at- 
tempt to  unite  with  a movement  which  did  not  make  the 
Scriptures  the  rule  and  guide  in  doctrine  and  life,  and 
urged  him  to  study  the  situation  more  carefully  and  throw 
his  strength  into  the  Protestant  movement.  If  he  could 
not  do  that,  we  all  represented  the  certainty  of  failure, 
if  only  a programme  of  negation  and  protest  were  en- 
tered upon,  and  secured  a promise  that  he  would  carefully 
consider  the  question  of  the  endorsement  of  the  Word  of 
God,  marriage  of  the  clergy,  and  the  abolition  of  Mari- 
olatry.” 

In  October,  1902,  Aglipay  called  together  the  priests 
and  laymen  who  had  consented  to  join  his  movement,  and 
with  their  aid  he  framed  and  adopted  a constitution  and 
became  by  the  votes  of  his  sympathizers  Archbishop  of 
the  Independent  Catholic  Church  of  the  Philippines. 
Several  priests  were  made  bishops  at  the  same  time,  and 
the  following  Sunday  the  new  Archbishop  celebrated  mass 
in  the  open  air  before  several  thousand  people.  The 
movement  spread  throughout  the  provinces,  in  some  of 
which  every  priest  and  every  church  and  entire  congrega- 
tion went  over  to  Aglipay.  The  Roman  Church  authori- 
ties appealed  to  Governor  Taft,  who  wrote  a letter  known 
in  the  Philippines  as  the  Proclamation  of  Peaceful  Pos- 


BIBLE  WORK  GAINS  GROUND 


259 


session,  the  gist  of  the  order  being  that  the  parties  in 
peaceful  possession  of  a house  of  worship  shall  be  con- 
sidered to  be  the  rightful  occupant,  and  the  contrary 
must  be  proven  in  the  courts  before  ejection  can  take 
place. 

The  strength  of  the  Aglipay  movement,  it  is  said  by 
careful  observers,  “lies  in  its  appeal  to  a growing  feeling 
of  nationality,  its  recognition  of  the  Word  of  God,  its 
partial  satisfaction  of  the  large  class  whose  hands  have 
long  waited  for  an  available  club  with  which  to  smite  the 
friars,  and  its  easy  programme  of  religious  reformation. 
It  is  a Filipino  movement.  It  throws  off  the  yoke  of  the 
Pope,  and  cuts  all  other  ties  of  a foreign  character.  Its 
entire  ministry  is  Filipino.  It  is  altogether  of  the  soil, 
and  therefore  he  who  does  not  support  it  is  not  a good 
Filipino.  He  does  not  love  his  Fatherland  unless  he 
joins  the  Independent  Catholic  Church.  This  form  of 
pressure  is  very  effective.  It  brings  thousands  into  the 
ranks  of  ‘Aglipayanos’  who  have  precious  little  concern 
about  merely  religious  matters.” 

Opinions  differ  greatly  as  to  the  lasting  character  of 
Aglipay’s  work ; but  that  he  is  at  present  lessening  the 
power  of  Rome  in  the  islands  is  freely  admitted.  Some 
believe  that  it  has  seen  its  best  days,  while  others  think 
with  Aguinaldo  that  this  movement  is  the  “second  grade,” 
and  that  Protestantism  will  gain  many  thousands  of  con- 
verts from  it.  Certain  it  is  that  the  Bible  societies  are 
having  their  greatest  sales  in  the  provinces  where  this 
movement  is  strongest. 

Dr.  Stuntz  believes  that  the  Aglipay  movement  will 
be  of  great  help  to  Protestantism,  and  his  reason  for 
this  assertion  is  this : 


260 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


“It  breaks  the  solid  front  of  Romish  opposition.  When 
we  are  told  that  the  Catholics  are  against  us,  we  can 
ask,  ‘Which  Catholics?’  It  attacks  the  chief  enmity  of 
the  hierarchy.  Since  this  schism  began  Rome  has  shot 
fewer  arrows  toward  our  lines.  Her  fury  against  the 
assumption  of  an  excommunicated  member  of  her  own 
body  has  burned  day  and  night  since  October,  1902,  and 
the  Protestant  has  come  off  with  but  a few  curses,  and 
a tract  or  two.  This  will  continue  so  long  as  the  nu- 
merical strength  of  the  Aglipay  schism  is  being  aug- 
mented. 

“The  Aglipay  movement  helps  us  by  detaching  the 
tens  of  thousands  of  members  from  a nominal  connection 
with  the  Church  of  Rome,  and  leaving  them  without  pos- 
itive instruction  in  a more  excellent  way.  Our  preachers 
get  a hearing  with  them,  and  hundreds  of  them  accept  the 
Word  and  are  saved.  These  people  would  never  have 
left  the  Roman  Catholic  Church  to  become  Protestants, 
feeble  as  was  the  hold  of  the  old  Church  upon  them;  but 
once  outside  and  hungry  for  spiritual  food,  they  hear 
and  are  saved.  Aglipay  loosens  this  fruit  from  the  tree 
and  we  gather  it.  God  is  thus  overruling  the  shortcom- 
ings of  the  leaders  of  this  revolt  against  the  Romish 
Church  to  the  spiritual  good  of  many  souls. 

“I  am  not  without  hope  that  Aglipay  will  yet  take 
more  advanced  spiritual  and  moral  ground.  His  own 
personal  belief  is  far  from  being  in  accord  with  some 
errors  at  which  he  feels  it  necessary  to  wink  lest  he  lose 
his  following.  He  hopes  to  be  able  to  lead  them  to 
greener  pastures  later  on. 

“The  Independent  Filipino  Catholic  Church  has  come 
to  stay.  Just  how  strong  a hold  it  will  be  able  to  keep 


A PERMANENT  RELIGIOUS  FACTOR  261 


over  the  multitude  which  have  flocked  to  its  standard  of 
revolt  against  the  Pope  cannot  be  foretold.  But  it  may 
be  reckoned  with  as  a permanent  factor  in  the  religious 
future  of  the  Philippines.” 


CHAPTER  XXV 


PROTESTANTISM:  ITS  PROGRESS 


Indiscriminate  Audiences  in  Church — Settlement  Work 
for  Filipinos — Many  Denominations,  but  no  Rivalry — 
Example  of  Americans  an  Obstacle  to  Protestant- 
ism— Government  Employees  Free  to  Worship  God 
as  They  Please — A Teacher  and  the  Colporters — Sab- 
bath Observance. 

HE  Spaniards  were  Christians,”  said  a leading 


Filipino,  “but  we  like  the  Americans  better  be- 
cause they  are  not  Christians.” 

“I  do  not  care  to  go  to  church,”  said  an  American 
girl  in  Manila ; “one  meets  such  an  indiscriminate  gather- 
ing there.”  The  young  lady  had  been  to  a cock-fight  the 
previous  Sunday  afternoon,  and  showed  plainly  the  irri- 
tation she  felt  in  being  invited  to  a religious  service. 

Protestantism  in  the  Philippines  is  only  six  years  old, 
and  yet  there  are  about  eight  thousand  communicants 
enrolled;  this  does  not  include  any  of  the  followers  of 
Aglipay,  but  it  is  expected  that  many  of  them  may  later 
enter  the  Protestant  fold.  There  are  a half  dozen  de- 
nominations laboring  in  the  archipelago,  five  of  them 
members  of  the  Evangelical  Union.  The  practical  work- 
ing basis  of  territorial  division  adopted  in  1901  was 
continued  at  the  annual  meeting  of  the  Union  this  year, 


DIVISION  OF  TERRITORY 


263 


and  outside  of  Manila  there  is  practically  no  duplication 
of  agencies  in  any  field. 

While  it  may  be  impossible  to  adhere  to  these  divisions 
very  long,  the  economical  results  of  this  co-operating 
assignment  of  forces  is  readily  seen.  Requests  for  pas- 
tors and  teachers  are  constantly  coming  in,  and  fre- 
quently communities  offer  buildings  and  pastoral  sup- 
port. The  personal  experiences  and  sacrifices  of  members 
and  the  demand  that  they  make  for  morality  in  their 
preachers,  are  said  to  be  surprising  and  satisfactory. 
Students  in  the  Government  normal  schools  show  an 
interest  that  affords  an  opening  that  will  be  difficult  to 
meet  adequately.  The  Young  Men’s  Christian  Associa- 
tion is  doing  its  part.  Side  by  side  with  the  American 
Bible  Society  in  the  great  work  of  giving  the  Scriptures 
to  the  Filipinos  have  labored  the  representatives  of  the 
British  Society.  Nor  should  the  work  of  the  Army  Chap- 
lains be  overlooked. 

The  Episcopalians,  Methodists  and  Presbyterians  have 
churches,  small  ones  yet,  for  Americans  living  or  visiting 
in  Manila  and  one  or  two  other  centers,  services  in 
English  being  maintained ; but  all  of  the  denominations 
except  the  Episcopalians  bend  their  energies  in  the  prov- 
ince to  win  the  natives  to  Protestantism. 

While  the  Episcopalians  seek  chief!}’  to  reach  Ameri- 
cans, they  have  a fine  Settlement  work  among  the  natives 
in  Manila,  and  in  some  districts  which  the  Roman  Catho- 
lic Church  has  abandoned  they  work  among  the  Filipinos. 
They  do  not  recognize  officially  any  division  of  territory 
among  denominations,  but  in  practice  they  are  careful 
not  to  interfere  with  fields  already  occupied.  The  Meth- 
odists occupy  the  northern  part  of  the  Island  of  Luzon 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


264 

and  the  Presbyterians  the  southern  part ; Manila  is  com- 
mon ground  for  all  denominations.  The  islands  in  the 
south — Panay,  Negros,  Cebu,  Samar  and  Leyte — are 
shared  by  the  Presbyterians  and  Baptists,  while  the  Con- 
gregationalists  are  at  work  in  Mindanao. 

The  American  Board  is  represented  by  the  Rev.  and 
Mrs.  Black.  After  a thorough  study  of  the  Island  of 
Mindanao,  in  which  he  journeyed  for  months  around  its 
long  coast,  Mr.  Black  decided  to  settle  at  Davao.  His 
report  of  the  conditions  in  that  interesting  field  is  hope- 
ful. In  his  journeys  he  carried  Scriptures  in  Visayan 
and  Spanish.  The  Baptists  have  materially  strengthened 
their  stations  in  Northern  Panay  and  Western  Negros. 
The  New  Testament  as  translated  by  the  Rev.  E.  Lund 
has  been  published  and  is  now  being  circulated.  They 
report  an  active  interest  in  their  field  and  an  aggressive 
plan  of  action  that  promises  large  results.  The  Presby- 
terian Mission  has  opened  new  work  on  the  islands  of 
Leyte  and  Cebu,  and  in  the  provinces  of  Batangas,  of 
Laguna  and  Albay.  A beautiful  church  building  has 
been  dedicated  in  a district  of  Manila.  This  is  the  first 
permanent  church  building  erected  in  the  islands  for 
Protestant  uses.  The  Methodist  Episcopal  Mission  has 
established  new  stations  in  Rizal,  Pangasinan,  Bulacan 
and  Nueva  Ecija  Provinces.  The  United  Brethren  have 
opened  work  in  San  Fernando,  Union  Province.  The 
Protestant  Episcopal  Church  has  begun  English  work 
at  Cavite,  Iloilo,  Cebu,  Zanboanga  and  Baguio.  A sta- 
tion has  been  started  at  Bontoc,  in  the  province  of  the 
same  name,  for  the  non-Christian  hill  tribes. 

No  denomination  in  the  Philippines  has  anything  like 
the  number  of  missionaries  that  it  needs.  A thousand 


MANY  MORE  WORKERS  NEEDED  265 


American  teachers  were  considered  all  too  few  to  start  a 
new  school  system  for  the  Filipinos.  There  were  schools 
here  with  teachers  having  certificates  from  the  Spanish 
Government  long  before  Dewey  sailed  into  Manila  Bay, 
but  neither  schools  nor  teachers  were  deemed  sufficient 
or  satisfactory,  and  the  best  talent  that  could  be  secured 
was  brought  here.  The  entire  Protestant  missionary 
force  from  America  does  not  yet  number  fifty  men, 
including  missionaries,  physicians,  teachers,  Association 
secretaries  and  Bible  readers.  Every  denomination  there 
could  use  at  least  fifty  ordained  men  in  addition  to 
teachers,  and  nurses  where  hospital  work  is  done,  first 
to  gather  congregations  and  then  to  instruct  the  natives 
how  to  preach  and  care  for  the  flocks. 

It  is  the  belief  of  many  that  the  Philippine  Protestants 
will  soon  have  not  only  self-supporting,  but  also  self- 
propagating  churches,  and  that  men  are  in  training  now 
who  will  be  willing  to  give  a part  or  all  of  their  time  to 
the  work  of  the  ministry,  depending  upon  their  converts 
for  support  and  the  erection  of  churches. 

The  Bible  and  Gospel  hymns  are  being  translated  as 
rapidly  as  possible  into  the  leading  languages  and  into 
different  dialects  of  the  Yisayan  language  especially ; but 
the  questions  of  race  and  language  form  serious  obsta- 
cles to  the  advance  of  Protestantism.  It  is  difficult  for 
a missionary  who  learns  Pampangan  to  reach  the  ma- 
jority of  his  people,  who  speak  Ilocano;  the  latter  is  a 
more  virile  language  and  is  displacing  the  Pampangan ; 
but,  until  it  makes  more  progress,  the  missionary  must 
learn  both  if  he  would  reach  all  the  people  in  his  district. 
The  same  thing  is  true  regarding  Yisayan.  There  is  a 
Panayan  Yisayan  and  a Cebuan  Yisayan,  entirely  dis- 


266 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


tinct  though  spoken  by  people  living  near  each  other. 
Tagalog  is  spoken  by  the  greater  number  of  Filipinos, 
but  it  is  not  understood  outside  the  provinces  where  it 
prevails.  This  means  a large  amount  of  Bible  translating 
and  a great  many  missionaries  at  the  outset. 

If  the  question  were  asked:  “What  is  the  greatest 

obstacle  to  Protestantism  in  the  Philippines?”  nearly 
every  Protestant  worker  in  that  archipelago  would  say : 

“The  example  of  Americans.” 

The  attitude  of  the  Government  in  regard  to  religion 
is  strictly  non-partisan.  A man  may  worship  God  as  he 
pleases  and  be  a Roman  Catholic,  an  Aglipayan,  a 
Protestant  or  an  infidel  at  pleasure,  and  he  will  be  pro- 
tected in  his  worship  or  non-worship.  At  the  same  time 
there  is  an  impression  among  American  teachers  and 
Civil  Government  employees  that  some  superiors  are 
better  pleased  if  Protestants  do  nothing  that  will  empha- 
size their  religious  tendencies,  such  as  entertaining  mis- 
sionaries or  Bible  agents,  or  attending  Protestant 
services.  The  writer  was  asked  to  preach  in  one  of  the 
provinces  the  Sunday  morning  following  an  address  on 
“Character”  which  he  had  given  in  the  Normal  School 
Building. 

“Of  course,  we  cannot  have  the  Sunday  service  in  the 
school  building,  nor  for  that  matter  in  any  Government 
building.  It  would  never  answer,”  was  the  explanation 
given  for  securing  an  empty  house  into  which  chairs 
were  carried  for  the  few  who  desired  to  attend.  Mem- 
ories of  Sunday  services  and  Sunday-schools  and  prayer- 
meetings  in  the  little  red  schoolhouses  among  the  Vermont 
hills,  in  the  valleys  of  New  York  State  and  on  the  prairies 
of  Minnesota,  rose  involuntarily.  Governor  Taft  is  a 


USING  OFFICIAL  PRESSURE 


267 


broad-minded  man,  and,  if  an  appeal  had  been  made  to 
him,  undoubtedly  he  would  have  given  permission  to 
hold  the  Sunday  service  in  the  same  building  that  had 
been  so  freely  offered  for  the  lecture  on  Saturday  evening. 

It  is  generally  known,  however,  throughout  the  Ameri- 
can colony  that  a former  member  of  the  Philippine  Com- 
mission, an  American,  compelled  the  Superintendent  of 
Education  to  withdraw  his  acceptance  of  an  invitation  to 
speak  at  a meeting  called  by  the  Young  Men’s  Christian 
Association.  I was  assured  by  Governor  Taft  that  he 
had  never  heard  of  this  act  of  his  colleague ; and  he 
added  that  he  had  just  accepted  a similar  invitation, 
and  that  he  intended  on  this  occasion  to  make  it  clear  that 
every  person  employed  by  the  Government  in  the  Phil- 
ippines had  absolute  freedom  to  worship  God  when  and 
where  and  how  he  pleased. 

I hastened  to  assure  him  that  I had  never  heard  any 
person  say  that  he  had  given  the  impression  that  prevails 
extensively,  but  I added : “American  teachers  and  other 
employees  state  freely  that  they  are  expected  neither  to 
entertain  missionaries  nor  to  attend  the  services  which 
they  hold.” 

“Well,”  said  Judge  Taft,  “there  are  two  sides  to  most 
questions.  Let  me  give  you  the  other  side  as  it  came 
before  me  some  days  ago.  A teacher  went  to  a town  in 
one  of  the  provinces  and  began  her  work.  The  padre 
was  greatly  pleased  and  helped  her  gather  the  children. 
Soon  there  were  one  hundred  and  twenty  scholars  in  the 
school.  Everything  was  going  on  swimmingly.  The 
teacher  was  popular,  the  padre  was  happy,  and  the  peo- 
ple were  pleased  to  have  their  children  in  school  learning 
English. 


268 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


“One  day  two  missionaries  came  to  that  town — perhaps 
they  were  not  missionaries,  but  colporters  or  Bible  agents ; 
at  any  rate  they  were  friends  of  this  teacher  and  were 
entertained  by  her,  and  made  her  rooms  their  headquar- 
ters from  which  they  distributed  Bibles  and  tracts 
throughout  the  town.” 

“What  was  the  result?” 

“The  padre  was  angry  and  used  his  influence  to  keep 
the  children  away  from  the  school,  and  finally  broke  up 
the  school,  and  the  teacher  was  obliged  to  go  to  another 
town,  all  because  she  had  entertained  Protestant  colpor- 
ters. What  do  you  think  of  that?” 

“That  under  similar  circumstances  I should  have  felt 
as  the  native  priest  did.  There  are  other  buildings  in 
town  which  may  serve  as  headquarters  for  Bibles  and 
tracts.  Both  the  American  teacher  and  her  guests 
showed  lack  of  tact.” 

“So  it  seemed  to  us,  and  yet  no  notice  of  it  was  taken 
publicly.  At  the  same  time,  we  felt  that  our  school 
work  should  not  be  broken  up  in  this  way.” 

Aside  from  the  attitude  of  the  Government,  whose  non- 
Catholic  representatives  have  not  been  openly  in  favor 
of  Protestantism,  the  social  customs  of  many  Americans 
do  not  aid  the  missionaries.  The  Filipinos  drink  their 
native  wines,  but  seldom  to  excess.  After  weeks  of 
travel  throughout  the  provinces,  and  of  residence  in 
Manila,  I saw  only  one  native  who  seemed  to  be  under 
the  influence  of  liquor.  As  he  was  going  home  from  a 
fiesta  after  a cock-fight  in  a country  town,  I could  not 
tell  whether  his  jubilance  was  due  to  a too  liberal  use 
of  vino,  or  to  the  fact  that  his  side  had  won  in  the  pit. 

“I  do  not  know  what  your  custom  is,”  said  our  Ameri- 


AMERICAN  AND  FILIPINO  CUSTOMS  269 


can  host  in  a provincial  town  as  we  were  about  to  call 
upon  the  Filipino  priest,  “but  unless  you  are  strongly 
opposed  to  drinking  wine  or  beer,  I hope  you  will  not 
refuse  it.  The  priest  will  not  understand  your  refusal; 
but  if  on  principle  you  cannot  take  anything,  it  will  not 
matter  so  much,  as  I will  take  a glass  of  everything  that 
is  offered.”  Not  only  did  he  keep  his  word,  but  his  wife 
also  took  both  beer  and  wine  and  gave  each  of  the  children 
a sip  or  two  from  her  glasses,  and  later,  at  another  home, 
took  a cigarette  when  they  were  passed,  not  to  smoke,  as 
she  admitted,  but  because  she  was  afraid  to  offend  her 
neighbors,  whose  customs  meant  so  much  to  them. 

“You  are  no  gentleman  to  leave  my  table  as  you  are 
doing,”  said  an  English  host  to  Mr.  Moody,  when  the 
wine  was  flowing  freely. 

“I  don’t  want  to  be,  if  I have  to  get  drunk  in  order  to 
be  one,”  was  his  characteristic  reply.  It  seems  pitiable 
that  Americans  sacrifice  their  sense  of  right  in  order  to 
conform  to  customs  which  have  largely  grown  up  since 
the  Americans  went  to  the  Philippines.  When  a Filipino 
calls  upon  another  native  the  host  never  thinks  of  offer- 
ing him  beer  or  whiskey,  but  these  are  considered  neces- 
sary when  an  American  calls. 


CHAPTER  XXVI 


THE  PRESBYTERIAN  CHURCH 


Early  Action  Taken  by  the  General  Assembly — Comity 
Planned  for  the  New  Fields — Splendid  Work  in  Ma- 
nila and  Iloilo— The  First  Protestant  Church  Build- 
ing— A Market  Day  in  Oton. 

THE  month  that  Admiral  Dewey  entered  Manila  Bay 
the  Presbyterian  General  Assembly,  in  session  at 
Winona  Lake,  Indiana,  enthusiastically  endorsed  the 
following  suggestion  made  by  the  Rev.  George  F.  Pente- 
cost, D.D. : 

“In  addition  to  fields  already  occupied,  we  cannot  be 
deaf  or  blind  to  the  startling  providence  of  God  which  is 
just  now  opening  up  new  and  unexpected  fields  for  for- 
eign mission  work.  The  peace-speaking  guns  of  Admiral 
Dewey  have  opened  the  gates  which  henceforth  make 
accessible  not  less  than  8,000,000  of  people  who  have 
for  three  hundred  years  been  fettered.  . . . We 

cannot  ignore  the  fact  that  God  has  given  into  our 
hands,  that  is,  into  the  hands  of  American  Christians, 
the  Philippine  Islands,  and  thus  opened  a great  door  and 
effectual  to  their  populations,  and  has,  by  the  very  guns 
of  our  battleships,  summoned  us  to  go  up  and  possess 
the  land.” 

Several  missionaries  in  various  lands  wrote  that  they 
were  willing  to  be  transferred  to  the  Philippine  Islands, 


URGING  ACTION  IN  THE  ISLANDS  271 


the  veteran  Dr.  Kerr,  of  Canton,  China,  sending  the  fol- 
lowing interesting  note : 

“Forty  years  ago  I spent  several  weeks  in  the  Philip- 
pine Islands,  and  some  years  ago  I wrote  to  Dr.  Ellin- 
wood  urging  him  to  take  some  steps  to  establish  a mission 
there.  Recent  events  at  Manila  indicate  that  the  way 
is  now,  or  soon  will  be,  open  to  establish  Protestant  mis- 
sions in  those  islands.  What  is  there  to  hinder  our 
Church  from  being  the  first  to  enter,  as  it  did  in  Japan 
and  Korea?  It  would  be  a difficult  field,  but  the  war 
will  no  doubt  shake  off  some  of  the  Catholic  fetters 
which  have  bound  the  people,  and  some  of  them  might 
welcome  the  preachers  of  salvation  by  grace,  as  they  will 
welcome  free  government.  I hope  you  will  take  this  mat- 
ter in  hand,  and  see  that  the  Board  enters  into  it  with 
enthusiasm  and  faith.” 

The  Presbyterian  Board  felt  that  the  political  and 
military  relations  into  wdiich  the  United  States  had  been 
so  strangely  forced  with  refei’ence  to  the  Philippine 
Islands,  Cuba  and  Porto  Rico,  involved  certain  moral  and 
religious  responsibilities — responsibilities  which  were 
perhaps  quite  independent  of  the  precise  character  of  the 
political  relationship  which  may  hereafter  be  formed 
with  the  islands — and  that  the  Christian  people  of  Amer- 
ica should  immediately  consider  the  duty  of  entering  the 
door  which  God  in  His  providence  was  thus  opening. 

A conference  with  the  representatrces  of  the  leading 
American  Mission  Boards  was  suggested,  with  a Ariew  to 
a mutual  understanding  as  to  the  new  responsibilities  of 
American  Christians  and  an  agreement  as  to  the  most 
effective  distribution  of  the  work  among  the  several 
Boards.  This  conference  was  held  in  the  summer  of 


m 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


1898,  and,  as  a result  of  It,  the  Board  decided  in  No- 
vember of  that  year  to  transfer  the  Rev.  James  "B.  Rod- 
gers, then  a missionary  in  Brazil,  to  the  Philippine 
Islands.  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Rodgers  arrived  there  on  April 
21,  1899,  and  a month  later  were  joined  by  the  Rev.  and 
Mrs.  David  S.  Hibbard.  Before  the  close  of  the  year 
they  reported  an  organized  native  church  with  nine  mem- 
bers, regular  semi-weekly  services  conducted  in  Spanish 
at  four  different  points  in  the  city,  a service  every  Sun- 
day in  English  for  the  English-speaking  people,  evan- 
gelistic work  among  the  soldiers,  visitation  of  hospitals, 
etc.  In  January,  1900,  Dr.  and  Mrs.  J.  Andrew  Hall 
arrived,  and  the  next  month  the  Rev.  Leonard  P.  David- 
son. Thus  the  Presbyterian  work  was  begun  promptly 
and  prosecuted  vigorously. 

The  Manila  station,  according  to  the  action  of  the 
Evangelical  Union,  includes  about  half  of  the  city  of 
Manila,  and  all  that  portion  of  the  Island  of  Luzon  south 
and  southeast  of  Manila,  the  Methodists  taking  the  other 
half  of  Manila  and  the  provinces  to  the  north.  Each 
denomination  has  about  1,300,000  population  among 
which  to  work. 

Mr.  Rodgers  has  under  his  care  seven  licensed  natives, 
and  five  or  six  others  on  whom  he  can  call  for  work  in 
Manila.  In  each  congregation  in  the  country  there  are 
two  men  who  direct  the  services  in  the  absence  of  the 
missionary  or  of  one  of  the  licensed  preachers.  Five  of 
the  licensed  men  are  paid  by  the  Mission  or  by  friends, 
and  give  all  their  time  to  the  work;  others  follow  regular 
trades  and  also  help  in  the  church  work.  In  addition  to 
the  three  Manila  congregations  there  were  in  1903  three 
in  Cavite  province,  three  in  Laguna  province,  and  one 


A Scene  on  the  Pasig  River 


THE  AMERICAN  CHURCH  PASTORS  273 


in  Pasig,  in  the  Province  of  Rizal.  Regular  services  are 
also  held  in  six  other  places,  and  occasional  ones  in  a 
number  of  other  towns.  There  are  six  chapels  con- 
structed by  the  people,  in  addition  to  the  large  native 
church  opened  in  Manila.  The  missionaries  had  baptized 
nearly  six  hundred  members  in  Manila  and  near-by  prov- 
inces, and  about  half  as  many  have  been  baptized  in 
Iloilo,  and  a smaller  number  in  towns  farther  south.  It 
is  not  the  policy  of  the  Presbyterians  to  baptize  natives 
until  they  understand  fully  what  this  act  means  and  what 
church  membership  involves ; hundreds  are  held  on  pro- 
bation and  received  into  church  membership  only  when 
the  missionaries  feel  that  they  are  making  a credible 
profession. 

Mr.  Snook  is  working  with  Mr.  Rodgers  in  extending 
the  work  among  the  natives.  Mr.  Rodgers  speaks  Span- 
ish fluently  and  can  thus  reach  the  majority  in  any  con- 
gregation. Mr.  Snook  has  given  his  time  chiefly  to 
learning  Tagalog,  that  he  may  speak  to  the  natives  in 
their  own  language.  Mr.  Rodgers  is  enthusiastic  over 
the  progress  already  made,  considering  all  with  which  the 
mission  work  has  had  to  contend.  With  the  new  mission- 
aries who  arrived  in  1903  and  1904,  the  work  was  greatly 
enlarged. 

The  American  Church  has  been  faithfully  served  from 
the  outset  by  young  missionaries,  who  have  carried  on 
services  for  their  countrymen  while  learning  the  native 
language,  which  they  were  to  use  in  their  life  work.  As 
soon  as  one  became  able  to  converse  in  Tagalog,  or  was 
needed  to  open  work  elsewhere,  he  was  transferred  and 
his  successor  had  charge  of  the  Manila  Church.  Nat- 
urally, with  a drifting  population  and  temporary  pas- 


274 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


tors  preaching  in  a hired  house,  it  was  difficult  to  build  up 
a stable  congregation. 

In  1902,  Mr.  Hillis,  a Princeton  graduate,  was  sent 
to  Manila  to  have  charge  of  the  English  work.  He  found 
a church  organized  and  a Sunday  audience  of  from  fifty 
to  seventy-five  loyal  people.  By  faithful  pastoral  work 
and  by  earnest  Gospel  sermons  he  built  an  audience  of 
from  seventy-five  to  one  hundred  and  fifty,  according  to 
the  weather,  for  the  heat  and  rain  in  the  Philippines  are 
two  of  Satan’s  most  successful  emissaries.  But  Mr.  Hillis 
did  more  than  this — he  drew  people  to  the  Sunday 
services.  By  an  attractive  personality  and  an  extremely 
sympathetic  and  loving  nature,  he  gripped  to  himself 
“with  hook  of  steel”  a regiment  of  young  men ; soldiers, 
Government  employees,  business  men,  and  sick  people  in 
the  hospitals.  Going  through  two  or  three  departments 
with  Mr.  Hillis  one  day,  it  seemed  as  if  he  knew  half  of 
the  employees  by  name,  and  with  most  of  the  others  he 
had  a speaking  acquaintance. 

The  result  is,  that  he  has  a tremendous  influence  for 
good  over  a larger  congregation  than  hears  him  preach 
on  any  given  Sunday ; he  visits  the  men  in  their  homes  or 
boarding  houses,  and  they  call  upon  him  in  his  modest 
rooms.  Of  course,  many  of  these  attend  his  services,  but 
not  with  sufficient  regularity  to  increase  perceptibly  the 
size  of  the  audiences ; when  they  are  ill  or  in  trouble  they 
send  quickly  to  this  preacher  friend,  who,  like  his  Master, 
goes  “about  doing  good.”  In  the  meantime  Mr.  Hillis 
has  built  up  a strong  body  of  workers  in  his  church. 
Responding  to  his  enthusiasm,  they  give  generously  of 
time  and  money,  sending  out  invitations  to  strangers, 
calling  upon  occasional  visitors  and  contributing  liberally 
to  the  financial  support  of  the  church. 


TWO  PASTORS  KEPT  BUSY 


275 


In  1903,  the  Rev.  Stealj  B.  Rossiter,  D.D.,  of  New 
York,  wTas  sent  to  Manila  to  take  charge  of  the  American 
Church,  Mr.  Hillis  becoming  his  assistant.  Dr.  Rossiter 
has  had  an  extended  pastoral  service  in  New  York,  and 
it  was  felt  that  the  two  clergymen  could  accomplish  a 
great  work  for  Americans  who  are  in  danger  of  losing 
all  church-going  habits.  The  result  has  justified  the 
experiment.  Dr.  Rossiter  and  his  accomplished  fam- 
ily have  made  their  home  a center  of  social  influence, 
while  faithful  sermons  and  personal  interviews  have 
led  many  people  to  throw  in  their  lot  with  the  Pres- 
byterians. In  the  meantime  Mr.  Hillis  has  been  supple- 
menting as  before  the  services  by  his  contact  with  young 
men  in  offices,  barracks  and  hospitals. 

During  all  the  time  that  the  Church  for  Americans  has 
been  open,  there  have  been,  besides  the  men,  many  elect 
ladies,  the  wives  of  Army  and  Navy  officers  and  Gov- 
ernment officials,  and  business  men,  besides  nurses  and 
teachers,  who  have  aided  nobly  the  several  preachers ; the 
pity  of  it  is  that  there  have  not  been  more,  in  view  of  the 
number  who  could  have  given  service  as  well  as  sympathy. 

The  first  Sunday  that  we  were  in  Manila  wTe  wor- 
shiped in  the  Presbyterian  Church  for  Americans.  The 
second  Sunday  I attended  two  native  services  with  Mr. 
Rodgers.  Four  members  were  received  on  confession  of 
faith  at  the  second  service,  two  men  and  twro  women ; and 
perhaps  a hundred  or  more  received  communion.  This 
meeting  was  held  in  the  Rizal  theatre,  and  at  least  three 
hundred  people,  in  addition  to  the  communicants,  were 
in  the  audience.  The  president  of  the  Board  of  Trustees 
of  this  native  church  is  Senor  Felipe  Buencamino,  one  of 
the  leading  men  among  the  insurgents,  and  later  a Civil 


276 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


Service  Commissioner  in  the  American  Government. 
Senor  Buencamino  has  been  in  the  United  States  and  did 
much  for  the  Filipinos  while  here,  and  has  been  of  great 
service  to  the  Americans  since  his  return. 

The  first  church  building  erected  by  the  Presbyterian 
Mission  in  Manila  was  dedicated  in  November,  1908. 
The  building  is  on  the  corner  of  Paseo  Azcarraga,  the 
broad  street  that  bounds  the  northern  side  of  the  city, 
and  Calle  Pescadores,  which,  under  various  names,  is  the 
principal  thoroughfare  of  the  large  native  districts  of 
San  Nicolas  and  Tondo.  It  is  built  of  American  lumber, 
Oregon  pine  and  redwood,  and  is  thoroughly  American 
in  style  and  plan.  Careful  provision  has  been  made  to 
overcome  the  difficulties  of  the  climate — heat,  for  the 
building  is  well  ventilated ; earthquakes  and  typhoons, 
for  the  whole  structure  is  well  braced.  There  are  two 
main  rooms,  the  principal  auditorium  accommodating 
about  five  hundred  people,  and  the  Sunday-school  and 
prayer-meeting  room  from  two  hundred  and  fifty  to  three 
hundred. 

The  lot  cost  $3,000,  and  the  building,  furnishings  and 
unexpected  extras  $14,500;  a large  sum,  but  due  to  the 
extraordinary  expensiveness  of  ever}Jhing  in  Manila, 
where  it  costs  more  to  get  a shipment  of  roofing  from  the 
harbor  to  the  church  building  than  it  did  to  transport 
the  same  material  from  New  York  to  Manila.  Most  of 
the  work  was  done  by  Filipino  laborers  and  mechanics; 
for  the  finer  interior  work  Japanese  carpenters  were  em- 
ployed. 

Presbyterian  mission  work  on  the  island  of  Panay  was 
started  in  1901  by  Hr.  and  Mrs.  J.  Andrew  Hall.  Dr. 
Hall  is  a medical  missionary,  and  secured  money  to  build 


AN  IDEAL  MISSIONARY 


277 


a missionary  hospital  and  dispensary,  which  have  already 
done  a vast  amount  of  good.  In  addition  to  his  work  as 
a physician,  he  has  from  the  first  been  engaged  in  evan- 
gelistic work,  both  in  Iloilo — the  second  largest  city  in 
the  archipelago- — and  in  its  suburbs  and  adjoining  towns. 

“I  do  not  belong  to  the  church  of  which  Dr.  Hall  is 
a communicant,  nor  have  I united  with  him  especially  in 
carrying  on  his  religious  work,”  said  a business  man  in 
Iloilo  who  was  a fellow  passenger  to  Manila  on  our  re- 
turn from  Iloilo.  “At  the  same  time  I feel  that  Dr.  Hall 
is  an  ideal  missionary.  His  sacrifice  knows  no  limits. 
He  has  won  the  hearts  of  the  American  people  and  the 
Filipinos  alike.  There  is  just  one  difficulty,  however, 
about  his  popularity,  and  that  is  that  unless  he  is  re- 
strained, or  has  more  assistance,  he  will  soon  wear  himself 
out.  No  church  on  these  islands  has  a more  consecrated 
representative  than  Dr.  Hall.”  This  opinion  had  been 
expressed  by  several  others  before  the  business  man  was 
met.  Dr.  Hall’s  popularity,  however,  is  shared  in  the 
mind  of  the  public  by  Mrs.  Hall,  who  works  to  the  break- 
ing point ; but,  as  her  husband  said : 

“What  is  one  to  do  when  the  need  is  so  great  and 
when  that  need  must  be  supplied?  We  must  work  as  hard 
as  we  can,  and  as  long  as  we  can,  for  this  is  a time  of 
crisis  in  the  history  of  Protestant  work  in  these  islands.” 
As  in  Manila,  there  is  an  American  congregation, 
which  has  its  services  in  the  building  occupied,  other 
hours  of  the  Sabbath  and  on  other  days  of  the  week,  by 
Filipinos  and  Chinamen.  The  English  work  is  in  charge 
of  the  Rev.  Paul  Doltz,  who  went  to  Iloilo  in  September, 
1902,  and  along  with  the  care  of  the  congregation  to 
which  he  ministers,  he  has  been  studying  the  Visayan 


278 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


language,  and  is  already  able  to  work  with  natives  both  in 
the  city  and  in  neighboring  towns.  The  congregation 
is  made  up  largely  of  American  officials  and  their  wives, 
American  teachers  and  a few  soldiers.  In  Iloilo  as  in 
Manila,  in  a similar  congregation,  the  grade  of  intel- 
ligence is  equal  to,  if  not  higher  than,  that  of  the 
average  audience  in  the  Homeland,  and  nothing  but  the 
best  that  the  missionary  can  give  is  satisfactory  to 
them.  Missionaries  sent  to  foreign  fields,  especially  to 
minister  to  English-speaking  congregations,  are  selected 
because  of  superior  qualities  as  preachers  and  pastors ; to 
do  less  than  this  is  to  invite  failure  from  the  outset. 

One  Monday  morning  at  seven  o’clock,  by  the  courtesy 
of  Colonel  C.  H.  McAuley,  in  charge  of  the  Quartermas- 
ter’s Department,  an  army  wagon  was  at  our  door  to 
drive  us  with  Dr.  Hall  and  a native  helper  to  Oton,  nine 
miles  from  the  city.  The  country  people  have  market 
days  in  different  towns,  when  thousands  of  people  gather, 
many  of  them  coming  twenty  or  thirty  miles  to  buy  or 
sell  produce.  Howr  many  kinds  of  fish  there  are  in  the 
sea  I am  not  able  to  tell,  but  there  are  at  least  forty,  I 
am  confident,  as  that  number  of  varieties  was  on  sale  in 
the  market  square  at  Oton.  It  may  be  added  that,  owing 
to  their  smallness,  few,  if  any,  of  those  seen  that  day 
would  be  recognized  as  fish  by  dealers  in  New  York.  Not 
satisfied  with  selling  the  various  members  of  the  finny 
tribe,  a coarse  paste,  resembling  chocolate  ice-cream,  is 
made  from  some  of  the  fish  and  sold  in  great  quantities 
to  hungry  buyers. 

The  native  cloth  woven  on  the  island  is  a striking 
feature  of  the  market.  No  dressmaker,  however,  would 
care  to  purchase  the  cloth,  because  her  services  would  not 


GOWNS  THAT  NEED  NO  MODISTE  279 


be  needed  in  preparing  the  gowns  for  the  belles  of  Panay. 
The  gowns  are  made  before  they  are  brought  to  the 
market.  One  consists  of  two  breadths  of  cloth  sewed  to- 
gether, with  the  ends  left  open.  A finished  gown  in 
Panay  resembles  a salt  sack  with  the  bottom  open.  Into 
this  prepared  creation  the  Panayan  lady  steps  and  finds 
herself  with  about  twice  as  much  room  as  she  needs  for 
comfortable  walking.  Catching  up  the  sack,  she  gives  it 
a twist  toward  the  left  and  tucks  the  end  in  the  belt 
thus  formed  and  she  is  ready  to  do  a day’s  work.  No 
buttons,  hooks,  eyes,  pins  or  strings  are  used  in  fastening 
the  skirt.  A little  jacket  with  a collarette,  separate  from 
the  waist,  completes  the  toilet,  although  some  of  the 
better  dressed  people  wear  slippers.  The  Chinamen  are 
there,  as  well  as  elsewhere,  in  great  numbers.  They  fur- 
nish the  cotton  and  silk  from  which  the  cloth  is  woven, 
and  then  buy  the  cloth  to  sell  in  the  markets  through- 
out the  island.  Seemingly  every  house  we  passed  on 
our  drive  had  a loom.  As  the  cloth  is  sold  very  cheaply, 
it  is  necessary  to  keep  the  hand  loom  busy  in  order  to 
make  a living.  Iloilo  is  the  home  of  the  Jusi  cloth.  As 
the  letter  J is  pronounced  like  H,  when  speaking  of  the 
cloth  one  is  reminded  of  the  name  given  by  heartless 
bachelors  to  some  of  the  sex  who  wear  it. 

But  it  is  not  the  fruit,  nor  the  fish,  nor  the  cloth,  nor 
the  rice,  nor  the  picturesque  crowd  of  market  people, 
that  had  taken  Dr.  Hall  so  far  from  Iloilo.  Walking 
to  a part  of  the  ground  where  they  would  be  able  to 
reach  a good  many  people,  the  preacher  and  his  assistant 
began  to  sing  a Gospel  hymn  in  the  Visayan  tongue. 
Soon  a large  number  of  people  stopped  their  buying  and 
gathered  around  the  visitors  and  listened  reverently  to  the 


280 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


songs  and  addresses  which  followed.  Not  the  slightest 
disrespect  was  shown  the  Protestants,  although  the  vast 
majority  of  the  hearers  were  Roman  Catholics.  After  a 
half-hour’s  service,  copies  of  the  Scriptures  in  the  native 
tongues  were  sold  and  man}r  tracts  distributed. 

Several  people  whom  Dr.  Hall  knew,  members  of  his 
congregation  at  Iloilo  or  Molo,  or  those  who  were  form- 
ing the  new  congregation  farther  back  in  the  mountains, 
gathered  around  him  for  a brief  chat,  and  then  the  evan- 
gelist went  to  another  part  of  the  market  crowds,  giving 
another  service  of  song  and  sermon,  closing  with  the 
distribution  of  the  Scriptures  and  tracts.  Under  the 
blazing  sun  it  must  have  been  a trying  experience,  es- 
pecially for  the  Americans;  but  month  in  and  month  out, 
every  Monday  morning  Dr.  Hall  or  Mr.  Doltz,  with  the 
native  preacher,  carry  on  this  form  of  work  after  driving 
to  Oton,  and  in  this  way  meet  the  distant  members  of 
their  flock  and  plan  for  more  advanced  work.  Dr.  and 
Mrs.  Hall  were  to  spend  a month  at  Oton  soon,  starting 
a native  church.  The  house  of  worship,  made  of  bamboo 
and  nipa  covering,  was  contributed  by  the  people. 

After  spending  three  days  with  these  workers  in  Iloilo, 
seeing  the  hospital  work,  which  takes  a great  deal  of  time 
and  does  an  immense  amount  of  good,  I am  prepared  to 
agree  with  my  business  acquaintance  that  what  the 
Church  needs  on  mission  fields  are  more  men  of  the  ability 
and  character  of  those  at  Iloilo.  What  is  needed  very 
greatly  is  a suitable  church  building,  part  to  be  used  for 
the  English  wTork  and  part  for  work  for  Chinamen  and 
Visayans.  A hospital  is  one  of  the  urgent  needs  of 
Americans  as  well  as  natives,  and  a home  for  the  mis- 
sionaries should  soon  be  erected.  There  should  also  be 


PROMISE  OF  FRUITFULNESS 


281 


an  addition  of  one  medical  missionary  giving  all  his  time 
to  the  work,  and  an  American  nurse,  whose  supervision 
of  the  native  nurses  would  be  necessary  for  carrying  on 
the  hospital. 

At  Dumaguete,  on  the  Island  of  Negros,  as  at  all  other 
stations  in  the  Philippines,  the  enlargement  of  the  mis- 
sion force  is  very  sorely  needed.  The  work  is  spreading 
beyond  the  power  of  the  Board  to  meet  its  claims,  and  at 
the  same  time  its  promise  of  fruitfulness  is  becoming 
greater  from  month  to  month.  Religious  services  have 
been  maintained  with  good  results. 

The  opening  of  the  mission  station  at  Cebu,  on  the 
island  of  that  name,  took  place  in  September,  1902.  Sun- 
day services  in  English  were  held  by  the  missionaries 
while  they  were  studying  the  Cebuan  and  Visayan. 

The  splendid  educational  work  at  Dumaguete  is  treated 
in  a subsequent  chapter. 


CHAPTER  XXVII 


IN  AGUINALDO’S  PROVINCE 


A Sunday  Sail  in  Manila  Bay — Greetings  from 
America — Remembering  His  First  Wife  at  His 
Second  Wedding — Dedicating  a Bamboo  Chapel — 

Bitter  Enemies  Made  Strong  Allies. 

OULD  you  like  to  spend  a Sunday  In  Cavite 


of  Aguinaldo?”  said  the  Rev.  James  B.  Rodgers  one 
Saturday  afternoon.  The  invitation  was  gladly  ac- 
cepted, and  the  two  clergymen  started  out  at  6.30  a.m. 
to  catch  the  boat  for  Cavite.  It  rained  when  we  started. 
It  was  a Manila  rain ; not  a shower,  nor  yet  a downpour ; 
rather  an  opening  of  the  clouds,  water  descending  in 
bucketfuls  upon  the  hapless  travelers.  In  America  rain 
storms,  even  violent  ones,  are  mild  compared  with  those 
in  the  Philippines.  Sometimes  a native  congregation  is 
unable  to  attend  church  because  the  people  have  no  boats 
and  cannot  leave  their  homes  on  account  of  the  water, 
which  often  comes  up  half  way  to  the  living  rooms,  sev- 
eral feet  above  the  ground.  The  city  is  so  low  that  it 
is  impossible  for  this  water  to  run  off  at  high  tide,  and 
in  the  rainy  season  one  often  sees  boats  used  in  the  streets 
where  an  hour  before  the  stones  were  blistering  hot. 

“Shall  we  go  back?”  said  Mr.  Rodgers,  as  we  reached 
the  boat. 


Province,  attending  services  near  the  home 


AT  SEA  IN  A BANCA 


283 


“Do  what  jTou  would  do  if  you  were  alone.” 

“Then  we  will  go  on.” 

The  ride  across  Manila  Bay  to  Cavite  occupied  about 
an  hour.  We  were  not  on  one  of  the  smallest  steamers, 
but  it  was  small  enough  for  the  sea  that  was  running  at 
the  time.  One  can  sit  in  a chair  if  he  pays  for  the 
privilege ; otherwise  he  stands  or  leans  or  squats,  accord- 
ing to  his  nationality.  The  steamer  route  crosses  that 
part  of  the  bay  where  the  Spanish  fleet  was  sunk,  and 
one  or  two  of  the  wrecks  were  still  in  evidence.  One  ship 
had  been  raised  recently  and  looked  sadly  in  need  of  a 
trip  to  the  dry  dock. 

When  we  reached  Cavite,  we  were  still  an  hour  from 
the  place  where  we  were  to  attend  the  meeting,  and  a 
transfer  was  made  to  a banca  with  a sail.  The  banca  is 
not  built  especially  for  sailing  purposes ; it  resembles  a 
hollow  log  with  one  side  cut  off.  In  order  to  prevent 
overturning  in  the  sea,  bamboo  outriggers  are  attached, 
and  with  the  sail  spread  we  sped  across  the  inner  bay. 
The  outrigger  not  being  deemed  sufficiently  heavy  to 
keep  the  clergymen  afloat,  two  of  the  men  ran  out  on  it, 
preventing  a catastrophe. 

In  another  hour  we  were  at  Cavite  Yiejo,  where  we 
found  a congregation  of  more  than  two  hundred  Taga- 
logs  awaiting  us.  The  native  preacher,  Mr.  Estrella, 
was  in  charge,  but  nothing  had  been  done  until  Mr.  Rod- 
gers arrived.  A stringed  band  and  the  members  of  the 
congregation  were  gathered  about  the  pulpit ; the  leader 
of  the  band  was  leading  the  singing. 

Mr.  Rodgers  speaks  Spanish  with  fluency  and  uses 
Tagalog  in  conversation,  but  does  not  preach  in  that 
language.  After  the  devotional  services  he  gave  an  ad- 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


284. 

dress  in  Spanish,  which  the  majority  of  the  congregation 
understood;  then  followed  a sermon  by  the  native 
preacher  in  Tagalog.  As  Mr.  Estrella  closed  his  address 
he  made  some  reference  to  America,  and  the  missionary 
said  to  me: 

“He  is  asking  them  if  they  want  a greeting  from  you.” 

As  two  hundred  voices  made  a response  that  seemed  to 
be  affirmative,  and  the  native  preacher  bowed  to  the  visi- 
tor, he  arose  and  gave  them  a greeting  in  the  name  of  the 
Christian  churches  of  America.  The  remarks  were  trans- 
lated into  Spanish  by  Mr.  Rodgers,  and  translated  again 
into  Tagalog  by  Mr.  Estrella.  As  some  of  the  congrega- 
tion understood  English,  and  most  of  them  Spanish,  and 
all  of  them  Tagalog,  the  address  was  to  many  of  them  a 
thrice-told  tale. 

Following  the  sermon  two  marriages  were  solemnized, 
without  a fee. 

“Why  was  one  of  the  men  in  tears  during  the  service?” 
Mr.  Rodgers  was  asked. 

“He  was  doubtless  thinking  of  his  first  wife,  who  has 
not  been  dead  very  long.” 

After  the  service,  candidates  for  admission  to  the 
church  were  examined  by  the  missionary  and  the  native 
preacher,  and  then  the  congregation  went  to  the  home  of 
the  bride  whose  husband  did  not  cry  while  pledging  his 
troth.  Two  or  three  score  of  people,  including  the 
musicians,  were  present,  and  as  rapidly  as  possible  the 
tables  set  in  the  yard  were  filled  with  guests.  Everybody 
was  welcome.  The  supply  of  rice  giving  out  as  the  meal 
was  in  progress,  a fresh  kettleful  was  boiled  a few  feet 
away  from  the  table.  In  variety  and  amount  the  dinner 
would  do  credit  to  any  wedding  breakfast.  Several  of 


AN  ECONOMICAL  CHAPEL 


285 


the  dishes  were  unfamiliar  to  one  of  the  visitors,  but 
were  greatly  enjoyed  by  the  other  guests. 

From  these  festivities  the  preachers  went  to  the  house 
of  another  church  member,  where  places  for  a siesta  had 
been  made.  We  were  ushered  into  the  best  room  in  the 
house,  where  the  floor  was  spread  with  blankets,  sheets 
and  pillows,  and  were  bidden  to  rest  until  the  afternoon 
service.  The  invitation  was  gratefully  accepted,  and  a 
nap  proved  a great  blessing,  as  it  was  after  midnight 
before  we  reached  our  beds. 

At  the  afternoon  service  fourteen  men  and  nine  women 
were  received  into  church  membership.  The  communion 
was  conducted  by  Mr.  Rodgers,  assisted  by  the  native 
preacher  and  the  visitor. 

Then  came  a ride  of  several  miles  to  Bacoor.  The 
most  prominent  building  passed  on  the  journey  was  the 
home  of  the  Aguinaldo  family,  where  the  great  agitator 
was  born  and  where  his  mother  still  lives. 

At  Bacoor,  on  Manila  Bay,  we  found  a tasty  chapel 
made  of  bamboo  poles,  with  a nipa  roof.  Around  the 
side  were  bamboo  fish  weirs  in  place  of  walls.  The  Amer- 
ican flag  was  prominent  over  the  pulpit  and  in  front  of 
the  chapel.  Tasteful  decorations  had  been  prepared,  and 
the  sign  in  front  announced  a cordial  invitation  to  the 
service.  On  either  side  of  the  pulpit  was  a banana  tree, 
apparently  growing  in  the  earth,  although  it  may  have 
been  placed  there  for  the  occasion. 

As  at  Cavite,  there  was  no  covering  for  the  floor  and 
benches  were  used  instead  of  chairs.  Both  chapels  were 
built  by  the  people  without  aid  from  the  Mission  Board, 
and  each  congregation  is  very  happy  over  its  work.  Two 
women  members  of  the  congregation  at  Bacoor  had 


286 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


walked  five  or  six  miles  to  secure  the  presence  of  the  band 
from  the  Cavite  congregation,  and  several  members  of 
the  morning  audience  were  also  present  in  the  evening. 

After  the  ministration  of  the  Lord’s  Supper,  the  chapel 
was  dedicated  and  an  earnest  address  was  given  by  Mr. 
Rodgers,  urging  the  people  to  be  zealous  in  their  Chris- 
tian living  and  not  over-zealous  toward  those  who  opposed 
them. 

The  Bacoor  people  had  a trying  experience  which 
turned  out  to  their  good.  The  Presidente  of  the  town, 
on  the  evening  of  July  4th,  had  the  entire  congregation 
arrested  and  about  twenty  of  them  thrown  into  prison 
after  a brief  examination.  When  the  attention  of  Gov- 
ernor Taft  was  called  to  the  matter  by  Mr.  Rodgers,  he 
ordered  the  prisoners  discharged  at  once,  and  sent  an 
attorney  to  investigate  the  matter.  The  Catholic  Society 
immediately  came  out  with  resolutions  protesting  against 
the  arrest  of  the  Protestants  and  applauding  the  action 
of  the  Governor  in  securing  their  release.  Manila  would 
not  have  known  that  Protestantism  had  gained  a foot- 
hold in  Bacoor,  had  it  not  been  for  the  over-zealous  ef- 
forts of  the  Presidente,  and  Presbyterians  throughout 
the  provinces  might  gratefully  recognize  his  involuntary 
assistance.  Twenty-seven  adults  were  examined  and  bap- 
tized on  confession  of  faith,  making,  with  those  received 
in  the  morning,  fifty  members  added  in  a single  day  to  the 
Presbyterian  Church  by  this  devoted  missionary  and  his 
assistant. 

As  it  began  to  rain  at  the  close  of  the  service,  which 
was  two  hours  in  length,  another  hour  was  spent  in  sing- 
ing, and  then  at  ten  o’clock  the  preachers  sought  a place 
to  stay  during  the  night.  It  was  two  hours  before  ar- 


A CHOICE  OF  BLESSINGS 


287 


rangements  were  completed,  owing  to  the  large  number 
of  people  detained  by  the  storm,  and  about  midnight  we 
were  ushered  into  our  resting  place,  a mile  or  so  from 
the  chapel.  A Filipino  bed,  with  a mosquito  net,  was  to 
serve  for  one  traveler,  and  a blanket  on  the  bamboo  floor 
for  the  other.  After  a brief  struggle  as  to  who  should 
have  the  bed  on  the  floor,  the  visitor  yielded,  and,  as 
usual,  secured  the  better  accommodations.  Mr.  Rodgers 
slept  on  the  floor,  declaring  that  it  was  what  he  was  ac- 
customed to  do  when  on  missionary  tours,  and  that  he 
was  really  happier  there  than  in  bed.  This  statement 
would  be  harder  to  believe  if  it  were  not  that  the  bed  and 
the  floor  were  both  of  bamboo,  so  that  there  was  doubtless 
little  difference  between  the  pliability  of  the  two. 

A three  hours’  ride  in  the  rain  Monday  morning  car- 
ried us  back  to  Manila,  none  the  worse  for  our  day  in  the 
province,  and  in  every  way  better  for  the  delightful  ex- 
perience with  those  who  a short  time  ago  were  America’s 
most  bitter  enemies.  Cavite  Province  was  a hotbed  of 
insurrection;  its  reputation  for  such  things  dating  back 
at  least  a generation.  With  the  Gospel  in  the  hearts  of 
the  people,  the  American  Army  may  safely  be  reduced 
there  and  in  other  provinces.  The  Government  of  the 
United  States  has  no  stronger  ally  in  its  pacification  of 
the  islands  than  the  Protesant  Church  of  America  with 
its  faithful,  self-sacrificing  missionaries;  and  of  these, 
none  deserves  greater  praise  than  Mr.  Rodgers,  one  of 
the  veterans,  though  still  a young  man. 


CHAPTER  XXVIII 


THE  SILLIMAN  INSTITUTE 


Dumaguete  an  Ideal  Place  for  the  School — Friendly 
Spirit  and  Active  Co-operation  of  Government  Offi- 
cers— Necessity  and  Dignity  of  Honest  Toil — Boys 
Alike  the  World  Over— The  Benefactor  a Noble 
American. 

I TRUST  that  you  will  visit  the  Silliman  Institute  at 
Dumaguete,”  said  Governor  Taft  when  outlining 
our  trip  to  the  southern  islands.  “It  is  only  a few  days 
ago  that  one  of  the  provincial  officers  from  Negros  was 
speaking  with  me  about  this  school,  and  he  made  the 
remark  that  no  effort  of  Americans  had  done  more  to 
bring  about  a good  feeling  between  their  government  and 
the  natives  of  that  island  than  the  establishment  and 
conduct  of  this  institution.” 

From  another  source  similar  testimony  was  borne  to 
the  excellent  character  of  the  institute,  which  bears  the 
name  of  its  donor,  the  Hon.  Horace  B.  Silliman,  LL.D., 
of  Cohoes,  N.  Y.,  who  gave  $20,000  to  found  it.  The 
city  of  Dumaguete  is  exceptionally  healthful  and  the 
Institute  is  located  on  a beautiful  palm-shaded  tract  of 
nearly  five  acres  on  the  main  street,  near  the  Governor’s 
residence,  and  fronting  the  beach.  It  is  easily  accessible, 
not  only  from  the  province  in  which  it  is  situated,  but 
from  the  populous  islands  of  Cebu  and  Bohol,  where  the 
same  dialect  is  spoken. 


Dk.  H.  B.  Sii.uman  Sillimax  Industrial  Institute 


IMPRESSIONS  OF  DUMAGUETE  289 


The  friendly  spirit  and  practical  co-operation  of  the 
Provincial  Governor  and  other  prominent  persons  at 
Dumaguete  in  all  that  pertains  to  the  school  enterprise 
and  the  general  plans  of  the  station  are  everywhere  seen. 
That  Dumaguete  is  a station  of  exceptional  salubrity 
and  exemption  from  disease  has  been  shown  in  the  fact 
that  Di\  Langheim,  one  of  the  instructors  of  the  Insti- 
tute, has  by  judicious  and  watchful  care  and  sanitary 
precaution  saved  the  community  to  a large  extent  from 
the  fearful  ravages  of  cholera  which  visited  Iloilo.  The 
medical  work  of  Dr.  Langheim  is  varied  and  exacting; 
besides  his  services  at  the  Institute,  he  has  important  du- 
ties as  general  superintendent  of  the  Board  of  Health 
for  Oriental  Negros. 

The  Rev.  Arthur  J.  Brown,  D.D.,  the  Secretary  of  the 
Presbyterian  Board  of  Foreign  Missions,  through  which 
Dr.  Silliman  presented  his  gift  to  the  Filipinos,  visited 
Dumaguete  in  1901.  In  “The  New  Era  in  the  Philip- 
pines” he  gives  his  impressions  of  the  place  and  the  work 
in  these  words : 

“The  location  is  the  most  healthful  and  beautiful  that 
I saw  in  the  Philippines.  The  land  rises  gently  from  a 
pebbly  beach  to  a noble  mountain  range.  The  lower 
levels  are  covered  with  plantations  of  tobacco  and  sugar 
cane,  higher  slopes  with  hemp,  and  summits  of  the  moun- 
tains with  heavy  forests  of  hardwoods.  Across  the  clear 
water  the  islands  of  Siquijor  and  Cebu  are  seen,  while 
farther  away,  but  in  plain  view,  are  the  outlines  of  Bohol 
and  Mindanao.  I drove  for  several  miles  in  various  di- 
rections from  the  town  in  order  to  get  some  idea  of  the 
adjacent  country.  The  result  was  surprising.  In  this 
alleged  uncivilized  land  on  the  other  side  of  the  globe, 


290 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


I found  such  roads  as  I had  not  found  in  China,  outside 
of  the  foreign  settlements,  and  which  would  be  consid- 
ered even  in  New  England  good  country  roads.  Back 
from  the  road  were  continuous  cultivated  fields,  while  lin- 
ing it  were  the  picturesque  bamboo  and  nipa  houses  of 
the  people  nestling  in  groves  of  banana,  cocoanut,  man- 
go, papaw  and  breadfruit  trees.  A more  charming  drive 
could  not  easily  be  found. 

“The  advantages  of  Dumaguete  as  the  site  for  the 
Silliman  Institute  are  : ( 1 ) Its  accessibility  to  a large 
population.  While  the  parish  of  Dumaguete  has  only 
about  twelve  thousand,  yet,  as  already  explained,  the 
place  is  within  easy  reach  of  the  populous  islands  of  Bo- 
hol and  lower  Cebu.  (2)  The  absence  of  competing 
schools.  Superintendent  Atkinson  told  me  that  while  the 
Department  of  Public  Instruction  contemplates  the  es- 
tablishment of  an  agricultural  college  on  the  other  side 
of  the  island  of  Negros,  and  an  industrial  school  at  Cebu, 
it  has  no  plans  for  anything  in  Dumaguete  beyond  the 
public  schools,  and  that  wre  could  have  a comparatively 
clear  field  for  the  development  of  the  Institute.  (3)  The 
friendliness  and  intelligence  of  the  officials  and  people. 
The  opposition  to  American  occupation  in  this  region  was 
slight,  and  there  would  have  been  none  at  all  if  it  had 
not  been  for  the  malcontents  from  Cebu.  Now  an  Ameri- 
can can  travel  with  perfect  safety  in  any  part  of  the 
island.  The  influence  of  Rome  appears  to  be  compara- 
tively weak.  The  people  have  driven  the  friars  off  the 
island  and  the  Roman  Catholic  churches  are  in  charge  of 
native  priests  for  whom  the  people  apparently  care  little. 
The  Governor  of  the  province,  Senor  Demetrio  Larena, 
and  his  brother,  the  Presidente  of  the  municipality,  im- 


MALAY  INDISPOSITION  TO  LABOR  291 


pressed  me  as  unusually  fine  types  of  Filipinos — intelli- 
gent, able  and  broad-minded.  They,  as  well  as  the  best 
people  of  the  place,  are  outspoken  in  their  gratification 
over  the  location  of  the  Institute  in  their  city,  and  give 
it  their  cordial  support.  The  Governor  sent  the  pros- 
pectus of  the  Institute  to  every  village  in  the  province, 
and  his  own  son  is  one  of  the  pupils.” 

Dr.  Silliman  and  the  Presbyterian  Missionary  Board 
intended  to  make  the  Institute  an  industrial  school,  but 
it  has  been  impossible  to  carry  out  that  part  of  the  plan 
at  first,  owing  to  the  illness  of  the  American  who  was 
sent  to  take  charge  of  it,  and  because  the  students  were 
able  and  willing  to  pay  the  required  fees  and  equally 
unwilling  to  work  with  their  hands.  Several  branches  of 
manual  training  were  started,  and  Dr.  Brown  urged  the 
teaching  of  gardening  as  well  as  printing  and  carpen- 
tering. 

“For,  oddly  enough,”  he  says,  “while  the  Filipinos 
understand  the  culture  of  sugar,  tobacco,  hemp,  bananas 
and  cocoanuts,  no  vegetables  can  be  had  in  Dumaguete, 
except  a coarse,  stringy  sweet-potato.  The  soil  of  the 
Institute  grounds  is  too  sandy  for  cultivation,  but  there 
is  an  abundance  of  fertile  land  to  be  had  within  half  a 
mile.  With  the  growth  of  the  School,  such  a tract  will 
be  a necessity.  There  are  thousands  of  boys  within  the 
vicinage  of  the  Institute  who  need  just  such  training, 
need  it  as  much  as  boys  anywhere.  But  here  again  the 
Malay  indisposition  to  labor  comes  in.  These  people  are 
utterly  unable  to  understand  why  Americans  always  want 
to  work.  They  must  be  taught  the  necessity  and  the 
dignity  of  honest  toil. 

“The  curriculum  of  the  Institute  is  an  excellent  one, 


292 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


having  been  formed  after  the  model  of  our  best  Indian 
schools.  It  assumes  that  students  should  not  be  less 
than  ten  years  of  age ; there  is  a middle  department  and 
a high  school,  with  electives  in  drawing,  botany,  natural 
history,  book-keeping  and  shorthand.  The  students  were 
fine-looking  boys,  and  with  the  white  suits  and  red  sashes, 
which  they  wore  at  the  reception  given  to  us,  they  pre- 
sented a striking  appearance.” 

The  need  of  a hospital  building  at  Dumaguete  is  so 
imperative  that  the  Mission  Board  allowed  Dr.  Langheim 
to  use  $1,200  granted  by  the  Government  for  the  super- 
intendency of  the  medical  work  in  the  district,  for  the 
purpose  of  erecting  a small  hospital.  The  medical  work 
of  Oriental  Negros,  with  a population  of  150,000,  has 
only  three  physicians : the  army  surgeon,  a Filipino  doc- 
tor and  an  American  missionary.  Dr.  Langheim’s  work 
in  a single  year  consisted  of  1,635  treatments,  including 
210  surgical  cases.  In  November,  1903,  the  Institute 
and  Hospital  buildings  were  dedicated.  The  exercises 
were  interesting,  with  tall  palm  trees  waving  above  the 
visitors  who  had  come  from  the  United  States,  England, 
Ireland,  Spain,  China,  Canada,  Russia,  as  well  as  other 
provinces  in  the  Philippines.  The  decorations  of  palm 
leaves  and  Japanese  lanterns  were  pretty.  The  Governor 
of  the  province  delivered  an  address,  and  the  presidente 
of  the  city  also  spoke,  closing  his  address  with  these 
wrords : 

“Let  us  do  all  we  can  to  help  these  people  who  have 
come  over  here  to  do  this  great  work.” 

One  of  the  leading  gentlemen  of  the  province  made  a 
good  speech  in  Visayan.  The  exercises  were  in  English, 
Spanish  and  Visayan.  The  occasion  was  peculiarly  in- 


EVEN  A COLLEGE  YELL 


293 


teresting,  too,  because  from  that  school  were  selected  the 
two  boys  of  all  those  In  that  province  who  were  best  fitted 
to  go  to  the  United  States  for  an  education. 

The  Rev.  Lewis  B.  Hillis,  of  Manila,  gives  these  im- 
pressions of  the  Institute  after  a close  study  of  the  school 
and  its  instructions  from  the  first: 

“One  of  the  suggestive  features  of  the  Institute  is  the 
universality  of  boy  nature.  They  cut  and  mark  the 
desks,  draw  pictures  of  the  teacher  and  of  each  other, 
hide  one  another’s  things,  whip  tops,  spike  tops,  play 
baseball,  football,  march  in  civic  processions,  wear  a red 
ribbon  which  stands  for  ‘Silliman,’  have  a college  yell  and 
a cheer  leader,  mass  together  and  make  life  uneasy  for 
the  Chinaman  who  dares  to  allow  one  of  them  to  pay  a 
few  cents  more  for  an  article  than  the  man  before  paid 
for  it ; swim,  play  truant  when  they  think  they  will  not 
be  missed,  and  frequently  have  a severe  attack  of  sickness 
when  they  have  not  their  lessons.  It  is  a peculiar  char- 
acteristic of  the  Visavan  that  he  prefers  to  bat  flies  or 
kick  the  football  to  playing  a regular  game.  Whether 
or  not  this  will  continue  to  be  the  case,  remains  to  be 
seen. 

“The  democracy  among  the  students  is  another  inter- 
esting feature.  Formerly  when  boj's  went  to  the  Insti- 
tute they  had  servants  to  carry  their  luggage  and  to  take 
care  of  their  clothes.  It  was  considered  undignified,  in 
fact  disgraceful,  to  do  any  manual  labor.  The  majority 
of  the  students  are  sons  of  wealthy  parents,  but  there 
are  a few  who  are  working  their  way  through.  Now 
they  have  a standing  in  the  School  which  accords  with  the 
real  worth  of  each  one.  Often  a promising  man  is  sent 
from  some  other  station  in  the  hope  that  he  may  make  a 


294 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


good  preacher.  One  was  sent  from  Cebu  a few  months 
ago.  He  was  under  the  impression  that  when  he  became 
a Protestant  he  had  finished  all  that  there  was  for 
him  to  do,  and  that  others  would  provide  for  him. 
When  the  instructors  asked  him  to  work,  it  hurt  his 
feelings,  and  he  almost  organized  a mutiny  among 
the  graciados : 

“ ‘We  did  not  enter  the  Protestant  religion  to  become 
servants,’  he  said,  and  he  started  back  to  Cebu. 

“Another  man,  a teacher,  about  twenty-eight,  who  had 
been  accustomed  all  his  life  to  being  considered  far  above 
labor,  was  anxious  to  go  to  the  School,  but  he  had  no 
money.  He  was  offered  a chance  to  clean  the  floors,  be- 
cause that  was  the  only  thing  to  be  done  at  the  time. 
The  teachers  knew  that  he  would  object,  and  were  sorry 
to  discourage  him,  but  they  were  practically  forced  into 
making  the  offer.  He  accepted  and  did  it  very  well.  In 
a few  weeks  there  was  some  translating  to  be  done,  and 
he  was  asked  to  do  it.  It  would  take  but  little  of  his 
time  and  be  far  better  for  the  School  than  the  other 
work. 

“ ‘Yes ; I will  do  it,  but  it  does  not  take  much  time ; I 
can  clean  the  floors,  too.’  Some  of  the  boys  support 
themselves:  One  has  just  arrived  from  Iloilo.  Another 
works  as  clerk  in  the  afternoon  and  evening  in  a store. 
One  has  a wife  who  runs  his  salt  works  while  he  attends 
school.  One  is  a silversmith.  Most  of  them  are  sons  of 
the  hacienderos — large  planters — but  occasionally  there 
is  one  who  cannot  pay  his  tuition. 

“What  has  the  School  accomplished?  It  has  attracted 
the  talented  pupils.  One  self-taught,  so  far  as  the  teach- 
ers can  learn,  painted  the  building  on  a contract,  but 


DR.  SILLIMAN’S  PERSONAL  INTEREST  295 


stranger  still,  when  they  wished  for  a picture  of  Wash- 
ington, he  brought  in  his  own  painting,  which  would 
attract  favorable  comment  as  the  work  of  an  untaught 
schoolboy  anywhere.  I thought  that  they  must  be  poor 
judges  of  painting  when  they  spoke  so  highly  about  it, 
but  I changed  my  mind  when  I saw  the  picture.  A sec- 
retary of  the  insurrection,  who  is  easily  one  of  the  best 
Visayan  scholars  around  there,  is  a student.  A boy’s 
paper  in  Virgil  was  almost  perfect.  One  young  man 
from  a family  that  opposed  his  attending  the  school 
came  in  the  morning  and  arranged  his  teaching  so  that 
he  could  do  it  in  the  afternoon.  A short  time  ago  he 
passed  the  examination  in  Dumaguete  with  the  highest 
mark  given  at  that  examination.  He  now  receives  a 
salary  of  $60  a month,  and  is  stationed  nine  miles  from 
Dumaguete.  But  it  took  the  combined  influence  of  his 
family,  which  weighed  little,  the  long  distance,  which 
was  considered  little,  and  the  teachers  at  Dumaguete  to 
prevent  his  arranging  his  work  to  teach  one-half  the  day 
and  ride  in  for  School  the  other  half.  A school  that 
attracts  that  kind  of  material  is  not  made  in  vain.  The 
Constabulary,  the  Educational  Department,  the  mer- 
chants and  men  in  the  offices  who  had  clerical  work  to 
do,  place  great  temptations  in  the  way  of  the  boys,  but 
there  are  rarely  more  than  half  a dozen  who  leave  the 
School  in  a year  unless  it  be  from  sickness  or  poverty. 
They  like  it.  And  they  are  learning  to  work  in 
the  printing  plant  and  at  other  things  around  the  build- 
ing.” 

Dr.  Silliman  is  deeply  interested  in  this  school  for  the 
Filipinos,  which  he  desires  to  follow  Hampton  and  Tuske- 
gee  Institutes  in  Virginia  and  Alabama.  Whatever  men 


296 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


and  means  can  accomplish  will  be  done  to  insure  its  suc- 
cess. The  trades  to  he  taught  in  the  Institute  are  car- 
pentry and  cabinet-making,  printing,  farming  and  gar- 
dening, masonry  and  bricklaying,  and  blacksmithing. 
Dr.  Silliman  will  erect  the  buildings  that  will  be  needed 
for  the  teaching  of  these  and  other  trades  and  equip  them 
with  machinery  and  tools.  He  is  also  now  erecting  two 
dwellings  for  the  missionaries  who  give  their  time  to  the 
Institute,  and  two  for  the  missionary  members  of  the 
station.  Dr.  Silliman  feels  that  the  help  which  they 
will  give  to  the  Institute  will  be  a fair  offset  for  their 
rent. 

The  industrial  department  of  the  Institute  will  be  de- 
veloped gradually  as  circumstances  justify.  Land  has 
been  secured  for  gardening  near  the  Institute  grounds, 
and  a farm  at  a little  distance  for  the  teaching  and  prac- 
tice of  agriculture.  It  was  fitting  that  Dr.  Silliman 
should  receive  from  the  Board  of  Missions  “its  hearty 
appreciation  of  his  intelligent,  sympathetic  and  gener- 
ous plans  for  the  Institute,”  and  a pledge  from  the 
Board  that  it  would  “unite  with  him  in  every  reason- 
able effort  for  the  uplifting  of  this  important  institu- 
tion.” 

With  the  American  Government  sending  Filipino 
youth  to  the  United  States  to  study  in  the  schools  and 
colleges  of  this  country,  and  Dr.  Silliman  providing  for 
others  in  their  own  land,  there  will  be  an  opportunity  in 
four  or  five  years  to  see  which  method  produces  the  better 
result.  The  generous  gifts  of  Dr.  Silliman  for  the  prac- 
tical education  of  hundreds  of  young  Filipinos  have  not 
been  equalled  by  any  other  American,  and  the  Govern- 
ment officials  are  very  hearty  in  their  approval  of  the 


AN  IDEAL  PLAN  OUTLINED 


297 


Institute,  and  justly  so,  for  his  motive  is  worthy  of  all 
praise:  “To  give  the  students  such  training,  physical, 
mental  and  moral,  as  will  best  qualify  them  to  help  the 
inhabitants  of  the  islands  to  improve  the  conditions  of 
their  civic  and  social  life.” 


CHAPTER  XXIX 


METHODIST  EPISCOPAL  CHURCH 


Old-Time  Revival  in  New  Possessions — A Church 
with  a Flexible  Economy — Printing  Press  an  Active 
Missionary  Agent — Modest  Church  Building  for 
Americans — The  Original  Protestant  — Methodism 
Taught  to  Nicholas  Zamora. 

BISHOP  THOBURN  of  India,  in  his  report  to  the 
General  Conference  of  the  Methodist  Episcopal 
Church  in  1900,  made  the  following  reference  to  his 
visit  to  Manila,  and  his  ordaining  the  first  Protestant 
Filipino  preacher.  He  said:  “Our  most  noted  advance 
during  the  quadrennium  just  closed  has  been  in  the  new 
American  possessions  in  the  Far  East.  By  the  action  of 
the  last  General  Conference  these  rich  and  beautiful 
islands  had  been  included  in  the  Malaysia  Conference, 
and  accordingly,  as  soon  as  they  had  been  formally 
ceded  to  the  United  States,  Bishop  Andrews  and  Dr. 
Leonard,  acting  in  behalf  of  the  Missionary  Society, 
cabled  me  a request  to  proceed  to  Manila  and  carefully 
examine  the  situation.  For  more  than  a dozen  years  God 
had  been  turning  my  thoughts  in  that  direction,  and  it 
was  with  a thankful  heart  that  I set  out  upon  that 
voyage.  My  stay  in  Manila  was  brief ; but  I secured  a 
theatre  and  began  preaching,  and  before  leaving  made 
arrangements  for  permanent  religious  services.  I also 


THE  FIRST  FILIPINO  PREACHER  299 


took  steps  to  open  a place  both  of  religious  meetings  and 
for  public  resort  for  our  soldiers. 

“During  the  year  this  provisional  arrangement,  al- 
though attended  with  many  difficulties,  received  God’s 
blessing,  and  when  I returned  two  months  ago,  I found 
not  only  a good  work  among  the  soldiers,  but  over  eighty 
Filipino  probationers  in  our  Church,  with  four  or  five 
well-attended  preaching  places  among  the  natives  of  the 
city  and  suburbs.  Owing  to  ill-health,  I had  brought 
Dr.  F.  W.  Warne  with  me  from  Calcutta,  not  only  to  do 
the  preaching,  but  to  take  my  place  in  everything  except 
my  purely  official  duties.  God  blessed  this  good  brother’s 
labors,  a revival  began,  and,  although  a delegate  to  the 
General  Conference,  he  cheerfully  remained  behind  to 
carry  on  the  work  for  a few  weeks,  while  I proceeded  on 
my  way.  A recent  letter  from  Brother  Warne  states 
that  we  now  have  an  American  Church  in  Manila  with 
fifty  members,  a Filipino  Church  with  two  hundred  mem- 
bers, and  weekly  services  attended  by  about  six  hundred 
Filipino  adherents.  Four  ladies  represent  the  Women’s 
Foreign  Missionary  Society,  and  active  work  has  been 
commenced  among  the  Filipino  women.  We  have  also  a 
small  but  hopeful  band  of  Chinese  Christians,  and  in  the 
early  future  hope  to  have  a vigorous  Chinese  work  among 
the  large  Chinese  populations  of  Manila.  A few  hours 
before  leaving  Manila  I had  the  pleasure  of  ordaining 
the  first  Protestant  Filipino  preacher  ever  admitted  to 
the  Christian  ministry.  In  order  to  provide  for  this  ex- 
traordinary emergency  I cabled  to  Bishop  Vincent, 
through  Dr.  Leonard,  to  have  the  brother  admitted  on 
trial  by  the  South  Kansas  Conference,  elected  to  deacon’s 
orders  under  the  Missionary  Rule,  and  transferred  to  the 


300 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


Malaysia  Mission  Conference.  A prompt  response  ena- 
bled me  to  place  an  intelligent  pastor  over  the  Filipino 
converts,  and  thereby  greatly  strengthen  the  brave  com- 
pany of  those  who  had  come  out  from  the  house  of 
priestly  bondage.  In  that  hour  of  need  I felt  devoutly 
thankful  that  I served  a Church  which  had  a flexible 
economy.” 

The  work  of  the  Methodist  Church  has  been  carried 
on  so  far  entirely  on  the  Island  of  Luzon.  Bishop  Tho- 
burn  went  there  early  in  the  days  of  American  occupation 
and  placed  the  work  under  the  care  of  a presiding  elder 
whose  district  was  a part  of  the  Malaysia  Annual  Con- 
ference, of  which  Singapore  and  Penang  are  the  chief 
cities.  The  force  of  the  denomination  in  1903  consisted 
of  ten  ordained  Americans,  eight  of  whom  were  married, 
and  two  ordained  natives,  the  more  prominent  of  whom, 
Nicholas  Zamora,  was  one  of  the  earliest  converts  to 
Protestantism. 

The  presiding  elder  of  the  District,  who  is  also  the 
pastor  of  the  American  Methodist  Church  in  Manila,  the 
Rev.  Homer  C.  Stuntz,  D.D.,  is  the  president  of  the  ex- 
ecutive committee  of  the  Evangelical  Union,  and  is  there- 
fore closely  in  touch  with  the  work  of  other  denominations 
throughout  the  islands.  By  an  understanding  when  the 
religious  work  was  begun  in  Manila,  the  Methodists,  in 
addition  to  their  work  in  Manila,  have  entire  charge  of 
the  island  north  of  Manila,  except  the  three  Uocano  prov- 
inces, and  centers  have  been  established  at  Malahon,  a 
suburb  of  Manila,  and  at  Malolos,  Baliuag,  San  Fer- 
nando and  Dagupan,  along  the  line  of  railroad,  with 
sub-stations  extending  east  and  west  from  the  railway 
line.  These  central  stations  are  fixed  according  to  the 


Rev.  Homer  C.  Stcntz,  D.D. 


INDEPENDENT  AND  PROGRESSIVE  301 


language  of  the  various  provinces,  so  that,  so  far  as 
possible,  the  missionary  will  have  to  learn  only  Spanish 
and  one  Filipino  language;  in  some  provinces  four  or 
five,  and  in  one  at  least  eight  dialects  are  spoken.  A 
printing  press  in  Manila  turns  out  thousands  of  pages  of 
tracts  and  other  religious  literature  in  several  languages 
which  are  used  by  the  missionaries. 

Dr.  Stuntz  believes  that  the  Methodist  Church  in  the 
Philippines  should  aim  to  be  both  self-supporting  and 
self-propagating.  In  addition  to  the  American  mission- 
aries and  the  ordained  natives,  there  are  sixty-two  licensed 
exhorters  and  local  preachers,  of  whom  only  seven  re- 
ceive one  penny  of  foreign  money.  The  men  work  at  their 
trades  during  the  day  and  preach  nights  and  Sundays. 
The  result  is  that  more  than  five  thousand  Filipinos  in 
this  part  of  the  island  had  joined  the  Methodist  Church 
as  full  members  or  probationers  in  1903,  and  the  pre- 
siding elder  was  confident  from  the  reports  received  that 
between  two  thousand  and  twenty-five  hundred  new  mem- 
bers would  be  reported  at  the  spring  conference.  In  one 
province  alone,  Pampanga,  the  Church  has  a thousand 
members. 

The  Methodist  church  building  for  Americans  in 
Manila,  like  those  of  the  other  two  denominations,  is  a 
temporary  structure,  and  seats  comfortably  a morning 
congregation  of  one  hundred  and  seventy-five  and  an 
evening  congregation  of  perhaps  one  hundred  or  more. 
Dr.  Stuntz  has  the  largest  Protestant  congregation  in 
the  city,  but  he  does  not  feel  justified,  notwithstanding 
this  fact,  in  building  a great  edifice.  His  plans  for  a 
permanent  structure  contemplate  an  audience  room  seat- 
ing five  or  six  hundred  people,  with  an  adjoining  room 


302 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


holding  two  or  three  hundred  more,  the  entire  structure  to 
cost  fifty  thousand  dollars.  His  reasons  for  this  modest 
plan  were  given  to  the  writer  as  follows: 

“Manila  will  never  have  a large  American  population 
— perhaps  not  larger  than  it  has  at  present,  six  or  seven 
thousand ; of  these  a large  number  will  be  unmarried  men 
who  come  here  not  to  make  Manila  their  home,  but  to 
stay  in  the  Government  service  for  a brief  period  and 
then  return  to  the  States.  Unfortunately  for  the  islands, 
the  class  of  men  attracted  to  them  is  not  in  the  main  a 
church-going  class;  what  is  still  more  unfortunate  is  that 
many  who  have  been  church  members,  and  both  regular 
attendants  and  faithful  workers  at  home,  find  that  the 
climate,  or  other  reasons  which  satisfy  them,  keep  them 
from  church  attendance.  It  seems  unwise,  therefore,  for 
our  denomination  at  least,  to  build  a great  cathedral  or 
a needlessly  expensive  edifice  for  the  Americans  when 
there  is  no  likelihood  of  our  needing  it  except  on  state 
occasions.  It  seems  better  policy  to  spend  the  money  in 
building  a large  church  for  the  natives,  and  this  wre  are 
planning  to  do.” 

The  Finance  Committee  of  the  Philippine  Conference 
will  erect  a fine  building  in  Manila  for  its  native  work 
in  the  near  future.  The  proposed  structure  will  cost 
$50,000  and  will  be  one  of  the  most  attractive  pieces 
of  church  architecture  in  the  Orient.  The  edifice  will 
be  known  as  the  Knox  Memorial  Church,  and  is  to 
be  at  Calle  Cervantes  and  Calle  Lopez  de  Vega  in  the 
Trozo  district,  on  the  site  of  the  old  Oriental  Theatre. 
The  Committee  has  secured  from  the  Government  a forty- 
year  lease  on  the  ground,  which  is  part  of  the  San  Lazaro 
estate. 


A NEW  CHURCH  ARCHITECTURE  303 


The  building  will  combine  Eastern  and  Western  archi- 
tecture in  a way  that  will  modify  and  improve  both  for 
the  purpose  at  hand.  The  intention  of  C.  B.  Ripley,  the 
architect,  is  to  improve  upon  the  types  of  church  archi- 
tecture found  in  the  Orient,  rather  than  to  discard  them. 
The  building  is  projected  with  three  things  in  view.  The 
erection  of  a church  with  a large  seating  capacity  was 
perhaps  the  primary  purpose.  The  Methodist  Church, 
by  whom  the  edifice  is  to  be  used,  is  ultra-evangelical ; 
to  reach  large  numbers  of  people  is  a fundamental  motto 
in  its  policy.  The  building  to  be  erected  will  seat  com- 
fortably fifteen  hundred  persons.  It  will  be  equipped 
with  a continuous  gallery,  cooled  and  ventilated  by  means 
of  a succession  of  windows  of  modern  stained  glass  from 
the  United  States. 

Permanence  is  another  object  sought  by  the  architect. 
The  building  will  be  of  steel,  designed  to  stand  the  rigors 
of  the  climate.  The  interstices  will  be  laid  with  cement 
flush  with  the  steel.  By  a modification  of  the  Oriental 
type  it  is  hoped  to  evade  the  massy  and  gloomy  aspect 
of  the  average  church  building  of  the  East.  There  will 
be  six  entrances.  The  main  front  will  lie  along  Calle 
Cervantes,  with  two  towers  facing  that  street;  the  sub- 
sidiary front  will  lie  along  Calle  Lopez  de  Vega.  Besides 
the  audience  room  the  new  church  will  contain  a choir 
room  and  a pastor’s  study  in  the  rear  of  the  pulpit  plat- 
form. The  choir  platform  will  accommodate  fifty 
singers,  and  the  building  will  be  supplied  with  a pipe 
organ. 

Dr.  Stuntz  is  desirous  of  opening  mission  work  in 
some  of  the  southern  islands  which  either  are  not  fully 
worked  by  the  denominations  at  present  there,  or  are 


304- 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


being  held  by  one  or  another  denomination  that  intends 
to  have  workers  there  soon ; but  as  president  of  the  execu- 
tive committee  of  the  Evangelical  Union,  and  fairly  in 
harmony  with  its  principles,  he  will  take  no  step  toward 
that  end  at  present.  While  believing  heartily  in  comity 
he  feels  that  the  theory  may  be  carried  too  far,  and  that 
Providential  calls  are  to  be  followed  rather  than  arbitrary 
decisions  regarding  division  of  territory. 

In  speaking  of  Aglipay,  Dr.  Stuntz  related  the  inter- 
esting incident  concerning  the  formation  of  the  Anti- 
Romanist  party  which  is  given  in  the  chapter  on  the 
Aglipay  Movement.  When  asked  why  Aglipay  left  the 
Church  of  Rome,  Dr.  Stuntz  answered  that  he  was  made 
a peace-offering  to  the  American  Nation.  When  word 
reached  the  Philippines  that  the  American  troops  were 
coming,  the  friars  sent  Aglipay  to  the  insurgent  forces, 
pleading  with  them  to  make  common  cause  with  the  Span- 
iards in  opposing  the  Americans.  They  offered  the  Fili- 
pinos autonomy  and  anything  else  that  they  chose  to 
ask.  Aglipay,  then  a priest  in  good  standing,  was  the 
messenger.  Of  course,  he  failed.  The  insurgents  did 
not  believe  what  the  friars  said,  and  flouted  all  such 
promises.  When  the  American  forces  arrived,  and  the 
commanders  heard  of  this  attempt  on  the  part  of  Aglipay 
to  form  an  alliance  against  them,  the  friars  promptly 
disavowed  Aglipay  and  his  mission,  and  turned  him  out 
of  the  priesthood ; then  he  went  over  to  Aguinaldo  and 
was  made  Vicar-General  of  the  insurrection  movement, 
using  the  same  force  then  that  he  had  previously  mani- 
fested in  the  Roman  Church,  and  that  he  has  shown  in 
a marked  measure  since  his  present  movement  started. 

Dr.  Stuntz  went  to  the  Philippines  after  a successful 


THE  ZAMORA  FAMILY 


305 


missionary  experience  in  India,  and  is  qualified  by  train- 
ing and  by  study  of  Eastern  problems,  both  social  and 
religious,  to  take  up  the  new  work  with  enthusiasm  tem- 
pered by  knowledge.  He  took  a leading  part  in  the  dis- 
cussions concerning  the  opium  traffic  in  the  Philippines, 
and  no  man  showed  a more  thorough  knowledge  of  the 
questions  at  issue.  To  him  more  than  to  any  other  man, 
perhaps,  is  due  the  result  which  has  given  satisfaction 
everywhere — the  tabling  of  the  proposed  opium  bill  con- 
cession, the  appointment  of  a committee  to  study  the 
subject,  and  its  excellent  report.  He  has  recently  pub- 
lished “The  Philippines  and  the  Far  East,”  one  of  the 
best  books  on  the  subject. 

After  one  of  the  native  sendees  in  the  Rizal  theatre 
I was  introduced  to  Paulino  Zamora,  who  was  said  to  be 
the  “Original  Protestant,”  having  received  baptism  at 
the  hands  of  the  Rev.  James  B.  Rodgers,  of  the  Presby- 
terian Board  of  Foreign  Missions.  Although  Mr. 
Zamora  and  his  family  were  probationers  in  the  Metho- 
dist Church,  they  were  baptized,  in  accordance  with  their 
desire,  by  Mr.  Rodgers,  because  there  was  at  that  time 
no  ordained  Methodist  missionary  in  the  Philippines. 
The  father,  two  sons  and  a daughter  united  with  the 
Presbyterian  Church,  while  Nicholas,  the  eldest  son,  re- 
mained a Methodist  and  was  ordained  by  Bishop  Thoburn 
as  the  first  Protestant  native  minister  in  the  Philippines. 
Bishop  Frank  W.  Warne,  who  had  the  privilege  of 
dedicating  as  a Methodist  church  the  first  Protestant 
church  building  in  the  Philippines,  has  told  the  story  of 
the  life  of  Zamora,  to  which  I am  indebted.  Paulino 
Zamora  became  anxious  to  secure  a Protestant  Bible 
about  twenty  years  ago,  but  there  was  none  to  be  had 


306 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


in  the  Philippines.  He  finally  succeeded  in  getting  part 
of  one  from  the  captain  of  a Spanish  ship  and  began  to 
study  it.  When  the  British  and  Foreign  Bible  Society 
sent  two  agents  to  the  Philippines  in  1889— one  of  whom 
died  and  the  other  was  banished — Zamora  received  a com- 
plete Bible  from  them,  with  some  instruction.  He  knew 
that  he  could  not  keep  the  Bible  in  his  home  in  Manila 
in  safety,  and  therefore,  in  order  to  study  it,  he  moved  to 
the  province  of  Bulacan,  and  there  continued  his  studies. 
Unwilling  to  keep  his  treasure  hidden  after  he  had  studied 
it  for  some  time,  he  invited  neighbors  to  study  the  Book 
with  him.  The  friars  found  that  he  had  a Protestant 
Bible ; one  evening  his  house  was  surrounded,  he  was 
arrested,  the  Book  was  found  and  its  owner  was  taken 
to  Manila  and  cast  into  Bilibid  prison.  Bishop  Warne 
says  that  he  tried  to  enter  one  of  those  unventilated  dun- 
geons in  a Spanish  prison  near  Manila,  but  found  the 
odor  so  strong  that  he  soon  retreated;  yet  Spanish  prison- 
ers were  compelled  to  exist  for  years  in  those  vile  dun- 
geons. 

After  a “trial,”  Zamora  was  banished  to  an  island  in 
the  Mediterranean  Sea.  He  had  a brother  who  was  a 
professor  in  the  principal  Roman  Catholic  college  in 
Manila.  This  brother  took  Nicholas  and  put  him  into 
the  college  and  dedicated  him  to  the  Roman  Catholic 
priesthood.  In  May,  1898,  three  events  occurred:  Paul- 
ino Zamora  returned  to  Manila ; Nicholas  was  graduated 
with  honors  from  the  Roman  Catholic  College,  and  the 
American  flag  floated  over  Manila. 

During  his  college  course,  Nicholas  had  been  anxious 
and  curious  to  see  the  Book  for  which  his  father  had 
been  banished.  When  they  came  together  in  Manila, 


Nicholas  Zamora 


APPEALING  TO  HIS  SON 


307 


the  father  taught  his  son  the  Protestant  Bible.  In  July, 
1899,  the  Rev.  Arthur  W.  Prautch,  a Methodist  local 
preacher,  who  had  an  institute  in  Manila  for  American 
soldiers,  announced  that  the  following  Sunday  there 
would  be  a Protestant  service  in  the  Spanish  language  in 
the  Soldiers’  Institute.  Mr.  Prautch  secured  an  in- 
terpreter at  $4  (Mexican)  an  hour,  and  twelve  persons 
were  present.  They  continued  thus  to  meet  for  three 
Sundays,  and  on  the  fourth  the  audience  had  grown  to  an 
attendance  of  thirty ; but  the  interpreter  did  not  appear. 
Paulino  Zamora  and  Nicholas  were  in  the  audience.  Mr. 
Prautch,  not  knowing  Spanish,  said  to  Paulino: 

“Will  you  speak?”  The  old  man  stood  up,  and 
though  he  had  stood  alone  for  religious  liberty  in  the 
Philippine  Islands  for  years,  and  though  he  had  suffered 
banishment  and  the  loss  of  property,  he  could  not  speak 
in  public.  When  the  trembling  father  failed  to  speak 
to  the  people  he  turned  to  Nicholas  and  said: 

“Nicholas,  you  try.”  Nicholas  sprang  quickly  to  his 
feet,  opened  his  Bible,  read  with  enthusiasm  the  passage 
his  father  had  taught  him  and  told  the  people  he  had 
found  peace  without  the  intercession  of  the  priests.  He 
showed  that  all  priestly  intercession  was  unnecessary, 
the  way  of  life  being  made  plain  in  the  Word  of  God, 
and  denounced  in  a vigorous  manner  the  friars  for  the 
way  they  had  taught  the  Filipino  people. 

“Nicholas,  will  you  speak  again  next  Sunday?”  said 
Mr.  Prautch  as  the  young  man  sat  down.  Nicholas  re- 
plied: “It  will  give  me  pleasure.” 

Mr.  Prautch  announced  that  on  the  following  Sunday 
Nicholas  Zamora  would  preach  in  the  Institute  in  the 
Spanish  language.  The  news  spread  rapidly  over  the 


308 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


city,  and  the  next  Sunday  there  was  a crowd.  Nicholas 
continued  several  Sundays,  and  the  crowd  increased, 
and  in  a few  months  he  was  preaching  in  seven  different 
centers  to  good  audiences,  and  was  one  of  the  most  widely 
known,  best  loved  and  most  hated  men  in  Manila. 

Bishops  Thoburn  and  Warne  found  some  hundreds  of 
people  who  had  become  Protestants,  but  there  was  no 
ordained  minister  of  their  mission  in  the  Philippine  Is- 
lands to  administer  the  sacraments.  A quarterly  con- 
ference was  organized,  made  up  of  Methodist  mission- 
aries and  laymen  from  America,  and  the  wisdom  of 
ordaining  Nicholas  Zamora  was  carefully  considered.  It 
was  conceded  that  he  was  a good  man,  educated,  married, 
converted,  eloquent,  knowing  his  Bible,  and  abundantly 
qualified  to  preach.  It  was  objected  that  he  did  not 
know  Methodism,  and  that,  therefore,  it  would  be  absurd 
to  ordain  him  as  a Methodist  preacher.  “I  am  going 
to  remain  in  Manila  for  a month,”  said  Bishop  Warne, 
“and  if  that  is  the  only  objection  I will  teach  him  Meth- 
odism,” and  with  that  promise  he  was  recommended  for 
ordination.  Zamora’s  aged  father  sat  in  the  audience 
when  his  son  was  ordained,  and  when  the  service  was  over 
the  old  man  rushed  forward,  threw  his  arms  around 
Bishop  Thoburn  and  hugged  him  and  wept  on  his  neck, 
and  tremblingly  quoted  in  the  Spanish  language  the 
words  of  Simeon : “Lord,  now  lettest  Thou  Thy  servant 
depart  in  peace,  according  to  Thy  Word,  for  mine  eyes 
have  seen  Thy  salvation.”  Under  the  leadership  of 
young  Zamora  the  first  Protestant  Church  in  the  Philip- 
pine Islands  was  built  and  largely  paid  for  by  the  Fil- 
ipino Protestant  Christians,  and  in  August,  1900,  it  was 
dedicated. 


Two  Filipino  Evangelists 


MAKING  THE  WAY  MORE  PLAIN  309 


Bishop  Warne  says  in  speaking  of  the  development  of 
the  young  evangelist:  “I  promised  to  teach  Nicholas 

Methodism.  I do  not  know  how  much  he  learned  about 
Methodism,  but  I learned  much  about  Romanism.  We 
studied  the  doctrines  and  rules  of  our  Church,  and  he 
was  greatly  interested.  I said  to  him : 

“ ‘You  must  have  Sunday-schools  and  teach  the  Bible 
to  the  children.’  With  knitted  brow  and  darkened  coun- 
tenance he  said : 

“ ‘Do  you  mean  to  tell  me  that  I must  teach  the  Bible 
to  little  children?  I thought  I had  gone  a great  way  in 
teaching  it  to  adults.’ 

“I  then  told  him  the  facts  about  Sunday-schools  in 
Protestant  countries ; and  as  the  idea  of  thus  educating 
the  children  dawned  upon  him,  his  countenance  changed, 
brightened  into  a smile,  indicating  intelligent  under- 
standing, and,  retaining  his  Roman  Catholic  phraseology, 
he  sprang  up,  caught  my  hands  and  said : 

“ ‘Father  Warne,  when  you  come  back  you  will  find 
our  children  in  Sunday-schools.’  I told  him  to  teach  the 
people  to  have  f amity  worship,  and  I went  through  the 
same  experience  of  seeing  his  brow  knit  and  his  counte- 
nance darken,  and  he  asked: 

“ ‘Do  you  mean  to  say  that  I must  teach  laymen  to 
read  the  Bible  in  their  homes  and  explain  it  to  their 
children?  Have  I not  gone  a long  way  in  consenting  to 
teach  it  to  the  laity?’  I then  told  him  the  story  of  family 
worship  and  Bible  study  in  Protestant  homes,  and  again 
his  countenance  brightened  and  he  caught  me  again  by 
the  hands  and  said : 

“ ‘Father  Wame,  when  you  come  back  we  will  have 
family  worship  among  our  people.’  ” They  now  have 


310 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


in  Manila  Sunday-schools  and  family  worship,  and 
prayer  meetings,  class  meetings,  Bible-schools,  open-air 
preaching,  Epworth  Leagues,  quarterly  and  district  con- 
ferences and  a fully  organized  Methodist  Church. 

One  evening  I had  a pleasant  interview  with  the  young 
evangelist,  Mr.  Rodgers  acting  as  interpreter.  He  is  a 
fine-looking  man,  about  twenty-eight  years  old,  with  a 
wife  and  three  children,  and  is  a loyal  representative  of 
the  Methodist  Episcopal  Church.  Friends  in  New  York 
who  have  known  of  the  work  which  Mr.  Zamora  has 
done  have  thought  that  he  might  be  able  to  lead  an 
evangelistic  work,  but  those  who  know  him  best  feel  that 
he  is  doing  his  best  work  as  an  evangelist  under  the 
direction  of  the  missionaries,  who  are  responsible  to  the 
home  churches  for  the  funds  sent  for  the  conversion  of 
the  Filipinos.  He  is  growing  in  power  as  a preacher 
and  in  his  appreciation  of  the  deeper  realities  of  the 
Protestant  faith. 


CHAPTER  XXX 


PROTESTANT  EPISCOPAL  CHURCH 


Bishop  Brent  and  Bishop  Brooks — A Ton  of  Soap 
Sent  from  the  Homeland — Gambling  Proceeds  Re- 
fused— Excellent  Work  Carried  on  by  Women— Safe- 
guarding the  Health  of  Missionaries — Influence  in 
Public  Affairs. 

THEY  call  St.  Stephen’s  Church  ‘The  Five-Cent 
Church,’  ” said  Bishop  Brent  with  a smile,  in 
speaking  about  the  contempt  of  the  Filipinos  for  the 
modest  structures  in  which  the  three  Protestant  congre- 
gations worship.  St.  Stephen’s  Church  will  seat  perhaps 
two  hundred  and  fifty  persons,  and  the  others  are  nearly, 
if  not  quite,  as  commodious.  It  is  probable,  therefore, 
that  in  the  opinion  of  the  natives,  the  monetary  value  of 
the  sacred  edifices  occupied  by  the  Methodists  and  Pres- 
byterians is  not  much  greater  than  that  which  they  place 
upon  the  Pro-Cathedral,  as  St.  Stephen’s  really  is. 

About  the  last  man  in  Manila  that  one  would  take  for 
a bishop  is  the  Rev.  Charles  H.  Brent,  D.D.,  consecrated 
Bishop  of  the  Missionary  District  of  the  Philippine 
Islands  in  December,  1901.  The  reason  for  this  is  that 
he  is  so  busy  that  neither  he,  nor  those  with  whom  he 
comes  in  contact,  have  time  to  think  of  the  dignity  which 
is  supposed  to  center  about  the  office  which  he  honors. 
Unconsciously  one  is  reminded  of  Bishop  Brooks,  both 
because  of  the  simplicity  of  the  two  men  and  their  inter- 


312 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


est  in  things  that  concern  the  life  that  now  is.  Intensely 
spiritual  in  his  preaching,  his  writings,  and  his  conversa- 
tion, the  preacher  impresses  one  both  by  his  manifest 
sincerity  and  his  humaneness. 

Bishop  Brent  was  especially  fortunate  in  his  journey 
to  the  Orient,  having  had  the  privilege  of  going  with 
Governor  Taft  and  the  Commission  appointed  to  confer 
with  the  Vatican  on  the  disposition  of  the  friars’  lands. 
Soon  after  reaching  Manila  in  August,  1902,  on  looking 
over  the  field  he  decided  that  the  first  thing  was  to  secure 
a building  site  for  a cathedral,  not  far  from  the  Luneta. 
Here  three  and  one-half  acres  have  been  purchased,  and 
it  was  expected  to  lay  the  corner-stone  early  last  fall. 
The  Cathedral,  exclusive  of  the  organ  and  other  furnish- 
ings, is  to  cost  one  hundred  thousand  dollars,  and  the 
organ  is  to  be  one  of  the  best  that  the  Bishop  can  procure. 
When  this  structure  is  dedicated  it  will  not  be  possible 
for  natives  to  speak  of  the  “Five-Cent  Church.” 

The  Bishop  went,  not  long  ago,  into  the  central  por- 
tion of  Northern  Luzon,  scores  of  miles  from  civilization 
and  hundreds  of  miles  from  the  regular  lines  of  communi- 
cation. Here  he  found  thousands  of  people  whose  out- 
ward appearance  suggested  need  of  a washing,  as  much 
as  he  knew  their  inward  condition  needed  regeneration. 
As  soon  as  he  reached  mailing  facilities  he  wrote  a soap 
firm  in  America  telling  what  he  had  seen,  and  asking  for 
a ton  of  soap.  As  quickly  as  two  steamers  and  express 
trains  could  cross  the  ocean  and  the  continent  twice,  the 
Bishop  had  an  order  for  the  soap,  which  the  Government 
transports  brought  him  later.  He  wants  the  outward 
cleansing  as  well  as  the  inward  change  of  hearts  and 
habits. 


REFUSING  MONEY  WON  BY  RACING  313 


At  the  same  time  the  Bishop  makes  his  impressions 
felt  in  the  refusal  of  contributions  for  his  work,  as  well 
as  in  the  acceptance  of  gifts  for  this  purpose.  From  a 
representative  of  the  Jockey  Club  Association,  I learned 
that  a check  for  five  hundred  dollars,  sent  to  the  Bishop 
to  aid  him  in  the  hospital  work  in  which  he  is  engaged, 
was  returned  by  him,  because  he  did  not  believe  in 
gambling.  Badly  as  he  needed  the  money,  he  believed 
that  it  was  important  to  place  before  the  business  men  of 
Manila  an  ideal  higher  than  that  of  gambling.  He  did 
not  denounce  their  racing  horses,  he  did  not  criticise  their 
motives  in  sending  a portion  of  their  surplus  to  charities ; 
he  simply  expressed  the  feeling  that  he  could  not  accept 
the  money  obtained  in  the  manner  described. 

“I  suppose  that  if  the  money  had  been  made  at  a 
church  fair,  the  Bishop  would  have  taken  it,”  said  the 
aggrieved  lover  of  fast  horses. 

“Not  if  I knew  it,”  replied  the  Bishop  with  a smile, 
when  asked  by  the  writer  what  he  would  have  done  under 
the  circumstances  mentioned. 

Chaplain  Pierce  began  mission  services  in  the  Cuartel 
Espana  in  the  Walled  City  in  1899,  and  the  work  of  this 
clergyman  has  developed  into  the  present  parish.  Soon 
after  the  Bishop’s  consecration  he  sent  his  chaplain,  the 
Rev.  R.  H.  Talbot,  to  join  the  other  missionaries  under 
his  jurisdiction.  The  present  building  was  erected  by 
Mr.  Talbot,  and  a Settlement  for  natives  planned.  In 
an  interview  lasting  an  hour,  it  was  difficult  to  get  the 
Bishop  to  talk  about  his  own  work  or  that  of  the  parish. 
He  was  constantly  giving  incidents  of  work  carried  on 
by  others  which  appeal  to  him  very  strongly.  For  in- 
stance : 


314 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


At  Vigan,  in  one  of  the  northern  provinces,  the  wife 
of  Judge  Wislizenus  saw  the  great  need  of  the  native 
people  about  her.  Instead  of  succumbing  to  the  pressure 
of  circumstances,  she  took  the  situation  in  hand  and  mas- 
tered the  circumstances.  Within  two  weeks  she  had 
gathered  the  wealthy  Filipinos  about  her,  arranged  for 
a dispensary,  secured  twelve  hundred  dollars  (Mexican), 
and  got  further  contributions  aggregating  a hundred 
dollars  a month.  Her  dispensary  was  organized  and  the 
medical  men  of  the  place  contribute  their  services.  What 
many  another  woman  would  have  thought  appalling,  she 
found  to  be  an  opportunity  for  usefulness. 

Mrs.  Kelly,  the  wTife  of  a miner  who  staked  out  claims 
in  Benguet,  recognized  similar  needs  in  her  district ; and 
in  addition  to  the  physical,  she  added  mental  care,  estab- 
lishing a school  and  carrying  it  on  at  first  gratuitously, 
but  so  efficiently  that  the  Bureau  of  Education  has  made 
her  a teacher,  while  the  Board  of  Health  gives  aid 
through  the  medical  work.  Bishop  Brent  is  seemingly 
more  proud  of  the  work  of  these  two  representative 
American  women  than  he  would  be  if  either  of  them  had 
endowed  his  cathedral. 

The  distinctive  work  of  the  Episcopal  Church  in  the 
Philippines  is  that  little  attention,  relatively,  is  given 
to  the  natives,  except  in  the  way  of  bettering  their  physi- 
cal condition.  The  Bishop,  without  impugning  the 
motives  of  others,  does  not  think  that  it  is  his  province 
to  draw  the  Filipinos  away  from  the  Catholic  Church. 
If  they  come  to  him  voluntarily  as  Presbyterians  or 
Methodists  might  do,  he  will,  of  course,  receive  them,  as 
he  would  Presbyterians  or  Methodists ; but  he  considers 
it  as  unfortunate  to  have  proselytes  made  from  a Catholic 


THE  CATHOLIC  CHURCH  DERELICT  315 


Church  as  from  Protestant  bodies.  He  is  insistent  on 
this  position,  because  he  finds  so  great  a need  among  the 
natives  who  have  not  yet  been  touched  by  the  Catholic 
Church,  in  spite  of  its  being  in  the  islands  three  cen- 
turies. He  finds  that  this  Church  has  abandoned  the 
field  in  many  places,  and  he  has  found  not  a few  in  the 
poorer  districts  to  which  he  feels  that  his  Church  has  a 
call,  unless  the  field  is  preoccupied.  In  one  town  he  has 
purchased  the  buildings  used  for  the  church  and  school 
by  the  Romanists,  who  sold  the  building  to  him,  knowing 
that  they  were  to  be  occupied  for  Protestant  work.  The 
native  work  needs  especially  homes  and  orphanages,  and 
these  the  Bishop  will  start  wherever  the  funds  and  workers 
warrant  the  expenditure.  A work  among  the  Chinese  has 
also  been  started,  and  a man  who  has  worked  in  Amoy 
for  six  years  is  to  have  charge  of  it. 

Outside  of  Manila  there  are  several  workers.  The 
Rev.  Irving  Spencer  is  stationed  at  Iloilo,  and  goes  to  all 
the  islands  south  of  that  point.  A chaplain  formerly 
carried  on  work  in  Cavite,  across  the  bay  from  Manila, 
and  a missionary  was  stationed  at  Caloocan,  a few  miles 
north  of  Manila,  for  a few  months;  as  soon  as  the  work 
is  properly  manned  in  Manila  these  missions  will  be  re- 
sumed. In  Benguet,  a hundred  and  fifty  miles  north  of 
Manila,  there  are  two  forms  of  work.  A church  has 
been  built  in  Baguio  on  a hill  overlooking  the  town. 
Baguio  is  to  be  the  summer  capital  of  the  Philippines, 
and  already  a large  number  of  Americans  are  there  in 
the  summer.  The  Rev.  J.  H.  Staunton  is  in  charge, 
and  is  also  beginning  to  reach  the  Igorrotes,  a native 
tribe  living  in  that  mountainous  province.  Mrs.  Staun- 
ton was  a trained  nurse,  and  aids  her  husband  matei’ially 


316 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


in  his  -work.  Mr.  Staunton  also  has  a mission  among  the 
Filipinos  in  Trinidad,  a few  miles  north  of  Baguio,  and 
ministers  to  probably  a hundred  people  there.  Farther 
north  still,  the  Rev.  W.  C.  Clapp  is  stationed  at  Bontoc, 
among  the  headhunters,  the  long-haired  natives,  among 
whom  no  trace  whatever  of  Christianity  has  been  found. 

In  his  first  report  to  the  people  at  home,  a year  after 
his  consecration  as  bishop  of  this  jurisdiction  and  five 
months  after  reaching  Manila,  Bishop  Brent  dwelt  upon 
four  subjects  which  will  interest  the  officials  of  other  de- 
nominations laboring  in  the  Philippines,  who  are  inter- 
ested in  the  general  theme  of  Missions.  Having  read  the 
report,  I have  secured  permission  to  make  a few  extracts 
from  it. 

The  four  topics,  treated  in  their  order,  are  these:  (1) 
Work  among  Americans  and  other  English-speaking 
residents  of  the  islands.  (2)  Work  among  natives.  (3) 
Safeguarding  the  health  of  the  missionaries;  and  (4) 
Financial  matters.  On  these  points  the  Bishop  says: 

“(1)  From  every  point  of  view  the  most  important 
section  of  our  work  at  present,  and  it  will  be  so  for  some 
time  to  come,  is  among  Americans  and  other  English- 
speaking  people.  Manila  with  its  growing  population 
of  citizens,  employed  in  Government  offices  or  pursuing 
some  business  vocation,  ought  eventually  to  shoulder  the 
current  expenses  of  the  local  church.  No  one  class  of 
citizens  has  shown  a more  unwavering  interest  in  all  that 
pertains  to  our  work  than  Army  officers  and  their  fam- 
ilies ; and  whatever  success  there  has  been  in  our  endeavor 
to  carry  on  a mission  in  Cavite  has  been  due  to  the 
efforts  of  Navy  officers  and  men. 

“One  man  could  easily  spend  his  entire  time  to  good 


Bishop  Charj.es  G.  Brent 


A PERPLEXING  PROBLEM 


317 


advantage  in  ministering  to  the  different  Army  posts,  in 
but  few  of  which  there  is  a chaplain.  Scattered  about 
all  through  the  islands  are  individuals  isolated  from 
white  people,  and  groups  of  Americans  with  no  religious 
privileges  whatever — unless  the  Roman  Catholic  cere- 
monies can  be  counted  as  such ; but  even  members  of  that 
communion  (Americans)  have  told  me  that  they  find  it 
difficult  to  worship  under  the  conditions  which  exist  in 
the  majority  of  their  churches.  It  is  my  purpose  to  try 
to  establish  lay  services,  at  any  rate  wherever  there  are 
Americans,  by  urging  them  to  avail  themselves  of  that 
priestly  privilege  which  belongs  to  every  Christian  and 
to  accept  the  responsibility  which  flows  therefrom. 

“Wherever  I go  there  is  a sincere  expression  of  appre- 
ciation that  opportunity  is  once  more  afforded  of  attend- 
ing public  worship,  though  no  one  seems  to  think  it  is 
his  duty  to  take  a position  of  leadership  and  gather  his 
fellows  from  week  to  week  to  join  in  those  services  of  the 
Church  which  a layman  can  conduct.  It  is  an  interesting 
fact  that  in  several  communities  where  I have  been  I 
have  found  that  Roman  Catholic  natives,  neglected 
through  a long  stretch  of  time  by  their  Church  and 
priesthood,  have  had  their  weekly  services  with  a layman 
as  leader ; this  in  a church  where  the  rights  of  the  priest- 
hood are  exaggerated,  whereas  in  our  communion,  as  well 
as  among  the  various  Protestant  bodies  in  which  the 
priesthood  of  the  laity  is  theoretically  exalted  as  a pivo- 
tal tenet,  no  similar  sense  of  responsibility  seems  to  exist. 

“(2)  The  question  of  native  work  is  an  extremely  dif- 
ficult and  perplexing  one.  I cannot  feel  it  to  be  the  duty 
of  the  Church  which  I represent  to  build  up  a constitu- 
ency by  deliberately  drawing  upon  the  Roman  Church. 


318 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


It  is  here  that  I find  myself  different  from  the  Protestant 
churches  at  work  in  the  islands,  and  for  this  reason,  if 
for  no  other,  I am  unable  to  enter  into  any  formal  re- 
lationship with  them.  The  Evangelical  Union  has  ex- 
tended us  a cordial  invitation  to  membership  in  their  body, 
but  we  are  unanimous  in  feeling  that  we  cannot  subscribe 
to  some  of  the  principles  implied  or  set  forth  explicitly. 
This,  however,  will  in  no  wise  prevent  friendly  relations 
with  our  Protestant  neighbors,  or  the  observance  of 
Christian  considerateness  where  division  of  territory  is 
concerned.  Though  I cannot  say  that  I shall  never 
place  missionaries  at  points  where  missionaries  of  other 
communions  have  preceded,  I shall  do  so  only  in  cases 
where  my  conception  of  duty  leaves  me  no  choice. 

“The  question  is  frequently  asked  at  home:  ‘Is  there 

any  movement  away  from  the  Roman  Catholic  Church?’ 
The  reply  is,  that  among  the  great  masses  of  the  people 
there  is  not  enough  intelligence  to  distinguish  between  a 
higher  and  a lower  form  of  Christianity.  Wherever  in 
the  past  the  Roman  Church  has  proved  to  be  an  oppressor 
instead  of  a spiritual  mother,  there  has  been  revolt,  and 
will  be  again.  The  cause  of  this,  however,  lies  not  in  the 
doctrinal  teaching  or  the  ceremonial  which  seems  to  be 
adapted  to  the  temperament  of  the  natives,  but  because 
the  fundamental  instinct  that  calls  for  justice  and  fair 
play  has  been  outraged  and  calls  for  strong  protest.  In 
this  I find  the  explanation  of  Aglipay’s  success  in  gain- 
ing a large  following. 

“(3)  Though  we  have  secured  a rest  house  in  Baguio, 
where  our  workers  can  recuperate  from  time  to  time,  I 
am  told  by  physicians  and  others  that  in  a seven  years’ 
term  of  service  there  should  be  a more  complete  change 


THE  MANILA  MISSION  EXPENSIVE  319 


than  can  be  found  in  the  archipelago.  The  Presbyterian 
Board  provides  for  two  trips  to  Japan,  each  of  three 
months’  duration,  during  this  period,  half  the  traveling 
expenses  being  paid.  I would  advocate  a similar  ar- 
rangement if  our  term  of  service  cannot  be  reduced  to 
five  years.  Here  again  it  is  a matter  of  economy  that 
some  such  provision  should  be  made.  In  the  long  run  it 
will  mean  continuity  of  service,  to  say  nothing  of  the 
saving  of  human  life  and  money. 

“(1)  As  I tried  to  impress  on  the  Church  before  leav- 
ing America,  this  is  bound  to  be  an  expensive  mission. 
Rents  in  Manila  are  absurdly  high,  and  the  food  supply 
is  proportionately  dear.  It  costs  me  about  one-third  more 
to  live  here  than  it  did  in  Boston.  In  Iloilo  matters  are 
not  much  better.  In  provincial  towns  the  rents  are  lower, 
but  the  cost  of  living  is  high,  partly  on  account  of  the 
tariff,  partly  because  of  the  difficulty  of  getting  trans- 
portation for  goods  now  that  the  commissary  is  no  longer 
available  for  civilians.  Proper  housing  and  food  are  not 
a luxury,  but  a necessity,  if  health  is  to  be  retained  in 
tropical  life.” 

An  interesting  feature  of  Bishop  Brent’s  work,  pecu- 
liar to  Manila,  is  a Settlement  in  the  Tondo  District. 
More  properly,  perhaps,  it  is  the  headquarters  for  the 
Women’s  Work  of  the  Mission  in  the  Philippine  Islands. 
A house  formerly  occupied  by  a Spaniard,  at  297  Calle 
Magdalena,  was  peculiarly  adapted  to  the  work  of  a 
Church  Settlement  House,  and  has  been  hired  for  a term 
of  years.  The  head  worker  of  the  house  is  Miss  Margaret 
Waterman,  formerly  of  New  York,  and  associated  with 
her  are  several  other  workers,  including  a kindergartner 
and  a trained  nurse. 


320 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


One  evening  a party  was  driven  to  the  Settlement 
House  and  was  shown  over  the  building,  containing  not 
only  commodious  living  and  dining  rooms,  but  also  a 
large  kindergarten  room,  a dispensary  and  a neat  little 
chapel  where  communion  is  celebrated.  An  American 
physician  and  his  wife  are  giving  all  of  their  time  to  the 
work,  and  several  other  physicians,  native  and  American, 
are  placing  a part  of  their  time  at  the  disposal  of  the 
workers.  The  House  is  a center  of  influence  and  useful- 
ness in  a very  needy  district.  There  are  two  clubs,  one 
of  girls  and  one  of  boys,  which  meet  three  days  every 
week.  The  kindergarten  of  the  Holy  Child  has  been 
opened,  and  the  dispensary  work  is  extending  the  influ- 
ence of  the  Great  Physician  throughout  the  district. 

It  was  a great  delight  to  visit  this  charming  home  and 
to  see  the  noble  spirit  which  actuates  the  workers,  and  to 
hear  from  others  also  of  the  splendid  work  which  they 
are  accomplishing.  The  House  is  open  for  hospitality 
to  others,  especially  for  the  neighborhood  children. 
Three  native  school-teachers  were  among  recent  dinner 
guests,  and  kept  saying  to  their  entertainers : 

“You  must  be  very  happy  in  this  beautiful  home.” 
One  aim  of  the  workers  is  to  interest  American  women 
in  the  Philippines,  not  already  engaged  in  philanthropic 
or  religious  work,  in  their  little  brown  sisters,  and  an 
urgent  appeal  has  been  issued  to  them,  suggesting  that 
those  who  can  should  undertake  some  form  of  service  for 
them. 

Bishop  Brent’s  work,  personal  and  official,  is  far-reach- 
ing. His  influence  in  public  affairs  is  perhaps  excelled 
by  no  other  American  civilian  in  the  islands,  certainly 
by  no  other  clergyman ; and  this  is  not  because  he  agrees 


Rev.  Teodora  Basconcillo 


STUDYING  THE  OPIUM  QUESTION  321 


with  every  act  of  the  Military  or  Civil  Governments.  In 
the  recent  discussion  regarding  the  Opium  bill,  he  came 
out  strongly  against  the  position  taken  by  Governor 
Taft  and  the  Civil  Commission,  but  when  a committee 
was  appointed  to  study  this  question  in  other  countries 
in  the  East,  the  Governor  appointed  the  Bishop  one  of 
the  members. 


CHAPTER  XXXI 


CHRISTIAN  ASSOCIATION  WORK 


Substitute  for  the  Canteen — Satisfying  the  Philip- 
pine Thirst — Erecting  Suitable  Buildings  at  Army 
Posts  — Material  Benefit  for  Soldiers  — Spiritual 
Blessings  Conferred — Pressing  Needs  of  the  Asso- 
ciations— Miss  Gould’s  Beautiful  Service. 

“TF  your  time  in  the  Philippines  is  limited,  and  you 
A must  miss  some  things,”  said  the  wife  of  an  Army 
officer,  “do  not  fail  to  see  the  work  of  the  Young  Men’s 
Christian  Association.  The  secretaries  in  charge  of  that 
work  are  doing  so  much  good  that  they  deserve  all  the 
help  that  can  be  given  them.  Now  that  the  canteen  has 
been  taken  away  from  the  soldiers,  the  need  for  the  work 
which  the  Association  does  is  greater  than  ever  before. 
There  is  so  much  idle  time  at  the  disposal  of  the  soldiers 
that  whatever  can  be  done  for  them  by  Christian  people 
should  be  done.  The  value  of  the  work  of  the  chaplains, 
in  regiments  where  they  are  stationed,  cannot  be  overesti- 
mated; but  a regiment  is  often  divided  into  so  many 
detachments  and  sent  to  so  many  various  posts,  that  it 
is  practically  impossible  for  a chaplain  to  minister  to 
all  of  the  men.  It  is  the  men  in  these  out-of-the-way 
places  who  are  really  in  the  greatest  danger,  and  there 
the  work  of  the  Association  appeals  most  directly.” 

As  we  traveled  throughout  the  islands  and  met  the  sec- 


SEVERAL  AMERICAN  SECRETARIES  323 


retaries  in  Manila  and  other  centers,  we  found  these 
statements  to  be  true.  The  Association  has  from  the  out- 
set been  fortunate  in  the  men  whom  it  has  sent  to  the 
Philippines.  Not  alone  the  Army  officers,  but  many  of 
the  enlisted  men  with  whom  the  writer  conversed,  were 
loud  in  praise  of  those  who  were  here  in  the  early  days, 
and  equally  kind  words  were  heard  of  the  men  who  now 
hold  the  islands  for  the  Association.  Many  different 
men  have  been  here  for  various  periods  since  1898.  The 
present  force  consists  of  the  general  secretary,  whose 
headquarters  are  in  Manila ; a secretary  at  Cavite  and 
Olongapo;  and  another  for  the  South  Philippines,  sta- 
tioned at  Iloilo,  where  he  is  assisted  by  the  secretary  who 
devotes  his  time  to  that  city,  making  a total  of  from  six 
to  ten  American  secretaries  in  addition  to  native  helpers 
at  work  in  the  archipelago. 

The  International  Committee  in  New  York  received 
permission  from  the  War  Department  in  1898  to  send 
secretaries  with  the  Army  to  Cuba,  Porto  Rico,  and  the 
Philippines.  An  Army  and  Navy  Department  was  cre- 
ated to  conduct  this  new  branch  of  work,  and  W.  B. 
Millar  was  made  its  secretary.  The  work  was  known  as 
the  Christian  Commission  during  the  summer  of  1898 
and  until  the  Treaty  of  Paris  was  made.  When  the 
transports  went  through  the  Suez  Canal  on  their  long 
journey  to  the  East,  or  sailed  from  San  Francisco 
directly  to  Manila,  the  majority  carried  Association  sec- 
retaries. Many  regiments  had  no  chaplain ; when  a 
transport  carried  both  a chaplain  and  a secretary  their 
time  was  well  employed.  When  the  Ninth  Infantry  was 
sent  to  China  in  1900  at  the  Boxer  outbreak,  a secretary 
of  the  Association  accompanied  it ; he  established  reading 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


324> 

rooms,  issued  supplies  and  held  religious  services  at  Tien 
Tsin  and  Pekin,  opening  a dozen  Army  Association  tents 
and  buildings  in  the  latter  city. 

Early  in  1900  five  additional  secretaries  were  sent  to 
the  Philippines,  and  in  1901  there  were  eleven  secretaries 
in  the  Philippines,  and  the  work  was  extended  from 
Manila  to  Iloilo,  Cebu,  Cavite,  Dagupan  and  Aparri. 
An  Association  tent  at  an  Army  post  means  a place 
where  soldiers  can  read  or  write  letters,  and  many  thou- 
sands of  letters  to  loved  ones  at  home  are  written  on  As- 
sociation paper.  In  Manila  a lunch  counter,  where  ice- 
cream, soda-water,  etc.,  may  be  had,  is  a favorite  resort 
of  the  soldiers  visiting  the  reading-room  or  passing  along 
Calle  Real  in  the  Walled  City,  from  one  point  to  another 
within  the  post.  Many  a saloon  is  passed  because  the 
fearful  “Philippine  thirst”  has  been  satisfied  with  re- 
freshing drinks  or  a plate  of  cream  at  the  Association 
counter.  The  work  in  the  provinces  has  been  largely 
confined  to  soldiers ; in  Manila  educational  classes,  re- 
ligious meetings,  the  lunch  counter  and  the  soda  fountain 
are  open  to  civilians  also. 

Buildings  have  been  provided  in  Manila,  Cavite  and 
Iloilo,  and  services  have  been  held  also  in  hospitals, 
prisons,  outposts  and  camps.  Two  of  the  secretaries 
have  spent  the  larger  portion  of  their  time  in  traveling. 
Through  the  courtesy  of  the  Quartermaster’s  and  Post 
Office  Departments,  it  has  been  possible  to  send  supplies 
to  many  men  in  isolated  places,  a total  of  six  hundred 
and  six  points  in  the  archipelago  having  been  reached 
during  the  year.  The  Association  has  made  every  effort 
during  the  past  years  to  help  our  soldiers,  not  only  by 
supplying  material  necessities,  but,  in  a more  permanent 


Association  Buildings 


MEETING  THE  NEW  CONDITIONS  325 


manner,  by  instilling  in  them  a desire  to  live  after  the 
pattern  set  by  Jesus  Christ. 

A short  time  ago  the  Army  was  scattered  over  a very 
large  area,  detachments  being  at  five  or  six  hundred 
posts.  It  is  understood  that  this  number  will  be  reduced 
to  about  twent}",  the  Filipino  Scouts  and  Constabulary 
taking  the  place  of  a large  part  of  the  American  military 
force  in  keeping  peace,  putting  down  uprisings  in  the 
mountains,  and  suppressing  ladrones.  With  character- 
istic enterprise,  the  Association  is  changing  its  form  of 
work  to  meet  the  new  conditions.  The  proposed  Army 
Posts,  with  one  exception,  are  away  from  cities,  and  the 
Association,  which  now  has  permission  from  Congress  to 
erect  buildings  on  military  reservations,  will  take  advan- 
tage of  that  opportunity. 

It  is  practically  impossible  at  any  post  to  secure  rooms 
for  Association  work  in  a building  occupied  in  part  by 
the  Army,  and  buildings  will  be  erected  at  a cost  of  from 
five  to  six  hundred  dollars.  In  some  places  a building 
will  cost  a thousand  dollars.  At  Olongapo,  on  Subig  Bay, 
sixty  miles  north  of  Manila,  where  five  hundred  marines 
are  stationed,  one  has  been  begun  and  will  soon  be  ready 
for  use.  The  lumber  comes  from  Oregon  and  the  roof 
will  be  of  nipa.  The  space,  forty  by  fifty  feet,  is  divided 
into  one  large  and  two  small  rooms.  The  Association 
hopes  to  build  ten  similar  buildings.  The  next  building 
to  be  erected  will  be  at  Camp  Jossman,  on  the  Island  of 
Guimaras,  near  Iloilo,  where  two  thousand  soldiers  are 
stationed.  Major  E.  W.  Halford,  President  Harrison’s 
private  secretary,  for  several  years  in  Manila,  has  taken 
a deep  and  practical  interest  in  the  proposed  building  in 
the  capital  of  the  Philippines. 


326 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


The  concentration  of  troops  and  the  possession  of  an 
Association  building  at  each  post  will  greatly  increase 
the  value  of  the  organization  to  the  Christian  men  in  the 
Army,  and  will  also  enable  the  Association  to  supply 
luncheon  and  refreshment  rooms,  which  will  facilitate  the 
solution  of  the  canteen  question. 

The  headquartex-s  of  the  Association  work  in  Manila 
is  fully  equipped  with  reading-room,  library,  game-room, 
bath  and  dormitories,  and  has  a literary  society,  with 
lectures,  social  and  Gospel  meetings  and  Bible  classes. 
Meetings  are  also  held  in  the  hospital  and  in  Bilibid 
prison.  Disti’ibution  of  reading  matter  is  made  from 
the  headquarters  to  all  parts  of  the  archipelago.  This 
amounted  last  year  to  75,000  books,  magazines  and  pa- 
pers, 750,000  pieces  of  stationery,  5,000  sacred  song 
books,  4,000  Testaments,  500  games  and  large  quantities 
of  blotters,  calendars,  ink-wells,  penholders,  pens,  etc. 
Thei’e  are  400  men  in  the  Army  Temperance  Union,  200 
men  in  the  Soldiers’  Prayer  and  Bible  League,  and  the 
night  school  for  men  has  40  pupils.  At  least  1,000  men 
in  the  Army  are  corresponded  with  annually.  The  fol- 
lowing instances  of  material  benefit  received  by  soldiers 
were  giveix  the  writer  by  Secretary  Glunz,  the  general 
secretary  in  Manila : 

A discharged  soldier  of  limited  education  went  to  the 
night  school  in  Manila.  He  studied  two  terms,  took  the 
Civil  Service  examination  and  secured  an  appointment  in 
the  post  office. 

Another  discharged  soldier  obtained  a clerical  position 
in  the  Quartermaster’s  Department.  The  officer  in 
charge,  who  was  interested  in  the  young  man,  suggested 
to  him  that  he  had  better  qualify  himself  by  taking  a 


GRATEFUL  FOR  BENEFITS  RECEIVED  327 


course  in  the  Association  night  school.  He  did  so,  and 
is  improving  rapidly. 

A former  student  writes:  “It  affords  me  great  pleas- 
ure to  state  that  the  Spanish  and  stenographic  classes  of 
the  Young  Men’s  Christian  Association  educational  de- 
partment have  been  of  great  benefit  to  me.  These  evening 
classes  are  a boon  to  us  day  workers.” 

Another  says:  “I  can  in  no  better  way  show  my 

appreciation  of  the  many  benefits  I have  derived  from 
the  Young  Men’s  Christian  Association  night  school 
than  by  a continuance  of  the  studies  which  I have  been 
pursuing.” 

And  still  another  expresses  his  appreciation  of  the 
great  benefit  which  he  has  received  from  the  Spanish 
class,  saying:  “It  is  entirely  due  to  the  thorough 

method  of  your  instructor  that  I was  able  to  learn  the 
language.” 

The  following  estimates  of  the  importance  of  the  As- 
sociation work  in  the  Philippines  show'  what  Army  offi- 
cials think  of  it.  General  George  W.  Davis,  when  com- 
manding the  division  of  the  Philippines,  wrote: 

“I  have  great  pleasure  in  saying  that  the  work  and 
methods  of  the  Young  Men’s  Christian  Association 
among  Army  garrisons  is  in  every  way  commendable. 
The  influence  of  those  in  authority  in  this  movement  is 
in  every  way  good,  and  I shall  be  happy  to  see  the 
Young  Men’s  Christian  Association  established  in  suit- 
able rooms  in  every  military  barracks  in  the  Philippines.” 
General  S.  S.  Sumner  writes  from  Zamboanga,  the 
headquarters  of  the  Department  of  Mindanao: 

“Referring  to  our  conversation  regarding  the  erection 
of  buildings  at  military  posts  in  Mindanao  by  the  Young 


328 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


Men’s  Christian  Association,  I am  heartily  in  favor  of  it, 
and  will  be  glad  to  assign  a suitable  position  at  the  Mili- 
tary posts  of  Jolo,  Camp  Overton,  Malabang  and  Pantar 
for  the  erection  of  Association  buildings.  I know  from 
experience  that  your  Society  works  for  the  good  of  the 
Military  service,  and  particularly  in  these  far-away  and 
isolated  garrisons.” 

Francis  B.  Doherty,  an  Army  chaplain,  wrote  not  long 
ago  to  Mr.  Glunz,  from  Camp  Jossman: 

“I  take  this  occasion  to  thank  you  for  all  the  kindly 
co-operation  of  the  Army  and  Navy  Young  Men’s  Chris- 
tian Association,  the  officers  of  which  have  so  frequently 
and  generously  placed  at  my  disposal  the  means  of  min- 
istering to  the  well-being  of  the  men  here  at  this  camp. 
The  problem  of  interesting  and  instructing  soldiers  in 
these  islands  is  fraught  with  difficulties  little  realized  at 
home,  but  the  Army  and  Navy  Department  meets  the 
situation  with  tact  and  efficiency,  and  the  generous  zeal 
of  Secretary  Collins  and  Mr.  Blazer  has  won  the  grateful 
regard  of  all.  Your  new  building  to  be  erected  at  this 
post  will  be  of  inestimable  value  to  the  men,  and  you 
may  count  upon  me  for  cordial  co-operation.  I wish 
you  success  in  your  undertakings,  and  Godspeed.” 

Two  or  three  incidents  of  Association  work  in  the  early 
dajrs  may  not  be  without  interest : 

During  the  battle  of  Manila,  August  13,  1898,  the 
two  Association  secretaries  who  had  accompanied  the 
troops  from  San  Francisco  served  with  the  hospital  corps 
of  the  Thirteenth  Minnesota  Volunteers.  Jackson  was 
at  the  firing  line  and  assisted  a hospital  corps  man  in 
carrying  back  a wounded  captain.  He  was  seen  by  some 
of  the  men,  and  within  a short  time  the  incident  was 


PRAISE  FROM  ARMY  OFFICERS  329 


known  among  most  of  the  men  of  the  Army  of  Occupa- 
tion. From  that  time  the  secretaries  were  welcomed 
everywhere.  After  the  battle  of  Manila  the  two  secre- 
taries went  back  to  Camp  Dewey  to  visit  the  wounded 
men  in  the  hospital  there.  Our  troops  had  entered  the 
city.  As  only  a few  men  had  been  left  to  guard  the 
camp  that  night,  and  most  of  them  were  on  sick  report, 
the  secretaries  volunteered  to  do  guard  duty,  and  the 
commanding  officer  made  one  of  them  acting  corporal. 

Two  days  after  the  troops  entered  Manila  the  secre- 
taries waited  on  the  Commanding  General  of  that 
Brigade,  General  MacArthur.  There  was  a small  build- 
ing near  the  encampment,  which  the  secretaries  wanted 
for  an  Association  building.  They  laid  the  case  before 
the  General.  Turning  to  his  adjutant  he  said: 

“Colonel,  we  want  to  encourage  this  sort  of  thing. 
Look  into  this  matter  and  grant  these  young  men  the 
use  of  that  building  if  it  is  at  all  possible.”  The  secre- 
taries obtained  the  building. 

While  the  men  were  in  the  trenches  around  the  city, 
awaiting  reinforcements,  life  became  very  monotonous. 
One  day  the  secretaries  placed  a lot  of  reading  matter  in 
a caratella  and  went  out  to  the  lines.  They  were  received 
with  joy  everywhere. 

“Bully  for  you !”  “Say,  this  is  a Godsend !”  and  sim- 
ilar expressions  were  numerous.  They  also  distributed 
stationery.  One  man  was  handed  a couple  of  envelopes, 
each  containing  two  sheets  of  writing  paper.  He  looked 
at  them  longingly. 

“Say,  mister,”  he  said,  “I  ain’t  got  any  money.” 

“Oh,  that’s  all  right,”  replied  the  secretary,  “that’s 
Young  Men’s  Christian  Association  writing  paper.”  Be- 


330 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


fore  the  soldier  had  recovered  from  his  surprise  the  secre- 
tary had  passed  on. 

During  the  northern  advance,  and  when  men  were  be- 
ing stationed  at  points  outside  of  Manila,  many  men  who 
returned  to  the  city  on  leave  or  detail  would  drop  into 
the  Association  tent.  At  a meeting  during  this  time  a 
man  got  up  and  said : 

“Men,  this  is  the  first  chance  I’ve  had  to  be  in  a re- 
ligious meeting  for  sis  months.  I’ve  been  on  the  hike 
most  of  the  time.  We’ve  had  no  chaplain.  We’ve  lost 
track  of  the  Sundays.  I’d  almost  forgotten  there  was 
any  other  kind  of  a life.  But  since  I’ve  been  here,  I’ve 
been  reminded  of  home.  As  we  were  singing  that  last 
hymn,  one  we  used  to  sing  at  home,  it  seemed  to  me,  of  a 
sudden,  that  if  I should  look  up  I should  see  my  mother 
sitting  over  there.  Men,  I’ve  been  helped  to-night.  I’ve 
been  reminded  of  my  mother  and  her  words  to  me.  Men, 
I want  you  to  pray  for  me  that  I may  keep  remembering 
them  and  living  up  to  them.” 

John  M.  Dean,  the  secretary,  was  going  from  one  town 
to  another  in  Panay  to  hold  services  for  the  men.  He 
was  with  three  soldiers  who  were  returning  to  their  com- 
pany. Suddenly  they  ran  into  a band  of  insurgents. 
They  made  some  resistance,  but  were  outnumbered.  One 
man  escaped  and  one  was  wounded.  Dean  and  the  third 
were  made  prisoners  and  taken  before  the  leader  of  the 
band,  who,  for  some  reason,  set  them  at  liberty.  The 
man  who  escaped  failed  to  report  to  his  company.  Later 
his  body  was  found.  He  had  been  killed,  probably  by 
another  body  of  insurgents. 

The  needs  of  the  Association  would  seem  to  be  these: 

1.  A building  at  Manila  to  be  the  headquarters  for 


PRESSING  NEEDS 


331 


all  the  departments  of  the  Association  work — which  will 
probably  cost  $200,000. 

2.  Three  more  Army  secretaries. 

3.  Three  men  for  work  among  native  young  men. 

4.  Perhaps  most  important  of  all — an  able,  experi- 
enced and  successful  man  for  the  general  supervision  of 
all  the  work.  The  Episcopalians  have  Bishop  Brent,  the 
Methodists  have  Dr.  Stuntz,  the  Presbyterians  have  Dr. 
Rossiter,  and  it  would  seem  as  if  the  Association  would 
accomplish  its  greatest  mission  if  a man  corresponding  to 
these  were  sent  out  to  supervise  the  work. 

No  account  of  the  work  of  the  Association  in  the  Phil- 
ippines would  be  complete  which  did  not  recognize  the 
credit  due  to  Miss  Helen  M.  Gould,  of  New  York,  who 
has  made  this  work  possible.  In  addition  to  her  splendid 
financial  contributions  she  has  given  a personal  service 
to  the  soldiers  the  value  of  which  is  beyond  computation. 
Not  to  speak  of  the  Traveling  Libraries — in  one  of 
which  I found  “Life’s  Golden  Lamp,”  published  by  The 
New  York  Observer — which  go  to  the  Army  posts  and 
are  read  and  re-read  by  nearly  every  soldier  there,  Miss 
Gould  sends,  through  the  Association,  a large  number 
of  Testaments  and  Psalms,  in  each  of  which  she  writes  a 
verse  of  Scripture.  The  one  that  I have  in  hand  as  I 
write,  similar  to  those  which  are  in  the  pockets  of  hun- 
dreds of  soldiers,  bears  this  inscription : 

“Be  thou  an  example  of  the  believers,  in  word,  in  con- 
versation, in  charity,  in  spirit,  in  faith,  in  purity.” 
(1  Timothy  4:12.) 


CHAPTER  XXXII 


BIBLE  DISTRIBUTION 


Withholding  the  Scriptures — President  Roosevelt’s 
Ringing  Tribute  to  the  Word  of  God— Colporters 
Travel  on  Foot — Priests  Oppose  the  Circulation  of 
the  Bible — Effect  of  the  Aglipay  Movement. 

WHATEVER  the  friars  gave  or  withheld,  one  thing 
is  certain — they  were  not  willing  that  the  Fili- 
pinos should  read  the  Bible.  Aglipay,  the  organizer  of 
the  Filipino  Independent  Catholic  Church,  is  taking 
advantage  of  every  means  which  may  tend  to  loosen 
the  hold  of  the  Roman  Church  upon  the  natives.  His 
latest  step  is  to  distribute  an  address  of  President  Roose- 
velt commending  the  study  of  the  Bible.  Already  one 
hundred  thousand  copies  of  the  address  and  Aglipay’s  let- 
ter commending  it  have  been  circulated  in  Spanish,  Taga- 
log  and  Ilocano.  In  this  address,  which  was  given  before 
the  Long  Island  Bible  Society  at  Oyster  Bay  on  June 
11,  1901,  Mr.  Roosevelt  said: 

“One  of  the  highest  tributes  of  modern  times  to  the 
worth  of  the  Bible  as  an  educational  and  moral  influence 
of  incalculable  value  to  the  whole  community  came  from 
the  great  scientist  Huxley,  who  said : 

“ ‘Consider  the  great  historical  fact  that  for  three 
centuries  this  book  has  been  woven  into  the  life  of  all 
that  is  noblest  and  best  in  our  history,  and  that  it  has 


THE  MAGNA  CHARTA  OF  THE  POOR  333 


become  the  national  epic  of  our  race ; that  it  is  written  in 
the  noblest  and  purest  English,  and  abounds  in  exquisite 
beauties  of  mere  literary  form ; and  finally,  that  it  forbids 
the  veriest  hind,  who  never  left  his  village,  to  be  ignorant 
of  the  existence  of  other  countries  and  civilizations  and 
of  a great  past,  stretching  back  to  the  furthest  limits  of 
the  oldest  nations  in  the  world.  By  the  study  of  what 
other  book  could  children  be  so  much  humanized  and 
made  to  feel  that  each  figure  in  that  vast  historical  pro- 
cession fills,  like  themselves,  but  a momentary  space  in 
the  interval  between  the  eternities?  But  the  Bible  has 
been  the  Magna  Charta  of  the  poor  and  of  the  oppressed. 
Down  to  modern  times  no  State  has  had  a constitution 
in  which  the  interests  of  the  people  are  so  largely  taken 
into  account ; in  which  the  duties,  so  much  more  than  the 
privileges,  of  rulers  are  insisted  upon,  as  that  drawn  up 
for  Israel  in  Deuteronomy  and  Leviticus.  Nowhere  is 
the  fundamental  truth  that  the  welfare  of  the  State,  in 
the  long  run,  depends  upon  the  righteousness  of  the  citi- 
zen, so  strongly  laid  down.  The  Bible  is  the  most  demo- 
cratic book  in  the  world.’  ” 

The  President  closed  his  address  with  these  earnest 
words : 

“If  we  read  the  Bible  aright,  we  read  a book  which 
teaches  us  to  go  forth  and  do  the  work  of  the  Lord  in 
the  world  as  we  find  it ; to  try  to  make  things  better  in 
this  world,  even  if  only  a little  better,  because  we  have 
lived  in  it.  That  kind  of  work  can  be  done  only  by  the 
man  who  is  neither  a weakling  nor  a coward ; by  the  man 
who  in  the  fullest  sense  of  the  word  is  a true  Christian, 
like  Great  Heart,  Bun}7an’s  hero.  We  plead  for  a closer 
and  wider  and  deeper  study  of  the  Bible,  so  that  our 


334. 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


people  may  be  in  fact  as  well  as  in  theory  ‘doers  of  the 
Word  and  not  hearers  only.’  ” 

Before  American  occupation,  Bible  translation  and 
distribution  were  not  permitted  in  the  Philippines.  A 
converted  friar  named  Lallave,  who  had  spent  twelve 
years  in  the  Province  of  Pangasinan  with  a companion 
named  Castells,  received  from  the  British  and  Foreign 
Bible  Society  in  1888  permission  to  distribute  the  Bible 
in  the  Philippine  Islands.  With  a stock  of  Spanish 
Scriptures  and  the  Gospels  in  the  Pangasinan  language, 
these  two  men  entered  Manila.  Their  books  were  detained 
in  the  Customs  House,  and  within  a week  after  their  ar- 
rival Seiior  Lallave  died  of  poison  in  his  room  in  the  Hotel 
Oriente,  and  his  companion  became  seriously  ill,  but  did 
not  die.  Castells  was  imprisoned  and  then  banished  from 
the  islands.  It  could  not  be  proved  that  Lallave’s  death 
was  due  to  friar  intrigue,  but  that  was  the  general  belief 
and  is  to  this  time.  As  soon  as  American  occupation  had 
taken  place,  the  Society  sent  an  agent,  Mr.  Randall,  to 
distribute  portions  of  the  Scripture  in  the  native  tongues, 
and  he  was  first  succeeded  by  the  Rev.  H.  S.  Miller  and 
then  by  Percy  Graham,  Mr.  Miller  having  resigned  on 
account  of  illness  in  his  family. 

A large  consignment  of  New  Testaments  was  at  Singa- 
pore when  Manila  fell,  and  as  quickly  as  possible  was 
shipped  to  the  Philippines  and  distributed.  The  follow- 
ing year,  in  November,  1899,  the  American  Bible  Society 
established  a Philippine  agency  and  appointed  the  Rev. 
Jay  C.  Goodrich  agent.  The  Superintendent  of  Educa- 
tion stating  that  ninety-five  per  cent,  of  the  population 
of  the  Philippines  cannot  read  the  Spanish  language,  the 
importance  of  circulating  the  Gospel  in  the  various  dia- 


DIFFICULTIES  MET  AND  OVERCOME  335 


lects  of  the  people  was  apparent.  It  is  distributed  now 
in  the  Malayan  dialects,  Spanish,  Chinese,  English, 
Japanese,  French,  German  and  Russian,  with  a circula- 
tion of  272,000  volumes  in  four  years. 

From  Mr.  Goodrich  a statement  has  been  obtained  con- 
cerning the  general  work  of  the  Society,  and  the  difficul- 
ties which  its  agents  and  colporters  meet : 

“The  problem  confronting  us  when  we  began  our  work 
here  was  the  making  of  translations  of  the  Bible,  the  cre- 
ating of  an  interest  in  the  Word  of  Truth  and  its  cii’cu- 
lation  among  eight  million  people  who  knew  it  only  as  a 
book  they  had  never  seen.  Even  the  Roman  Version  was 
not  allowed  here.  In  some  cases  it  reached  a few,  and 
men  were  transported  and  condemned  to  penal  servitude 
for  no  other  offense  than  the  possession  of  the  Scriptures. 
It  is  not  difficult  to  conclude  that  there  were  few  copies 
of  God’s  Holy  Word  in  the  islands.  Our  way  seemed 
blocked  by  great  obstacles.  There  was  no  common  lan- 
guage. The  number  speaking  Spanish  was  singularly 
small  and  that  of  those  who  could  read  smaller.  Some 
translations  had  been  made,  but  they  were  never  satisfac- 
tory, and  the  task  of  correcting  was  extremely  difficult, 
for  the  reasons  that  the  dialects  were  not  fixed,  differing 
in  different  parts  of  the  same  province.  No  two  trans- 
lators could  agree  on  exact  renderings.  Dictionaries  and 
grammars  were  untrustworthy.  The  training  of  those 
to  be  employed  had  not  been  such  as  to  make  them  capable 
of  close  and  literal  work. 

“With  some  thirty  differing  dialects,  with  no  facilities 
for  travel,  with  bands  of  murderous  half-savage  ladrones 
threatening  torture  and  death  every  step  of  the  way, 
with  a people  ignorant,  fanatical  and  often  incited  to 


336 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


violence  by  the  agents  of  the  friars,  the  vicious  hangers- 
on  of  the  conventos,  so  that  our  colporters  have  been 
robbed  and  mobbed,  their  books  collected  and  burned, 
God  has  marvelously  opened  the  way,  created  hunger  for 
the  Truth  and  signally  blessed  our  seed  sowing.  The 
harvest  is  being  gathered  by  the  missions  in  hundreds  of 
cases.” 

“What  has  been  done  in  the  way  of  making  new  trans- 
lations of  the  Scriptures?” 

“Speaking  for  the  American  Bible  Society,  we  have 
translated  some  portions  of  the  Bible  into  five  of  the  more 
important  dialects.  In  two  of  these  the  New  Testament 
is  complete,  and  in  one  printed.  In  three  years  and  a 
few  months  over  two  hundred  thousand  copies  were  sold 
and  donated.  Our  colporters  have  journeyed  from  one 
end  of  the  islands  to  the  other,  traveling  many  thousands 
of  miles  on  foot.  The  story  of  the  work,  victories  and 
hardships  of  these  brave  men  would  fill  a volume.  In 
many  places  so  strongly  have  the  people  felt  that  they 
have  at  last  found  the  true  light,  that  they  have  pleaded 
for  our  men  to  stay  and  teach  them,  promising  to  erect 
churches  and  support  pastors.  In  several  towns  where 
such  conditions  were  reported,  organizations  have  been 
formed  by  the  missionaries  and  churches  now  stand  as 
monuments  to  these  pioneers. 

“Mr.  Milloy,  the  son  of  a Canadian'  Presbyterian  min- 
ister, has  acquired  the  Tagalog  language,  and  has  un- 
usual success  in  reaching  large  crowds  in  market  places 
and  at  cock-pits.  He  often  holds  his  audiences  for  hours 
as  he  reads  and  explains.  Only  the  other  day  I ran 
across  a Filipino  boy  who  had  purchased  the  Gospel  of 
John  from  him  months  before,  a hundred  miles  or  more 


Pbeparixo  Rice  ron  Market 


OPPOSITION  NOT  UNUSUAL 


337 


south  of  this  city.  In  looking  over  the  book  I found 
several  passages  marked,  and  among  them  was  John 
3:16:  ‘God  so  loved  the  world  that  he  gave  his  only 

begotten  Son  that  whosoever  believeth  in  Him  should  not 
perish,  but  have  everlasting  life.’  I asked  him  why  he 
had  marked  that.  He  answered : ‘In  order  that  I might 
learn  it.  All  the  world  should  know  that.’  ” 

“Do  your  men  meet  with  opposition?” 

“Mr.  Barnhart  and  Mr.  Matthews  have  just  made  a 
visit  to  the  city  of  Mauban  on  the  east  coast  of  Luzon. 
In  order  to  reach  the  place  they  were  obliged  to  traverse 
many  weary  miles  of  mountain  trail ; so  difficult  was  the 
way  that  for  three  days  after  arrival,  Mr.  Matthews  wras 
prostrated  with  fever,  and  upon  his  return  Mr.  Barnhart 
was  obliged  to  enter  the  hospital  and  is  there  at  this 
writing.  Night  after  night,  in  that  distant  town,  these 
heroic  boys,  at  the  risk  of  their  lives,  told  the  story  of 
Christ  to  hundreds  and  hundreds  of  people  as  they 
thronged  in  from  the  country  round  about.  They  were 
aided  by  stereopticon  views  to  fasten  their  lessons  in 
the  minds  of  the  people  and  left  the  printed  words  in  their 
hands  to  work  its  work  by  the  Spirit’s  power. 

“The  priest  tried  to  drive  them  from  the  place,  but 
the  people  were  eager  to  hear  and  buy  the  Word.  They 
offer  to  build  a church  and  pay  a pastor  if  one  can  be 
sent  them.  In  that  town  they  discovered  a Filipino  who 
had  years  ago  in  some  way  secured  a Bible.  The  priest 
upon  learning  that  he  had  it,  caused  his  arrest  and  exile. 
This  man’s  delight  upon  obtaining  a Testament  in  his 
own  language  cannot  be  described.  He  is  perfectly  fear- 
less and  will  teach  and  lead  his  neighbors  until  a mission- 
ary can  visit  the  place.” 


338 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


“How  does  the  Aglipay  movement  affect  your  work?” 
“One  of  the  most  far-reaching  victories  we  have  had 
is  the  winning  of  the  Aglipay  church,  which  is  strength- 
ening its  organization  and  daily  augmenting  its  num- 
bers. Aglipay  has  declared  for  an  open  Bible.  He  has 
written  us,  formally  stating  that  in  his  opinion  the  read- 
ing of  the  Bible  will  result  in  the  elevation  of  the  Fil- 
ipino people.  We  are  circulating  thousands  of  copies 
through  him  and  his  priests. 

“This  work  has  its  dark  side.  The  Bible  Society  has 
a grave  here  by  the  side  of  this  beautiful  bay,  and  the 
story  of  the  one  who  rests  there  seems  out  of  place  in  this 
busy  commercial  world.  He  comes  to  us  from  a volunteer 
regiment,  led  to  the  work  b}T  his  love  for  the  people.  For 
a year  he  worked  for  his  Master  and  the  people  he  loved. 
One  time  he  came  near  to  death  by  having  a raft  swept 
from  under  him  in  descending  a northern  river.  At 
another  he  nearly  died  with  fever  when  so  far  in  the  in- 
terior that  we  could  not  reach  him  in  weeks.  He  came 
into  the  office  one  night  in  the  highest  spirits,  expecting 
to  go  out  in  the  morning  with  new  stock.  At  three  o’clock 
he  was  stricken  with  the  dread  cholera,  and  at  six  that 
evening  he  was  with  Him  who  said:  ‘Greater  love  hath 

no  man  than  this.’  Eight  millions  of  people  to  have  the 
light.  Is  it  worth  the  cost?  We  think  it  is.” 

Some  incidents  from  the  experiences  of  the  colporters 
will  be  of  interest : 

“From  Dagupan  to  St.  Thomas  is  a distance  of  thirty 
miles,  and  we  were  obliged  to  do  it  on  foot  by  the  side  of 
an  ox  cart,  which  conveyed  our  books.  It  was  a long, 
hard  day’s  march,  beginning  at  half-past  seven  in  the 
morning  and  ending  at  nine  o’clock  at  night.  A little 


SLEEPING  IN  A MOVING  CART  339 


supper  would  have  tasted  good  about  that  time,  for  all 
we  had  to  eat  on  that  long  tramp  was  a small  slice  of 
bread  and  some  bananas;  but  there  was  no  help  for  it, 
and  we  retired  to  our  plank  beds  to  dream  of  the  supper 
we  should  have  had.  In  the  morning  we  had  an  interview 
with  the  Presidente  about  our  work ; at  first  he  hesitated 
because  the  books  were  not  Catholic.  We  explained  that 
they  were  Christian.  He  read  passages ; his  counsellors 
read,  and  at  last  bought  eagerly.  We  were  invited  to 
call  at  the  schools,  and  we  accepted  the  invitation.  The 
Presidente  accompanied  us. 

“While  canvassing  the  town  we  heard  of  a fiesta  which 
was  to  be  held  at  Rosario.  We  inquired  about  transpor- 
tation and  found  that  the  only  way  was  by  ox  cart,  a 
distance  of  some  seventeen  miles  over  the  mountains.  We 
had  canvassed  all  day  and  were  weary,  but  thought  we 
would  be  able  to  sleep  on  the  cart  as  it  rattled  along.  So 
we  started,  but  had  not  made  three  miles  before  the  ox 
began  to  show  signs  of  being  tired,  and  the  driver  in- 
sisted that  if  we  wished  to  reach  our  destination  we  must 
walk.  After  a four  hours’  tramp  we  halted  at  a group 
of  shacks  on  the  mountain  side,  and  changed  the  tired 
animal  for  a fresh  one. 

“The  road  began  to  be  very  rough  and  steep,  and  we 
needed  a sure-footed  and  steady  beast,  and  found  we 
had  just  the  opposite.  As  we  would  start  down  a hill 
into  a gulch,  the  ox  would  go  his  own  gait  and  give  us  a 
most  uncomfortable  jolting.  Finally  we  reached  the 
high  ridge,  with  a steep  decline  on  the  other  side,  with  a 
bridge  over  the  stream  at  the  bottom.  As  usual,  we  went 
down  with  a rush,  and  a sharp  turn  on  to  the  bridge  was 
too  much  for  the  cart,  and  over  it  went,  scattering  our 


340 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


boxes  down  the  gulch  side.  It  was  dark  and  we  were 
obliged  to  make  a light  and  gather  what  we  could  of 
our  hooks  together.  If  there  had  been  water  in  the 
stream  it  would  have  been  a total  loss.  We  were  delayed 
about  two  hours,  and  started  on  with  a broken  axle.  This 
we  had  tied  up  with  strips  of  cane,  and  it  held  until  we 
were  within  two  miles  of  Rosario.  Then  the  driver  went 
on  to  borrow  another  cart,  while  we  threw  ourselves  on 
the  ground  and  slept.  We  made  good  sales  in  Rosario 
the  first  day.  On  the  second  day  the  padre  came  and  we 
sold  less. 

“When  we  came  to  the  Presidente  for  transportation 
to  the  next  town,  he  sent  runners  out  into  the  hills  and 
they  brought  in  some  Igorrotes  (wild  hill  men),  who 
carried  our  boxes  while  we  trudged  on.  After  traveling 
some  nine  miles,  we  succeeded  in  finding  a cart  and  sent 
the  Igorrotes  back.  We  found  traveling  by  night  much 
more  comfortable  on  account  of  the  scorching  sun.  As 
we  rode  into  and  through  the  villages  a runner  would  pre- 
cede us  announcing  our  approach  and  explaining  our 
work.  The  people  came  out  to  the  roads  and  waited  for 
us,  listening,  buying  and  seeming  to  be  anxious  to  be 
taught  the  truth.  What  a work  devolves  upon  those  who 
are  entrusted  with  the  care  of  these  spiritually  hungry 
people !” 


Maleqon  Walk  and  Drive  in  Manila 


CHAPTER  XXXIII 


TRUSTWORTHY  MEN  NEEDED 


High  Moral  Tone  Needed — Violations  of  Financial 
Confidence — American  Enthusiasm  Dampened — Sac- 
rifice by  Men  of  Culture — Haste  to  Get  Rich — The 
Kind  of  Patriots  to  Establish  a Government — Gov- 
ernor Taft  a True  Representative. 

THE  greatest  need  of  the  Philippine  Islands  is  men 
who  will  serve  the  Government  in  times  of  peace 
with  something  of  that  loyalty  which  soldiers  manifest 
in  times  of  war.  This  does  not  mean  that  the  moral  tone 
of  men  in  the  Philippines  is  lower  than  that  of  men  in 
similar  Government  positions  at  home;  but  it  does  mean 
that  the  need  is  more  manifest  in  the  Philippines.  Nor 
does  it  mean  that  many  of  the  Civil  Government  employ- 
ees, and  those  who  are  serving  in  the  Army  and  in  the 
Constabulary,  are  not  as  noble  and  as  self-sacrificing  as 
any  other  Americans — but  it  does  mean  that  the  tempta- 
tions here  to  secure  wealth  and  honors  are  so  great  that 
some  of  the  men  who  can  be  secured  at  the  salaries  offered 
are  unable  to  stand  the  pi*essure,  and  consequently  fall. 

Gross  violations  of  financial  confidence  by  Americans 
in  civil,  military  and  business  life,  resulting  in  newspaper 
exposures  and  terms  of  imprisonment ; and  indulgence  in 
social  customs  which  offend  the  Filipinos  and  fill  the  col- 
umns of  the  newspapers,  bring  contempt  upon  the  term 


342 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


American.  A trusted  employee  arrested  for  embezzle- 
ment, a soldier  leaving  his  Filipino  wife,  or  mistress, 
when  his  regiment  sails  for  home,  or  a Sunday  house 
party  with  a cock-fight  as  an  attraction,  lead  the  Fili- 
pinos to  wonder  whether  their  islands  have  gained  in 
morality  by  an  exchange  of  owners  and  armies.  As  in 
other  lands,  it  is  the  individual,  and  not  the  mass,  who 
gives  color  to  the  impression  made.  The  friars  never 
let  slip  an  opportunity  of  creating  or  deepening  the  im- 
pression that  Spaniards  and  not  Americans  are  the  real 
friends  of  the  Filipinos. 

It  dampens  one’s  enthusiasm  for  the  Nation  to  which 
he  belongs  to  read  in  the  Manila  papers  of  the  downfall 
of  this  and  that  supply  officer,  of  this  and  that  disbursing 
officer,  and  of  other  men  holding  positions  of  trust  and 
responsibility.  If  it  be  added  that  despatches  from 
Washington  read  at  the  same  time  contain  reports  of 
public  scandals  in  high  offices  in  the  Homeland,  it  does 
not  lessen,  but  rather  deepens  the  feeling  of  depression. 

Governor  Taft  and  other  representatives  of  the  Civil 
Government  were  broken-hearted  over  the  reported  defal- 
cations. Two  or  three  interviews  obtained  by  the  writer 
will  explain  some  of  the  recent  defalcations,  and  empha- 
size the  importance  of  having  good  men  in  humble  as  well 
as  prominent  positions. 

“Our  greatest  need  to-day,”  said  an  officer  of  the  Con- 
stabulary, “is  young  men  of  wealth  and  culture  who  are 
willing  to  make  a sacrifice  for  the  sake  of  their  country 
and  come  here  and  accept  positions  of  trust  at  the  sal- 
aries which  the  present  resources  of  the  Philippines  will 
allow,  giving  a few  of  the  best  years  of  their  life  with 
the  devotion  with  which  they  would  enter  the  Army. 


PROSPERITY  A PITFALL 


818 


“A  man  receives  $900  a year  for  his  work  as  a supply 
officer.  If  he  qualifies  to  handle  the  money  and  the  com- 
missary supplies  needed  by  the  company,  he  receives  $200 
additional.  From  this  he  must  pay  $15,  a fourth  of 
the  premium  on  a bond  of  $6,000,  the  Government  pay- 
ing the  other  three-fourths.  A man  capable  of  taking 
that  position  and  assuming  the  responsibility,  could 
easily  get  a Civil  Service  position  in  Manila  at  a salary 
of  $1,200,  have  no  work  after  office  hours,  and  be  en- 
tirely free  from  such  responsibility  as  goes  with  the 
handling  of  funds  and  commissary  stores.  While  many 
supply  officers  are  as  trustworthy  as  any  bank  cashier, 
the  strain  upon  others,  who  are  willing  to  take  this  small 
salary,  with  its  risks,  is  too  great,  and  they  go  to  the 
wall.  We  should  not  be  obliged  to  take  a lower  grade 
of  men  than  the  position  calls  for,  and  the  Government 
suffers  from  it.  The  man  is  disgraced,  and  our  influence 
here  is  lessened.” 

“The  trouble  with  the  average  American,”  said  a 
young  man  at  the  head  of  an  important  English  house 
in  one  of  the  provinces,  “is  this : He  wants  to  get  rich 
too  fast.  He  thinks  that  he  is  in  the  Philippines  for  a 
short  time,  and  he  sees  possibilities  of  which  he  had 
never  dreamed  at  home.  Perhaps  he  is  a discharged  sol- 
dier who  was  a clerk  before  the  War,  receiving  ten  or 
twelve  dollars  a week.  After  his  discharge,  he  secures  a 
position  that  gives  him  one  hundred  dollars  a month. 
His  rapid  rise  is  the  beginning  of  his  downfall.  He 
lives  at  a club  or  a fashionable  hotel,  buys  a carromata, 
and,  as  his  salary  is  increased,  a Victoria  and  span,  in- 
vites his  friends  to  expensive  dinners,  takes  his  young 
lady  friends  to  the  opera  or  theater,  and  before  he  knows 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


344 

it  his  month’s  salary  is  gone.  He  then  sets  about  to 
supply  his  needs  and  does  what  many  another  high-liver 
has  done — disgraces  himself  and  the  country  which  he 
represents. 

“It  is  different  with  the  English  youth.  He  is  willing 
to  live  at  a more  modest  pace.  He  does  not  plan  to  go 
home  in  two  years,  but  expects  to  grow  up  with  the  firm 
which  he  represents  and  to  receive  the  promotion  that 
goes  with  faithful  work,  looking  to  the  time  when  he 
will  be  called  back  to  London  to  take  a position  of  trust 
with  the  firm,  and  by  and  by  to  become  a member  of  it. 
Many  times  in  my  experience  here,  which  dates  back  to 
Spanish  times,  I have  seen  men  of  fine  parts  begin  the 
career  which  can  have  only  one  ending — disgrace,  if  not 
imprisonment.” 

“The  ships  which  sail  from  San  Francisco  seem  to 
make  no  provision  for  carrying  a man’s  piety,”  said  a 
worker  among  young  men.  “If  he  has  a Bible,  he  fig- 
uratively tears  out  the  part  which  contains  the  Decalogue. 
If  he  were  an  active  church  member  at  home,  he  is 
ashamed  of  that  fact  when  he  gets  here.  He  may  have 
been  a leader  in  Christian  Endeavor  work  or  in  Christian 
Association  work,  but  he  seems  determined  that  no  one 
shall  find  it  out.  If  he  is  not  ashamed  of  his  religion,  his 
conduct  warrants  that  impression.  Influences  which 
bound  him  at  home  being  gone,  he  drifts,  and  then  re- 
mains stranded.  Church-going  may  not  be  played  out 
here,  but  people  who  are  depended  upon  in  New 
York  and  San  Francisco  to  support  the  churches  are 
either  unable  or  unwilling  to  do  so  here.  Sometimes  a 
man  will  begin  to  attend  church  regularly  and  then 
stop.  When  this  occurs  I am  tempted  to  ask  him 


LACKING  THE  CHURCH-GOING  HABIT  345 


what  sin  he  has  committed  that  keeps  him  from  the  house 
of  God.” 

After  two  months  in  various  provinces,  I have  come 
to  the  conclusion  that  these  interviews  do  not  overesti- 
mate the  true  condition.  It  is  fair  that  the  other  side 
should  be  heard.  Sunday  work  is  probably  necessary  in 
some  of  the  departments ; but  that  this  necessity  should 
be  given  as  a reason  by  scores  of  people  not  in  any  of 
these  departments,  shows  how  fragile  an  excuse  one  may 
put  forward  to  satisfy  his  friends,  if  not  his  own  con- 
science. 

Protestants  in  Manila  do  not  have  the  church-going 
habit.  With  thousands  of  Americans,  not  Roman  Catho- 
lics, there,  the  three  small  Protestant  churches  are  never 
full.  The  Methodist,  Presbyterian  and  Protestant 
Episcopal  bodies  all  contemplate  the  erection  of  new 
church  buildings,  but  not  because  the  present  ones,  seat- 
ing from  one  to  two  hundred  each,  are  ever  crowded.  At 
the  second  service  on  a Sunday  afternoon,  fifteen  persons 
were  in  the  audience,  including  eight  who  were  in  some 
way  connected  with  the  church  and  its  official  work.  The 
sermon  which  was  delivered  would  have  done  honor  to  a 
Philadelphia  or  New  York  congregation.  One  frequently 
hears  an  American  say: 

“I  have  not  been  to  church  in  a year,  or  more  than 
twice  in  two  years ;”  adding,  as  if  there  were  virtue  in 
the  confession:  “I  should  never  think  of  staying  away 
from  church  so  long  at  home,  nor  should  I have  supposed 
it  possible  before  I came  to  the  Philippines  that  I could 
do  so  here.” 

An  interview  with  an  official  on  the  question  of  Sab- 
bath keeping  and  religious  freedom  ran  along  this  line: 


346 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


“What  is  your  opinion  of  the  influence  of  Americans 
in  the  Philippines?”  the  writer  was  asked. 

“The  chief  defect,  it  seems  to  me,  is  non-Sabbath  ob- 
servance.” 

“But  would  you  have  the  same  form  of  Sabbath  ob- 
servance in  the  Philippines,  or  in  a Catholic  country  of 
Eui’ope,  that  you  would  in  the  United  States?” 

“It  seems  to  me  that  the  representatives  of  the  United 
States  Government  in  Berlin,  for  instance,  should  stand 
before  the  German  people  for  those  principles  which 
differentiate  America  from  the  Catholic  countries  of 
Europe,  as  well  as  from  the  heathen  countries  of  Asia. 
They  should  follow  the  example  of  the  President  of  the 
United  States  in  Sabbath  observance.  The  example  set 
by  the  Governor  of  the  Philippines,  the  officers  of  the 
Army,  and  the  employees  of  the  Civil  Government,  is 
followed  more  or  less  closely  by  the  entire  body  of  Ameri- 
cans throughout  the  islands.  It  would  seem  as  if  every 
effort  possible  should  be  made  to  represent  truly  the 
best  of  American  principles,  and  imitate  closely  the  ex- 
ample of  America’s  leading  citizen.” 

The  Rev.  George  F.  Pentecost,  D.D.,  was  in  the  Phil- 
ippines about  three  months,  and  he  spoke  fearlessly  to 
the  Americans  regarding  Sabbath  desecration.  At 
Dumaguete  and  Iloilo,  as  well  as  in  Manila,  he  left  a 
lasting  impression.  Nearly  every  American  in  the 
smaller  towns  was  present  at  every  service  which  he  held, 
but  this  was  too  much  to  expect  in  the  capital  city. 
His  sermons  were  fully  reported  in  the  leading  papers, 
and  those  who  did  not  hear  them  knew  that  one  had  come 
from  the  Homeland  to  tell  them  what  they  should  do 
and  what  they  should  refrain  from  doing.  Governor 


THE  DECALOGUE  BROUGHT  TO  MIND  347 


Taft  was  delighted  with  the  preacher,  and  invited  all  the 
resident  American  clergymen  to  a dinner  which  he  gave 
in  his  honor.  Dr.  Pentecost  stated  frankly  that  many 
Americans  in  the  Philippines  do  not  manifest  that  inter- 
est in  religious  activities  which  they  would  if  they  were 
at  home.  Business  crowds  upon  them  and  they  think 
that  a part  of  every  working  day  must  be  given  to  rest ; 
social  engagements  are  numerous  and  Sunday  is  observed 
by  many  as  a day  of  physical  rest,  if  not  as  a day  for 
recreation.  Others  use  a part  of  the  day  in  finishing  up 
work  left  undone  through  the  week,  or  in  granting  in- 
terviews when  the  rush  of  business  will  not  interrupt 
them. 

“I  shall  be  glad  to  see  you  to-morrow  morning  and 
give  the  information  which  you  desire,”  said  an  American 
official,  not  a member  of  the  Commission.  The  writer 
had  asked  him  for  an  interview  regarding  the  department 
of  which  he  had  charge  at  the  time.  A card  had  been 
sent  to  the  official  which  informed  him  that  a clergyman 
sought  the  interview,  and  yet  he  did  not  hesitate  to  name 
Sunday  as  a time  for  giving  it. 

“As  I am  to  preach  twice  to-morrow,  it  would  be 
impossible  for  me  to  call,  if  there  were  no  other  reason,” 
was  the  reply. 

“Well,  then,  come  Monday  morning.  I only  thought 
that  to-morrow  would  be  more  agreeable  to  both  of  us. 
As  I am  to  be  in  the  office  anyway,  it  would  be  more 
satisfactory  to  both  of  us  to  have  a quiet  time  for  the 
interview.” 

Against  the  violation  of  the  Fourth  Commandment, 
Dr.  Pentecost  thundered  with  the  force  of  an  old-time 
prophet,  and  those  who  were  there  at  the  time  say  that 


348 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


his  words  did  not  fall  on  heedless  ears ; that  the  Sabbath 
is  more  respected  than  it  was  before  he  preached  his 
ringing  sermons  against  its  desecration.  He  told  leading 
officials  privately  that  by  their  violation  of  the  Fourth 
Commandment  they  were  setting  an  example  of  disre- 
gard for  the  laws  of  God  which  would  result  in  a fearful 
harvest  of  crime.  His  picture  was  startling  and  to  many 
a cause  for  anxiety. 

In  the  provinces,  outside  of  one  or  two  cities  and  army 
posts  where  there  are  chaplains  or  Association  secretaries, 
there  is  practically  no  church  attendance  by  Americans, 
Protestant  or  Catholic.  The  clergymen  in  Manila  and 
Iloilo,  and  in  one  or  two  other  places,  are  doing  all  that 
they  can  to  help  their  countrymen ; but  a mission  to 
Americans  in  the  Philippines  is  quite  as  necessary  as  a 
mission  to  the  Filipinos. 

Climatic  conditions  and  distances  form  serious  obsta- 
cles to  religious  activity  in  the  Philippines.  A good  deal 
may  be  laid  at  the  door  of  a temperature  which  struggles 
to  record  three  figures,  and  seldom  fails  to  get  within  four 
or  five  degrees  of  its  goal  for  days  at  a time,  and  this 
not  in  the  so-called  “hot  season.”  When  one  has  been 
wilting  and  withering  for  six  days,  a Sunday  in  the  coun- 
try or  an  opportunity  to  “lie  around”  in  his  room  pre- 
sents a temptation  not  easy  to  resist.  Even  if  his 
conscience  backs  his  early  training,  a walk  of  a mile  or 
two  or  three  miles  to  the  nearest  church  in  a blistering 
sun  does  not  appeal  to  one  with  much  force.  When  the 
new  electric  street  cars  are  running,  this  difficulty  will 
be  overcome. 

But  it  should  be  added  that  many  people  overcome 
both  weather  and  distance  and  are  in  church  at  least 


General  Wood  and  Staff  Entering  Jolo 


MEN  OF  ROOSEVELT’S  TYPE  NEEDED  349 


once  every  Sunday.  Several  army  nurses,  young  women, 
walked  more  than  three  miles  to  attend  a Sunday  evening 
service  at  which  I was  present.  People  living  within  a 
block  of  the  church  found  the  atmosphere  too  oppressive 
to  venture  out ; and  as  I was  the  speaker,  I sympathized 
with  them.  How  the  missionaries  live  and  labor  as  they 
do  year  after  year  is  a marvel.  Indeed  many  of  them 
are  not  strong,  and  the  ladies  find  it  necessary  to  go  to 
Japan  once  in  two  or  three  years.  If  any  one  desires 
missionary  work  in  a hard  field,  let  him  apply  for  an 
appointment  to  the  Philippines. 

A hundred  men  of  the  Roosevelt  type,  graduates  of 
leading  American  universities,  who  would  come  here  for  a 
term  of  years  for  the  good  that  they  may  do  in  estab- 
lishing Civil  Government  on  a true  American  basis,  would 
do  more  for  their  country  than  they  can  in  the  Army 
or  Navy  or  any  other  branch  of  the  National  Govern- 
ment. 

“God  give  us  men:  a time  like  this  demands 
Great  hearts,  strong  minds,  true  faith  and  willing  hands. 

Men  whom  the  lust  of  .office  cannot  kill; 

Men  whom  the  spoils  of  office  cannot  buy; 

Men  who  possess  opinions  and  a will; 

Men  who  have  honor,  men  who  will  not  lie.” 

Such  a man  is  the  present  Secretary  of  War,  to  whom 
more  than  to  any  other  man  is  due  the  peace  and  pros- 
perity of  the  Philippine  Islands.  Judge  Taft,  an  Ohio 
man,  was  graduated  from  Yale  University  in  1878,  the 
second  in  his  class  and  its  salutatorian  and  class  orator. 
As  a member  of  the  judiciary  in  his  native  State,  as 
judge  of  one  of  our  highest  Federal  courts  for  eight 


350 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


years,  and  as  president  of  the  Philippine  Commission 
and  the  first  Civil  Governor  of  the  islands,  “he  has  carried 
into  every  sphere  of  duty  a breadth  of  view,  a clarity  of 
judgment,  a purity  of  motive,  a nobleness  of  aim,  that 
have  won  for  him  the  deep  and  abiding  confidence  and 
the  heartiest  personal  regard  of  all  with  whom  he  has  had 
to  do.” 

This  opinion  of  Governor  Taft,  which  President  Roose- 
velt expressed  in  an  article  written  while  President  Mc- 
Kinley was  }ret  alive,  was  confirmed  by  a close  acquaint- 
ance with  the  Governor  while  in  the  Philippines.  Mr. 
Roosevelt  said:  “I  think  that  almost  all  men  who  have 

been  brought  into  close  contact  with  Judge  Taft  agree 
that  he  combines,  as  very,  very  few  men  ever  can  com- 
bine, a standard  of  absolutely  unflinching  rectitude  on 
every  point  of  public  duty,  and  a literally  dauntless 
courage  and  willingness  to  bear  responsibility,  with  a 
knowledge  of  men,  and  a far-reaching  tact  and  kindli- 
ness, which  enable  his  great  abilities  and  high  principles 
to  be  of  use  in  a way  that  would  be  impossible,  were  he 
not  thus  gifted  with  a capacity  to  work  hand  in  hand 
with  his  fellows.  Governor  Taft  left  a high  office  of 
honor  and  of  comparative  ease  to  undertake  his  present 
work.  As  soon  as  he  became  convinced  where  his  duty 
lay  he  did  not  hesitate  a moment,  though  he  clearly  fore- 
saw the  infinite  labor,  the  crushing  responsibility,  the 
certainty  of  recurring  disappointments  and  all  the  grind- 
ing wear  and  tear  which  such  a task  implies.  But  he 
gladly  undertook  it ; and  he  is  to  be  considered  thrice 
fortunate.  For  in  this  world  the  one  thing  supremely 
worth  the  having  is  the  opportunity,  coupled  with  the 
capacity,  to  do  well  and  worthily  a piece  of  work  the 


PLANS  OF  DESIGNING  MEN 


351 


doing  of  which  is  of  vital  consequence  to  the  welfare  of 
mankind.” 

“When  you  go  home,”  said  a former  American  soldier, 
now  a well-to-do  resident  of  the  islands,  “advocate  the 
withdrawal  of  the  American  troops  from  the  Philippines. 
They  should  not  be  here ; it  is  a disgrace  to  our  country 
to  prevent  this  native  population  from  enjoying  the  free- 
dom recognized  in  the  Declaration  of  American  Inde- 
pendence as  being  the  inalienable  right  of  all  men.  Now 
we  are  enslaving  the  Filipinos,  however  worthy  our  mo- 
tive may  be.  Give  the  Filipinos  self-government.  You 
can  trust  them.” 

“What  would  happen  if  the  troops  were  ordered  home 
to-day  ?” 

“The  Filipinos  would  set  up  an  independent  govern- 
ment and  begin  their  long-desired  rule  over  this  beautiful 
archipelago.” 

“And  then ?” 

“Three  days  after  the  last  soldier  sailed,  the  new  Fil- 
ipino Government  would  be  overturned  by  Americans  now 
in  the  islands,  and  I do  not  mind  saying  that  I am  one 
of  those  who  would  start  the  revolution  to-morrow  if 
that  were  possible.  What  do  I care  for  Filipino  Govern- 
ment, or  American  Government,  either?  I am  here  for 
what  I can  get,  and  I hail  every  movement  with  joy 
which  will  hasten  the  day  that  sees  the  departure  of  the 
Americans — I mean  the  officials  and  the  military — for 
we  who  are  not  in  either  of  those  classes  will  remain,  and 
there  will  be  a new  government  set  up  with  men  of 
American  birth  in  control.” 

“What  would  the  native  soldiers  do  while  you  were 
effecting  your  proposed  changes?” 


352 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


“Fall  under  our  fire,  for  we  are  becoming  desperate, 
and  are  only  waiting  for  our  day  to  come.  Our  number 
is  increasing,  for  the  natives  are  taking  the  places  of 
Americans  in  the  offices.” 

“Are  they  fitted  for  the  positions  which  they  fill?” 
“Perhaps  so ; but  what  has  that  to  do  with  the  ques- 
tion? We  want  the  work,  and  it  is  only  the  fear  of  our 
brothers  in  khaki  that  keeps  us  now  from  settling  the  fate 
of  Governor  Taft’s  ‘brothers  in  brown.’  But  our  day  will 
come,  and  you  can  help  us  mightily  by  advising  self- 
government  for  the  Filipinos;  give  them  independence 
as  soon  as  possible.  It  means  food  and  clothing  and 
power  for  the  sons  of  ‘God’s  own  country.’  ” 

This  man  of  education,  having  a strong  influence  with 
a part  of  the  American  population  in  the  islands,  was 
apparently  sincere  in  his  desire  for  another  revolution  in 
the  Philippines,  feeling  that  the  Filipinos  could  not  resist 
the  Americans,  of  whom  Governor  Taft  says: 

“One  of  the  great  obstacles  that  this  Government  has 
to  contend  with  is  the  presence,  in  a large  majority  of 
the  towns  of  the  archipelago,  of  dissolute,  drunken  and 
lawless  Americans,  who  are  willing  to  associate  with  low 
Filipino  women  and  live  upon  the  proceeds  of  their  labor. 
They  are  truculent  and  dishonest.  They  borrow,  beg, 
and  steal  from  the  native.  Their  conduct  and  mode  of 
life  are  not  calculated  to  impress  the  native  with  the 
advantage  of  American  civilization.  When  opportunity 
offers,  however,  they  are  loudest  in  denunciation  of  the 
Filipinos  as  an  inferior,  lying  race.” 

To  rid  the  islands  of  this  class  of  Ameincans  the  Com- 
mission passed  two  acts  defining  vagrancy  and  providing 
for  its  punishment:  one  fixes  the  punishment  by  a fine 


Outrigger  Boats 


SUSPENDING  SENTENCE  AT  TIMES  353 


of  not  exceeding  one  hundred  dollars,  or  by  imprisonment 
not  exceeding  one  year  and  a day,  or  both ; and  the  other 
giving  the  court  liberty,  upon  conviction  of  any  citizen 
of  the  United  States,  to  suspend  sentence,  conditioned 
upon  the  convict  leaving  the  Philippine  Islands  and  not 
returning  thereto  in  less  than  ten  years. 


CHAPTER  XXXIV 


THE  PEARL  OF  THE  ORIENT 


In  Quarantine — Verbal  Protest  Based  on  the  Color 
Line — An  Old-Time  Democrat  Forfeits  His  Break- 
fast— Lifting  One’s  Hat  to  Dr.  Patton — Self-Sac- 
rifice Typical  of  American  Spirit — Heart  of  Filipino 
Will  Repay  Cultivation — Our  Triumph. 

HEN  we  reached  the  Philippines  it  was  thought 


that  three  or  four  weeks  would  suffice  to  visit 


the  principal  cities  and  provinces,  and  to  see  the  leading 
men  and  investigate  special  problems  of  interest.  We 
soon  found,  however,  that  much  more  time  was  needed, 
and  the  Logan,  which  had  brought  us  from  San  Fran- 
cisco, was  seen  to  depart  on  her  homeward  trip  without 
the  Editor  and  his  wife. 

The  Sherman,  on  which  we  secured  transportation  to 
Japan,  was  detained  in  the  harbor  by  a typhoon  for 
nearly  a week.  She  then  went  to  Jolo,  to  leave  the  regi- 
ment which  had  come  from  the  States,  and  to  take  on  the 
one  which,  having  served  two  years  in  Mindanao  and 
other  parts  of  the  archipelago,  was  ready  to  take  the  vaca- 
tion allowed  by  the  Government.  The  present  plan  is  two 
years  in  the  Philippines  and  three  or  four  years  at  home, 
according  to  the  needs  of  the  New  Possessions.  The 
Government  has  not  yet  introduced  the  length  of  service 
in  tropical  countries  which  the  Foreign  Boards  have  es- 


THE  YELLOW  FLAG  HALTS  TRANSPORT  355 


tablished  for  missionaries — six  or  seven  years  according 
to  the  country,  with  a furlough  of  a year  or  sixteen 
months,  during  which  time  the  missionary  is  allowed  to 
speak  from  two  hundred  to  three  hundred  times  while 
“resting.” 

The  day  that  the  Sherman  wras  announced  as  ready  to 
start  for  San  Francisco  we  were  on  board  at  9 a.m. 
Promptly  at  the  hour  advertised  the  anchor  was  lifted 
and  we  were  off — but  not  for  Japan.  The  rumor  had 
quickly  spread  among  the  cabin  passengers,  and  the  sol- 
diers who  had  come  from  the  south,  that  we  were  going 
into  quarantine  in  Meriveles  Bay — twenty -five  miles  from 
Manila.  The  cause  of  the  delay  was  a simple  one,  but  it 
illustrates  the  care  which  the  Army  takes  of  its  men : 

A soldier  stationed  with  his  company  near  Manila, 
while  going  down  to  the  river  to  embark  on  the  ship 
which  was  to  carry  it  to  the  disinfecting  station  at 
Meriveles,  developed  signs  of  cholera.  As  all  the  mem- 
bers of  his  company  had  been  exposed  to  the  same  condi- 
tions, the  yellow  flag  was  raised  over  the  ship  which  car- 
ried the  men  across  the  bay,  and  the  Sherman  was  held 
until  the  result  of  the  medical  examination  showed 
whether  or  not  the  man  had  cholera.  It  was  known  that 
there  were  many  cases  of  cholera  in  Manila  as  well  as  in 
other  parts  of  the  islands.  Deaths  were  reported  almost 
daily  while  we  were  on  shore,  and  several  Americans  were 
among  those  who  fell  victims  to  the  disease.  It  is  not 
pleasant  to  have  the  anchor  dropped  at  the  quarantine 
station,  for  one  never  knows  whether  the  detention  will 
be  for  five  days,  in  case  one  man  has  cholera,  or  five  days 
for  each  new  case  which  may  develop  during  the  next 
fortnight.  Neither  the  officers  of  the  ship  nor  the  offi- 


356 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


cers  of  the  regiment  on  board  were  able  to  throw  any 
light  upon  the  problem.  The  best  that  we  could  hear 
was : “While  the  yellow  flag  flies  over  the  station  we 

must  rest  patiently.” 

And  after  all  the  time  did  not  drag  so  heavily  as  one 
might  think  it  Mould.  It  was  extremely  hot  in  the  bay, 
but  it  had  been  hotter  still  in  Manila,  and,  therefore,  our 
condition  M'as  somewhat  improved.  The  table  was  good 
and  the  supply  of  food,  MTater  and  ice  abundant.  The 
second  day  the  yellow  flag  fell  and  a cheer  came  across 
the  water  from  the  men  who  had  been  detained.  It  was 
found  that  the  soldier  did  not  have  cholera  at  all,  and 
rapid  work  was  made  on  land  in  disinfecting  the  bag- 
gage. The  folloM'ing  day  all  the  men  were  on  the  trans- 
port with  their  arms  and  trunks  and  bundles,  and  we 
Mrere  really  off  for  Japan. 

The  Sherman  had  been  resting  for  several  months  pre- 
vious to  this  trip,  as  it  had  run  on  rocks  in  the  San 
Bernardino  Strait  at  the  eastern  entrance  the  previous  De- 
cember, and  had  been  sent  to  Hong  Kong  for  repairs.  It 
added  someMhat  to  our  comfort  to  know  that,  whether  or 
not  the  sailing  master  had  been  responsible  for  the  acci- 
dent, he  was  no  longer  in  command  of  the  ship.  Opinions 
differ  as  to  the  real  cause  of  the  disaster,  but  it  seems, 
from  the  testimony  of  those  on  board  at  the  time,  that 
the  unfortunate  master  was  taking  chances  and  had  his 
ship  too  near  the  lighthouse.  It  is  only  just  to  say  that 
the  coasts  around  the  islands  are  not  yet  properly 
charted,  and  no  one  feels  quite  sure  M’here  the  rocks  are 
until  the  ship  strikes  them.  The  knowledge  secured  by 
actual  contact  is  not  appreciated  by  the  Government, 
M’hich  must  pay  for  the  damage  done. 


RANK  MAY  NOT  BE  IGNORED 


357 


Captain  R.  L.  Brown  was  the  quartermaster  of  the 
Sherman,  and  his  task  was  not  an  easy  one— to  provide 
for  all  of  the  troops,  and  especially  to  place  the  officers, 
and  members  of  their  families  accompanying  them,  in  such 
position  as  to  stateroom  and  table  that  there  should  be  no 
unpleasant  feeling.  There  are  two  fine  staterooms — one 
of  which  the  colonel  in  command  of  the  regiment  occu- 
pied, and  the  other  was  given  to  one  of  the  two  generals 
on  board.  Fortunately  the  Army  officers  were  all  on  the 
best  of  terms,  and  no  friction  was  manifest  except  in  the 
case  of  one  of  the  younger  officers,  who,  classed  according 
to  his  grade,  had  to  sit  next  to  a young  Filipino,  also  an 
officer,  on  his  way  to  the  training  school  at  Leavenworth. 
I am  not  sure  that  any  protest  wras  made  to  Captain 
Brown  by  the  officer  in  question,  but  he  made  the  air  of 
the  smoking-room  even  bluer  than  the  smoke  from  a dozen 
cigars,  in  his  pi’otest  against  being  placed  by  the  side  of 
an  “inferior.” 

“I  make  my  verbal  protest  now,  and  I shall  put  it  in 
writing  later,”  he  said  with  an  emphasis  which  sounded 
like  slamming  a door.  “I  declare  now,  and  I shall  make 
my  written  declaration  even  more  forcibly,  that  I will 
not  sit  beside  that  man.”  While  some  of  the  brother 
officers  approved  his  decision,  others  counseled  modera- 
tion. This  good  advice  prevailed,  with  the  following  de- 
cision on  the  part  of  the  injured  officer: 

“Well,  they  cannot  make  me  eat  at  the  first  table;  if 
I cannot  make  a change  I will  go  to  the  second  table” ; 
and  the  atmosphere  became  natural  again. 

Another  passenger,  not  an  officer,  nor  yet  a clergyman, 
felt  obliged  to  go  to  the  second  table  because  he  was 
unable  to  sleep  the  early  part  of  the  night  and  preferred 


358 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


to  rest  in  the  morning.  He  had  his  own  troubles  also, 
which  he  explained  confidentially  to  the  writer: 

“I  am  an  old-time  Democrat,  and  I find  it  mighty 
difficult  to  eat  with  a colored  person.  One  of  the  officers 
has  a Negro  nurse  for  his  baby,  and  I tell  you  privately 
that  I would  rather  go  without  my  breakfast  and  enjoy 
my  pride.”  The  steward  of  the  ship  saved  one  meal  a 
day,  as  the  “old-time  Democrat”  did  not  come  down  to 
breakfast  very  often.  Sometimes  his  pride  would  give 
way  to  his  appetite,  but  he  managed  to  look  after  both. 

The  noblest  act  which  the  writer  saw  in  the  Philippines 
was  not  performed  on  the  battlefield,  nor  yet  in  the  hos- 
pital— civil  or  military.  On  the  Logan  were  a young 
doctor  and  his  wife  and  three  small  children,  who  were 
among  the  friends  that  invited  us  to  visit  them  after  they 
were  settled  in  their  post.  When  we  boarded  the  Sher- 
man we  saw  the  children  and  their  father,  from  whom  we 
learned  that  the  mother  had  without  any  warning  devel- 
oped tuberculosis,  having  twenty  hemorrhages  within 
six  days.  An  examination  ordered  by  the  surgeon  of  the 
department  resulted  not  only  in  ordering  the  immediate 
return  of  the  mother  and  children,  but  also  in  the  recom- 
mendation that  the  husband  should  accompany  them. 
When  the  request  was  made  to  the  surgeon  of  the  divi- 
sion, great  difficulty  was  experienced  in  securing  the 
desired  permission.  Another  physician  who  had  been 
three  years  in  the  Philippines,  and  had  secured  a room 
upon  the  Sherman,  was  so  impressed  by  the  apparent  need 
of  his  brother  physician,  whom  he  had  never  seen,  that  he 
did  all  in  his  power  to  aid  him.  It  was  said  that  there 
was  no  room  on  the  Sherman  for  the  family;  that  all  the 
staterooms  were  taken. 


HEROISM  OF  A PHYSICIAN 


359 


“Then  I will  give  up  mine  to  them,  for  I feel  that  they 
should  go  home.” 

“The  doctor  cannot  be  spared.  He  has  only  recently 
come  to  the  Philippines  and  we  need  his  services.” 

“I  have  served  three  years  and  want  to  go  home  very 
much,  but  I will  take  his  place  and  serve  his  three  years 
in  order  that  he  may  go,”  was  the  reply  of  Dr.  Patton. 

Later  it  was  found  that  an  arrangement  could  be 
made  which  would  allow  the  husband  a leave  of  absence  of 
one  month  after  reaching  San  Francisco.  When  one 
considers  the  trying  climate  of  the  Philippines  and  the 
arduous  service  which  an  army  surgeon  is  called  upon  to 
perform,  he  is  glad  to  lift  his  hat  to  Dr.  Patton. 

This  spirit  of  self-sacrifice  is  typical  of  the  American 
spirit  displayed  daily  in  the  Philippines  by  men  in 
authority  and  by  those  whose  names  are  unheralded. 
Governor  Taft,  Governor  Wright,  his  successor,  and 
their  associates  in  the  Commission ; leaders  of  the  mili- 
tary, many  of  whom  were  humane,  even  to  a fault;  heads 
of  departments  under  the  Civil  Government ; teachers  in 
the  public  schools ; missionaries  of  Protestant  bodies,  and 
representatives  of  the  Catholic  Church — all  these  and 
many  other  Americans  are  imbued  with  the  spirit  of  help- 
fulness, and  are  truly  representing  Him  who  said : “I  am 
among  you  as  one  who  serveth.”  They  represent  various 
sections  of  the  Homeland;  they  belong  to  different  politi- 
cal parties  ; they  stand  for  many  creeds  or  profess  none — ■ 
but  the  aim  of  the  majority  is  one — uplifting  the  fallen, 
guiding  the  weak,  encouraging  the  strong.  Not  every 
one  engaged  in  this  beneficent  work  is  actuated  by  the 
highest  motives,  but  that  the  great  majority  of  them  are 
is  sincerely  believed.  Some  time  will  be  necessary  before 


360 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


the  spirit  which  they  represent  will  be  understood — be- 
fore gentleness  and  kindness  are  fully  appreciated. 

The  future  of  the  Philippines  and  the  welfare  of  their 
inhabitants  depend  very  much  upon  our  representatives. 
Wise  were  the  words  of  one  of  the  best-informed  men 
met  in  Manila,  Senor  Felipe  Buencamino: 

“The  heart  of  the  Filipino  is  like  his  fertile  soil,  and  it 
will  as  surely  repay  cultivation.  Sow  hate  and  hatred 
will  grow,  sow  love  and  you  will  reap  love.” 

In  his  inaugural  address  in  February,  1904,  Governor 
Wright  referred  to  the  policy  which  he  contemplated  in 
the  conduct  of  the  Philippines.  After  discussing  the 
“period  of  political  reconstruction  through  which  the 
Philippines  have  been  passing  during  the  past  five  or 
six  years,”  the  Governor  said  that  the  real  work  for  the 
American  and  Filipino  lies  in  the  future. 

With  self-government  for  the  Philippines  the  goal  for 
the  Filipino,  and  good  will  and  justice  and  patience  and 
mutual  confidence  exhibited  by  both  Filipino  and  Ameri- 
cans in  the  Plomeland  and  in  the  Pearl  of  the  Orient,  the 
day  is  not  far  distant  when  both  classes  will  recognize  the 
Providence  that  brought  them  together.  To-day  with 
Whittier  let  us  catch  a glimpse  of  that  day,  and  hail  it  as 
our  Triumph: 

“Others  shall  sing  the  song; 

Others  shall  right  the  wrong, 

Finish  what  I begin 
And  all  I fail  of  win. 

“What  matter  I or  they? 

Mine  or  another’s  day? 

So  that  the  right  word  be  said. 

And  life  the  sweeter  made.” 


CHAPTER  XXXV 


EXHIBIT  AT  ST.  LOUIS 


Getting  Ready  for  the  World’s  Fair — Bilibid  Prison- 
ers Preparing  a Collection — Patriotic  Pride  Displayed 
by  the  Filipinos — Scouts  and  Constabulary  on  Ex- 
hibition— A Native  Band  Led  by  a Negro — Antaero 
Gives  an  Interview. 

THE  Philippine  Government  from  the  first  was  deeply 
interested  in  the  Louisiana  Purchase  Exposition 
held  at  St.  Louis  in  1904.  Governor  Taft  realized  that 
an  opportunity  had  come  to  display  to  the  people  of  the 
United  States  the  wonderful  resources  of  the  archipelago. 
He  called  a meeting  of  the  governors  of  the  provinces, 
some  of  them  Americans,  some  Filipinos,  all  of  whom 
joined  heartily  in  the  plan,  and  the  Philippine  Exposition 
Board  was  appointed. 

At  its  head  was  Dr.  William  P.  Wilson,  director  of 
the  Philadelphia  Commercial  Museums,  who  made  a trip 
to  the  islands  for  the  purpose  of  getting  into  shape  the 
displays  to  be  taken  to  St.  Louis.  Associated  with  him 
were  Dr.  Gustavo  Neiderlien,  who  has  had  large  experi- 
ence with  colonial  exhibits ; Pedro  A.  Patemo,  president 
of  the  Senate  under  Aguinaldo,  and  Dr.  Guerrero.  As 
chief  of  the  Bureau  of  Insular  Affairs  of  the  War 
Department,  Colonel  Clarence  R.  Edwards  gave  the 
Philippine  Exposition  his  personal  attention  from  its 


362 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


inception,  and  was  also  largely  responsible  for  many  of 
its  most  successful  features.  To  Dr.  Neiderlien  fell  the 
arduous  task  of  whipping  into  shape  the  multitude  of 
displays  from  all  parts  of  the  islands.  Collecting  an 
exhibit  from  over  a thousand  islands,  populated  by  more 
than  a hundred  different  tribes,  all  speaking  different 
dialects,  was  no  easy  matter.  Scientists  from  the  United 
States  classified  native  woods  and  the  mineral  products. 
Competition  was  started  among  native  architects  for  de- 
signs in  native  buildings.  Business  men  joined  in  the 
movement  to  make  a display  that  would  give  to  the 
western  world  a new  impression  of  the  Philippines.  And 
all  the  while  agents  of  the  Exposition  Board  were  out 
among  the  leading  Christian  and  non-Christian  tribes, 
arranging  for  representatives  at  the  Fair.  Some  of 
these  agents  penetrated  mountain  fastnesses,  accompanied 
only  by  guides  and  interpreters.  The  result  was  a spon- 
taneous and  patriotic  response  to  the  call  on  the  natives 
to  show  the  work  of  their  country. 

Two  buildings  in  Manila  were  placed  at  the  disposal 
of  the  Commission  having  charge  of  this  matter,  and 
through  the  courtesy  of  Dr.  Neiderlien,  we  inspected  a 
large  number  of  articles  awaiting  transportation  to  St. 
Louis,  and  learned  of  others  already  on  the  way,  and 
others  soon  expected  from  the  northern  and  southern 
provinces.  The  two  or  three  thousand  prisoners,  chiefly 
insurrectos,  in  Bilibid  Prison  in  Manila,  were  making  a 
fine  collection  of  chairs,  tables,  mats,  hammocks  and  other 
articles,  chiefly  of  a useful  character.  One  room  was 
devoted  to  coins  collected  by  Chinamen  in  the  Philip- 
pines. 

Each  province  in  the  archipelago  had  been  interested 


PATRIOTIC  PRIDE  DISPLAYED  363 


in  the  preparation  and  collection  of  articles  especially 
designed  to  show  its  products  ; while  thei'e  were  thousands 
of  articles  which  were  common  to  several  provinces. 

The  products  of  mines,  forests,  fields,  rivers  and  bays 
were  sent  in  great  profusion;  also  manufactures,  chiefly 
the  work  of  individuals,  representing  the  utensils  used 
in  farming,  housekeeping  and  social  life.  Scores  of 
musical  instruments,  hundreds  of  bamboo  implements, 
every  form  of  weapon,  ancient  and  modem,  as  well  as 
needlework,  specimens  of  adept  handiwork  of  the  natives, 
both  men  and  women,  were  collected  and  exhibited  first 
in  Manila. 

The  exhibit  as  presented  at  St.  Louis  cost  over 
$1,000,000,  of  which  $800,000  was  paid  by  the  Insular 
Government ; a concession  of  $200,000  was  made  by  the 
World’s  Fair  Directors.  The  display  embraced  70,000 
exhibits,  arranged  in  over  300  classes  and  more  than  100 
groups.  It  was  on  a picturesque  tract  of  forty-seven 
acres.  Perhaps  the  most  striking  feature  of  the  display 
was  its  naturalness.  More  than  1,100  persons  were 
housed  in  the  reservation.  The  Filipino  people  were 
gathered  in  villages,  in  houses  built  by  their  own  hands. 
There  they  lived  abiding  by  the  customs  of  their  various 
tribes.  An  elaborate  system  of  buildings  had  been 
erected  in  the  enclosure.  Special  attention  was  paid  to 
the  landscape,  and  a large  lake  was  at  the  service  of  the 
water  Moros  and  other  coast  tribes. 

The  Philippine  people  gave  in  this  Exposition  proof 
of  the  high-spirited  patriotic  pride  which  induced  them 
to  make  sacrifices  that  the  resources  and  conditions  of 
their  country  might  appear  in  a dignified  manner  before 
the  world.  Many  of  the  honorary  Philippine  Commis- 


364 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


sioners  recently  in  this  country,  as  members  of  the  Civil 
Commission  and  as  governors  of  provinces,  contributed 
largely  to  the  success  of  the  display.  One  hundred 
Philippine  youths  studying  in  the  United  States  spent 
a month  or  more  at  the  Fair,  housed  in  the  Philippine 
grounds  and  serving  as  guides  through  the  display. 

High  on  the  hill  overlooking  the  reservation,  within 
a grove  of  sheltering  oak  trees,  was  the  Model  Camp 
occupied  by  Philippine  Scouts.  They  represented  the 
Philippine  contingent  of  the  Regular  Army  of  the  United 
States.  At  the  suggestion  of  Major  William  H.  John- 
ston, who  commanded,  the  plan  of  bringing  them  to  St. 
Louis  as  an  independent  military  display  was  adopted. 
Four  out  of  fifty  companies  making  up  the  Philippine 
Scouts  were  selected,  representing  Macabebes,  Ilocanos, 
Tagalos  and  Visayans.  In  each  company  some  of  the 
original  Scouts  still  serve.  Most  of  them  have  been  under 
fire,  and  a few  carry  scars  of  former  campaigns.  One 
of  the  novel  Exposition  sights  every  afternoon  was  the 
daily  dress  parade  and  drill  of  the  Scouts.  In  field  move- 
ment, manual  of  arms  and  general  soldierly  deportment, 
they  compared  favorably  with  any  military  force  on  the 
ground,  except,  perhaps,  the  West  Point  Cadets.  The 
men  as  a rule  make  neat,  trim-looking  soldiers,  and  full 
of  fight. 

Housed  in  the  cuartel  was  another  native  organization 
of  two  hundred  soldiers  and  eighty-five  musicians,  known 
as  the  Philippine  Constabulary.  All  the  Christian  tribes 
in  the  islands  were  represented  in  this  battalion,  and  in 
addition  there  were  nine  Moros.  These  Moros  do  not 
wear  the  regular  campaign  cap,  as  it  was  originally 
agreed  not  to  interfere  in  any  way  with  the  religious 


LAW,  ORDER  AND  DISCIPLINE  365 


affairs  of  the  people,  and  they  are  permitted  to  wear  red 
fezes  in  accordance  with  their  Mohammedan  custom. 
The  Filipinos  in  the  battalion  were  trim,  orderly  and 
soldier-like  in  appearance,  though  noticeably  small  in 
stature,  like  the  Japanese.  While  the  Scouts  are  com- 
manded entirely  by  American  officers,  several  companies 
of  Constabulary  have  native  officers,  who  take  great 
pride  in  training  the  men  under  them.  The  commands 
to  both  these  military  organizations  were  given  in 
English,  and  the  bands  played  American  airs.  Sousa 
said,  after  hearing  a concert  by  the  Constabulary  band 
led  by  Lieutenant  Loving : 

“I  marvel  at  their  skill.” 

The  musical  feature  of  the  drills  was  striking,  show- 
ing in  a very  impressive  way  the  musical  nature  of  the 
Filipinos.  It  was  a sight  that  will  be  remembered — the 
formation  of  these  native  organizations  stretching  down 
the  green  parade  ground  at  sunset.  It  is  significant  of 
the  work  accomplished  in  the  Philippines — bringing  law 
and  order  and  discipline  out  of  insurrection  and  igno- 
rance, and  teaching  the  lesson  of  good  government. 

The  Visayan  Village,  on  the  shore  of  Arrow  Head 
Lake,  was  enclosed  by  a picturesque  fence  of  laced  bam- 
boo, and  consisted  of  about  twenty  houses.  In  these  the 
Visayans  lived  as  they  do  in  their  homes  in  the  islands. 
They  are  a people  of  artistic  temperament  and  good  mu- 
sicians. In  this  village  there  was  a church,  a theatre,  a 
market  and  a municipal  building. 

Two  tribes  of  Moros  were  represented.  The  Samal 
Moros  are  coast  dwellers,  seafaring  men  and  pirates. 
The  Lanao  people  are  from  the  interior  of  Mindanao. 
Very  little  is  known  about  the  inland  Moros,  but  repre- 


366 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


sentatives  of  some  of  the  most  savage  tribes  were  brought 
here.  The  hatred  between  the  various  tribes  of  Moros  is 
so  intense  and  so  sincere  that  a special  guard  was  on 
duty  in  the  villages. 

Probably  the  most  interesting  single  feature  of  the 
Exposition  was  the  Igorrote  Village.  This  included 
three  tribes : the  Bontoc,  the  Suyoc,  and  the  Tinguanes. 
The  Suyocs  are  the  miners,  and  showed  their  methods  of 
extracting  metal  from  ore.  Some  of  their  work  in  cop- 
per is  remarkable.  They  had  their  own  rice  paddies 
and  sweet-potato  patch.  The  Bontocs  are  the  head- 
hunters. Tatooing  is  considered  an  art  by  them,  and 
across  the  chest  of  several  chiefs  in  the  village  was  re- 
corded the  result  of  their  head-hunting  expeditions. 
These  Bontocs  are  the  dog  eaters  of  whom  so  much  has 
been  written  in  the  newspapers.  The  Tinguanes  are 
agriculturalists  and  of  a milder  disposition. 

The  Negritos  are  the  aborigines  of  the  Philippines. 
They  are  black,  squat  and  kinky  headed.  They  look 
like  the  African  Negi’o,  but  are  of  smaller  stature,  low 
in  intellect  and  primitive  in  their  methods  of  living. 
They  have  no  permanent  homes  in  the  islands,  wandering 
from  place  to  place  in  small  groups  and  living  on  herbs 
and  roots  and  what  game  they  can  shoot.  They  are 
very  skillful  with  the  bow  and  arrow.  The  Manguianes, 
occupying  a special  section  of  the  Negrito  Village,  were 
from  the  Island  of  Mindoro,  and  were  seen  to  be  a unique 
race. 

Laguna  de  Bay,  or  Arrow  Head  Lake,  was  a pictur- 
esque sheet  of  water  fronting  the  reservation.  The 
Moros  gave  exhibitions  on  the  lake  of  the  way  they 
handle  their  crude  craft,  and  how  they  carry  on  their 


FORESTRY  AND  AGRICULTURE  367 


pearl  fishing.  The  lake  was  crossed  by  three  bridges, 
illustrating  native  architecture,  the  main  bridge  being  a 
reproduction  of  the  famous  structure  over  the  Pasig,  the 
“Puente  De  Espana.”  The  main  entrance  was  through 
the  Walled  City,  reproducing  the  Spanish  walls  sur- 
rounding the  City  of  Manila,  in  which  are  exhibited  relics 
of  the  various  Philippine  wars.  Fronting  the  main 
square  was  the  Educational  Building,  a reproduction  of 
one  of  the  most  native  cathedrals.  In  the  center  of  the 
square  was  a monument  erected  to  the  memory  of  Magel- 
lan, by  whom  the  Philippines  were  discovered  only  a 
score  of  years  after  Columbus  discovered  this  country. 
The  square  was  flanked  on  all  sides  by  reproductions  of 
well-known  structures  in  Manila. 

The  Forestry  Building  was  really  an  enlarged  native 
house,  made  of  Philippine  woods,  with  a long  veranda 
of  bamboo  shaded  with  coils  of  rattan.  Several  speci- 
mens of  hardwood  shown,  the  most  valuable  being  narra, 
were  often  mistaken  for  mahogany.  The  Mining  Build- 
ing contained  over  2,000  samples  of  mineral  products 
of  the  Philippine  Islands,  besides  methods  of  mining  and 
gold  washing  and  the  transformation  of  the  ores  into 
metal  and  metal  work.  There  was  a great  abundance  of 
copper  ore,  gold  ore,  and  coal,  petroleum,  sulphur,  mar- 
ble, and  a kind  of  kaolin,  etc.  The  Agricultural  Build- 
ing had  in  it  ten  thousand  exhibits,  showing  agricultural 
resources,  implements  used,  certain  products  of  agricul- 
tural industry,  horticultural  products,  including  tropical 
fruits,  and  vehicles  of  land  transportation-  The  Ethno- 
logical Building  contained  a remarkable  collection  of 
arms,  implements,  wearing  apparel,  adornments  and  in- 
numerable objects  used  in  the  different  tribal  life  of  the 


368 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


islands.  In  the  Hospital  Service  Building  ample  pro- 
vision was  made  for  caring  for  the  sick  people  living  on 
the  reservation. 

In  the  Foreign  Commerce  and  Native  Industry  Build- 
ing was  a collection  of  over  four  thousand  samples  of 
goods,  imported  to  the  Philippines,  with  full  data,  which 
were  of  special  interest  to  the  American  manufacturer 
and  exporter. 

The  Government  Building  was  an  imitation  of  the 
Avuntamento  or  Government  Building  of  the  Insular 
Government  in  Manila,  and  in  it  were  seen  choice  ex- 
hibits of  art,  liberal  arts  and  sciences  and  some  Govern- 
ment displays  of  the  principal  insular  bureaus.  An  in- 
teresting feature  of  the  reservation  was  the  large  relief 
map  made  by  Father  Algue,  a Jesuit  priest,  who  has 
charge  of  the  Manila  Observatory.  The  map  covered  an 
area  of  110X75  feet  in  the  open,  and  was  surrounded  by 
a circular  plank  walk.  More  than  two  thousand  islands 
were  shown  in  their  proper  shape  and  proportionate 
sizes.  Inside  the  building,  from  which  the  wall  around 
the  main  map  extends,  were  eighteen  relief  maps.  These 
showed  the  mines,  hot  and  cold  springs,  location  of  tribes 
and  races,  forestry  and  agriculture,  and  other  physical 
features  of  interest  in  the  archipelago. 

The  postal  service  in  the  country,  and  the  tents  and 
utensils  used  by  the  soldiers  in  the  early  days  of  the 
American  occupation,  showed  the  progress  that  has  been 
made  in  the  islands  in  six  years.  The  forestry  exhibition 
included  hundreds  of  pieces  of  wood  representing  the 
produce  of  various  forests,  and  a round  table  made  in  a 
solid  piece  of  wood  nine  feet  six  inches  across.  Unlike 
similar  pieces  of  wood  in  the  United  States,  cut  across 


IcORROTES 


TEACHING  IN  A MODEL  SCHOOL  369 


the  trunk  of  the  tree,  this  was  taken  from  the  heart  of  the 
tree,  the  other  portions  being  removed,  not  with  saws,  but 
wdth  axes. 

The  Educational  Exhibit  was  one  of  the  finest  in  the 
entire  collection.  Prominent  on  the  wall  in  the  room 
containing  it  vTas  a copy  of  a letter  sent  to  a son  of 
President  Roosevelt  by  a native  boy,  and  in  the  same 
frame  the  reply  of  the  President,  together  with  his  photo- 
graph. It  was  feared  that  the  President  would  be  inun- 
dated with  letters  from  other  native  boys  hoping  for 
similar  replies.  Several  hundred  volumes  dealing  with 
the  Philippines,  from  the  libraries  of  Europe,  had  been 
collected. 

Probably  the  most  effective  educational  exhibit  was 
the  Model  School  conducted  by  Miss  Pilar  Zamora,  an 
accomplished  graduate  of  the  highest  institution  in 
Manila,  and  a practical  teacher.  Within  a trim  little 
nipa  and  bamboo  cottage  in  the  rear  of  the  Manila  build- 
ing fifty  little  savages,  recruited  from  the  various  vil- 
lages, gathered  each  day  and  fashioned  English  letters 
on  big  blackboards  mounted  on  bamboo  poles.  Some 
of  the  most  advanced  pupils  wTere  taught  composition, 
geography  and  arithmetic.  Those  who  witnessed  this 
remarkable  scene  were  impressed  with  the  eagerness  of  the 
tiny  Filipinos  to  learn  English,  and  the  intelligence  of 
their  bright  brown  faces. 

Antaero,  aged  twelve,  the  only  Igorrote  on  the  reserva- 
tion who  knew  English,  had  been  in  an  American  school 
in  the  mountains  of  Luzon  for  some  months.  In  the 
village  of  his  people  Antaero  joins  in  the  spirit-dance 
with  the  vehemence  of  the  oldest  head-hunter,  and  chants 
the  raucous  refrain  of  his  tribe  with  apparent  relish. 


370 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


Within  the  schoolhouse  he  is  quiet,  observant,  tractable 
and  courteous. 

“Did  you  like  to  go  to  school  in  the  Philippines?” 
some  one  asked  him. 

“Yes,”  he  replied. 

“Do  you  want  to  go  to  school  back  there?” 

“Yes.” 

“What  are  you  going  to  do  when  you  are  a man  ?” 

Antaero  hesitated.  The  people  of  his  tribe  were  then 
beating  their  brass  instruments  as  they  whirled  about  in 
their  wild  dance. 

“Would  you  like  to  teach  school?”  Antaero  was  asked. 

“Yes,”  he  said  promptly. 

“Would  you  wear  American  clothes  then?” 

Antaero  laughed.  “I  like  string  breech,”  he  said. 

The  “string  breech”  or  “breech  clout,”  a piece  of  red 
cloth  about  as  wide  as  one’s  two  hands,  tied  about  his 
middle  and  allowed  to  fall  to  his  knees,  was  Antaero’s 
only  costume. 


CHAPTER  XXXVI 


DUTY  OF  THE  AMERICAN  CHURCH 


Responsibility  Early  Recognized — Chaplains  and 
Secretaries  for  Soldiers — Mission  Work  Among  the 
Filipinos — Providing  for  the  Religious  Needs  of 
Americans — Bible  and  Tract  Distribution. 

“ \ MERICA  is  another  name  for  Opportunity,”  said 
F*  a New  England  theologian  in  the  last  century. 
The  remark  was  true  when  made ; for  “America”  read 
“The  Philippines,”  and  it  will  be  strictly  up-to-date.  It 
is  a fact  already  recognized  in  the  earlier  chapters  of  this 
volume  that  the  religious  denominations  in  the  Homeland 
were  aroused  to  their  duty  toward  the  Filipinos  by  the 
thunder  of  Dewey’s  guns  in  Manila  Harbor.  Baptists, 
Congregationalists,  Disciples,  Methodists,  Presbyterians, 
and  United  Brethren  said  at  once  that  something  must 
be  done  for  them,  and  splendid  work  has  been  accom- 
plished. 

There  are  many  encouraging  features  of  missionary 
work  in  the  archipelago  at  this  time.  What  has  been 
done  gives  a bright  promise  of  what  may  be  expected 
during  the  coming  decade.  The  period  of  experiment 
has  passed ; the  missionaries  know  the  strange  people  bet- 
ter than  they  did,  and  the  Filipinos  understand  something 
of  the  practical  character  of  Protestantism. 

The  missionaries  are  a united  body ; while  representing 


372 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


denominations  to  those  who  stand  behind  them,  they  pre- 
sent a practical  demonstration  of  Federation  to  the  Fili- 
pinos, who  stand  before  them.  Sheep  are  not  coaxed 
from  one  pasture  to  another  in  order  to  make  any  flock 
larger  than  those  in  the  neighboring  fields,  but  there  is 
a delightful  spirit  of  brotherhood  among  the  workers — 
missionaries,  Association  secretaries,  Bible  Society  rep- 
resentatives, colporters  and  tract  distributors.  With  the 
whole  archipelago  before  them  and  eight  million  people 
accessible,  there  should  be  no  crowding  and  no  jealousy, 
and  there  is  none.  Dr.  Stuntz  says : “The  missionary 

who  is  here  in  the  Philippines  primarily  to  build  up  a 
denomination,  should  be  immediately  recalled.  We  are 
here  to  build  up  the  Kingdom  of  Righteousness,  and  only 
so  far  as  our  native  churches  hasten  this  end  are  they  of 
any  real  use  to  Him  in  whose  name  we  labor.” 

The  language  difficulties  that  confronted  the  mission- 
aries at  the  outset  have  been  largely  overcome  by  the 
division  of  territory  agreed  upon  early  in  their  residence 
in  the  islands.  The  principal  language  which  Methodist 
workers  use  differs  widely  from  that  in  which  the  Bap- 
tists tell  the  story  of  the  Cross,  while  Presbyterians  and 
Congregationalists  talk  in  yet  other  tongues;  Presby- 
terian woi’kers  laboring  side  by  side  with  Methodists  on 
one  island  and  Baptists  on  another  use  both  Tagalog  and 
Visayan  as  well  as  English  and  Spanish  in  their  several 
fields.  The  rapidly  advancing  translations  of  portions 
of  the  Bible  and  tracts  into  the  vernacular  is  a great 
boon  to  the  missionaries.  More  lasting  good  can  be  ac- 
complished when  the  people  have  the  Word  of  God  and 
helpful  literature  in  their  own  tongues. 

Another  hopeful  feature  of  the  language  question  is 


CLASSES  OF  PEOPLE  REPRESENTED  373 


the  fact  that  all  the  school  children  and  many  adults  ai’e 
learning  English ; it  will  soon  be  possible  to  carry  on 
Sunday-schools  and  work  among  the  young  people  in 
the  unifying  language  of  Christendom;  but  the  trans- 
lation of  Scriptures  and  simple  Gospel  truths  into  the 
native  languages  will  be  needed  for  a generation  at  least. 

The  American  Church  has  several  classes  of  people  in 
the  Philippines  to  whom  it  owes  a pressing  duty  at  this 
time : the  pagan  tribes  in  the  North,  as  truly  heathen  as 
the  people  of  Central  Africa;  the  Mohammedans  in  the 
South,  as  fierce  and  bigoted  as  the  Sandwich  Islanders 
were  a century  ago;  the  Christian  Filipinos  (Roman 
Catholic)  ; the  followers  of  Aglipay  (lapsed  Roman 
Catholics)  ; Chinamen,  probably  one  hundred  thousand, 
as  far  from  Christianity  as  their  relatives  and  friends  in 
Canton;  the  American  Army  and  Navy;  many  seamen 
from  other  countries  constantly  in  the  chief  ports ; a 
thousand  American  teachers  scattered  over  every  province 
in  the  archipelago,  and  Americans  in  the  Civil  Govern- 
ment and  in  business,  five  or  six  thousand  in  Manila,  and 
hundreds  of  others,  like  the  teachers,  living  in  smaller 
cities  and  in  towns  and  pueblos  where  their  duties  call 
them. 

The  narration  of  these  classes  of  people  awaiting  the 
Gospel  message  indicates  the  variety  of  forms  in  which 
this  message  must  be  delivered.  New  agencies  are  not 
needed,  but  there  must  be  a strengthening  of  each  one  at 
work  there  to-day.  For  the  pagan,  the  Mohammedan 
and  the  Confucianist,  little  has  been  done.  In  Manila 
a few  noble  men  are  working  among  the  Chinese,  but 
more  could  be  wisely  employed  there;  the  Igorrotes  and 
the  Moros  have  scarcely  been  touched;  a devoted  couple 


374 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


are  laboring  among  the  seamen  in  Manila — they  should 
have  a suitable  building  for  their  work,  and  their  income 
should  be  doubled.  Protestant  missionaries  should  gather 
the  fruit  that  Aglipay  is  shaking  from  the  Roman 
Catholic  tree — people  falling  away  from  Rome  should 
be  welded  into  a positive  force  for  Protestant  Chris- 
tianity instead  of  having  for  their  creed  hatred  of  the 
friars  and  the  Roman  Heirarchy;  the  Filipinos  who  are 
still  Catholics,  a great  majority  of  the  population  having 
been  freed  from  the  domination  of  the  friars,  are  coming 
more  and  more  to  have  the  American  spirit  of  liberty  in 
spiritual  as  well  as  political  matters,  and  thousands  of 
them  are  identifying  themselves  with  Protestantism — 
could  the  various  missions  be  strengthened  the  ingather- 
ing would  be  doubled  and  trebled  within  a year. 

The  problems  of  Heathenism  and  Mohammedanism 
and  Catholicism,  grave  as  they  are,  are  not  so  serious  as 
the  one  which  has  to  do  with  American  Protestantism. 
In  the  Army,  in  the  Civil  Government  and  in  business 
there  are  a large  number  of  Americans  who  are  identified 
with  the  Roman  Catholic  Church  at  home;  they  enter 
naturally  into  the  spacious  cathedral  in  the  Capital  or 
in  other  fine  church  edifices  in  Manila,  and  in  every  town 
of  importance  in  which  they  live.  Not  so  the  Protestants. 
In  Manila  they  will  find  three  or  four  services  carried 
on  for  their  benefit,  but  no  one  of  them  has  been  in  a 
church  building ; there  is  a mission  aspect  about  them 
all.  This  is  not  said  by  way  of  criticism,  for  the  faithful 
pastors  sent  out  by  the  home  churches  are  doing  the  best 
that  the}r  can  with  the  material  given  them.  What  the 
three  denominations  which  carry  on  work  for  Americans 
in  Manila  should  do  is  to  give  them  suitable  houses  of 


WHAT  PASTORS  AT  HOME  MAY  DO  375 


worship.  Bishop  Brent  has  the  money  for  a building, 
but  not  for  the  furnishings;  the  Presbyterians  are  expect- 
ing a chapel  at  a cost  of  $10,000 — the  main  church 
should  follow  speedily;  the  Methodists  should  also  have 
the  modest  church  building  for  which  they  are  seeking 
funds. 

But  more  than  brick  and  mortar  must  be  given  by  the 
American  Church.  Pastors  and  people  having  church 
members  and  friends  who  are  starting  for  Manila 
should  seek  to  have  them  identified  with  one  of  the 
American  churches  in  that  city,  and  if  possible  have 
them  join  it,  even  though  they  are  to  remain  oixly  a year 
or  two.  An  Amei'ican  in  the  Philippines  needs  every  re- 
straining and  helpful  force  by  which  he  can  be  sui’- 
rounded.  If  he  is  not  going  to  remain  in  Manila,  let 
him  try  to  form  an  alliance  with  some  American  mission- 
ai’y  in  the  provinces.  In  some  of  the  towns  visited  by 
the  writer,  the  fi’iendship  existing  between  a teacher  or 
pi'ovincial  officer  and  a missionary  family  was  beautiful 
to  see,  but  too  often  there  was  seemingly  a lack  of  mu- 
tual intei’est— the  teacher  or  officer  had  his  duties  and 
friends  and  the  missionary,  who  was  giving  heai't  and 
soul  to  the  natives,  was  too  deeply  engrossed  in  his  labors 
for  them  to  do  much  for  his  American  brothers.  It  is  a 
fair  question  whether  here  and  elsewhere  more  would  not 
be  accomplished  for  the  natives  if  moi'e  were  done  by 
the  missionaries  for  the  Amei’icans  resident  in  the  field. 
But  cei'tainly  American  church  members  in  the  Philip- 
pines have  a clear  duty  toward  both  the  missionary  and 
the  Filipino. 

For  when  all  has  been  said  that  can  be  in  favor  of 
the  teacher,  officer,  soldier  or  business  man,  it  must  be 


376 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


added  that  hundreds  of  American  Christians  in  the  Phil- 
ippines are  not  living  out  the  faith  which  they  have  pro- 
fessed. Satisfying  conscience  with  one  excuse  or 
another — climate,  health,  distance,  weariness,  business, 
friendship- — they  do  not  accept  their  responsibilities  as 
Christians.  There  are  four  or  five  hundred  out  of  five 
thousand  in  Manila  who  are  usually  found  in  the  sanc- 
tuary on  the  Lord’s  Day,  and  as  many  more  who  are 
occasionally  seen  there.  How  to  bring  a larger  number 
of  the  Protestants  into  relation  with  the  Protestant 
Church  is  the  problem  before  the  pastors  in  Manila  and 
the  provinces. 

The  duty  of  the  American  Church  would  seem  to  be  to 
double  her  forces — men  and  means — in  the  native  work; 
lessen  the  period  of  its  missionaries  to  five  years  as  a 
maximum,  in  order  to  preserve  health  and  life;  see  that 
the  Army  and  Navy  are  provided  with  efficient  chaplains 
properly  equipped  for  their  work;  look  after  the  seamen 
who  should  find  true  friends  in  a port  over  which  the 
Stars  and  Stripes  float;  enlarge  the  force  of  Bible  and 
tract  distributors ; increase  the  number  of  secretaries  sent 
out  by  the  Young  Men’s  Christian  Association  for  work 
among  the  young  men  in  Civil,  Military  and  Naval  life, 
providing  them  with  suitable  buildings ; erect  two  or 
three  church  buildings  for  Americans  in  Manila,  and 
provide  one  at  any  other  place  where  there  is  a sufficient 
number  to  warrant  a service,  and  then  to  seek  as  now, 
by  every  possible  means,  to  bring  every  American  Protes- 
tant, by  profession  or  affiliation,  into  touch  with  a 
Protestant  clergyman  as  soon  as  he  reaches  the  Philip- 
pines. 

And  when  all  that  has  been  done,  then  the  members  of 


AND  HAVING  DONE  ALL— PRAY  377 


the  Church  at  home  should  pray  for  those  who  have 
gone  forth  from  her  bosom,  lest  they  fail  to  represent 
truly,  to  those  who  have  been  in  darkness  these  many 
centuries,  the  spirit  of  American  Christianity.  What 
church  buildings  and  faithful  ministrations  on  the  part 
of  Christians  at  home  and  abroad  may  fail  to  do,  prayer 
may  accomplish,  for  in  the  words  of  Tennyson: 

“More  things  are  wrought  by  prayer 
Than  this  world  dreams  of.  Wherefore,  let  thy  voice 
Rise  like  a fountain  for  me,  night  and  day. 

For  what  are  men  better  than  sheep  or  goats 
That  nourish  a blind  life  within  the  brain,- 
If,  knowing  God,  they  lift  not  hands  of  prayer, 

Both  for  themselves  and  those  who  call  them  friends? 

For  so  the  whole  round  earth  is  every  way 
By  gold  chains  bound  about  the  feet  of  God.” 


APPENDIX 


PATHS  OF  PEACE  AND  PROSPERITY. 

You  will  instruct  the  Commission  to  proceed  to  the  city  of 
Manila,  where  they  will  make  their  principal  office,  and  to  com- 
municate with  the  military  governor  of  the  Philippine  Islands, 
whom  you  will  at  the  same  time  direct  to  render  to  them  every 
assistance  within  his  power  in  the  performance  of  their  duties. 
Without  hampering  them  by  too  specific  instructions,  they  should 
in  general  be  enjoined,  after  making  themselves  familiar  with  the 
conditions  and  needs  of  the  country,  to  devote  their  attention  in 
the  first  instance  to  the  establishment  of  municipal  governments, 
in  which  the  natives  of  the  islands,  both  in  the  cities  and  in  the 
rural  communities,  shall  be  afforded  the  opportunity  to  manage 
their  own  local  affairs  to  the  fullest  extent  of  which  they  are 
capable,  and  subject  to  the  least  degree  of  supervision  and  control 
■which  a careful  study  of  their  capacities  and  observation  of  the 
workings  of  a native  control  show  to  be  consistent  with  the  mainte- 
nance of  law,  order  and  loyalty. 

In  all  forms  of  government  and  administrative  provisions 
which  they  are  authorized  to  prescribe,  the  Commission  should 
bear  in  mind  that  the  government  which  they  are  establishing  is 
designed  not  for  our  satisfaction,  or  for  the  expression  of  our 
theoretical  view's,  but  for  the  happiness,  peace  and  prosperity  of 
the  people  of  the  Philippine  Islands,  and  the  measures  adopted 
should  be  made  to  conform  to  their  customs,  habits,  and  even 
their  prejudices,  to  the  fullest  extent  consistent  with  the  accom- 
plishment of  the  indispensable  requisite  of  just  and  effective  gov- 
ernment. 

At  the  same  time  the  Commission  should  bear  in  mind,  and  the 
people  of  the  islands  should  be  made  plainly  to  understand,  that 
there  are  certain  great  principles  of  government  w'hieh  have  been 
made  the  basis  of  our  governmental  system  which  wre  deem  essen- 
tial to  the  rule  of  law  and  the  maintenance  of  individual  freedom, 
and  of  which  they  have,  unfortunately,  been  denied  the  experience 
possessed  by  us;  that  there  are  also  certain  practical  rules  of 


380 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


government  which  we  have  found  to  be  essential  to  the  preserva- 
tion of  these  great  principles  of  liberty  and  law,  and  that  these 
principles  and  these  rules  of  government  must  be  established  and 
maintained  in  their  islands  for  the  sake  of  their  liberty  and  happi- 
ness, however  much  they  may  conflict  with  the  customs  or  laws 
of  procedure  with  which  they  are  familiar. 

Upon  all  oiBcers  and  employees  of  the  United  States,  both 
civil  and  military,  should  be  impressed  a sense  of  duty  to  observe 
not  merely  the  material,  but  the  personal  and  social  rights  of 
the  people  of  the  islands,  and  to  treat  them  with  the  same  cour- 
tesy and  respect  for  their  personal  dignity  which  the  people  of 
the  United  States  are  accustomed  to  require  from  each  other. 

The  articles  of  capitulation  of  the  city  of  Manila  on  the  13th 
of  August,  1898,  concluded  with  these  words:  “This  city,  its 

inhabitants,  its  churches  and  religious  worship,  its  educational 
establishments,  and  its  private  property  of  all  descriptions,  are 
placed  under  the  special  safeguard  of  the  faith  and  honor  of  the 
American  Army.” 

I believe  that  this  pledge  has  been  faithfully  kept.  As  high 
and  sacred  an  obligation  rests  upon  the  Government  of  the  United 
States  to  give  protection  for  property  and  life,  civil  and  religious 
freedom,  and  wise,  firm,  and  unselfish  guidance  in  the  paths  of 
peace  and  prosperity  to  all  the  people  of  the  Philippine  Islands. 
I charge  this  Commission  to  labor  for  the  full  performance  of  this 
obligation,  which  concerns  the  honor  and  conscience  of  their 
country,  in  the  firm  hope  that  through  their  labors  all  the  inhab- 
itants of  the  Philippine  Islands  may  come  to  look  back  with 
gratitude  to  the  day  when  God  gave  victory  to  American  arms  at 
Manila  and  set  their  land  under  the  sovereignty  and  the  protec- 
tion of  the  people  of  the  United  States. 

(President  McKinley  in  his  letter  to  the  Secretary  of  War  an- 
nouncing the  appointment  of  the  Philippine  Commission,  April 
7,  1900.) 


THE  PHILIPPINES  FOR  THE  FILIPINOS. 


Our  foothold  in  the  Philippines  greatly  strengthens  our  position 
in  the  competition  for  the  trade  of  the  East;  but  we  are  governing 
the  Philippines  in  the  interest  of  the  Philippine  people  themselves. 
We  have  already  given  them  a large  share  in  their  government, 
and  our  purpose  is  to  increase  this  share  as  rapidly  as  they  give 
evidence  of  increasing  fitness  for  the  task.  The  great  majority 
of  the  officials  of  the  islands,  whether  elective  or  appointive,  are 
already  native  Filipinos.  We  are  providing  for  a legislative 
assembly. 

This  is  the  first  step  to  be  taken  in  the  future;  and  it  would  be 
eminently  unwise  to  declare  what  our  next  step  will  be  until  this 
first  step  has  been  taken  and  the  results  are  manifest.  To  have 
gone  faster  than  we  have  already  gone  in  giving  the  islanders  a 
constantly  increasing  measure  of  self-government  would  have  been 
disastrous.  At  the  present  moment  to  give  political  independence 
to  the  islands  would  result  in  the  immediate  loss  of  civil  rights, 
personal  liberty  and  public  order,  as  regards  the  mass  of  the 
Filipinos,  for  the  majority  of  the  islanders  have  been  given  these 
great  boons  by  us,  and  only  keep  them  because  we  vigilantly  safe- 
guard and  guarantee  them.  To  withdraw  our  government  from 
the  islands  at  this  time  would  mean  to  the  average  native  the  loss 
of  his  barely  won  civil  freedom. 

We  have  established  in  the  islands  a government  by  Americans, 
assisted  by  Filipinos.  We  are  steadily  striving  to  transform  this 
into  self-government  by  the  Filipinos,  assisted  by  Americans. 

(President  Roosevelt  in  his  reply  to  the  Committee  from  the 
Republican  National  Convention,  informing  him  of  his  nomination 
on  July  27,  1901.) 


FILIPINO  SELF-GOVERNMENT 


It  is  difficult  to  understand  how  any  citizen  of  the  United 
States,  much  less  a descendant  of  Revolutionary  stock,  can  tol- 
erate the  thought  of  permanently  denying  the  right  of  self-govern- 
ment to  the  Filipinos.  Can  we  hope  to  instil  into  the  minds  of 
our  descendants  reverence  and  devotion  for  a government  by  the 
people,  while  denying  ultimately  that  right  to  the  inhabitants  of 
distant  countries  whose  territory  we  have  acquired  either  by  pur- 
chase or  by  force? 

Can  we  say  to  the  Filipinos,  ‘‘Your  lives,  your  liberty  and  your 
property  may  be  taken  from  you  without  due  process  of  law  for 
all  time,”  and  expect  we  will  long  glory  in  that  feature  of  Magna 
Charta  which  has  become  incorporated,  in  substance  and  effect, 
into  the  constitution  of  every  State,  as  well  as  into  the  Fourteenth 
Amendment  to  the  Constitution  of  the  United  States?  Can  we 
hope  for  the  respect  of  the  civilized  world  while  proudly  guaran- 
teeing to  every  citizen  of  the  United  States  that  no  law  shall  be 
made  or  enforced  which  shall  abridge  the  privileges  or  immunities 
of  citizens  of  the  United  States,  or  deny  to  any  person  the  equal 
protection  of  the  laws,  and  at  the  same  time  not  only  deny  similar 
rights  to  the  inhabitants  of  the  Philippines,  but  take  away  from 
them  the  right  of  trial  by  jury  and  place  their  lives  and  the 
disposition  of  their  property  in  the  keeping  of  those  whom  we 
send  to  them  to  be  their  governors? 

We  shall  certainly  rue  it  as  a Nation  if  we  make  any  such 
attempt.  Viewing  the  question  even  from  the  standpoint  of 
national  selfishness,  there  is  no  prospect  that  the  $20,000,000  ex- 
pended in  the  purchase  of  the  islands,  and  the  $650,000,000  said  to 
have  been  since  disbursed,  will  ever  come  back  to  us.  The  acci- 
dent of  war  brought  the  Philippines  into  our  possession,  and  we 
are  not  at  liberty  to  disregard  the  responsibility  which  thus  came 
to  us;  but  that  responsibility  will  be  best  subserved  by  preparing 
the  islanders  as  rapidly  as  possible  for  self-government,  and 


“SELF-GOVERNMENT”  EXPLAINED  383 


giving  to  them  the  assurances  that  it  will  come  as  soon  as  they 
are  reasonably  prepared  for  it. 

(Judge  Parker  in  his  reply  to  the  Committee  from  the  Demo- 
cratic National  Convention  informing  him  of  his  nomination  on 
August  10,  1904.) 

“SELF-GOVERNMENT”  EXPLAINED. 

“You  are  entirely  right  in  assuming  that  as  I employed  the 
phrase  ‘self-government,’  it  was  intended  to  be  identical  with 
independence,  political  and  territorial.  After  noting  the  criticism 
referred  to  by  you,  I am  still  unable  to  understand  how  it  can 
be  said  that  a people  enjoy  self-government,  while  another  nation 
may  in  any  degree  whatever  control  their  action.  But  to  take 
away  all  possible  opportunity  for  conjecture,  it  shall  be  made 
clear  in  the  letter  of  acceptance  that  I am  in  hearty  accord  with 
that  plank  in  the  Democratic  platform  which  advocates  treating 
the  Filipinos  precisely  as  we  did  the  Cubans;  and  I also  favor 
making  the  promise  to  them  now  to  take  such  action  as  soon  as 
it  can  prudently  be  done.” 

(From  a letter  written  by  Judge  Parker  August  22, 1904,  to  John 
G.  Milburn,  of  Buffalo.) 


LIBERTY,  NOT  INDEPENDENCE  YET 


As  to  the  Philippines,  the  work  done  there  by  Judge  Taft  and 
his  associates  will  rank  among  the  highest  achievements  of 
colonial  administration  recorded  in  history.  Never  since  their 
discovery  has  there  been  such  general  peace  and  order;  so  thor- 
ough a protection  of  the  peaceable  and  restraint  of  evil-doers; 
so  wide  a diffusion  of  education;  so  complete  a guaranty  to 
industry  of  the  fruit  of  its  labors.  And  when  they  see  this  ener- 
getic and  efficient  government  carried  on,  free  from  the  venality 
and  bribery  which  formerly  seemed  to  them  a necessity  of  exist- 
ence, then,  indeed,  they  are  like  them  that  dream.  The  principal 
evil  from  which  they  still  suffer  has  its  origin  here. 

Some  well-meaning  people — and  others  not  so  well-meaning — 
are  constantly  persuading  them  that  they  are  oppressed,  and  that 
they  will  be  given  their  liberty,  as  they  choose  to  call  it,  as  soon 
as  the  Republican  Party  is  overthrown  in  this  country.  These 
are  the  true  enemies  of  the  Filipinos,  and  not  the  men  who  are 
striving  with  whole-hearted  energy  and  with  consummate  success 
to  ameliorate  their  condition  and  to  make  them  fit  for  self-gov- 
ernment and  all  its  attendant  advantages. 

The  so-called  anti-imperialists  confound  in  their  daily  speeches 
and  writings  two  absolutely  unrelated  ideas — the  liberty,  the  civil 
rights,  the  self-government  which  we  have  given  the  Filipinos,  and 
the  independence  which  the  best  of  them  do  not  want  and  know 
they  are  unable  to  maintain.  To  abandon  them  now,  to  cast  them 
adrift  at  the  mercy  of  accident,  would  be  an  act  of  cowardice  and 
treachery  which  would  gain  us  the  scorn  and  reproach  of  civiliza- 
tion. 

(The  Hon.  John  Hay,  Secretary  of  State  of  the  United  States, 
at  Jackson,  Mich.,  July  6,  1904.) 


SELF-GOVERNMENT  THE  GOAL 


When  the  last  National  Convention  met,  the  Philippines  also 
were  under  military  rule.  The  insurrectos  from  the  mountains 
spread  terror  among  the  peaceful  people  by  midnight  foray  and 
secret  assassinations.  Aguinaldo  bided  his  time  in  a secret  re- 
treat. Over  seventy  thousand  American  soldiers  from  more  than 
five  hundred  stations  held  a still  vigorous  enemy  in  check.  The 
Philippine  Commission  had  not  yet  begun  its  work. 

The  last  vestige  of  insurrection  has  been  swept  away.  With  their 
work  accomplished,  over  fifty-five  thousand  American  troops  have 
been  brought  back  across  the  Pacific.  Civil  government  has  been  es- 
tablished throughout  the  archipelago.  Peace  and  order  and  justice 
prevail.  The  Philippine  Commission,  guided  at  first  by  executive 
order  and  then  by  the  wise  legislation  of  Congress  in  the  Philip- 
pine Government  Act  of  July  1,  1902,  have  established  and  con- 
ducted a government  which  has  been  a credit  to  their  country  and 
a blessing  to  the  people  of  the  islands.  The  body  of  laws  which 
they  have  enacted  upon  careful  and  intelligent  study  of  the  needs 
of  the  country  challenges  comparison  with  the  statutes  of  any 
country.  The  personnel  of  civil  government  has  been  brought 
together  under  an  advanced  and  comprehensive  civil-service  law, 
which  has  been  rigidly  enforced.  A complete  census  has  been 
taken,  designed  to  be  there,  as  it  was  in  Cuba,  the  basis  for 
representative  government;  and  the  people  of  the  islands  will 
soon  proceed  under  provisions  already  made  by  Congress  to  the 
election  of  a representative  assembly,  in  which,  for  the  first  time 
in  their  history,  they  may  have  a voice  in  the  making  of  their  own 
laws. 

In  the  meantime  the  local  and  provincial  governments  are  in 
the  hands  of  officers  elected  by  the  Filipinos;  and  in  the  great 
central  offices,  in  the  Commission,  on  the  Bench,  in  the  executive 
departments,  the  most  distinguished  men  of  the  Filipino  race  are 
taking  part  in  the  government  of  their  people.  A free-school 
system  has  been  established  and  hundreds  of  thousands  of  chil- 


386 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


dren  are  learning  lessons  which  will  help  fit  them  for  self-govern- 
ment. The  seeds  of  religions  strife  existing  in  the  bitter 
controversy  between  the  people  and  the  religious  orders  have  been 
deprived  of  potency  for  harm  by  the  purchase  of  the  friars’  lands, 
and  their  practical  withdrawal.  By  the  Act  of  Congress  of 
March  2,  1903,  a gold  standard  has  been  established  to  take  the 
place  of  the  fluctuating  silver  currency.  The  unit  of  value  is 
made  exactly  one-half  the  value  of  the  American  gold  dollar,  so 
that  American  money  is  practically  part  of  their  currency  system. 
To  enable  the  Philippine  Government  to  issue  this  new  currency, 
$6,000,000  was  borrowed  by  them  in  1903,  in  the  City  of  New 
York;  and  it  was  borrowed  at  a net  interest  charge  of  1%  per 
cent,  per  annum.  The  trade  of  the  islands  has  increased,  not- 
withstanding adverse  conditions.  During  the  last  five  years  of 
peace  under  Spanish  rule,  the  average  total  trade  of  the  islands 
was  less  than  $36,000,000.  During  the  fiscal  year  ending  June 
30,  1903,  the  trade  of  the  islands  was  over  $66,000,000.  There  is 
but  one  point  of  disturbance,  and  that  is  the  country  of  the 
Mohammedan  Moros,  where  there  is  an  occasional  fitful  savage 
outbreak  against  the  enforcement  of  the  law  recently  made  to 
provide  for  adequate  supervision  and  control  to  put  an  end  to 
the  practice  of  human  slavery. 

When  Governor  Taft  sailed  from  Manila  in  December  last  to 
fill  the  higher  office  where  he  will  still  guard  the  destinies  of  the 
people  for  whom  he  has  done  such  great  and  noble  service,  he 
was  followed  to  the  shore  by  a mighty  throng,  not  of  repressed 
and  sullen  subjects,  but  of  free  and  peaceful  people,  whose  tears 
and  prayers  of  affectionate  farewell  showed  that  they  had  already 
begun  to  learn  that  “our  flag  has  not  lost  its  gift  of  benediction 
in  its  world-wide  journey  to  their  shores.” 

None  can  foretell  the  future;  but  there  seems  no  reasonable 
cause  to  doubt  that,  under  the  policy  already  effectively  inaugu- 
rated, the  institutions  already  implanted,  and  the  processes 
already  begun  in  the  Philippine  Islands,  if  these  be  not  repressed 
and  interrupted,  the  Philippine  people  will  follow  in  the  footsteps 
of  the  people  of  Cuba;  that  more  slowly  indeed,  because  they 
are  not  as  advanced,  yet  as  surely,  they  will  grow  in  capacity  for 
self-government,  and,  receiving  power  as  they  grow  in  capacity, 
will  come  to  bear  substantially  such  relations  to  the  people  of  the 
United  States  as  do  now  the  people  of  Cuba,  differing  in  details 


THE  PHILIPPINES  TO  BE  LIKE  CUBA  387 


as  conditions  and  needs  differ,  but  the  same  in  principle  and  the 
same  in  beneficent  results. 

(The  Hon.  Elihu  Root,  ex-Secretary  of  War,  as  temporary 
Chairman  of  the  National  Republican  Convention  at  Chicago,  111, 
June  21,  1904.) 


THE  AMERICAN  UNION  AN  ASIATIC  POWER 


With  the  acquisition  of  the  Philippines,  whether  wisely  or 
unwisely  done,  the  United  States  has  assumed  toward  those  coun- 
tries the  new  and  additional  relation  of  a neighbor.  The  enormous 
development  of  the  resources  of  the  United  States  and  the 
increased  necessity  for  foreign  markets  have  strengthened  the 
reasons  which  have  controlled  its  policy  in  the  past,  and  the 
proximity  of  its  new  possessions,  with  their  millions  of  inhabi- 
tants, has  brought  it  nearer  than  ever  in  sympathy  to  these 
peoples  and  their  governments.  The  American  Union  has  become 
an  Asiatic  power.  It  has  new  duties  to  discharge  and  enlarged 
interests  to  protect.  But  its  record  of  a hundred  years  of  honor- 
able intercourse  with  that  region  will  be  a safe  guide  for  the 
conduct  of  alfairs.  Its  task  will  be  well  done  if  it  shall  aid  in 
giving  to  the  world  a freer  market,  and  to  the  inhabitants  of  the 
Orient  to  blessings  of  Christian  civilization. 

(The  Hon.  John  W.  Foster,  ex-Secretary  of  State  of  the  United 
States,  in  his  book  entitled  “American  Diplomacy  in  the  Orient.”) 


THE  DUTY  OF  AMERICANS  IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


When  the  history  of  the  Spanish  war  is  written,  including  the 
sequelae  in  Cuba,  Porto  Rico  and  the  Philippines,  the  historian 
will  find  no  episode  of  our  country’s  life  in  which  the  Nation  has 
played  a higher  and  nobler  part.  In  the  heat  of  political  contro- 
versy the  motives  of  the  chief  actors  in  that  war  have  been 
questioned,  and  possibly  this  may  continue  for  a generation; 
but  the  future  historian  will  judge  of  the  acts  of  the  Nation,  not 
by  querulous  criticism  of  professional  critics  or  by  the  abuse  and 
misinterpretation  of  motives  by  heated  partisan  opponents,  but 
by  what  the  Nation  did,  by  what  the  Nation  said,  by  what  it 
promised,  and  by  what  it  fulfilled.  . . . 

The  Spanish  war  opened  other  possibilities  which  no  man  could 
foresee.  In  following  the  proper  course  of  a combatant  to  dis- 
able the  enemy  wherever  he  is  found,  the  United  States  struck 
down  the  power  of  Spain  in  the  Philippine  Islands ; struck  it  down 
at  a time  when  one  insurrection  by  the  people  against  the  sov- 
ereignty was  very  recent,  and  at  a time  when  another  was  begin- 
ning. The  impetus  of  Dewey’s  victory  strengthened  the  insurgent 
cause,  and  with  the  coming  of  Anderson  and  Merritt  and  Otis, 
and  the  signing  of  the  protocol,  the  United  States  was  presented 
with  this  dilemma:  Shall  we  in  the  treaty  of  peace  return  the 

Philippine  Islands  to  Spain;  shall  we  turn  them  over  to  the 
insurgent  forces,  or  shall  we  accept  the  sovereignty  over  them 
from  Spain  and  discharge  our  duty  as  sovereign  toward  the 
people? 

It  was  a very  serious  issue.  These  islands  lay  seven  thousand 
miles  away  from  our  coast,  were  far  in  the  Tropics,  and  were  peo- 
pled by  a race  with  which  we  had  had  up  to  that  time  nothing  to  do 
and  nothing  in  common,  except  that  we  had  fought  together  against 
Spain  to  deprive  her  of  her  power  in  the  islands  and  had  encour- 
aged the  people  to  join  us  in  that  fight.  It  was  decided  that  if  we 
turned  the  islands  back  to  Spain  we  should  be  guilty  of  a breach 
of  faith  to  the  people  who  had  worked  and  co-operated  with  us 
in  driving  Spain  from  power.  The  plea  and  representation  that 


390 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


Spain  had  oppressed  them  appealed  to  us  and  invoked  our  sym- 
pathy in  their  struggle  for  their  liberties.  We  therefore  rid  them 
of  Spain  by  accepting  the  sovereignty  of  these  islands,  which  was 
as  legally'  passed  to  us  as  the  sovereignty  of  any  country  was  ever 
passed  or  transferred  from  one  government  to  another. 

Being  the  sovereign  in  these  islands,  then  the  question  came. 
What  was  our  duty  to  these  people?  Many  of  those  who  had  been 
prominent  in  insurgent  circles  as  leaders  desired  the  establish- 
ment of  an  independent  government.  There  were  others  who 
recognized  the  inability  of  their  people,  as  then  constituted,  to 
organize  and  maintain  a government  which  would  be  for  their 
welfare.  The  United  States  was  responsible  to  the  world  for 
the  maintenance  of  law  and  order  here  and  was  responsible  to 
Spain  for  the  preservation  of  the  rights  of  her  citizens  and  of 
her  corporations.  It  had  therefore  to  decide  whether,  as  a 
sovereign  with  the  responsibilities  of  a sovereign  and  with  the 
true  interests  of  these  people  at  heart,  it  could  trust  to  the 
chaotic  agglomeration  of  tribes  having  no  real  government  except 
a very  imperfect  government  of  military  force,  to  organize  the 
islands  and  develop  the  people  as  they  deserved. 

The  United  States  decided  that  the  people  were  not  able  them- 
selves to  bring  about  any  beneficial  result  which  would  secure  an 
efficient  government,  either  for  the  preservation  of  international 
obligations  or  for  the  elevation  of  the  people  and  the  development 
of  the  country';  that  self-government,  to  be  a benefit,  must  be  a 
growth  and  an  education,  and  that  these  people  with  their  three 
hundred  years  of  subjection  to  Spain  have  not  reached  the  point 
where  actual  experience  in  independent  self-government  would 
lead  them  on  to  a better  understanding  of  it;  that  they  needed  the 
helping  and  guiding  hand  of  a people  who  for  hundreds  of  years 
had  fought  for  individual  liberty  and  popular  rule,  and  who, 
therefore,  knew  something  of  the  difficulties  of  organizing  gov- 
ernment and  maintaining  it  on  a popular  basis. 

It  has  been  charged  that  when  the  United  States  came  here  it 
came  with  a greedy  disposition  to  acquire  territory  and  power. 
No  loyal  son  of  the  United  States,  in  twenty-five  years  after  the 
war  with  Spain  and  the  treaty  of  Paris,  as  he  looks  at  the  records 
will  say  so.  No  loyal  man  who  will  study  the  utterances  and  the 
thoughts  of  McKinley,  as  shown  forth  in  his  state  papers,  can 
but  realize  that  he  assumed  the  control  of  the  Philippine  Islands 


AMERICAN  CAPITAL  NEEDED 


391 


with  the  utmost  reluctance  and  with  a sense  of  responsibility  to 
the  people  of  these  islands  that  was  profound  and  sincere.  . . . 

From  the  beginning  to  the  end  of  the  state  papers  which  were 
circulated  in  these  islands  by  the  Schurman  and  the  Civil  Com- 
missions, as  authoritative  expressions  of  the  Executive,  the  motto 
that  “the  Philippines  are  for  the  Filipinos”  and  that  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  United  States  is  here  for  the  purpose  of  preserving 
the  “Philippines  for  the  Filipinos,”  for  their  benefit,  for  their 
elevation,  for  their  civilization,  again  and  again  and  again  appear, 
and  it  is  to  be  noted  that  these  declarations  were  made  and  were 
continued,  while  many  of  the  Filipinos  were  in  arms  against  the 
sovereignty  of  the  United  States;  that  nothing  of  violence,  of 
treachery  on  the  part  of  some,  of  obduracy  on  the  part  of  others, 
could  turn  the  Executive  from  his  purpose  to  conciliate  the  people 
by  promises  fulfilled  as  far  as  time  permitted;  that  the  govern- 
ment of  these  islands  should  always  be  carried  on  with  an  eye 
anxious  for  the  welfare  of  the  Filipino  people.  . . . 

Now,  what  is  meant  by  the  principle,  “the  Philippines  for  the 
Filipinos?”  Only  this,  that  every  measure,  whether  in  the  form 
of  law  or  an  Executive  order,  before  its  adoption,  should  be 
weighed  in  the  light  of  this  question:  Does  it  make  for  the 

welfare  of  the  Filipino  people,  or  does  it  not?  If  it  does  not 
make  for  the  welfare  of  the  Filipino  people,  then  it  ought  not  to 
be  enacted  or  executed.  The  doctrine  as  interpreted  in  the  light 
of  these  authoritative  declarations  assumes  that  the  Filipino 
people  are  of  future  capacity,  but  not  of  present  fitness  for  self- 
government,  and  that  they  may  be  taught  by  the  gradual  extension 
of  self-government  to  exercise  the  conservative  self-restraint 
without  which  popular  government  is  impossible. 

Does  the  doctrine  exclude  the  encouragement  of  American  enter- 
prise, the  investment  of  capital  in  these  islands?  No;  emphat- 
ically no.  There  is  nothing  which  Americans  can  bring,  and  I do 
not  expect  education  or  a free  form  of  government,  which  can 
make  more  for  the  elevation  and  civilization  of  the  Filipino  people 
than  the  investment  of  American  capital  in  the  material  devel- 
opment of  these  islands.  Civilization  follows  material  develop- 
ment. What  the  islands  are  most  lacking  are  high  roads,  harbors, 
and  modern  methods  of  intercommunication.  If  the  construction 
of  railroads,  the  inauguration  of  steamship  lines,  the  construction 
of  highways,  or  building  of  port-works  comes  under  the  definition 


392 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


of  “exploitation,”  then  that  kind  of  exploitation  is  wholly  con- 
sistent with  the  principle  of  “the  Philippines  for  the  Filipinos,” 
and  is  indispensable  in  carrying  out  that  principle  as  properly 
understood. 

Nor  is  it  to  be  expected  that  capital  can  be  invested  here  unless 
it  is  assured  of  an  adequate  return.  The  profit  must  be  large  to 
be  proportioned  to  the  risk  run.  The  idea  that  the  policy  of 
“the  Philippines  for  the  Filipinos”  involves  the  exclusion  of 
Americans  or  others  from  making  money  in  the  islands  is  as  far 
as  possible  from  a reasonable  interpretation  of  it.  The  only 
kind  of  exploitation  which  can  be  properly  termed  selfish  and 
which  is  not  consistent  with  the  principle  as  I have  explained  it 
of  “the  Philippines  for  the  Filipinos”  is  that  which  takes  wealth 
out  of  the  country  or  produces  a condition  of  profit  for  Ameri- 
cans or  others  in  the  country  at  the  expense  of  the  people  of  the 
Philippines,  and  without  conferring  upon  them  any  benefit.  For 
instance,  suppose  the  Congress  of  the  United  States  were  to  adopt 
a law  which  forbade  inter-island  trade  except  in  ships  constructed 
in  United  States  territory,  and  thereby  reduced  the  carrying 
trade  to  one-half  its  carrying  capacity,  increasing  the  freight 
rates  exorbitantly,  and  conferring  profit  only  on  Americans  inter- 
ested in  that  trade;  that  I would  say  was  selfish  exploitation  of 
the  most  detestable  character. 

In  carrying  out  the  principle,  “the  Philippines  for  the  Fili- 
pinos,” in  respect  to  any  measure,  the  question  is:  Is  it  for  the 
welfare  of  the  Filipino  people?  The  doctrine  does  not  include, 
necessarily,  the  independence  of  the  Filipinos,  nor  any  particular 
degree  of  autonomy.  It  is  entirely  consistent  with  the  principle 
to  object  to  an  immediate  extension  of  popular  government  on  the 
ground  that  we  are  going  too  fast  for  the  political  digestion  of 
the  people,  and  that  it  is  not,  therefore,  for  their  good.  Whether 
an  autonomy  or  independence  or  quasi-independence  shall  ulti- 
mately follow  in  these  islands  ought  to  depend  solely  on  the 
question:  Is  it  best  for  the  Filipino  people  and  their  welfare? 

It  is  my  sincere  belief  that  when  America  shall  have  discharged 
her  duty  toward  the  Philippines,  shall  have  reduced  the  tarilf, 
and  made  the  commercial  bonds  between  the  two  countries  close 
and  profit-giving-  to  both,  the  Filipinos  will  love  the  association 
with  the  mother  country,  and  will  be  the  last  to  desire  a severance 
of  those  ties.  . . . 


PATIENCE  NEEDED  BY  AMERICANS  393 


There  are  many  Americans  in  these  islands,  possibly  a majority, 
and  this  includes  all  the  American  press,  who  are  strongly  opposed 
to  the  doctrine  of  “the  Philippines  for  the  Filipinos.”  They  have 
no  patience  with  the  policy  of  attraction,  no  patience  with  at- 
tempts to  conciliate  the  Filipino  people,  no  patience  with  the 
introduction  into  the  government  as  rapidly  as  their  fitness  justi- 
fies of  the  prominent  Filipinos.  They  resent  everything  in  the 
government  that  is  not  American.  They  insist  that  there  is  a 
necessity  for  a firm  government  here,  rather  than  a popular  one, 
and  that  the  welfare  of  the  Americans  and  American  trade  should 
be  regarded  as  paramount.  It  is  possible  to  trace  the  history  of 
the  formation  of  these  views. 

The  first  Americans  to  land  in  these  islands  were  the  Army 
and  Navy,  together  with  those  venturesome  business  spirits  that 
thrive  best  in  times  of  trouble  and  excitement,  when  the  oppor- 
tunities for  making  money  suddenly  for  those  upon  the  spot 
are  good.  The  history  of  the  relations  of  our  Army  and  Navy 
with  the  insurgents,  the  hostile  spirit  with  which  the  denial  of 
the  insurgents  of  the  right  to  loot  the  city  of  Manila  was 
received  by  them,  the  sneers  and  contempt  with  which  they  visited 
the  American  troops  before  the  outbreak  of  February,  1900,  and 
the  subsequent  warfare,  attended,  as  it  was,  especially  in  the 
guerrilla  part  of  it,  with  ambuscades,  treachery  and  cruelty,  all 
tended  to  create  a bitterness  of  feeling  on  the  part  of  the  soldiers 
toward  their  Filipino  opponents  that  could  not  but  be  shared  in 
by  the  Americans  who  were  in  the  islands  at  that  time.  It  was 
only  natural,  therefore,  that  every  defect,  every  weakness,  of  the 
Filipino  character  should  be  dilated  upon  by  the  American  sol- 
diers and  by  those  who  accompanied  them.  The  Anglo-Saxon  is 
not  noted  for  his  courtesy;  he  is  not  noted  for  his  consideration 
for  races  which  he  considers  inferior  to  his.  Counting  upon  the 
secret  enmity  of  every  Filipino  that  he  met,  it  is  not  surprising 
that  he  should  treat  the  Filipino  accordingly. 

The  exigencies  presented  by  guerrilla  warfare  required  the 
presence  here  of  a much  larger  body  of  troops  than  first  came, 
so  that  in  1900  there  were  here  seventy  thousand  men  of  the 
United  States  Army,  and  they  were  stationed  at  six  hundred 
posts.  Their  presence  in  the  islands  created  a demand  so  large 
for  American  supplies  of  food  and  drink  and  other  things,  that 
the  American  merchants,  who  were  the  only  merchants  familiar 


394 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


with  the  demands  of  American  soldiers,  found  themselves  with 
a larger  business  on  their  hands  than  they  could  take  care  of, 
the  profits  from  which  were  very  great  indeed.  They  then  in  the 
islands  had  no  need  to  look  for  other  trade  or  patronage  tnan 
this.  The  necessity  for  cultivating  the  taste  or  the  good-will  of 
the  Filipinos  for  business  purposes  was  wholly  absent,  because 
the  patrons  who  were  making  their  money  were  deeply  imbued 
with  feelings  of  hostility  and  contempt  toward  the  native  popu- 
lation. It  was  only  natural  that  the  newspapers,  whose  editorial 
staffs  were  largely  composed  of  men  recently  in  the  battlefield 
and  whose  subscription  lists  were  largely  swelled  by  the  names  of 
soldiers,  whose  advertising  columns  were  filled  by  the  advertising 
of  these  American  merchants,  should  reflect  the  opinion  which 
the  American  merchant  and  the  American  soldier  had  of  the 
Filipinos.  The  American  knew  little  of  the  Spanish  language 
and  still  less  of  the  real  languages  of  the  country — the  Tagalog, 
the  Visayan,  and  the  Iloeano.  His  opportunity  for  communica- 
tion with  the  native  was  therefore  exceedingly  restricted.  The 
language  of  the  American  was  “yea,  yea,”  and  “nay,  nay.”  He 
said  what  he  meant  and  he  meant  what  he  said,  with  all  the 
abruptness  and  bluntness  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  race.  The  Filipino, 
with  a timidity  born  of  years  of  subordination  and  with  the 
Oriental  tendency  to  speak  that  which  his  auditor  wishes  to  hear, 
and  with  the  courtesy  which  is  innate  in  the  race  and  has  been 
increased  by  lessons  from  the  Spanish,  used  expressions  which, 
interpreted  by  Anglo-Saxon  standards,  were  false  and  deceitful; 
interpreted  by  the  men  who  understood  the  race,  were  nothing 
more  than  courteous  commonplace.  And  so  it  was  that  the  Amer- 
ican enlisted  men  and  many  officers,  and  the  American  merchant 
looked  upon  every  effort  of  the  Civil  Government  to  cultivate  the 
good-will  of  the  natives  as  love’s  labor  lost,  and  as  likely  to 
result  in  a weak  government,  ultimately  to  be  destroyed  by 
treachery. 

Now  the  army  of  seventy  thousand  men  has  been  reduced  to 
fifteen  thousand.  The  Americans  in  the  islands  have  decreased 
rather  than  increased  since  1900.  The  demand  for  American 
goods,  for  American  supplies,  has  been  much  reduced.  The  op- 
portunity for  large  profit  on  the  part  of  the  American  merchant, 
who  was  so  long  content  with  American  trade  only,  has  passed. 
The  circulation  of  the  American  press  has  been  reduced,  because 


FINDING  A SCAPEGOAT 


395 


the  number  of  those  who  read  English  in  the  islands  has,  of 
course,  become  less  with  the  departure  of  each  American  regiment 
and  the  reduction  of  the  American  garrison,  and  now  the  pinch 
is  being  felt.  Of  course,  the  dreadful  agricultural  depression 
due  to  loss  of  cattle  has  much  to  do  with  business  dullness,  but 
the  case  of  the  Americans  is  peculiar  and  is  largely  affected  by 
the  change  I have  described.  With  the  lack  of  logic,  so  character- 
istic of  human  nature,  the  merchant  who  finds  hard  times  coming 
on,  the  business  man  whose  profits  are  not  so  great,  looks  about 
for  a scapegoat  and  an  explanation,  and  he  finds  it  in  the  wicked 
Civil  Government  which  has  been  encouraging  the  natives  as  far  as 
it  could;  has  been  taking  the  native  into  the  government  as  far 
as  he  seemed  fitted;  is  doing  what  it  can  to  elevate  the  Filipino 
people  and  provide  for  their  welfare,  and  has  not  taken  the 
American  merchant  under  its  special  wing.  Complaint  has  been 
made  against  the  Civil  Government  that  it  buys  its  goods  outside 
of  the  Philippines  and  gives  the  American  merchant  no  oppor- 
tunity for  profit.  Investigation  has  been  made,  and  it  is  found 
that  eighty  per  cent,  of  everything  bought  by  the  Civil  Government 
is  bought  in  the  islands,  and  that  a good  deal  of  the  American 
trade  in  the  islands  is  that  which  the  Civil  Government  itself  fur- 
nishes. There  is  no  discrimination  in  favor  of  the  Filipino  as 
against  the  American  in  business.  Before  the  law  they  are  exactly 
equal,  because  equality  of  resident,  citizen,  and  foreigner  in  busi- 
ness is  on  the  whole  the  best  method  of  developing  the  country 
and  therefore  the  best  for  the  welfare  of  the  people  of  the 
country. 

But  it  is  said  that  American  capital  has  not  been  encouraged  to 
come  here.  Until  July  1,  1902,  it  is  true  that  the  Commission  had 
no  authority  to  grant  franchises  which  should  induce  large  invest- 
ments of  capital.  Then  it  was  understood  that  the  Commission 
would  be  glad  to  hear  applications  for  franchises  on  terms  favor- 
able to  the  public,  and  a number  of  franchises  have  since  been 
granted — not  all  that  the  interests  of  the  country  required  have 
been  granted,  but  all  that  capital  invited.  American  capital  has 
been  so  occupied  with  the  great  profits  of  a prosperous  period 
in  the  United  States  that  it  could  with  great  difficulty  be  induced 
to  come  so  far.  The  attitude  of  the  American  press  and  of  the 
American  merchant  in  his  hostility  to  the  Filipino,  and  in  the  con- 
sequent hostility  to  the  Civil  Government,  was  led  into  the  error 


396 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


at  one  time  of  emphasizing  in  every  possible  way,  by  letters  and 
representations  of  all  sorts,  that  the  condition  of  the  country  as 
to  tranquility  was  so  bad  that  the  whole  of  the  islands  was  still 
in  a state  of  war.  Every  small  ladrone  fight,  every  discomfiture 
which  the  Constabulary  suffered,  was  exaggerated  and  made  the 
basis  for  the  inference  that  the  conditions  in  the  country  were 
retrograding  rather  than  improving.  Such  incidents  were  seized 
upon  and  made  as  much  of  as  headlines  and  general  statements 
could  make  them.  Representations  of  this  character  were  hardly 
in  the  nature  of  encouragement  to  capital  to  invest  in  the  islands, 
and  while  I entirely  acquit  the  press  and  others  making  such 
representations  of  a desire  to  exclude  it,  and  am  able  to  find  an 
explanation  for  it  in  their  disgust  with  the  policy  of  the  Civil 
Government  and  their  bitter  feelings  for  the  natives,  yet  justice 
requires  the  conclusion  that  such  reports  had  something  to  do 
with  delaying  the  coming  of  capital.  . . . 

With  respect  to  the  possibility  of  obtaining  satisfactory  labor 
from  the  Filipinos,  I have  only  to  say  this,  that  experiments  have 
shown  that  those  who  have  gone  about  the  matter  systematically 
and  have  attempted  to  find  out  what  the  native  needs  to  keep  him 
constant  in  his  attendance  upon  work  have  been  successful,  so 
that,  wages  considered,  his  work  has  been  fairly  satisfactory. 
But  it  is  very  certain  that  before  satisfactory  labor  can  be  ob- 
tained from  him,  he  must  be  under  the  control  of  a master  who 
understands  him.  I know  the  disposition  of  most  Americans 
here  is  to  open  the  doors  and  let  in  the  Chinese,  so  that  we  may 
have  Chinese  cheap  labor  in  the  islands,  but  I am  emphatically 
opposed  to  the  general  policy  of  admitting  the  Chinese;  first, 
because  the  Filipinos  have  the  strongest  opinion  that  it  will  be 
for  their  detriment,  and  second,  because  I believe  the  history  of 
the  Straits  Settlements  shows  that  it  will  be  not  for  their  pros- 
perity as  distinguished  from  the  material  prosperity  of  the 
islands.  I am  opposed  to  admitting  any  Chinese  labor  until  it 
shall  be  made  to  appear  that  the  great  works  of  construction 
which  are  essential  in  the  islands  cannot  be  carried  on  satisfactorily 
with  Filipino  labor.  . . . 

Mow,  I hope  I am  a reasonable  man,  and  I am  not  disposed  to 
quarrel  with  those  with  whom  I differ.  I know  that  the  habits 
of  the  Filipino  servant  are  trying  to  the  American  who  first 
comes  to  these  islands;  I know  that  the  laziness  and  indisposition 


GIVING  THE  FILIPINOS  THEIR  DUE  397 


to  hire  of  the  cochero  are  enough  to  cause  blasphemy.  I know 
that  we  have  had  instances  of  the  grossest  treachery  and  cruelty 
by  Filipinos;  I know  that  the  Filipino  is  disposed  to  conceal  his 
real  feelings  when  in  opposition  to  the  person  whom  he  is  ad- 
dressing, and  I know  that  these  characteristics  are  calculated  to 
make  the  Americans  impatient  and  condemn  the  race.  When  one’s 
feelings  of  enmity  are  very  much  aroused  it  is  difficult  to  get  the 
limit  to  the  expression  of  them.  So  it  is  that  we  have  the  young 
lions  of  the  American  press,  of  the  three  newspapers  who  are 
supposed  to  speak  the  American  public  opinion  in  these  islands, 
holding  the  Filipino  up  to  contempt,  exposing  all  his  supposed 
vices,  and  giving  him  no  credit  whatever  for  any  virtues,  and  it 
may  be  that  this  represents  the  feeling  of  the  majority  of  the 
resident  Americans  in  Manila.  But  can  we  not,  in  the  end,  be 
just  and  give  the  whole  Filipino  people  their  due?  Should  we 
wish  the  Filipino  people  to  judge  of  Americans  by  the  drunken, 
truculent  American  loafers  who  infest  the  small  towns  of  these 
islands,  living  on  the  fruits  of  the  labor  of  Filipino  women,  and 
give  us  more  trouble  than  any  other  element  in  the  islands? 
Should  we  wish  the  Filipino  people  to  judge  of  American 
standards  of  honesty  by  reading  the  humiliating  list  of 
American  official  and  unofficial  defaulters  in  these  islands?  I 
think  not. 

Contrast  the  Filipinos  with  other  Malays  and  the  Oriental  peo- 
ples, and  I ask  you  to  name  a people  offering  more  opportunities 
for  development  along  the  lines  which  American  ideals  require 
than  the  people  of  these  islands.  To  begin  with,  they  are  a 
Christian  people,  and  they  have  been  so  for  three  hundred  years. 
It  will  not  be  said  that  I have  been  partial  to  the  Spanish  friars 
and  the  Spanish  sovereignty  here,  but  I am  anxious  to  admit  in 
the  fullest  manner  the  debt  which  these  people  and  the  world 
owes  to  Spain  and  her  friars  for  Christianizing  seven  millions  of 
Malays  and  giving  them,  speaking  broadly,  Christian  and  modern 
ideals.  It  is  true  that  their  Christianity  sometimes  seems  different 
from  European  or  American  Christianity,  but  in  forming  a sub- 
ject for  the  operation  of  elevating  influence,  of  education,  and 
the  environment  of  civilization,  this  people  is  centuries  in  advance 
of  the  Mohammedan  or  Buddhist.  The  Mohammedan,  the  Buddh- 
ist, the  Chinaman,  looks  with  a sense  of  superiority  on  the 
efforts  of  the  Christian  European  nation  to  better  his  condition. 


398 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


He  has  no  desire  for  popular  government,  no  longing  for  indi- 
vidual liberty.  He  opposes  to  development  of  this  kind  the  im- 
penetrable wall  of  disdain  and  contempt.  The  Filipino  people  as 
a people  have  breathed  in  through  their  educated  leaders  the 
inspiration  of  liberty  and  free  government.  Many  of  them  have 
fought,  bled,  and  given  up  their  lives  in  a struggle  for  indepen- 
dence. It  was  a mistaken  struggle,  but  their  sacrifice  and  their 
bravery  are  worthy  our  admiration  and  bespeak  a people  capable 
of  greater  things.  Their  intense  desire  for  education,  their  ap- 
preciation of  European  and  American  improvements  in  dress  and 
bodily  comforts,  their  artistic  ambitions,  their  quick  desire  and 
power  to  imitate  the  good  they  see  and  understand,  their  openness 
to  the  reception  of  new  and  better  things,  however  lacking  in  a 
political  knowledge  of  its  difficulties  and  real  essence — all  these 
traits,  added  to  a peculiar  social  sense  and  charm,  make  them  a 
people  peculiarly  subject  to  the  good  and  developing  influence 
of  a friendly  and  sympathetic  government  in  which  they  are 
given  a gradually  increasing  part,  and  justify  an  entirely  different 
policy  in  dealing  with  them  and  promoting  their  welfare  from 
that  which  England  has  found  it  necessary  to  pursue  with  Mo- 
hammedan and  Buddhist  peoples,  having  neither  sympathy  with, 
nor  understanding  of,  modern  European  ideas.  . . . 

The  American  trade  in  these  islands — and  by  that  I mean  the 
demand  of  Americans  for  goods  and  supplies — can  never  exceed 
that  of  twenty  thousand  people  in  addition  to  the  soldiers  who 
may  be  here.  The  demand  of  the  Filipino  people  will  be  a de- 
mand, when  created  and  encouraged,  of  seven  and  one-half 
million  persons.  The  only  hope,  the  only  possible  source,  of  real 
business  and  of  real  trade  that  can  be  dignified  by  the  name, 
which  the  United  States  or  any  of  our  merchants,  whether  living 
in  the  United  States  or  in  these  islands,  can  have  is  with  the 
Filipino  people.  The  promotion  of  their  material  and  intellectual 
welfare  will  necessarily  develop  wants  on  their  part  for  things 
which  in  times  of  poverty  they  regard  as  luxuries,  but  which,  as 
they  grow  more  educated  and  as  they  grow  wealthier,  become 
necessities.  The  carrying  out  of  the  principle,  “the  Philippines  for 
the  Filipinos,”  in  first  promoting  the  welfare,  material,  spiritual 
and  intellectual,  of  the  people  of  these  islands,  is  the  one  course 
which  can  create  any  market  here  among  the  people  for  American 
goods  and  American  supplies  that  will  make  the  relation  of  the 


TRANQUILITY  INDISPENSABLE  399 


United  States  to  the  Philippines  a profitable  one  for  our  merchants 
and  manufacturers.  . . . 

Again,  one  of  the  conditions  indispensable  to  progress  is  tran- 
quility. Without  it  capital,  constitutionally  timid,  will  not  come. 
Now,  what  has  produced  the  present  tranquility?  I say  without 
hesitation  that  the  chief  element  to-day  is  the  confidence  which 
the  conservative  people  of  the  islands  have  in  the  promises  of  the 
United  States  to  make  the  welfare  of  the  Filipinos  its  chief 
purpose  in  remaining  here  and  to  assist  them  sincerely  in  learning 
the  secret  of  self-government  by  gradually  enlarging  their  politi- 
cal power.  The  successful  suppression  of  ladronism  is  due 
directly  to  the  efficient  energy  of  the  Constabulary  and  the  Scouts; 
but  that  would  have  been  entirely  impossible  but  for  the  assist- 
ance of  native  judges,  native  provincial  governors,  and  native 
municipal  officers.  The  conservative  Filipinos  are  on  the  side  of 
the  Government  and  law  and  order. 

What  do  the  young  lions  of  the  American  press  in  Manila, 
what  do  the  merchants  of  Manila  who  take  the  position  I have 
attempted  to  explain  and  describe,  expect  to  do?  Do  they  expect 
to  change  the  policy  of  the  Government?  Certainly  not  as  long 
as  the  Government  of  the  United  States  is  alive  to  the  honor  of- 
preserving  sacred  its  promises  to  a whole  people.  From  where 
do  they  expect  the  political  support  that  can  be  effective  to  carry 
out  the  policy  which  their  attitude  indicates?  The  policy  of  the 
present  Civil  Government  in  placing  as  its  first  aim  the  promotion 
of  the  welfare  and  the  prosperity  of  the  Filipino  people,  and  the 
gradual  extension  to  them  of  self-government,  is  the  identical 
policy  of  the  Republican  party.  . . . 

Do  they  hope  to  obtain  support  for  their  policy  if  the  Dem- 
ocrats succeed  the  Republicans?  The  Democrats  are  more  ex- 
treme in  their  view  that  the  islands  should  be  preserved  for  the 
Filipinos  exclusively  than  the  Republicans.  . . . 

Should  the  Congress  of  the  United  States,  as  I earnestly  hope 
it  will,  reduce  the  tariff  upon  tobacco  and  sugar,  there  will  be 
created  a trade  between  these  islands  and  the  United  States 
which  can  but  lead  to  a counter  trade  in  American  products  here, 
and  this  In  spite  of  the  fact  that  there  may  be  no  discrimination 
here  against  the  goods  of  England,  Germany  and  other  countries. 
The  discrimination  in  favor  of  these  islands  by  a reduction  of 
the  Dingley  tariff  must  operate  to  turn  a great  proportion  of  the 


400 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


trade  of  these  islands  toward  the  United  States,  and  the  material 
development  of  the  people  must  increase  that  trade.  I shall  not 
believe  that  the  American  merchants  now  in  the  islands,  nor  those 
who  are  to  come  here,  will  be  lacking  in  that  sagacity  which  they 
have  at  home  and  that  they  will  blindly  put  an  obstacle  in  the 
way  of  their  own  success  by  following  a policy  born  of  prejudice 
and  not  of  good  sound  sense. 

I am  not  insisting  that  merchants  who  come  here  and  invest 
their  little  or  their  great  capital  shall,  at  a loss  to  themselves, 
support  the  policy  of  the  Government  from  altruistic  motives  or 
on  the  ground  that  the  honor  of  the  Nation  requires  such  a policy. 
I urge  it  upon  them  chiefly  because  it  is  the  only  method  that  I 
see  by  which  the  American  trade  in  these  islands  can  be  made 
profitable  and  the  American  merchants  who  have  ventured  here 
can  be  made  rich.  The  policy  will,  in  fact,  be  carried  out  because 
it  is  a national  obligation;  but  it  is  most  fortunate  that  we  find 
moving  toward  the  same  end  both  honor  and  profit.  I am  confi- 
dent the  Americans  in  these  islands  will  realize  this  before  it  is 
too  late. 

(Governor  William  Howard  Taft  in  an  address  given  before 
the  Union  Reading  College,  Manila,  December  17,  1903.) 


THE  DOOR  OF  OPPORTUNITY  OPEN 


Did  time  permit  I might  enumerate  other  matters  of  consider- 
able though  minor  importance  which  call  for  future  consideration. 
Enough,  however,  has  been  said  to  indicate  the  general  lines  of 
policy  which  it  is  believed  will  be  pursued  by  the  Government  in 
the  immediate  future.  I cannot  refrain  from  saying  that  success 
or  failure  of  the  efforts  of  the  representatives  of  the  American 
Government  in  these  islands  must  very  largely  depend  upon  the 
attitude  of  the  Filipino  people  themselves;  and,  furthermore,  that 
their  attitude  will,  in  the  nature  of  things,  in  turn  be  largely 
affected  by  the  attitude  of  the  Americans  in  these  islands  toward 
the  Filipino  people.  It  has  been  perhaps  not  extraordinary,  in 
view  of  past  events,  that  Americans  and  Filipinos  should,  to  some 
extent,  still  stand  apart  from  each  other.  It  seems  to  me,  how- 
ever, that  the  time  has  passed,  if  it  ever  existed,  for  an  attitude 
of  reserve  and  distrust. 

The  Americans  who  are'  here  in  these  islands  with  the  legitimate 
and  laudable  purpose  of  aiding  in  their  development,  and  at  the 
same  time  bettering  their  own  fortunes,  cannot  fail  to  see  that 
they  can  only  hope  to  accomplish  their  desires  by  establishing 
cordial  personal  and  business  relations  with  the  people  with  wiiom 
they  must  necessarily  come  in  contact.  This  is  so  obviously  true 
that  it  does  not  require  elaboration.  Aside  from  this,  every 
consideration  of  magnanimity  and  patriotism  impels  them  to 
such  a course.  We  are  strong;  the  Filipinos  are  wreak.  We  are 
justly  proud  of  our  institutions  and  of  the  benefits  and  blessings 
which  spring  from  them.  We  have  assumed  control  and  govern- 
ment of  these  islands  without  consulting  the  wishes  of  their  inhab- 
itants. Are  we  not  in  conscience  and  honor  bound  to  offer  them 
the  best  wTe  have  to  give?  In  inviting  them  to  participate  equally 
in  our  common  birthright,  we  do  not  make  ourselves  the  poorer, 
but  therein  the  richer.  We  cannot  ignore  the  truth  that  in  our 
relations  with  this  people  the  Americans  here  are  quite  as  much 
on  trial  before  the  civilized  world  as  are  the  Filipinos.  On  the 


402 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


other  side,  every  Filipino  should  turn  a deaf  ear  to  the  sinister 
promptings  of  restless  and  selfish  agitators  and  demagogues  who 
strive  to  keep  alive  prejudices  born  of  evil  passions  engendered 
by  war,  and,  following  the  example  of  the  wisest  and  most  patri- 
otic of  their  countrymen,  should  frankly  and  loyally  accept  the 
Situation  as  it  is.  Nothing  can  be  accomplished  that  is  good  by  a 
contrary  course.  The  logic  of  events  is  inexorable.  True  patriot- 
ism, under  existing  conditions,  is  found  in  a loyal  attitude  to  the 
Government.  Every  intelligent  Filipino  must  realize  that  his 
people  in  the  present  stage  of  development  are  unable  to  stand 
alone,  and  that  in  the  very  nature  of  things,  they  must  lean  upon 
some  stronger  arm.  It  is  suicidal,  therefore,  to  repel  the  kindly 
advances  made  by  those  in  authority  or  to  engage  in  a policy  of 
obstruction  or  agitation.  There  is  no  reason  for  antagonism. 
On  the  contrary,  there  is  every  reason  against  it.  The  coming 
of  Americans  to  these  islands  to  build  railroads  and  other  works 
of  public  utility,  to  engage  in  agriculture,  manufacturing,  or  the 
mechanical  arts,  can  only  be  of  advantage  to  the  Filipino  people. 
There  is  room  in  these  beautiful  and  fertile  islands  for  all.  The 
door  of  equal  opportunity  should  be  thrown  wide  open  for  all 
alike — European,  American  and  Filipino. 

(Governor  Luke  E.  Wright  in  his  Inaugural  Address  as  second 
Governor  of  the  Philippine  Islands,  February  1,  1904.) 


AUTHORITIES  CONSULTED 


Reports  of  the  Philippine  Commission,  the  Civil  Governor  and  the 
Heads  of  the  Executive  Departments  of  the  Civil  Government 
of  the  Philippine  Islands — 1900-1903. 

“Annual  Reports  of  the  Secretary  of  War  for  the  years  1901, 
1902,  1903.” 

“Annual  Report  of  Major-General  George  W.  Davis,  U.S.A., 
commanding  Seventh  Separate  Brigade,  Department  of  South 
Philippines,  1902.” 

“Education  in  the  Philippine  Islands.”  United  States  Bureau  of 
Education,  1902.  Government  Printing  Office,  Washington, 
D.  C. 

“United  States  Senate  Document  190 — Church  Lands  in  the 
Philippines — A Message  to  Congress  by  President  McKinley, 
1901.” 

“Official  Hand  Book  of  the  Philippines  and  Catalogue  of  the 
Philippine  Exhibit  at  the  Louisiana  Purchase  Exhibit,  St. 
Louis.”  Manila  Bureau  of  Public  Printing,  1903. 

“The  Duty  of  Americans  in  the  Philippines.”  The  Hon.  William 
Howard  Taft. 

“The  Republican  Party”:  Speeches  by  Secretary  Hay  at  Jackson, 
Michigan,  and  ex-Seeretary  Root  at  the  National  Republican 
Convention  in  Chicago,  in  June,  1904. 

“The  Philippine  Islands:  A Political,  Geographical,  Ethnograph- 
ical, Social  and  Commercial  History  of  the  Philippine  Archi- 
pelago and  its  Political  Dependencies,  Embracing  the  Whole 
Period  of  Spanish  Rule.”  John  Foreman,  F.R.G.S.  Kelly  & 
Walsh,  Limited,  Shanghai,  Hong  Kong,  Singapore  nad  Yoko- 
hama. 

“The  Philippines:  The  War  and  the  People.  A Record  of  Per- 
sonal Observations  and  Experiences.”  Albert  G.  Robinson. 
McClure,  Phillips  & Co.,  New  York. 

“American  Diplomacy  in  the  Orient.”  The  Hon.  John  W.  Foster, 
ex-Seeretary  of  State  of  the  United  States.  Houghton, 
Mifflin  & Co.,  Boston  and  New  York. 


401 


IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 


“The  Gems  of  the  East.”  Sixteen  Thousand  Miles  of  Research 
and  Travel  Among  Wild  and  Tame  Tribes  of  Enchanting 
Islands.  A.  H.  Savage  Landor.  Harper  & Brothers,  New 
York  and  London,  1904. 

“The  Mastery  of  the  Pacific”  and  “Greater  America.”  Archibald 
R.  Colquhoun.  Harper  & Brothers,  New  York  and  London. 

“Greater  America — The  Last  Acquired  Insular  Possessions.” 
The  Youth’s  Companion.  Perry  Mason  Co.,  Boston. 

“The  United  States  in  Our  Own  Time.”  E.  Benjamin  Andrews, 
Chancellor  of  the  University  of  Nebraska.  Charles  Scrib- 
ner’s Sons,  New  York. 

“The  New  Era  in  the  Philippines.”  Arthur  J.  Brown,  D.D.,  Sec- 
retary of  the  Board  of  Foreign  Missions  of  the  Presbyterian 
Church  in  the  LTnited  States  of  America.  Fleming  H.  Revell 
Company,  New  York,  Chicago  and  London,  1903. 

“The  Philippines  and  the  Far  East.”  Homer  C.  Stuntz,  D.D., 
Presiding  Elder  of  the  Methodist  Episcopal  Church  in  the 
Philippines.  Eaton  & Mains,  New  York. 

“Aguinaldo’s  Hostage.”  H.  Irving  Hancock,  War  Correspondent. 
Lee  & Shepard,  Boston. 

“The  Cross  of  Christ  in  Bolo  Land.”  Rev.  John  Marvin  Dean, 
Army  Secretary  of  the  International  Committee  of  the 
„ Young  Men’s  Christian  Association  in  the  Philippines. 
Fleming  H.  Revell  Co. 

“Old  Glory  and  the  Gospel  in  the  Philippines.”  Alice  Byram 
Condict,  M.D.  Fleming  H.  Revell  Co. 

“The  .Manila  Review  of  Trade — Devoted  to  the  Business  Interests 
of  Manila  and  the  Philippines,  Vol.  3,  No.  1,  1904.” 

“The  Roosevelt  Doctrine:  Being  the  personal  utterances  of  the 
President  on  various  matters  of  vital  interest,  authoritatively 
arranged  for  reference  in  their  logical  sequence.  A Brief 
Summary  of  the  Principles  of  American  Citizenship  and 
Government.”  Compiled  by  R.  E.  Garrison.  Robert  Grier 
Cooke,  New  York,  1904. 


INDEX  OF  SUBJECTS 


A 

Adams,  John  Quincy,  30 
Agana,  town,  35,  38 
Aglipay,  Gregorio,  80,  211,  233, 
252-261,  304,  318,  332,  338, 
373,  374 

Agricultural  implements,  88,  89, 
94,  367 

Agriculture,  85,  90,  92,  367 
Aguinaldo,  Emilio,  78,  206,  229, 
230,  285 

commends  Protestantism, 
211 

events  of  life,  212,  213 
gives  pledges,  215 
interview  with  author,  206- 

212 

offers  banking  plan,  209 
physical  appearance,  207 
revolts,  64,  73 
treats  with  Spain,  213 
Alabaster,  95 
Albert,  Dr.  Jose,  144 
Alejandrano,  General,  230 
Algue,  Father,  368 
Allen,  General  Henry  T.,  164, 
166,  172,  173,  177,  193 
American  Bible  Society,  54,  263, 
334,  336 

American  Board  of  Foreign 
Missions,  264 
American  Church,  275 
American  Commissioners  treat 
with  Spain,  67,  68,  69 
“American  Diplomacy  in  the 
Orient,”  30 

American  doctrines,  161 
American  Government  (ef.  Civil 
Commission) 

“American  Union  an  Asiatic 
Power,  The,”  390 


Americans,  177,  187-205,  262, 
266,  268,  269,  341-353,  375, 
399 

“Amigos,”  153 

“Ancient  Civilization  of  the 
Philippine  Islands,  The,” 

226 

Andrews,  Bishop  E.  G.,  298 
Andrews,  Chancellor  E.  Benja- 
min, 215 

Antaero,  369,  370 
Anti-Romanist  Party,  304 
Army 

(а)  American,  79 

efficiency,  156 
humanity,  152,  395 
moral  standing  required, 
128 

President  Roosevelt 
thanks,  155,  156 
reduction,  158,  163,  165, 
174,  396 

size,  158,  159,  174 
support  of  native  wives, 
128 

temperance,  155,  157,  158 
“water  cure”  justified,  153 
Y.  M.  C.  A.  work,  322-331 

(б)  Filipino,  99  (cf.  Constabu- 

lary) 

efficiency,  159,  163 
guardians  of  the  peace, 
163,  166 

objections,  175,  176 
trustworthiness,  160,  176 
under  Spanish  rule,  160 
(c)  Spanish 

surrenders,  63 
Army  canteen,  157,  322 
changes  needed,  158 
favored  by  soldiers,  157 
results,  157,  158 


406  INDEX  OF  SUBJECTS 


Atkinson,  Dr.  F.  W.,  191,  192, 
290  (cf.  Education) 
Atlantic,  Gulf  and  Pacific  Com- 
pany, 133 

B 

Bacoor,  285 

Baguio,  120, 121,  122,  150,  315 
Bamboo,  93 
Baptist,  264 
Barasoain,  78 
Barnhart,  Mr.,  337 
Barrows,  Dr.  David,  191 
Batangas,  province,  101,  212, 
264 
Beer,  158 

Bell,  General  J.  F.,  168 
Benguet,  province,  120,  121,  132, 
150,  314 
Beriberi,  184 

Biac-na-bato,  treaty  of,  226,  229 
Bible,  259,  264,  265,  305,  306, 
307,  332-340 

Bible  Societies  (cf.  American 
Bible  Society  and  British 
and  Foreign  Bible  So- 
ciety) 

Bilibid  Prison,  184,  306,  362 
Binan,  111 

Binondo,  suburb,  147 
Black,  Rev.  and  Mrs.,  264 
Blazer,  Mr.,  328 
Bleasdale,  B.  G.,  100 
Board  of  Health,  108 
Boats,  55,  56,  98,  111,  113,  146, 
147,  186 

Boca  Chiea  Channel,  47 
Boca  Grande  Channel,  47 
Bolo,  153 
Bontoc,  366 

Botocan  Falls,  113,  115,  116 
River,  114 
Boys’  school,  207 
Breakwater,  147,  148 
Brent,  Bishop  Charles  H.,  141, 
143,  144,  311,  316,  320 
Bridge  of  Spain,  53,  98 
British  and  Foreign  Bible  So- 
ciety, 263,  334 


Brooks,  Captain,  33 
Brown,  Captain  R.  L.,  357 
Brown,  Rev.  Arthur  J.,  D.D., 
71,  122,  130 
Bryan,  Dr.  E.  B.,  192 
Bubonic  plague,  182 
Bued  River,  151 
Buencamino,  Senor  Felipe,  275, 
360 

Bulacan,  province,  94,  212,  306 
Bureau  of  Agriculture,  experi- 
ments, 86,  87,  88 
Bureau  of  Education,  196 
Business  opportunities,  66,  85- 
96 


C 

Cable,  American,  29 
Cacao,  85 

Cailles,  Governor  Juan,  112 
Calamba,  111,  219 
Calderon,  Don  Felipe,  241 
Calle,  Rosario,  53 
Canteen  (cf.  Army  canteen) 
Carabao,  51,  52,  99 
Cargo,  147 
Carromata,  50 
Carter,  Major  E.  C.,  144 
Castelar,  Emelio,  227,  231 
Castells,  334 
Castillo,  Leon  y,  227 
Cathedral,  312 

Catholicism  (cf.  Friars),  80, 
111,  179,  217,  233-251, 
252-261,  286,  317,  318, 
373,  399 

Cavite,  47,  211,  212,  272,  282, 
283,  287 
Census,  65,  66 
Chaffee,  General  A.  R.,  74 
Chance,  Colonel  J.  C.,  25 
Chaplain,  41,  153,  263 
“Character,”  address  on,  83 
Chicle,  90 

Children,  death  rate,  135,  185 
China,  138,  141 

Chinese,  129,  134,  140,  207,  299, 
315,  362,  373,  398 


INDEX  OF  SUBJECTS 


407 


Chino,  boy,  110 
Cholera,  181,  182,  183,  184,  186, 
289,  355 

“Christian  Advocate,  The,”  69 
“Christianity  in  the  Ancient 
Tagalog  Civilization,”  226 
Christians,  66,  262,  344 
Church,  282,  286,  344 

Aglipay  Movement,  252-261 
Catholics,  233-251 
Duty  of,  371-377 
Methodist  Episcopal,  298- 
310 

Presbyterian,  270-281 
Protestant  Episcopal,  311- 
321 

Protestantism,  262-269 
“Church  and  Church  Lands  in 
the  Philippines,”  240 
Church  and  State,  189,  242,  243, 
247,  255 

Civil  Commission  (cf.  Govern- 
ment) 

appointed,  73 
appoints  Filipino  members, 
75 

appoints  insurgents  to  po- 
sitions, 210 

attitude  toward  Catholicism, 
233,  234,  238,  247 
attitude  toward  internal 
improvements,  146-151 
attitude  toward  labor  prob- 
lem, 131,  132 

attitude  toward  opium 
traffic,  139,  141-145 
changes  burial  system,  137 
disapproves  of  querida  sys- 
tem, 127,  128 
duties,  73,  74 
Governor  Taft  resigns,  75 
investigates  climatic  condi- 
tions, 119,  120 
passes  School  Act,  189 
passes  vagrancy  laws,  352, 
353 

purchases  friars’  lands,  246 
Civil  Governor,  74 
Civil  Service,  100,  121,  343 


Clapp,  Rev.  W.  C.,  316 
Cleanliness  (cf.  Sanitary  Con- 
ditions), 107 
Cleveland,  Grover,  31 
Climate,  99,  117-123,  133,  282, 
348,  34.9 

Clothes,  56,  57,  370 
Coal,  93,  94 

Cocoanut  industry,  89,  90 
Cochero,  103,  105,  398,  399 
Cock  fighting,  59,  115,  262,  268, 
336 

Coffee,  85,  90 

Cofren,  Captain  F.  E.,  168 
Collins,  Z.  C.,  328 
Colporter,  336-340 
Colquhoun,  Archibald  R.,  129, 
131,  133,  203 

Commerce,  148,  388,  394,  896, 
397,  400 

Commission  of  Conciliation 
appointed,  72 

report,  72,  73,  214,  215,  216 
Commission  to  investigate  opium 
traffic,  144 

Concepcion,  Juan  de  la,  129 
Congress  aids  poor,  210 

authorizes  organization  of 
Scouts,  165 

delays  opium  legislation, 
145 

orders  census,  65 
Constabulary  (cf.  Army),  79 
83,  97,  99,  159,  364 
duties,  164-167 
needs  Americans,  177,  342 
size,  164 
value,  168-177 
Constantino,  Senor,  240 
Constitution  of  the  Philippines, 
229 

Conui,  Don  Isaac,  94 
Copper,  94 
Copra,  85,  90 
Corregidor  Island,  47 
Council  of  Ministers,  230 
Courts,  100,  101 
Crawford,  Captain  Samuel,  97 
Cuba,  387,  388 


408 


INDEX  OF  SUBJECTS 


D 

Dade,  Captain  A.  L.,  Ill 
Dagupan,  82 

Dancel,  Governor  Arturo,  99 
Davidson,  Rev.  Leonard,  272 
Davis,  C.  K.,  67 
Davis,  General  George,  57,  159, 
160,  168,  212,  327 
Day,  W.  R.,  67,  68 
Dean,  John  M.,  330 
Death-rate,  135,  182,  184,  185 
Deceitfulness  of  Filipinos,  103, 
154,  213,  214,  395,  399 
Denby,  Charles,  72 
Despujol,  Civil  Governor,  228 
Devins,  Mrs.  John  Bancroft, 
199 

Dewey,  Admiral  George, 

appointed  Commissioner,  72 
cuts  cable,  29 
enters  Manila  Bay,  47,  63 
destroys  Spanish  fleet,  63 
paroles  Aguinaldo,  215 
Disease,  53,  121,  135,  178-186, 
289 

Division  of  church  territory, 
262,  263,  272 
Doherty,  Francis  B.,  328 
Doltz,  Rev.  Paul,  277 
“Door  of  Opportunity  Open, 
The,”  403 
Dredging,  147,  148 
Drunkenness,  155,  268 
Dumaguete,  288,  289 
“Duty  of  Americans  in  the  Phil- 
ippines, The,”  391-402 
Duty  on  opium,  138 
Dyewoods,  91 
Dysentery,  184 

E 

Editors,  139 

Education  (cf.  Teachers, 
Schools),  80,  100,  134, 
190,  193,  248,  249,  288- 
297,  326,  327,  369 
Edwards,  Colonel  Clarence  R., 
361 

“El  Filibusterismo,”  217 


England,  176 

Episcopal  (cf.  Protestant  Epis- 
copal) 

Epworth  League,  310 
Escolta,  53 
Esperanze,  94 
Estrella,  Mr.,  283,  284 
Evangelical  LTnion,  139,  272, 
300,  304,  318 

Exhibit  of  World’s  Fair,  99 
Experiments  of  Bureau  of  Ag- 
riculture, 87,  88 

F 

Fatalism  of  Filipinos,  108 
Ferguson,  Arthur  W.,  74 
Filipino  Congress,  226,  229 
Republic,  221,  229 
“Filipino  Self-Government,” 
384,  385 

Filipinos  (cf.  Philippine 
Islands ) 
boats,  55,  56 
carriages,  50 

characteristics,  103-109,171, 
176,  198,  214,  220-232,  291, 
294,  317,  318,  336,  369, 
396,  398,  399 
clothes,  56,  57,  107,  278,  279 
education  (cf.  Education), 
187-205,  248,  249 
habits,  57-60,  107,  172,  243, 
244,  268,  269,  278,  366 
houses,  55,  92 
industrv,  81,  130-133,  294, 
398 

liberty,  200,  212,  386,  394, 
400 

ministers,  235,  247,  259,  272, 
299,301,305,308,  309,  317 
music,  58,  283,  365 
patriotism,  170,  172,  176, 
200,  212,  220-232,  257, 400 
police,  163  (cf.  Police) 
siesta,  53 

soldiers  (cf.  Army) 
street  cars,  52 
women,  56,  57,  101,  124,  125, 
126,  278 


INDEX  OF  SUBJECTS 


409 


Fire-tree,  92 
Fish,  278 

Flag,  191,  285,  306 
Flores,  ex-Governor  Protacio, 
101 

Flowers,  92 

Forbes,  W.  Cameron,  76 
Foreman,  John,  115,  126,  219, 
238 

Forests,  91 
Fort  Santiago,  54 
Foster,  Hon.  John  W.,  30,  61, 
69,  390 

Franklin,  Benjamin,  202 
Freight  rates,  148 
Friars,  80,  154,  304,  342 

cruelty,  217,  218,  306,  334 
forbid  Bible,  332,  334,  337 
greed,  243,  244 
hatred  against,  236,  238, 
241,  243,  245,  257 
history,  235 

monastic  orders,  235,  239 
morals,  241,  242 
possessions.  111,  235 
power,  228,  236,  238,  239, 
245,  306,  332,  33t 
schools,  80,  248,  249,  250 
sell  land,  246,  388 
services,  236,  399 
uprising  against,  212,  236, 
252 

Fruits,  85 
Frye,  W.  P.,  67 
Funerals,  135,  244 
Funston,  General  Frederick,  64, 
214,  219 

G 

Galena,  95 

Gambling,  58,  59,  313 
“Gems  of  the  East,  The,”  93, 
204 

General  Conference,  298 
Generosity  of  Spanish,  112 
Gentleness  of  Filipinos,  103 
Gleason,  R.  P.,  197 
Glunz,  Charles  A.,  326,  328 
Gold,  94 


Gold  Standard,  388 
Gonzaga,  Senor,  230 
Goodrich,  Rev.  J ay  C.,  257,  334, 
335 

Gould,  Miss  Helen  Miller,  331 
Government  (cf.  Civil  Com- 
mission) 

canteen  question,  157,  158 
educational  policy,  187-205 
establishes  hospitals,  178- 
186 

improvement  of  harbors, 
roads,  146-151 
treatment  of  social  vice,  179 
Graham,  Percy,  334 
Granite,  95 
Gray,  George,  67,  68 
“Greater  America,”  33,  203 
Green,  Captain  F.  E.,  95,  164 
Guerrero,  Dr.,  361 
Guild,  Lieutenant,  171 

H 

Halford,  Major  Elijah  W.,  71, 
325 

Hall,  Dr.  J.  Andrew,  272,  276, 
277 

Harbors,  146-151 
Cebu,  149 
Iloilo,  149 
Manila,  146-149 
Harding,  Captain,  164 
Harrison,  Benjamin,  31 
Hawaiian  Islands,  29,  31 
Hay,  John,  68,  386 
Health 

Board,  135,  178,  183,  184, 
Filipinos,  107,  108,  135,  185 
foreigners,  119,  120,  122, 
135,  185,  349,  355 
resorts,  120 
Hemp,  85,  89 
Hibbard,  Rev.  David,  272 
Hillis,  Rev.  Lewis  B.,  274,  293 
Hilo,  32 
Honolulu,  29 

Hospital,  178,  179,  183,  292,  314, 
368 


410 


INDEX  OF  SUBJECTS 


“Howling  Wilderness,”  44 
Humanity  of  American  soldiers, 
152,  153 

Hunter,  Rev.  Joseph  L.,  39 


I 

Ide,  Henry  C.,  73,  76 
Igorrotes,  195,  315,  366,  369 
Independent  Filipino  Catholic 
Church,  256-261 

Industries,  81,  85-96,  278,  314, 
367 

Insular  Bureau  of  Agriculture, 
85-88 

constabulary,  166 
Insurrection,  64,  73,  100,  172, 
173,  214,  228,  235,  237, 
238,  289,  387 
Iron,  94 
Islands  of 

Albay,  94,  264 
Bohol,  65 
Camarines,  93 
Cebu,  48,  65,  93,  95,  149, 
264,  290 
Corregidor,  47 
Guam,  36,  37,  38,  221 
Iloilo,  135,  139,  153,  201, 
202,  315,  319 
Leyte,  48,  65,  264 
Luzon,  48,  65,  68,  87,  93,  94, 
207,  227,  272,  300,  312 
Masbate,  65 

Mindanao,  48,  65,  93,  95, 
160,  167 

Mindoro,  65,  95 
Negros,  48,  65,  75,  93,  264 
Palawan,  65 

Pa  nay,  48,  65,  95,  264,  276 
Samar,  48,  65 
Tutuila,  34 


J 

Japan,  178,  179,  193,  203 
Jenks,  Professor  J.  W.,  130 
Jesuits  (cf.  Friars) 
Johnston,  Major  Wm.,  364 


K 

Kamehameha,  Chief,  29 

Kelly,  Mrs.,  314 

Kerr,  Rev.  John  G.,  271 

Kilauea,  volcano,  31 

“King”  Apo,  173 

Knox  Memorial  Church,  302 

L 

Labor,  129-134,  151,  398 
Ladrones,  79,  83,  97,  100,  101, 
116,  169,  170,  171,  221 
Laguna  de  Bay,  113,  218,  366 
Laguna,  province,  112,  272 
Lala,  Dr.  Ramon,  106,  107 
Lallave,  Senor,  334 
Lamson-Scribner,  Professor  F. 
86 

Landor,  A.  H.,  93,  203 
Lands,  friar  (cf.  Friars) 
distribution,  248 
owners,  235 
purchase,  246 
Langheim,  Dr.  H.  W.,  289 
Languages,  100,  190,  191,  237, 
248,  249,  292,  301 
Larena,  Senor  Demetrio,  290 
Leary,  Captain  Richard,  37 
Legarda,  Senor  Benito,  75,  76, 
216 

Legislation  on  opium  traffic,  144, 
145 

Lemonade,  118,  119 
Leonard,  Rev.  A.  B.,  D.D.,  298 
Leprosy,  178,  179,  180 
Liberty  (cf.  Filipinos) 

“Libertv,  not  Independence 
Yet,”  386 
Lighthouse,  147 
Liquor,  155,  157,  268,  269 
Locusts,  81,  111 
“Logan,”  26,  38,  111,  152,  354 
Los  Banos,  111 
Luisania,  town,  115,  116 
Luna,  General,  206,  230 
Luneta,  53,  54,  63 
Luthi,  Captain,  164 
Lying  among  Filipinos,  82,  104, 
106 

Luzuriaga,  Sefior  Jos£,  75,  76 


INDEX  OF  SUBJECTS 


411 


M 

MacArthur,  General  Arthur, 
219,  329 

McAuley,  Colonel  C.  H.,  278 
McEwen,  Rev.  H.  T.,  D.D.,  102 
McKinley,  President  William, 
31 

appoints  Commission,  72 
instructs  Civil  Commission, 
188,  381,  382 

intentions  regarding  the 
Philippines,  67,  69,  70,  71 
message  to  Congress,  73 
sanitary  conditions,  185 
McLaughlin,  Rev.  J.  L.,  257 
McLeod,  John,  213 
Mabini,  206,  220,  221,  223,  224 
Magellan,  Fernando,  367 
Mair,  Captain  Thomas,  82 
Maize,  85 

Malacanan  Palace,  98,  212 
Malaria,  184 

Malaysia  Conference,  300 
Maloios,  capital,  78,  229 
Manila,  116,  117,  133,  139,  169 
Bridge  of  Spain,  53 
Calle  Rosario,  53 
capture,  63 
climate,  117-123 
cost  of  living,  319 
death-rate,  135,  185 
Escolta,  53 
first  impressions,  46 
funerals,  135 
harbor,  146 
houses,  54 

night  school,  198,  199,  327 
normal  school,  195,  196 
Presbyterian  Mission,  272 
religion,  299,  302,  373 
school  in  telegraphy,  197 
trade  school,  197 
transport  service,  22 
Walled  City,  53 
Manila  and  Dagupan  Railway, 
77,  120,  132 

Manila  Bay,  47,  48,  62,  146,  283 
battle  of,  63 
map  of,  368 


Marble,  95 

Marriage,  124-128,  243,  244,  284 
Marshall,  Dr.,  178,  179 
Matthews,  Mr.,  337 
Mauban,  337 
Mauna  Loa,  31 
Merritt,  Major  General,  63 
Mestizo,  100,  130,  207 
Methodist  Printing  Press,  54 
Episcopal  Church,  139,  263, 
272,  298-310 
Midway  Islands,  33 
Millar,  W.  B.,  323 
Milloy,  Mr.,  336 
Missionaiy  (cf.  Church,  Re- 
ligion), 239,  263,  264,  265, 
272,  273,  277,  348,  349 
Mohammedans,  239,  373,  399 
Monastic  orders  (cf.  Friars), 
235,  237,  239,  240,  245-248 
Money,  388 

Morals  (cf.  Friars),  128,  342 
Moret,  Senor  Sagasta,  227 
Moros,  161,  195,  239,  364,  365, 
366 

Moses,  Professor  Bernard,  73, 
139 

Municipal  police,  163,  164 
Music,  58,  191,  283,  365 
Myer,  Colonel,  167 

N 

Nable,  Senor  Don  Mariano,  82 
Names,  how  derived,  125 
Natives  (cf.  Filipinos) 
Negritos,  tribe,  195,  366 
Neiderlien,  Dr.  Gustavo,  361, 
362 

“New  Era  in  the  Philippines, 
The,”  289 

Newson,  S.  C.,  193 
Newspapers,  139,  397,  398,  399, 
401 

Night  schools,  198,  201 
“Ninay,”  227 
Nipa,  92 

“Noli  Me  Tangere,”  217,  227 
Non-Christians,  66,  160,  264 


412 


INDEX  OF  SUBJECTS 


Normal  school,  195,  201 
Northern  dipper,  23 
Nozaleda,  Archbishop,  22S 
Nueva  Viscaya,  province,  87 

O 

Ocampo,  Pablo  Tecson  (cf.  Tec- 
son) 

O’Connell,  Colonel  J.  J.,  25,  44 
Oil,  95 

Olongapo,  198 
Ompong,  171,  172 
Opium 

argument  against,  139,  142 
evils,  140 

Commission  appointed,  144 
reports,  144 
proposed  bill,  138 
protest  from  Chinese,  140 
Governor  Taft’s  opinion, 
142,  143,  144 
Opportunities,  66,  87,  88 
Orders  (cf.  Friars),  239,  240, 
245-248 

O’Reilly,  G.  A.,  199 
Otis,  Major  General  Elwell  S., 
72,  75,  191,  229,  230 
Overton,  Captain,  167 

P 

Paco,  suburb,  136 
Pago-Pago,  34 
Palace,  54 
“Papa”  Isio,  173 
Parker,  Judge  Alton  B.,  384, 
385 
Pasig,  99 

Pasig  River,  53,  55,  97,  110,  146, 
147,  183 

Paterno,  Pedro  A.,  212,  221,  224, 
226,  361 

“Paths  of  Peace  and  Pros- 
perity,” 381,  382 
Patriotism,  172,  176,  200,  212, 
220-232,  257,  285,  400,  401 
Patton,  Dr.,  359 
Peace  of  Biac-na-bato,  226,  229 
Pearl  industry,  92 


Pentecost,  Rev.  George  F., 
D.D.,  270,  346 
“Pepe,”  The  launch,  97 
Philippine,  The 

American  duty  towards,  71 
census,  66 

church  (cf.  Church,  Relig- 
ion) 

Civil  Governor  appointed, 
74 

climate,  117,  123,  348,  349 
courts,  100,  101 
Commissioners  (cf.  Civil 
Commissioners  ) 
funerals,  135,  136 
Government,  246,  248 
harbor,  146-151 
history,  62 
hospitals,  178,  186 
Islands  (cf.  Filipinos) 
labor  problem,  129-134 
marriage,  124-128,  243,  244 
method  of  civilizing,  74 
morals,  127,128  (cf.  Friars) 
needs,  96,  341-352,  360,  393 
objects  to  be  gained,  71 
opium  traffic,  138-144 
poverty  from  war,  81 
products,  85-93 
Provincial  Government  es- 
tablished, 74 
railroads,  77,  78,  149 
reasons  for  demanding,  69 
religion  (cf.  Church) 

Bible  distribution,  332- 
340 

Catholic  Church,  233-251 
“Duty  of  Church,”  371- 
377 

Methodist  Episcopal 
Church,  298-310 
Presbyterian  Church,  270- 
281 

Protestant  Episcopal 
Church,  311-321 
Young  Men’s  Christian 
Association,  322-331 
resources,  66,  85-96,  367 
salaries,  343 


INDEX  OF  SUBJECTS 


413 


sanitary  conditions,  107, 108 
schools  (cf.  Schools),  79, 
80,  200 

self-government,  384,  387, 
393,  394 
size,  65,  66 

“Philippines,  The,”  242 
“Philippines  and  the  Far  East, 
The,”  305 

“Philippines  for  the  Filipinos, 
The,”  383 

Pierce,  Chaplain,  313 
Piti,  village,  35 
Plague,  181,  182 
Polavieia,  Blanco,  228 
Police 

Constabulary,  164-170  175- 
177 

municipal,  164 
native,  163 
Politeness,  107 
“Popes,”  173 
Potatoes,  85 

Potter,  Bishop  Henry  C.,  79 
Potter’s  Field,  136 
Pottery,  98 

Prautch,  Rev.  A.  W.,  307 
Presbyterian  Board  of  Foreign 
Missions,  272,  285,  291 
Church,  264,  270-281,  286, 
375 

General  Assembly,  270 
Presidente,  99 

Press,  139,  397,  398,  399,  401 
Price,  Rev.  Francis  E.,  38 
Property  rights  of  women,  124- 
127 

Protestant  Episcopal  Church, 
311-321 

Protestantism,  262-269,  287,  308, 
374 

Provincial  Board,  74 
“Puente  de  Espana,”  367 

Q 

Quarantine,  36,  355 
Querida,  svstem  of  marriage, 
127,  128 


R 

Railroads,  77,  149 
Rain,  151,  282 
Rampolla,  Cardinal,  247 
Ratification  of  Filipino  Inde- 
pendence, 229 
Reid,  Whitelaw,  67 
Religion,  39,  40,  287,  294,  344- 
347 

Bible  distribution,  332-340 
Catholic  Church,  233-251 
“Duty  of  Church,”  371-377 
Methodist  Episcopal 
Church,  298-310 
Presbyterian  Church,  270- 
281 

Protestant  Episcopal 
Church,  311-321 
Y.  M.  C.  A.,  322-331 
Report  of  Committee  to  Investi- 
gate the  Opium  Problem, 
144 

Resources,  65,  85-96,  367 
Reyes,  Isabelo  de  los,  256,  257 
Rice,  81,  85,  88 
Ripley,  C.  B.,  303 
Rivera,  Spanish  Governor,  229 
Rivers,  113,  116,  151,  186 
Rizal,  Dr.,  217,  218,  227,  228 
Rizal,  province,  99,  100 
Roads,  146,  150,  151 
Robbery,  83 

Rodgers,  Rev.  J.  B.,  207,  211, 
257,  272,  282,  287,  305 
Roosevelt,  President  Theodore, 
139,  155,  332,  350,  383 
Root,  Elihu,  165,  387-389 
Rossiter,  Rev.  S.  B.,  D.D.,  275 
Rubber,  92 

S 

“Saints,”  173 
Salaries,  343 

Salvador,  Felipe,  83,  170 
Samar,  “Howling  Wilderness,” 
44 

Sandwich  Islands,  30 
San  Fernando,  82 


414 


INDEX  OF  SUBJECTS 


Sanitary  conditions,  107,  108, 
185,  186 

San  Lazaro  Hospital,  178 
San  Miguel,  221,  223 
San  Ramon,  89 
Santa  Anna,  98 
Santa  Cruz,  111,  113,  116 
Santa  Rosa,  111 
Scenery,  113-115 
Schools  (cf.  Teachers),  79,  80, 
100,  190-205,  248,  249,  250, 
265,  288-297,  326,  327 
Schurman,  President  J.  G.,  67, 
72 

Commission  (cf.  Commis- 
sion of  Conciliation) 
Scott,  Colonel  W.  S.,  168 
Scouts,  59,  165,  166,  167,  364 
(cf.  Army) 

Seeds,  distribution  of,  89 
“Self-Government,  Filipino,” 
384,  385 

“Self-Government  the  Goal,” 
387 

Settlement,  313,  319,  320 
“Sherman,”  354,  355 
Siesta,  53 

Silliman,  Horace  B.,  288 
Silliman  Institute,  288-297 
Sleeping,  105 
Smallpox,  181,  182 
Smith,  General  J.  H.,  44 
Smith,  James  F.,  76,  139,  141 
Smoking,  57,  58,  138,  143 
Smuggling,  138,  142 
Snook,  Rev.  J.  Eugene,  273 
“Social  Influence  of  Christian- 
ity, The,”  226 
Soil,  87  ‘ 

Soldiers  (see  Army) 

Sousa,  John  Philip,  365 
Southern  Cross,  23 
Spain,  160,  211,  212,  213,  218, 
227,  229,  236, 242, 248, 391, 
399 

Spanish  Commissioners,  67 
friars,  236,  238,  247,  248 
indemnity,  68 
officers  inferior,  176 
prison,  306 


troops  surrender,  63 
Spencer,  Rev.  Irving,  315 
St.  Stephen’s  Church,  311 
St.  Thomas  University,  54 
Staunton,  Rev.  J.  H.,  315 
Stevens,  Joseph  Earle,  24,  113 
Stewards,  college  students,  23 
Stock  raising,  87 
Stoicism,  106 

Street  Railway  Company  in 
Manila,  132 

Stuntz,  Rev.  Homer  C.,  D.D., 
139,  142,  144,  175,  218, 
243,  244,  250,  257,  259, 
301,  304,  372 
Subig  Bay,  63 
Suez  Canal,  22 
Sugar,  85,  90 
Sumner,  General  S.  S.,  327 
Sunday,  59,  345,  346 
Sunday  School,  310 
Superstition,  104,  105 
“Supply,”  ship,  35 
Surigao,  167 

Sutherland,  Professor,  203 
Suyoe,  366 

T 

Taft,  Governor  William  H.,  57, 
115,  116,  168,  212,  221, 
223,  234,  242,  256,  258, 
267,  342,  350 
Americans  on,  352 
appointed  Commissioner,  73 
appoints  Exposition  Board, 
361 

defends  opium  bill,  142 
“Duty  of  Americans,”  391- 
402 

educational  plans,  204,  205 
inaugurated  Civil  Governor, 
74 

“Philippines,  The,”  242 
purchases  friars’  lands,  246 
querida  system  on,  127 
recognizes  rights  of  Agli- 
pay,  253,  255 
resigns,  75 

view  of  labor  problem,  129, 
132,  134 


INDEX  OF  SUBJECTS 


415 


Taft,  Mrs.  William  H.,  199, 201 
Tagalo,  166 

Tagalog,  100,  273,  283,  336 
“Tagalog  Music,”  226 
Talbot,  Rev.  R.  H.,  313 
Tariff,  138,  401 
Tarlac,  78,  169 

address  on  “Character,”  83 
Taussig,  Commander  Edward 
D.,  33 

Tavera,  Dr.  T.  H.,  75,  76 
Teachers  (cf.  Schools) 

American,  100,  187-205 
Filipino,  100,  194,  199,  369 
Spanish,  80,  190,  240,  249, 
250 

Tecson,  Governor  Pablo,  79,  80, 

81 

Tennyson,  Alfred,  377 
Thirst,  118,  199 
Thoburn,  Bishop  James  M.,  298, 
300,  308 

Thomson,  Captain,  83 
Timber,  91,  367 
Tinguanes,  366 
Tobacco,  90 
Tondo,  district,  59 
Trade,  388,  394,  397,  400 
Trades  (cf.  Industries),  148, 
197,  295,  296 
Transport 
cost,  27 
life,  22,  25,  39 
quarantined,  36 
service,  22 
value,  27 

Treachery,  103,  154,  169,  170, 
171,  217,  218,  395,  399 
Treaties 

Aguinaldo  and  Spain,  212, 
226 

England,  Germany  and 
U.  S.,  34 

Hawaiian  Islands  and 
U.  S.,  31 

U.  S.  and  Spain,  68,  69 
Treaty  of  Paris,  62,  242,  243 
Trowbridge,  Captain,  164 
Typhoons,  147 


U 

United  Brethren,  264 
United  States 

Army  (cf.  Army),  68,  77, 

99,  152 

Agriculture,  89 

Uprising  (cf.  Insurrection), 

100,  153,  154,  173 
Utensils,  94 

V 

Vatican,  245 
Vegetables,  88 

Vincent,  Bishop  John  H.,  299 
Visayan  Village,  365 
Volcanoes,  23,  31 


W 

Wade,  General  James  F.,  159 
Wake,  Captain,  34 
Walled  City,  53 
War  (indemnity),  68 
Warne,  Bishop  F.  W.,  299,  30 5, 
309 

Warren,  Captain  W.  H.,  79 
Washing,  98 

Washington,  George,  61 
Water,  184,  186 
“Water  Cure,”  153 
Waterman,  Miss  Margaret,  319 
Water-power,  116 
Wesley,  John,  61 
Whitmarsh,  H.  Phelps,  245 
Whittier,  John  G.,  360 
Wildman,  Consul,  215 
Wilson,  Dr.  William,  361 
Wint,  General  Theodore  J.,  167 
Winthrop,  Judge  Beekman,  132 
Wislizenus,  Judge,  314 
Women,  56,  57,  101,  124-127 
Women’s  Foreign  Missionary 
Society  (Methodist),  299 
Worcester,  Dean  C.,  72,  73,  76, 
98,  120,  184 

World’s  Fair  Exhibit  of  Phil- 
ippines, 99,  361-370 
Wrecks,  63 


416 


INDEX  OF  SUBJECTS 


Wright,  Governor  Luke  E.,  360 
appointed  Commissioner,  73 
“Door  of  Opportunity 
Open,  The,”  403 
inaugurated  Governor,  76 
investigates  health  condi- 
tions, 120 

Y 

“Yesterday  in  the  Philippines,” 
24,  *113 


Young  Men’s  Christian  Associ- 
ation, 54,  119,  158,  263, 
322-331 

“Youth’s  Companion,  The,”  33 


Z 

Zamora 

Miss  Pilar,  369 
Nicholas,  305-308,  310 
Paulino,  305-308 


THE  END 


Date  Due 

'"*40 

3 

[j  i 

’ ____  . 

O ’ " 

- 

, 

<f) 

